Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutResolution - 4389 - Contract - Anthony Mechanical Inc - HVAC Renovations Phase II, LIA - 02_10_1994Resolution No. 4389 February 10, 1994 Item #29 RESOLUTION BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK: THAT the Mayor of the City of Lubbock BE and is hereby authorized and directed to execute for and on behalf of the City of Lubbock a Contract and all related documents by and between the City of Lubbock and Anthony Mechanical, Inc., of Lubbock to furnish and install all materials as bid for the HVAC Renovations - Phase II at the Lubbock International Airport for the City of Lubbock, which contract is attached hereto, which shall be spread upon the minutes of the Council and as spread upon the minutes of this Council shall constitute and be a part of this Resolution as if fully copied herein in detail. Passed by the City Council this loth ATTEST. - .. Betty NJ. Rohnson, My Secretary APPROVED AS TO CONTENT: Victor Ki Purchasing anger AS TO Assistant City Attorney DGV :dp%G: kcdaS\Anthmiy.Res Febmery 1.1994 _ day of February 1994. ARCHI'T�C�' Joe D. McKay, AIA Architects ,• 1402 AVENUE N LUBBOCK, TX 79424 8 7 49 MECFIANICAL & ELECTRICAL ENGINEERS r► Agnew Associates, Im., 3223 S. LOOP 289, SUM 424 LUBBOCK, TX 79423 1 (806) 799-0753; Fix (&%),7.92-201 F Q� V. Project No. 9329 Set No. 2 j I Dater November 3,1993/63 y 1 '' JOE D. MCKAY A.I.A. MEMBER AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS 1402 AVENUE N LUBBOCK, TEXAS 70401 (806)744-4490 FAX(806)744-4494 LUBBOCK INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT 1994 HVAC RENOVATIONS - PHASE II LUBBOCK, TEXAS ADDENDUM NO. 1 TO THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS NOVEMBER 11, 1993 All bidders are asked to note the following changes, additions, omissions and/or corrections to the original Bidding Documents. Instructions issued in this Addendum are to be a part of the Contract and the Bidders are asked to adjust their proposals accordingly. Item 1: NOTICE TO REVISED BID DATE: The bid date for this project has been changed to Wednesday, December 1, 1993, at 2:00 p.m. Bids will be received at the Municipal Building, 162513th Street, Lubbock, Texas. r JOE Q. MCKAY A.I.A. MEMBER AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS 1402 AVENUE N LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79401 (805)744-4490 FAX(806)744-4494 LUBBOCK INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT 1994 HVAC RENOVATIONS - PHASE II PROJECT BID12734 LUBBOCK, TEXAS I ADDENDUM NO. TWO TO THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS NOVEMBER 30, 1993 All bidders are asked to note the following changes, additions, omissions and/or corrections to the original Bidding Documents. Instructions issued in this Addendum are to be a part of the Contract and the Bidders are asked to adjust their proposals accordingly. IN THE SPECIFICATIONS: - --.S9��I�►� Due to various changes, the bid proposal has been revised and herewithin attached. All r. bidders are instructed to disregard the original bid proposal found In the front end of the i specifications, and use the revised Bid Proposal for the submittal of bids to the City of Lubbock. ITEM 2: SECTION 01010 - SPECIAL CONDITIONS 1.06 Special Project Procedures F. Construction Sequence - ADD THE FOLLOWING. 3. The work shall be scheduled such that all areas served by roof top units are air-conditioned from June 1, 1993, through September 15, 1993. If any existing roof top units are removed, the new units must be operational by June 1, 1993. Otherwiase, work in these areas shall be delayed until after September 15, 1993. ITEM 3: SECTION 09500 - ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEMS PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Materials A. Ceiling Systems - CHANGE THE FOLLOWING TO READ Acoustone Checkmate Item #432 STC: 35 - 44 NRS: .50 - .70 Light Reference: .75 or more Size: 24" x 24" x 3/4", Revealed Edge Finish: Standard White Suspension System: Exposed USG Donn Meridian, 9/16" White ITEM 4: Notice the attached Mechanical Addenda Items. 7 BID PROPOSAL Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, TX 79457 DATE: PROJECT NUMBER: 12734 - HVAC RENOVATIONS - PHASE II, LUBBOCK INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT Proposal of - (hereinafter called Bidder) To the Honorable Mayor and City Councll . City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called Owner) Gentlemen: The Bidder, in compliance with your invitation for bids for the Replacement of HVAC Equipment, Phase 11, Lubbock r- International Airport, Lubbock, Texas, has carefully examined the plans, specifications, instructions to bidders, notice to bidders and all other related contract documents and the site of the proposed work, and being familiar with all of the conditions surrounding the construction of the proposed project including the availability of r„ materials and labor, hereby proposes to furnish all labor, materials, and supplies; and to construct the project in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, within the time set forth therein and at the price stated below. The price to cover all expenses incurred in performing the work required under the contract documents, MATERIALS: ($ ) SERVICES: ($ 1 BASE BID: ($ ALTERNATE NO. ONE (ADD OR DEDUCT) ($ ALTERNATE NO. TWO (ADD OR DEDUCT) ($ 1 ALTERNATE NO. THREE (ADD OR DEDUCT) ($ 1 ALTERNATE NO. FOUR (ADD OR DEDUCT) ($ ) ALTERNATE NO. FIVE (ADD OR DEDUCT) ($ 1 (Amount shall be shown in both words and figures. in case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern.) F r r Bidder hereby agrees to commence the work on the above project on or before a date to be specified in a written 'Notice to Proceed' of the Owner and to fully complete the project within consecutive days thereafter as stipulated In the specifications and other contract documents. Bidder hereby further agrees to pay the Owner as liquidated damages the sum of $750.00 (SEVEN HUNDRED FIFTY DOLL.ARSl for each consecutive calendar day in excess of the time set forth hereinabove for completion of this project, all as more fully set forth r in the general conditions of the contract documents. Bidder understands and agrees that this bid proposal shall be completed and submitted in accordance with Instruction number 20 of the General Instructions to Bidders. Bidder understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any formality in the bidding. The Bidder agrees that this bid shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) calendar days after the scheduled closing time for receiving bids. The undersigned Bidder hereby declares that he has visited the site of the work and has carefully examined the plans, specifications and contract documents pertaining to the work covered by this bid, and he further agrees to commence work on or before the date specified in the written notice to proceed, and to subsequently complete the work on which he has bid; as provided in the contract documents. The undersigned Bidder agrees that the Cashier's check or proposal bond in the amount of five percent r" (5%) of his proposal, payable to City of Lubbock, Lubbock, Texas, which is left In escrow with the Architect, and e_ that this amount is the measure of liquidated damages the Owner will sustain by the failure of the undersigned to execute and deliver the above named agreement or In furnishing the bond within ten (10) days of written notification of the award of the contract to him then the cashier's check or proposal bond shall become the property of the Owner, but if this proposal is not accepted within sixty (60) days of the time set for the submission of bids, or If the undersigned executes and delivers said contract and bond, the check shall be returned to him on receipt thereof. Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by Bidder shall be bound and include all contract documents made available to him for his Inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. (Seal If Bidder is a Corporation) ATTEST. Secretary 7 r ti Contractor BY., F ADDENDUM NO. TWO Page 1 r 1994 HVAC RENOVATIONS - PHASE TWO LUBBOCK INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT LUBBOCK, TEXAS Project Bid No. 12734 DECH,ANICAL M Item 1. On the Drawings, Sheet M4, note that existing RTU-6, between grids 6 and 7, shall be delivered to the owner. Item 2. In the Specifications, Section 15320, AIR DISTRIBUTION, page 15320-Z add paragraph 2.O1.I as follows: I. All exterior ductwork shall be constructed of 'paint grip' metal. Item 3. In the Specifications, Section 15700, TEMPERATURE REGULATIONS, page 15700-43, add paragraph 6.01.B as follows: r- B. Existing flow measuring devices may be used for flow indication where shown in the Point Schedule. Item 4. In the Specifications, Section 15700, TEMPERATURE REGULATION, delete pages 1 through 23 of the Point Schedule and insert the attached sheets. Item 5. In the Specifications, Section 15500, EQUIPMENT, page 15500-32, add paragraph Z22 as follows: A. The existing cooling tower cells are Ceramic with 10 HP fan motors. The r contractor shall include the work as described below under Bid Item #2. The work shall be accomplished by workman normally engaged in cooling tower assembly- B. Existing Cooling Tower Cell #1 (North Cell). 1. Replace the precast concrete fan stock and retaining bands. 2. Replace the gearbox and completely epoxy paint the exterior. Provide new oil. 3. Replace the QD bushing for the fan hub and completely epoxy paint. 4. Replace the fan hub. S. Replace the air seal bolts and coupling guard bolts. I Item 6. 6. Replace the driveshaft muldflex kit. 7. Replace one brass nozzle, 45 degree elbow and IT long, 1" diameter PVC pipe in the distribution system. 8. Replace oil and vent lines for the gear reducer. C. Cooling Tower Cell #1-90: Epoxy paint the drive equipment. In the Specifications, Section 15500, EQUIPMENT, page 15500-5, add paragraph 2.03.H.20 as follows: 20. The complete drive assembly shall be epoxy painted. L___: L_ POINT SCHEDULE Page 1 OF 23 POINT POINT POINT POINT COS DDC TYPE FUNCTION APPLICATION ALARM S T P D . N L P T E R S 0 H 0 0 L 0 A H K 0 H D I C C N I L F C 0 S R P H P I G A U T N 0 H C E G 0 F C T E U R L H R N T 0 T 3 N L H/ HW D BA 0 F S r?.Y, E 0 0 A D Y T E 3 D R L S NIA I N I U D T/ P A I S N N H L C A R S R T L L 0 S D N A N T B A S U T D S F A I I Y L L H T 0 0 A I I R P J ALP PAT T LU I U L B T D T S M C I00A0ES PPS : N:Si4LU R 0 0 0 C U 0 S R T R 0 T T D 0/ I L Z C D T S S A T T E U I I A A S POINT DESCRIPTION YGTTKSPE 1XI E7 EiJ USCRS'7E Eii�EET0P.ZZQSTT L Y T 1 AHU -Supply Fan NX X IX X I I I ! ! 2 Mixed Air fK I ! I 1 1 X I I I I I I I 3 Discharge Air. Ix Ix I I I I IX ! ! ! XIX 4 Space Temp. X X I I 1 I! I X X 5 Heating Coil. Flow X ( I I I 6 Cooling Coil Flow V, Ix ( I I ! ! ! 7 Return Air Temp_tX IX ]XI I ( 1XI I ( ! I I K Il ! I S Return Fan I Ix X 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I I I 1XIi I I I X I9 CHR Temp I Ix Ix III X I 1 1 Y I 1 I i l lI X la I I I i 112 I I ( I ! I 13 14 II II I I !i i 15 16 17 ! I I I I I III ! I I 1s I III11 I III I �I�� 19 I r20 I I I f t l l l I 21 22 I I I I I I I I 23 24 III I I I 25 26 27 1 1 1 jI ! ! 28 =9 I I i l —1�_ .�L�_. mr I -- _ _ _47- I �p—i..___ ry I r- ►_ I L-'-, L--' L—. I POINT SCHEDULE Page 2 OF 23 POINT DESCRIPTION POINT POINT FUNCTIONTYPE POI APPLICATION POINT ' • U • U Sl F• C• ' • • • • • , • • • • • • • • ii�eWE �; ► nln�umoons 0301 MORE nttnttn ©tM ttt ��tn�ttttttttna�tt WAR ,ttttnMEMO nntntttttttnttE �tn�tt�mnntee�t� • '� sanmKmnRENEW ttuttent � t�tttustt�n�ut■ MnEnnn«nmitt SQuntttnt ■NEtttt IRKNER ntntu�t■ ■RE �tEnnttmtntnRn i�nttn nnm�mtnKNEES" NERNEE SEE M on nuu�uun ME nimmtn tNERVERtit�n� tnatntn�t n EARE [n ONE i ■ENNEN mmtmERNME nti ■���ttnn���n�iu����u�nttm�■ ■mmmmmINu��m��n�nui����un�■ nMS�nnnn���nn� �ttttttn���nttttnttttntts[ttt■ ■tttttttn[nsItttttmtnttttttntt■ POINT SCHEDULE Page 3 OF 23 ' POINT DESCRIPTION POINT I TYPE POINT a FUNCTION — POINT APPLICATION 7 POINT COS ALARMS DDC .3 B I N A R YGTTKSPE A N A L 0 I N P U 0 U T P U P 0 S F D B A C S/ T A T U S T A R T S T 0 P U L S T .E M P E R A T U R, EY H U m I D I P R E S S U R EW F L 0 B T USCRS^_JE K I L 0 W A T T D D M O N I T 0/ P RE 0 G R A M S D M A N D L I M I D U T Y C Y C L T O T A L I Z EtKEE I N T E R L O C 3 M O D 3 S T A T O S TOR E S S A C 0 N D 0 P T ZZQS: C H L R 0 P TIE C H/ L R S .H 0H N E S T A T U . I G H L I M I L 0 W L I M I TLYT . 0 F F N 0 R M A L 0 C D I S P L A L 0 C A D J U S 1 AHU E 3 x x x I M Ix X 2 Mixed Air X X 1 I X 1xI I I X1 X 3 Discharge Air 4 Space Temp. 5 Heating Coil Flow X X X I I X X I(( I I XEax I i I I j I Xj XI X X 6 Coolin Coil Flow X X ! IX I I I ! I I { 7 Return Air Tem I x x I I I x i I I I X I 1 1 1 X XI s Return Fan X x X I I I I I I! I I Xj i I X X h9 MTem I x X I I IX I I I I XI I 1 1 1 1 1 1 ! 1 X o {! II ! { 112 ! I I I I I 13 ! ! I I ! ! ( ! ! 14 it I I I I11 I I I 15 i f I 17 ! I I{ i { I I I I! 1 1s I I IIIiI 111111 II I i!i 19 ! 1 !! 1!! I I I I!! I 120 it IIII IJ11111 11� �!JI 21 I I I! I I I I _! I I ! !! ! zz I I( f { I ! 1 23 I I I I I I I 24 I i I I I 1 1 I 25 I I I IITI I J 26 ! I ! I ! I 27 I I 28 1 , 29 30 I I I I I I I POINT SCHEDULE Page 4_ OF 23 POINT 1 11 POINT POINT POINT COS JDDCJ TYPE FUNCTION APPLICATION IO ALARM S T P D N L ' P T E R E 0 H 0 0 L 0 A H K 0 H D I C C N I L F C 0 S R P H P I G A U T N 0 H C E G 0 F C T E U R L H R N T 0 T 3 N L H/ H W D BA 0FS/ P.HE 0 0 A D Y T E 3 D R L S NIA I N I U D T P A I S W N H L C A R S R T L L 0 S D N A N T B A S U T D S F A I I Y L L H T 0 0 A I I R P J A L P P A T T L U I U L B T D T S M C I 0 0 A O E S P P S T N H L U R 0 0 0 C U 0 S R. R O T T D 0/ I L Z CDT S S A T T E U I I A A S POI:1T DESCRIPTION Y G T T X S P E E Y E r U S C R S^� E E j K E E i O P. i Z Q S '' T, L Y T 4 -Supply Fan X X X I i{ IX{X I 2 Hot Deck I X X I I I x I I I I x{! I I I I I II I I XIXIYI 1X 3 Cold Deck 1XIX I 1 1 IX I I I I 1711 1 1 I I I IX IX ( X 4 Mixed Air I (X IX, X I I 1 1 1 X I I i I ! II I IX IX ! I IX 5 Space Temp - 1 per 1XIX I I I i X1 I I 1XII I Y I Ix 6 zone I( I I I I! 1 I I I I I f7 Cooling Coil Flow 1 X X I I I Ij I I IX j I I 1XII I I I i I tr. Supply Air P- IX X I I l i IX 1 1 1! I I X! 9 Per zone i 1 f I I I I I I I I i t ! 10 Return r emP IX X( I i Ix I I I 9K �11 Return an X {X X ! ( g - I I 22 �P XX !KI I I X I I 13 II I II1 1 14 I I I I i I I III i I I I I '-6 17 I! I I I I I I I III ! 26 I I II II ( III I I I! 19 120 21 I I illl I I !II I I Ill I 22 I III II III 23 I I I I ( I I I I 24 I I I I I I 25 I I iLlI 26 f I ! I 27 2s I 1 29 30 ! ( ! ( 1 ! POINT SCHEDULE Page 5 OF 23 POINT POINT POINT POINT COS DDCI TYPE FUNCTION APPLICATION ALARM ' S - T P D- .7 L P T E R E 0 H 0 0 L 0 A M K 0 M D I C C N I L F C 0 S R P H P I G A U T N 0 H C E G 0 F C T E U R L M R N T 0 T 3 N L H/ H W D B A 0 F S/ R M E 0 0 A D Y T E 3 D R L S N I A I N I U D T D A I S W N M L C A R S R T L L 0 S D N A N T B A S U T D S F A I I Y L L M T 0 0 A I I R P J A L P P A T T L U I U L B T D T S M C I 0 0 A 0 E S P P S 7 HX H L U R 0 U U C U 0 S R T R O T T D 0/ I L Z CDT S S A T T E U I I A A S POINT DESCRIPTION Y G T T K S P E E Y£ w' U S C R ST!E ELK E E? TOR Z ." Q S �' T L Y T AHU -Supply Fan X X X X ! I! IX I + 2 Mixedr K X I X I I I 3 Discharge Air X X I I IX I J T I ocri! K X 4 Space Temp. X X1 I j 1_ JK I I 1XIX 5 Heating Coil. Flow X ! ! 6 Cooling Coil Flow X I ! i 7 Return Air TempX ! X I 1 ! a Return Fan X X XI I I i I I I I I I -X X 110 9 CHR Temp X X ( I X i I X I I IT 11 112 I I 13 ! I 14 I I I I I I i 15 i6 1 I1111 1!i ! III ! 17 1111 !i II + is i IIiI ! Ili �ll 19 �20 21 IA i 22 ( I I ! 23 I !! I I I 1 I 24 I i 25 ! 26 111 27 28 29 30 I I { POINT SCHEDULE Page 6 OP 23 — IPOINT POINT POINT POINT COS DDC) TYPE FUNCTION APPLICATION ALARMS .� ' S T P D N L P T E R E O N 0 0 L 0 A M K 0 M D I C C N I L F C 0 S R P H P I G A U T N 0 H C E G 0 F C T E U R L M R N T O T 3 N L H/ E W D B A 0 F S/ R M E 0 0 A D Y T E 3 D R L S N I A I N I U D T P A I S N N M L C A R S R T L L 0 S D N A N T B A S U T D S F A I I Y L L M T 0 0 A I I R P J A L P P A T T L U I U L B T D T S .M . C I O O 4% O E S PPS _ !! K M L U R 0 U U C U 0 S R 1 R O T T D 0/ I L Z C D T S S A T T E U I I A A S POINT DESCRIPTION Y G T T K S P£ E Y E 'n' U S C R S? i z£ i ri£ E T O? Z Z Q S T T L Y T 1 AHU - 4�6 Su 1 Fan x IN x I I I I I I 1 ! 2 Hot Deck I I I I X I j I 3 Cold Deck II 11 11 4 Mixed Air 1 gl i ( v 5 Space Tem .- per 4-X X I I X X 6 zone ! 1 ( itI HillI 7 Heating Coil Flow IV IK I I I! (' lA I I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1! s Cooling o' I I l l l l! I A+ I! `9 Supply Air - i If Iyl I I V1 I I I I 1 1 I 10 ver zonp Return Air T �11 12 Return Fan i 1 ( j j 13 CHR Tem I I I I ! 1 1 I ! 1 1 14 115 i6 it 11111 !i ! III ! I 17 I i l ELTELL 16 1 l III IIII I I I I I I IIl+ 19 I I I 1 1 IMI I I I i l! i 20 I I I1 1 11 II!1 i 1 I1 21 II it 1 I 111 I II. I TT 22 ! I I 23 24 i 25. � 26 27 28 29 30ry� POINT SCHEDULE Page 7 OF 23 1 POINT I POINT POINT POINT COS DDC TYPE FUNCTION APPLICATION ALARM S T P D . - • L P T E R S O F 0 0 L 0 A M K 0 M D I C C N I L F C 0 S R P H P 1 G A U T N 0 H C E G 0 F C T E U R L M R N T 0 T 3 N L H/ H W D B A 0 F S R K E 0 0 A D Y T E 3 D R L S N I A I N I U D T/ P A I S W N M L C A R S R T L L 0 S D N A N T B A S U T D S F A I I Y L L M T 0 0 A l l R P J ALP PAT T L U I U L B T D T S M C. I O0AOES?PSTMIMIMLU R 0 U U C U 0 S R: R 0 T T D 0/ I L Z CDT S S A T T E U I I A A S POINT DESCRIPTION Y G T T K S P E E 'i E W U S C R S ^,E E,K E E i O R Z Z O S i T L Y T AHU -Supply Fan X X ! X X i I!! !X I ! 1 2 Mixed Air IxX II IIIX IIII II IIIIIt I I IXIXI 3 Discharge Air X I I I 1X I II rx) II IXIX 4 Space Temp. I LIX' I I I xi I I I X.I I j 1 IXIX 5 Heating Coil. Flow IX X A! ! ! I 1 I I I 6 Cooling Coil Flow X I 1 I i i I I 1 7 Return Air Temp ! iX Ix I! I I ixi j { lX ! ! 1 i I I ! o Return FanIK I X1 1X I I I I IXI I II I I I I XI I �9 CHR Temp 1 Ix Ix I XI ( I I I Y I I I I I I 1 I I I X 10 I I ! I I I 1 1 1 I i ! �11. I I I I 1z 1 I I 1 1 I 1 1 113, 14 I I I I I I I I I I 1 I 15 1 1 1! ilil! I 1 1 1 II 16 it 11111111! ! lill I 1111 17 1e I ( 1 1{ { I ( I I I ( I I I I 19 I I I I I I I I ! I! I I! ! I j2 I ! 11111 f11111! ! !!IIAT 21 I II II11 l II 1 ! IJ� ! 22 I I I I I I I I I I 23 ! 11 11 I i Ilii 24 ! III, I1 TII I I I 25 26 it ! III 27 I i 2s 29 m 30 •B1nt .. 1 I I L__, l_m_ POINT SCHEDULE Page 8 OF 23 POINT POINT I POINT POINT COS DDC TYPE FUNCTION APPLICATION ALARH • S T P D •0F :1 L P T E Rs 0 0 L 0 A M F O M D I C C N I L F C O S R P H P I G A U T N 0 H C E G 0 F C T E U R L H R N T O T 3 N L H/ F W D B A 0 F S/ R M E 0 0 A D Y T E 3 D R L S N I A I N I U D T P A I S N N M L C A R S R T L L 0 S D N A N T B A S U T D S F A I I Y L L M T 0 0 A I I R P J A L P P A T T L U I U L B T D T S H C I O O A O E S P P S T mm M L U R 0 0 0 C U 0 S R: R 0 T T D 0/ I L Z ir C D T S S A T T E U I I A A S POINT DESCRIPTION Y G T T{ S P E E Y£ 4 U S C R S a� E i is E EY 0 8 Z Z 5 4 T L Y T MEN m ad MINIM 3 Discharge Air t�Q/ttt�ttttlIRS 4 Space Temp. _ H�aiing Coil. Flo Cooling5 ttttt® 7 Return Air :JII • S Return Fan 1 I 1 �■��� 1 ■ ' ttt�IAM. M m� MEN XMINFREE n�� tttnt� IM mtt� ONE] MEM ■t SEEN EMIRS t�ittmri��tntmt�m�ttttnt■■ MEMORIES INN ■tnttttt ■�� ttt�ttnnttn ■/ ■tttt■t�ttntn t■■nn ttnnt�mnt■tt■n■ ■■nt �tttttt�ttttttnmts ■tt■tt■■nt tt/■t■ttttnt■� BEENE n■�■�tt■mtntttnmtntt�ntt■ ■tm■�tmttnttttnttttntntttt■ i_- 11111111111111111111 L- - L--L._-- L- - L : [ POINT SCHEDULE Page 9 OF 23 I _ L POINT I POINT I POINT POINT COS I DDC TYPE FUNCTION APPLICATION ALARM S T P D .0 y L • P T E R r F 0 0 L O A H K 0 H D I C C N I L F C 0 S R P H P I G A U T N O H C E G O F C T E U R L H R N T 0 T 3 N L H/ H W D B A 0 F S R H E 0 0 A D Y T E 3 D R L S N I A I N I U D T/ P A I S W N H L C A R S R T L L 0 S D N A N T B A S U T D S F A I I Y L L H T 0 0 A I I R P J ALP P A T T LU I U LBTDTSMCI00A0ES PPS?MIMMJLU R 0 U U C U 0 S R T R O T T D 0/ I L Z C D T S S A T T E U I I A A S POINTDESCRIPTION YGTTKSP£E7EWUSCRS n(EEKE£i0RZZQ5 T L Y T i AHU 9-Supply Fan X K IX I I X _xj I I I J!! IX 1 2 e r I x 1XI I I II x I J JKIi I! I I 3 Discharge Air Ix I I I I I X1 I !PC II XIX 4 Space Temp. tx Ix' i 1 1 xi I I JK II II (x X 5 Heating Coil. FlowIx Ix I I( I 6 Cooling Coil Flow Ix II I I I I ! I 7 Return Air Temp JX ix I I t 1XII I I I I i o Return Fan x X x I I I j! I! I I I I X J ! x J { 9 CHR Temp I X X ( I x I ( I ( ( I I ! x 1'- 0 1 i t I I 1 112 1111 I I I 13 1 Iff i 14 '-6 1! I111111!i ! III I ! 17 II Ilii II it !I I !, 16 I II illll I iil II I !1 19 II I1 II II ll! !! 120 I I 111 I111 ! ! 1111 21 ( I I I I I I1 1 I i t i i t I 22 1 ! I I I 23 24 I III, I 25 ! I I I ! 26 I I I I 27 28 ! 29 Df I I I 1 ffl- I J POINT SCHEDULE Page 10 OF 23 POINT POINT POINT POINT COS +DDC TYPE FUNCTION APPLICATION ALARM ' S T P D L P T E R r 0 H 0 0 L 0 A H K O M D I C C N I L F C 0 S R P H P I C A U T N 0 H C E C 0 F C T E U R L M R N T O T 3 N L H/ H W D B A 0 F S/ R M E 0 0 A D Y T E 3 D R L S N I A I N I U D T P A I S W N M L C A R S R T L L 0 S D N A N T B A S U T D S F A I I Y L L M T 0 0 A I I R P J A L P P A T T L U I U L B T D T S M c I 0 0 A 0 ESP P S H F M L U R 0 0 0 C U 0 S R T R 0 T T D 0/ I L Z C D T S S A T T E U I I A A S POINT DESCRIPTION YCTTKSPE EYEh USCRS?)E E,KEETOP.ZZQST i LYT -Supply Fan X X j)) IX X X 2 Hot Deck X X j X ( j X i X X 3 Cold Deck X X X ( g ! X 4 Mixed Air X X" X I X I ! X 5 Space Temp - 1 per X X1 IX I I I X I I 6 zone ( i 7 Cooling oil Flow IX X I X I X I I! s supply r Temp - X X I I IX I I I I I j per zone ! ( { I �9 10 return it emp ' XIXI I I I V i I IX I I ! 11 eturn an X X X X I I IKI 12 1P X X1 I I I IX I I I X1 II 114 15 t 11 1 1 i i '-6 I Iiill !i ! III !i 17 I III I )i 1920 'zl illlili II 1 Iljll 22 I I I 1 23 I I IA II 24 1 25 1) 26 27 28 29 ( I I 30int POINT SCHEDULE page I OF 23 POINT DESCRIPTION 1 AHU 11 Supply Fan POINT I TYPE POINT FUNCTION POINT APPLICATION POINT COS ALARM DDC B I N ALP R Y]GTTKSPE X I A N A 0 I N 0 r 0 U T P 0 X P 0 S F D B A C (X 5 T/ A T U S T A R T S T 0 X P U L S T E M P E R A T U R E H U ME I D I T YE�'USCRS-dEFs'ihEEi0RZZ0S P R S S U R j( F LBTDTSMc 0 T j K I L 0 W A T I D H 0 N I 0/ jXj P RE 0 G R A M D M A N D L I I D U T Y C Y L T 0 T A L I Z } I N T E R L OOAOES?PS C 3 M D 3 S T T S S A C 0 N D 0 T C H L R 0 T C H/ L R E I :l 0Fi N E S T A U I G HW L I ?::;HLU I I L 0 L I I T 0 F F N 0 R A L L 0 L C 0 C D I A S D P J A S Y T Mixedr X[ I I I I XI 1 1 I I I I III I 3 Discharge Air IX X I I I I I X ( ( i j X( g 4 Space Temp Ix X' I I I X1 I I I I ! 1!X1 X 5 Heating Coil. Flow I ix I I I II I 1 1 ! 6 Cooling Coil Flow xf I 1 7 Return Air Temp s Return FanKI I IX IX ix I Ix I I IXI I I I I I XI I I I I! 1 1 ! 1 i I- I I I CHR Temp ix ix I I I I X 1 I I Y I 1 1 1 1 i I X �g lo III 1 1 I I 1 1 I i i 111 12 I I I I 131415 %-I, 1 1 1 1 I It I 1I I 1 1 11 i6 f! !lIIIIIII ! II!I 17 Illi I Ilil II II i !1I! 1s is I I 11 (I I I I II! I I I !I 20 I I IIII 1f11111 I ! III 21 II it III i II I I I1�1 1 22 I ! II11 I 1 II I 23 24 25 26 i I I 1 1I! 111 27 I I 26 j 291 Ai 30 I I I I I 1 I I iLVV .i1J-V POINT SCHEDULE Page 12 OF 23 MI— DESCRIPTION POINT I TYPE . POINT FUNCTION POINT APPLICATION POINT COS ALARM jDDC B I N A R Y A N A L 0 G I N P 0 T 0 U T P 0 T X P 0 S F D B A C { I S/ T A T U S X S T A R T S T 0 P XI P U L S E T E H P E R A T U R E H U H I D I T Y I P R E S S U R E I F L 0 w I B T U 1 K I L 0 N A T T SCR 1 D D H 0 N I T 0/ IX I! P R 0 G R A H S S D r H A H D L I M I S, D U T Y C Y C L E T O T A L I Z E i I I N T E R L 0 C K. 3 H 0 D E- 3 S T F I y 0 S j E S 0 S A R C 0 N D 0 P T Z ! C H L R 0 P T Z C H/ L R S E Q. ! ;I 0 N E S T A T U S I H I G H L I m Z =" I+ L 0 W L I m IAA T 0 F F N 0 R m L L 0 C D I S P L Y L 0 C A D J U S T 1 # 12 -Supply Fan z Mixedr BIX x 1XI I!II! 1 1 1lIIl1 I 3 Discharge Air iX X I I I I X1 I!! I I I 1 1 ! I I I X1 x 4 Space Temp. 5 Heating Coil. Flo IX GY Ix IX( - I I I i x 1 ! 1 I! I I! I I I I I I I I I I I I I II I 1 xl I xl t 6 Cooling Coil Flow I Ix x( I I I I I ! I{ I I 11 1 11 1 I I I I1 1 1 1 1 f7 Return Air Temp s Return Fan CHR Temp I I txIX I (X 1XIXI Ix ( I I x I i 1 I I im l ! x( 1 1 I l l i Y I I ! I I I IXI I! I 1 I I I I i I l I l l l PK 1 1 x 1 I9 10 !!) I !111 III1 1 VIA I IIII ! I i I I f I I THI I- 111 12112 l i t I i l i I I I I I I I 11 13 I I I i I I I I! I i ! I•I I I !! 14 I I i1 I is I t (IIII Ilill i (1lII I it I �6 I Illiilillllli !IIIIiI IIII! !! 17 illllt ilfl JII11! i!II11 !!! ! 1i: it II illilil 111 I! IIIII� !) 19 120 I I 11(! II IIIIi illll 1111111 II !IIIIII! Ilt ! I) 11�1J1 !I 21 11 Il iil I III!IIII ilII1I�1 I 22 II 1111 Illlll 11 III II III I 23 I ( III! it 1 I tillli II11 24 25 ( 11 1 i IIII !II I! 26 illll II IIII I!i Ili1 f I 27 ! 2BBH1 I I I I I I I I 1 29 111 II 30 I I II I L__6 _ -6 I_ I I I I I II III I I tl l r r r L_ _ _ L:_- l.• a L� POINT SCHEDULE Page 13 OF 23 I • POINT DESCRIPTION POINT TYPE POINT FUNCTION POINT APPLICATION POINT COS ALARM' IDDC B I N A R Y A N A L 0 G I N P 0 T 0 U T P 0 T P 0 S F D B A C K S/ T A T U SIP S T A R T S T 0 P U L S E T E H P E R A T U R E H U M I D I 1 Y P R E S S U R E F L O n' B T U K I L 0 W A T T S D D C M 0 N I T 0/ R P R 0 G R A M S S D 7 M A N D L I M I ='!E D U T Y C Y C L T 0 T A L I Z Ear I N T E R L O C 3 M O D E 3 S T A T E O S i E S 0 S A R C 0 N D 0 P T Z C H L R 0 P T Z C H/ L R S: E 0 0 N E S T A U S H I G H L I M I L 0 W L I M I Y,L O F F N 0 R M A L 0 C D I S P L A Y L O C A D J U S T I RTU #1- Supply Fa Ix xt yJyj I 1 1 1 1 I x! ! ! I ) 2 Hot Deck I I I I I x I I I Ai t 11 I I 1 3 Cold Deck I -1x I I I I I 11 I I I I I 4 Mixed Air 5 Space Temp. - 1 per i II 1 I 1XI X1 i I I I i I X1 X 1 1 11 1 1 1 i I 1 1 1 1 I;;) x X 1X 6 zone I f ( I I I I I I 1 1 1 1 1 i i I Id I I I I 1 7Heating Coil Flow I IX k Ix I 1 I I I 1 1.1 1 1 I s Cooling Coil Flow ix Ix I I I I I I tK 1 1 1 11 ! 1 !) I I I I 9 Supply Air Temp. I IX Ix I I I I 1 1I I I R1 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 l 10 per zon I I I ! I I I I I! ! I ! I Return Air TemD I Ix Ix I I I I Ix I 1 1 ) I I I Ili 12 Return Fan k! ix x I 1XIII I I I U V i I I 1xi I I I I I IX1 CHR Temp i tK x I I xi I I I I III I } I ! 113 14 I III I IildIIII ! {I i Il I ls I 1 III I I I I I I I i l I i I 17 III I i11 I IIII ! I!I I 1s I it 11 I I Iill i III1 19 I II I II IIII II 11 !! 20 I I I I I l I I 1111 11 I! I I 21 I 11 I I I ! I III I I! I 22 23 124 25. I I I I I 26 I I I I I 27 28 i I I I 39 30 POINT SCHEDULE Page 14 OF 23 POINT POINT POINT POINT COS IDDC TYPE FUNCTION APPLICATION ALARM S T P D N L • P T E R E O H O O L 0 A H K O M D I C C N I L F C O S R P H P I G A U T N 0 H C E G 0 F C T E U R L M R N T 0 T 3 N L H/ 9 W D BA 0 F S / P.M E 0 0 A D Y T E 3 D R L S NIA I N I U D T P A I S W N M L C A R S R T L L O S D N A N T B A S U T D S F A I I Y L L M T 0 0 A I I R P J A L P P A T T L U I U L B T D T S M C I 0 0 A 0 E S P P S? N M N L U R 0 U U C U 0 S R T R 0 T T D 0/ I L Z C D T S S A: T E U I I A A S POINT DESCRIPTION YGTTXSPE E Y EW USCRS^•,EE,nEEYOP ZZQST'T,LYT i RTU #2 - Supply Falk xf I 1 1 ! I I ! ! AI HIT ! ! m I ! 2 Hot Deck I ! I I I 1 11 1 1 I I!! I I j x 3 Cold Deck 1k I I I I 1XI I I I IxIx 4 Mixed Air I k 1XI ! XI I I 1 1I I1 1! IX IX I 5 Space Tem .- 1 er k I I I I I 1XII 1 TY-11 1 I I Ix1x1 1:?.X zonelI I I 1I I1-1-177III II II I 11 7 Heating Coil Flow 11X Ex ( I I l t I I k! 1 tK I III I II I ( I I I I ! 5 Cooling Coil Flow Ix I I I I( I 114Y I I I III ! I I I ! 9 Supply Air Tem . ! IX X1 I I I l I X I I I I I I IIII I I1K Ix t o per zonel I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I ! i ! 11 Return Air Temp IX IX I I ! I X1 1 1 1I ! ! 1 12 Return Fan k 1XIXI 1 XI I I 1 1Ll I V. F I j I Ix I I 1 1 XI I ix 1 Temp Itxx I 1! I 1 X1 I IK I I !III !!1! !! 113CHR 14 ! Iil ! I I11l1 ! ► I 15 III IIlil IIII I I I I II1 1 j6 i 111 I1I1111!i ! IIII I! I! 11 17 IIII I IIII Ilillf I!I I ! I 16 19 II I1 1 III 11 IIII II! II !! �20 I i II I I!Ilfll I11 II!fll 21 22 23 ( I 1 I I I I I I 1 1 I I I 24 25. I I I ! ! I 26 1 1 1 ! ) ! I I I 27 1 ! I 28 ! I I I I 29 I ..... , _...:� _ _.. � � '--4 ---i POINT SCHEDULE Page 15 OF 23 L L« f I POIN—A DESCRIPTION POINT TYPE POINT FUNCTIOti POINT APPLICATION POINT COS ALARH' DDC B I N ALP R Y A N A 0 G I N 0 T 0 U T PAT 0 T P 0 S F D B C It S/ T A U S S T A R T S T 0 P P U L S E T E H P E R A T U R E H U H I D I T Y P R E S S ULBTDTSMCI R E F 0 WU T K I L 0 W A T S D C H 0 N I 0/ R P R 0 G R A H S. D H A N D L I I i D U T Y C Y L E T 0 T A L Z E I N T E R L OOAOES C i n££ 3 H D 3 S T T S T S O A R C 0 N D 0 PPS?!!:;HLU T Z C H L R 0 T z • C H/ L R E O :1 0 N E S T A U SIT H I G H L I I L 0 W L I I T 0 F F N 0 R A L L 0 C D I S P A Y L 0 C A D J S T 1 RTU 3— Supply Fa I IIII i i ! j Ix I 1 2 Hot Deck I k I I I1 1XI I I A III I I I I I I i I I INIXI 3 Cold Deck I I )! 1 1 I I I I I I I lxlxl 4 Mixed Air IX1 ( XI I 1 1 1 ! 1 1 1 1 1X 1 Y 5 Space Temp.. - 1 per 1XIX I 1 I 1xv IX 6 zone I 7 Heating Coil Flow I I X1 I 5 Cooling Coil Flow I IX I I I I I t I R I I I 1 i 9 Supply Air Temp. I IX Ix I I i x IIIII X1 I! I I I! I I II I t o ppr zonal I I t 1 1 I III I I 1! ! 11 Return Air Temp I Ix I f I 1-1 X I I I I V Y 12 Return Fan x x AI I I I I 1XI I xi ! ix I CHR Temp I tK Ix I I I I I X1 I I I I I IK 113 14 1I1 11 1 1 1 1I I 1 1 i I I I 1 15 III 1 III 1 it1 I t l l Illl 16 17 III I IIII ll I11 IlIII ! ! 1B 19 120 21 22 II I III II ( 1 I II 23 24 I` I l I1 1 ITI I I I 25. i i I J I Ii 26 f 11 1 1 1 1 IIIiI 27 1 TTI 28 29 30 POINT SCHEDULE Page 16 OF 23 - jPOINT POINT POINT POINT COS JDDC TYPE FUNCTION APPLICATION ALARM'' S T P D y L P T E R E 0 H 0 0 L 0 A H K O H D I C C N I L F C 0 S R P H P I G A U T N 0 H C E G 0 F C T E U R L K R N T 0 T 3 N L H/ H W D 3 A 0 F S/ R M' E 0 0 A D Y T E 3 D R L S N I A I N I U D T P A I S H N K L C A R S R T L L 0 S D N A N i B A S U T D S F A I I Y L L M T 0 0 A I I R P J A L P P A T T L U I U L B T D T S" C I 0 0 A 0 E S PPS ? u K i! L U R 0 0 0 C U 0 S R T R 0 T T D 0/ I L Z C D T S S A T T E U I I A A S POINT DESCRIPTION Y C T T K SIP E £ Y E h U S C R S ^I E E L K E z T O? Z Z Q S? T,L Y T RTU 4.- Supply Fa I 1 1 1 1 i 1 ! ) 2 Hot Deck I I I I ! I I! I I I! I v 3 Cold Deck Is x I I f Ix I 1 A X1 I( ! i t 4 Mixed Air f 1XI ( FFFF Xf I I I 1 t•1Ix 5 Space Temp. - 1 per I k x I I I I11XI I I I I X i I 1 i Ix ix 6 zone I I I I I I 7 Heating Coil Flow I fX lK I III 1! ! I Ix FTI ! I I I I 9 Cooling Coil Flow X I I I I I! t 1 I<Y I f l IK 1 1 1 1 ! 1 1 1 1 Supply Air Temp. t Ix X1 I I f I I A I I I I I I 1 I! I I I I I I ! ,9 10 per zonel I I I II ! 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I ! I ! 11 Return Air Temp IX IX I I 1 11 1 X i IIK 112 Return Fan IKI xIxI 1XIW11, I I 1XI ) I I 1 XI 13 CHR-Temp I Ix I I I I I X1 I I I IK ( I I I I I I I! ) ! 14 i I 15 IIII 1 16 II MIL 17 IIII II illl I11111 I! 11 ! =s I I ! I I I I I I I ( I I I I 19 II II I III II ill) II! !! 120 1 I i I 1111 !11 111 I( ! !fll 21 it I! ill! !IIII !II I 22 23 I I I I I I I I 24 I I I I ! I 25. 1 1 I I 26 27 I I I 28 I I I 29 I IL I I -IF F L___ L-v- t _ L POINT SCHEDULE Page 17 OF 23 POINT POINT POINT POINT COS JDDCI TYPE FUNCTION APPLICATION ALARM S T P D v. ; L • P T E R Z O H O O L 0 A M K 0 M D I C C N I L F C 0 S R P H P I G A U T N 0 H C E G 0 F C T E U R L M R N T O T 3 N L H/ HW D B A 0 F S/ R M E 0 0 A D Y T E 3 D R L S N I A I N I U D T P A I S W N M L C A R S R= L L 0 S D N A N T B A S U T D S F A I I Y L L M T 0 0 A I I R P J A L P P A T T L U I U L B T D T S M C I 0 0 A 0 E S ? !I :: H L U R 0 0 0 C U 0 S R. R 0 T T D 0/ I L z C D T S S A ISIPIP T T E U I I A A S POINT DESCRIPT'ON Y G T T K S P E E Y E w' U S C R S ': ;�� rn E � Y 0 R z Z Q S i T L Y T RTU 5.- Su 1 Fa ! I I I I I! 1 ! ! I ! 2 Hot Deck ! k I I I I I I I lxlxl 3 Cold Deck I I I I i 1 I I I X1 I 1 1 ! xl 4 Mixed Air ! I ! X{ I ! ( ! Iv X 5 Space Temp: - 1 per I 1XI I II I A I I I Li x x 6 zone I 141110111 7 Heating Coil Flow I IX k I I I I i X1 1 i 1 1 11 1 ! I ! o CoolingCoil Flow X 11 1 I I! 1 1VIH I Supply Air Temp. I tK X I! i I I I I 1 1 1 1 1 1 I I V JK F 19 10 per zonel I I I I + 11 Return Airlemp I IX I I i I I X 1 I J ! I I I I I I 12 Return Fan k I X X I 1XII I I I !I V I iI I IX 1 1 1 1 XI 13 CHR Temp I IX X I I{ ! I XI I 1 I lK I ! I I ! ! • ! I 15 I I ! l l I I 1 1 I 1 I I I 16 LJJ I I I I 1 Ili !lllll II !11 17 11 1 ! I I I I I 1 1 1 I! 1 I ! 1s I II i it IIII II 11 19 120 I ( i 1 1 1 I_j l 21 I !! 11 1 1 II1111 1 Ilr i 22 I I I I I I I I 1 ! I 1 23 24 i IIII I I 25. I p I ! 26 t 27 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 V I I i I Ir i i r 2206 t141-6 I f , POINT SCHEDULE Page 18 OF 23 ` POINT I POINT POINT POINT COS IDDC TYPE FUNCTION APPLICATION ALARM-1 S T P D N L P T E R 0 H 0 0 L 0 A M I{ 0KD I CC NI L F C 0 S R P H P I G A U T N 0 H C E G 0 F C T E U R L H R N T 0 T 3 N L H/ H 'd D B A O F S/ F H E 0 0 A D Y T E 3 D R L S N I A I N I U D T P A I S W N H L C A R S R= L L O S D N A N T B A S U T D S F A I I Y L L H T 0 0 A I I R P J A L P P A T T L U I U L B T D T S u C I 0 0 A 0 E S P P S= m v H L U R 0 U U C U 0 S R T R 0 T T D 0/ I L 2 CDT S S A T T E U I I A A S POINT DESCRIPTION YGTT{ SIP E E Y EW US CR S1IE ErnE EYOR ZZQS?YLYT i .RTU 6.— Supply Fa MY I I I I I ! I I Ix I Ix L z Hot Deck I f f I III !I X1I III ! t 3 Cold Deck I 1 I I 1 1 I i I ! 4 Mixed Air I I1xi I X1 I I I I i I;; 5 Space Temp. - 1 per I 1XIXI I I I II t I I I I I I 1x , IX 6 zone i II l I I I I 1 1 I I I I I 7 Heating Coil Flow I Ix LK I If I I 1 I j I I I I ( FT i t I I I I I i Cooling Coil Flow Ix I I I I I I I Supp1v Air Temp. I tK IX I I I I X I I l t III I I I I! I I �9 10 per zonel I I I I I I I I 1 III II I I I I ! I I If 11 Return Air Temp I (X IX I ( I I X I I I I I I I I I 12 Return Fan 1K Ix Ix 1XI I I11 I 1 1K I i I I 1XI I I 1 1 1 XI 1 ix 1 CHR Tem I Ix I I I XI I i t III 11 1 I I 1 1 1 ! I 113 14 I I flit 1 t I I1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I I 1 1 1 1 I I ls Ilt I!! t i l I IIJ i t '6 I II Illllllli !illlll 1) ! 11 17 Ill I I III II IIII i I!I + 1& I II 1 II i 11) II III+ 39 I it I it 11 tltl II! f +I j20 1 1 I t l i I I I IIII III i l! 1: 1 21 II II I I I ! II III 1 II 22 23 24 ( I I I I I I I 25. I I i (1 jTI 26 T! ! i III III I 27 I I 28 I I I 29 I 30 ...... i II I I1 1 1 POINT SCHEDULE Page 19 OF 23 1 ' POINT DESCRIPTION POINT TYPE POINT FUNCTION POINT APPLICATION POINT COS ALARM I DDC B I N A R Y A N A L 0 G I N P 0 T 0 U T P 0 T P 0 S F D B A C K S/ T A T U S S T A R T S T 0 P P U LU S E T E M P E R A T R E H U M I D I T Y P R E S S U R E F LBTDTSMCI 0 w' T U K I L 0 H A T S D C M 0 N I 0/ R P R 0 G R A M S^{ D r M A N D L I I D U T Y C Y L E T O T A L Z E i I N T E R L OOAOES C K 3 M D E 3 S T T S i S 0 A P. C 0 N D 0 PPSTN:SMLU T Z C H L R 0 T C H/ L R E Q y 0 N E S T A UII S H I G H L I L 0 W L I I T 0 F F N 0 R A L L 0 L C 0 C D I A S D P J A S Y T 1 RTU #7 - Supply Fan X X X l i l !X I 1 g 2 Mixed Air X X I I X I ! X I } X X 3 Space X ix X X 1 1 X I IX X 4 HeatingCoil Flow X' I X X 1 1 5 CoolingCoil Flow ix X X X X! I 6 Supply Air Temp X1 I I Ix- I X i t 7 Return Air Temp lxixl I I Ix i I X1 I! 1 -o Return Fan X1 1XIIII I I i iI I I X I! I 1 1 Y4 1 1! 1 IX h9 CHR Temp X1 X1 11 IX I I I X I I l l o I 1 1 1 TT! 11 I.1 IT I I I I I 12 I 1 I I 13 14 I I I I l 15 I I I I I 16 II IIIiI !i ! III I{ 17 1s ill 111 I !I 19 ! I I I !! I I! f 20 1 1 1 TT I l l ! 1!I J-11} 21 I I I 22 23 1 I 1 I 24 ( i 25 � 26 ! 27 28#1 Eq wif 29 30 1 I L�.a LL L— t-- i _ L POINT SCHEDULE Page 20 OF 23 I • POINT DESCRIPTION POINT TYPE POINT FUNCTION POINT APPLICA':ION POINT COS ALARM' �DDC B I N A R YGTTKSP£ A N A L 0 I N P 0 0 U T P 0 P 0 S F D B A C S/ T A T U S T A R T S T 0 P U L S T E H P E R A T U R+ EYEWUS H U M I D I P R E S S U R F L O B T K I L 0 W A T T D D CRS':IE H 0 N I T 0/ P R 0 G R A M S D E M A N D L I M I D U T Y C Y C L T 0 T A L I Z FEE I N T E R- L 0 C 3 M 0 D 3 S T A T E 0 S i E S 0R S A C 0 N D 0 P T ZZQS C H L R 0 P T C H/ L R S E ;l 0 N E S T A T U H I G H L I M I i L 0 W L I M I iLYT O F F N 0 R M A L 0 C D I S P L A L 0 C A D J U S 1 RTU #9— Supply Fa I I I II i II I 2 Hot Deck I I I I I I I ! 3 Cold Deck 1 1 j j 4 Mixed Air 5 Sp ace Temp. 1 per X I XI X I I 1 I 1 I" X X x .x 6 zonel I J ! j j 7 Heatin Coil Flow ( IX I I I I I i t 1 1 s CoolingCoil Flow X I I I I R I I I I Supply Air Temp.! i I I i tI 1KI I I l l l i l 19 10 per zon ( 1 1 I I i 1 Return Air Tem X I X I ( I Ix I �11 12 Return Fan 1XIXI 1XII I I I X I Xj I ix 13 CHR Tem I X 1 I XI I 1 1 i { ( ! 14 115 I III I Till ! 1 16 17 Il I I I I III 16 I I 11 1II II I� 19 120 1 TT I ! I 21 22 23 I I I I 1 t 1 24 i I ! 25. ! 26 I ! I ! I 27 j 28 29 30 11 I I it I-,-- L--- c-- L--� [ POINT SCHEDULE Page 21 OF 23 POINT POINT I POINT POINT COS DDC TYPE %-% FUNCTION APPLICATION ALARMS .� S T P D y L P T E R E 0 H 0 0 L 0 A M K O M D I C C N I L F C 0 S R P H P I G A U T N 0 H C E G 0 F C T E U R L M R N T 0 T 3 N L H/ E W D B A 0 F S/ R M E 0 0 A D Y T E 3 D R L S N I A I N I U D T D A I S W N M L C A R S R T L L 0 S D N A N T B A S U T D S F A I I Y L L M T 0 0 A I I R P J A L P P A T T LU I ULBTDTSMCI00A0ES PPS Y.::MLU R O D U C U O S R T R O T T D O/ I L Z C D T S S A T T E U I I A A S POINT DESCRIPTION Y G T T K S P E E Y E W U S C R S^• , c E t K E E T 0 P. Z Z 0S T T L Y T Boiler X ix X X i t I IX 2 HW Pump 3 X X I 1 ! X rxi t I I 3 HW Supply Temp X X I II X I I I I I X 4 M Return Temp X X1, I I I I X ! I 5 Flow Ix Ix 1XIXI X X X I I 6 Inlet Valve at ( y, X I I Boiler 3 I ( ( I I [7 9 HW Supply Temp X X I I IX I I I! X I I from Boiler 3 I I ( I I 19 10 ! 111 I . 12 I I I 14 15 1 I 1 I ,6 17 II1 I II ! 1s I 11 ill I �!� 19 I I I I ! I 1! ! {20 I I I I I I I ( I I I! 21 22 I I I I 23 24 I i 25 1 HI 26 T I 27 28 ,g 1 MA '1--FH--i 30 r I FR44-41 I L---- t C.__1- t; L,F-: l_ tY _ LL: L__� ( __: L POINT SCHEDULE Page 22 OF 23 POINT DESCRIPTION 1 Chiller POINT I TYPE %^ POINT FUNCTION POINT APPLICATION 7 POINT COS ALARM7 ++ -DDC .� I B I N A R Y A H A L 0 G I N P 0 T 0 U T P 0 T P 0 S F D B A C K S/ T A T U S S T A R T S T 0 P - P U L S E T E M P E R A T U R: E H U M I D I Y P R E S S U R E I F L O i► I I B T U K I L 0 W A T T S D D C j M 0 N I T 0/ R P R 0 G R A M S S^ D E M A N D L I H I I D U T Y C Y C L t£, T 0 T A L I Z I N T E R L 0 C K 3 M 0 D E 3 S T A T E 0 S Y E S O S A R C 0 N D 0 P T Z C H L R 0 P T Z C H/ L R S E Q N 0 N E S T A U S • H I G HW L I M I T L 0 L I M I T • 0 F F N 0 R M A L L 0 C D I S P L A Y L 0 C A D J U S T 2 PCHWP (3) X I I I X ! 3 CHW Supply TempX X ! X ! 4 CHW Return TempX X X I I 5 SCHWP 3 X X I ! 6 CHS Temp X X X 1 X ! 7 CHR Temp lxlxl I I I ! X I I I r Temp at Xlxl I 11 !X 1 1 ! I ix I ! 9 Chiller (3) i I OCHS Temp at XIXI I I I K I I Il ix-1 Chiller (3) I �11 12 ecoupler Temp X X I -- I X I 13 I I l ! 14 t I I I I i I I I I 15 1 i6 II 11 !i ! IIl I 1 17 1B I I I f I I ) 1 19 I 1! I 1! ! I! ! 20 I 1 1If) ill !i 21 I If I I 22 1I 23 f I I II 1 24 iITT! 25 I 26 27 28 29 9 Dint •��• r I 1 I I POINT SCHEDULE Page 23 OF 23 L POINT POINT I POINT POINT COS DDC TYPE FUNCTION APPLICATION ALARMS J ' S T P D ;1 L P T E R E 0 P 0 0 L 0 A M K 0 M D I C C N I L F C 0 S R P H P I G A U T N 0 H C E G 0 F C T E U R L M R N T 0 T 3 N L H/ F W D 8 A 0 F S/ R M E 0 0 A D Y T E 3 D R L S N I A I N I U D T P A I S W N M L C A R S R T L L 0 S D N A N T B A S U T D S F A I I Y L L M T 0 0 A I I R P J A L P P A T T L U I U L B T D T S M C I 0 0 A 0 E S P P S T R M4 M L U R 0 U U C U 0 S R T R4�-Tu D 0/ I L Z C D T S S A T T E U I I A A S POINT DESCRIPTION Y G T T K S P E E Y EC R S ^_ { e E i K E E T 0 R Z I& 0 S ^_ ? L Y T 1 Cooling Tower (3) X X I X ► X2 uPP Y X X I ( I X 3 Return X X ! Fan pee X Xl ! 5 Y ass X X X X I ! X 6 umP X X X, I X ! X ix i Auto Valve At K ix 1XI f7 3 Tower inlet (3) CWS at Chiller (3) k Ix I( IX ( ! IIxI ! I I C9 10 CWR at Chiller (3) tK tK I I i Xi { i tK ! X1 X 11CW Flow at lK I I I 141I !X X 112 Chiller (3) I 1 I X I X 13 ( ! i 14 I1 J- 16 17 19 120Blower Coil 11 Xi Ix XI 1xi xi I I ! I I I { IX X I ! ( ( X! ! ! 21 Space Temp I ! ! ! i ! I I1 Y, 22 ! I ! 23 I I ! I I 24 I 25 I 26 ! 27 28 29 30. AL I 1 i 1 _._. L..m I___ i_._._ 1994 HVAC Renovations - Phase Two Lubbock International Airport Lubbock, Texas Project Bid No.12734 Joe D. McKay, AIA Architects 1402 AVENUE N LUBBOCK, TX 79424 (806 744-4490 Fax (806;744-4494 MECHANICAL & ELECTRICAL ENGINEERS Agnew Associates, Inc. 3223 S. LOOP 289, SUM 424 LUBBOCK, TX 79423 (806) 799-0753 Fax (806) 792-2014 1994 HVAC RENOVATION - PHASE it LUBBOCK INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT NO. 12734 LUBBOCK, TEXAS TABLE OF CONTENTS FOR 1994 HVAC RENOVATION - PHASE II LUBBOCK INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT LUBBOCK, TEXAS DIVISION 0 - BIDDING AND CONTRACTS Notice to Bidders General Instructions to Bidders Bid Proposal - Bid for Unit Price Contract Payment Bond Performance Bond Certificate of Insurance Contract General Conditions ofrthe Agreement Current Wage Determinations Notice of Acceptance DIVISION 1 - GENERAL CONDITIONS 01010 Special Conditions 01030 Alternatives 01340 Shop Drawings 01600 Materials DIVISION 4 - MASONRY 04100 Mortar 04200 Unit Masonry DIVISION 7 - THERMAUMOISTURE PROTECTION Sheet Metal Flashing 07600 07900 Caulking & Sealants DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS Hollow Metal Doors & Frames 08100 08330 Rolling Service Door DIVISION 9 - FINISHES Acoustical Ceiling System 09500 09900 Painting and Finishing JLL TC-1 1994 HVAC RENOVATION - PHASE II WBBOCK INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT NO. 12734 WBBOCK, TEXAS Note to Bidders DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL General Provisions Mechanical and Electrical 15000 15200 Piping and Accessories 15210 Plumbing Systems 15230 Chilled Water Systems 15235 Heating Water Systems 15250 Condensing Water System 15290 Marking and Identification 15320 Air Distribution 15330 Hangers and Supports '15335 Vibration Isolation 15500 Equipment 15600 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Mechanical Systems 15700 Temperature Regulation DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL Raceways and Fittings 16110 16120 Conductors 16140 Wiring. Devices 16150 Motors and Equipment Controls and Wiring 16170 Circuit and Motor Disconnects 16195 Electrical Identification 16450 Grounding 16470 Panelboards 16475 Overcurrent Protective Devices 16500 Lighting 16723 Fire 'Alarm and Detection System 16920 Motor Control Centers I J LL TC-2 NOTICE TO BIDDERS NOTICE TO BIDS BID # 12734 Sealed bids addressed to Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer, City of Lubbock, Texas, will be received at the office of the Purchasing Manager, Municipal Bldg., 1625 13th St., Room L-04, Lubbock, Texas, 79401, until 2:00 o'clock p.m. on the 18th day of November, 1993, or as changed by the issuance of formal addenda to all planholders, to furnish all labor and materials and perform all work for the construction of the following described project: LUBBOCK INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT-HVAC RENOVATIONS PHASE II After the expiration of the time and date above first written, said sealed bids will be opened by the Buyer at his office and publicly read aloud. it is the sole responsibility of the bidder to insure that his bid is actually in the office of Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock, prior to the expiration of the date above first written. The City of Lubbock will consider the bids on the 18th day of November, 1993, at the Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street, Lubbock, Texas, or as soon thereafter as may be reasonably convenient, subject to the right to reject any or all bids and waive any formalities. The successful bidder will be required to furnish a performance bond and payment bond in accordance with Article 5160, Vernon's Ann. Civil St., in the t amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $25,000.00. Said statutory bonds should be issued by a company carrying a current Best Rating of B or superior, as the rating of the bond company is a factor that will be considered in determination of the lowest responsible bidder. if the contract price does not exceed $25,000.00 the said statutory bonds will not be required. Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's or certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a proposal bond from a reliable surety company, payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than 5% of the total amount of the bid submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within 10 days after notice of award of the contract to him. u it shall be each bidders sole responsibility to inspect the site of the work and to inform himself regarding all local conditions under which the work is to be done. It shall be understood and agreed that all such factors have been thoroughly investigated and considered in the preparation of the bid submitted. The plans, specifications, proposal forms and contract documents may be examined at the office of the Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock, Lubbock, Texas. Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in the contract documents on file in the office of the Purchasing Manager of the City of Lubbock, which document is specifically referred to in this notice to bidders. Each bidder's attention is further directed to provision of Article 5159a, Vernon's Ann. Civil St., and the requirements contained therein concerning the above wage scale and payment by the contractor of the prevailing rates of wages as heretofore established by owner in said wage scale. r The City of Lubbock hereby notifies all bidders that in regard to any contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement, minority and women business enterprises will be afforded equal opportunities to submit bids in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, sex, disability, or national origin in consideration for an award. r.. There will be a pre -bid conference on 9th day of November, 1993. at 1:30 o'clock a.m., Blue Room, Lubbock international Airport, Lubbock, Texas. r` The City of Lubbock does not discriminate against persons with disabilities. City of Lubbock pre - bid meetings and bid openings are available to all persons regardless of disability. if you would like bid information made available in a more accessible format or if you require assistance, please contact the Purchasing Department at (806) 767-2167 (Monday -Friday, 8:00 - 5:00 p.m.) or 1625 13th Street Room L-04 at r " least 48 hours in advance of the meeting. W LUBBOCKffield SENIOR BUYER 1 7 is r t r- e GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS r f 4 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1. SCOPE OF WORK The contractor shall furnish all labor, superintendence, machinery, equipment and all materials necessary to complete this project in accordance with contract documents for the HVAC Renovations Phase II - Lubbock International Airport, Lubbock, Texas. 2. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS All work covered by this contract shalt be done in accordance with contract documents described in the General Conditions. ALL bidders shalt be thoroughly familiar with all of the requirements set forth on the contract documents for the construction of this project and shalt be responsible for the satisfactory completion of all work contemplated by said contract documents. 3. PLANS FOR USE BY BIDDERS It is the intent of the City of Lubbock that att parties with an interest in submitting a bid on the project covered by the contract documents be given a reasonable opportunity to examine the documents and prepare a bid without charge of forfeiture of deposit. The contract documents, may be examined without charge as noted in the Notice to Bidders. 4. TIME AND ORDER FOR COMPLETION The construction covered by the contract documents shall be fully completed within 60 (SIXTY) calendar days from the date specified in the Notice to Proceed issued by the City of Lubbock to the successful bidder. The Contractor will be permitted to prosecute the work in the order of his own choosing, provided, however, the City reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit a progress schedule of the work contemplated by the contract documents. In the event the City requires a progress schedule to be submitted, and it is determined by the City that the progress of the work is not in accordance with the progress schedule so submitted, the City may direct the Contractor to take such action as the City deems necessary to insure completion of the project within the time specified. 5. PAYMENT ALL payments due to Contractor shall be made in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions of the contract documents. 6. AFFIDAVITS OF BILLS PAID The City of Lubbock reserves the right, prior to final acceptance of this project to require the Contractor to execute an affidavit that all bills for labor, materials and incidentals incurred in the construction of the Improvements contemplated by the contract documents have been paid in full and that there are no claims pending, of which the Contractor has been notified. T. MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP The intent of these contract documents is that only materials and workmanship of the best quality and grade will be furnished. The fact that the specifications may fail to be sufficiently complete in some detail will not relieve �+ the Contractor of full responsibility for providing materials of high quality and for protecting them adequately juntil incorporated into the project. The presence or absence of a representative of the City on the site will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility of complying with this provision. The specifications for materials and methods set forth in the contract documents provide minimum standards of quality which the Owner believes p necessary to procure a satisfactory project. 8. GUARANTEES ALL equipment and materials incorporated in the project and all construction shall be guaranteed against defective materials and workmanship. Prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shad.furnish to the Owner, a.written generaL guarantee which shall provide that the Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work, and pay for any and all damages of any nature whatsoever resulting in such defects, when such defects appear within ONE year from date of final acceptance of the work as a result of defective materials or workmanship, at no cost to the Owner (City of Lubbock). 9. PLANS FOR THE CONTRACTOR The contractor will be furnished one set of plans and specifications, and related contract documents. for his use during construction. Plans and specifications for use during construction will only be furnished directly to the Contractor. The Contractor shall then distribute copies of plans and specifications to suppliers, subcontractors or others, as required for proper prosecution of the work contemplated by the Contractor. 10. PROTECTION OF THE WORK ^, The Contractor shall be responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, and protection of all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, apparatus, accessories, facilities, and all means of construction, and any and all parts of the work whether the Contractor has been paid, partially paid, or not paid for such work, until the date the City issues its certificate of completion to Contractor. The City reserves the right, after the bids have 1 been opened and before the contract has been awarded, to require of a bidder the following information: t (a) The experience record of the bidder showing completed jobs of a similar nature to the one covered by the r` proposed contract and all work in progress with bond amounts and percentage completed. (b) A sworn statement of the current financial condition of the bidder. W Equipment schedule. 11. TEXAS STATE SALES TAX This contract is issued by an organization which qualifies for exemption provisions pursuant to provisions of Article 20.04 of the Texas Limited Sales, Excise and Use Tax Act. The Contractor,.must obtain a limited sales, excise and use tax permit which shall enable him to buy the materials to. be incorporated into the work without paying the tax at the time of purchase. ice'' rr 12. PROTECTION OF SUBSURFACE LINES AND STRUCTURES It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to prosecute the work contemplated by the contract documents in such a way as to exercise due care to locate and prevent damage to all underground pipelines, utility lines, conduits or other underground structures which might or could be damaged by Contractor during the construction of the project contemplated by these contract documents. The City of Lubbock agrees that it will furnish Contractor the location of all such underground lines and utilities of which it has knowledge. However, such fact shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities aforementioned. All such underground lines or structures cut or damaged by Contractor during the prosecution of the work contemplated by this contract shall be repaired immediately by Contractor to the satisfaction of the City of Lubbock, Texas, at Contractor's expense. 13. BARRICADES AND SAFETY MEASURES The contractor shall, at his own expense, furnish and erect such barricades, fences, lights and danger signals, and shall take such other precautionary measures for the protection of persons, property and the work as may be necessary. The Contractor will be held responsible for all damage to the work due to failure of barricades, signs, and lights to protect it, and when damage is incurred, the damaged portion shall be immediately removed and replaced by Contractor at his own cost and expense. The Contractor's responsibility for maintenance of barricades, signs, and lights shall not cease until the date of issuance to Contractor of City's certificate of acceptance of the project. 14. €XPLOSIVES The use of explosives will not be permitted unless written permission to do so is obtained by the Contractor from the City. In all cases where written permission is obtained for the use of explosives, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for all damage which may occur as a direct or indirect result of the blasting. In addition, in all cases where explosives are authorized to be used, the Contractor shall use utmost care so as not to endanger Life or property and the Contractor shall further use only such methods as are currently utilized by persons, firms, or corporations engaged in similar type of construction activity. Explosive materials shall not be stored or kept at the construction site by the Contractor. In all cases where explosives are to be used during the construction of the project contemplated by this contract, it shall be the duty of the Contractor to notify each utility company having structures (above or below the ground) in proximity to the site of the work of Contractor's intention to use explosives, and such notice shall be given sufficiently in advance to enable the companies to take such steps as they may deem necessary to protect their property from injury. Such notice, however, shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for any damage resulting from his blasting operations. 15. CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE The successful bidder shall be required to have a responsible local representative available at all times while the r• work is in progress under this contract. The successful bidder shall be required to furnish the name, address and telephone number where such local representative may be reached during the time that the work contemplated by this contract is in progress. 16. INSURANCE The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written notice of cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) days in advance of cancellation or change. All policies shall contain an agreement on the part of the insurer waiving the right to subrogation. i The insurance certificates furnished shall name the City as an additional insured and shall further state that all subcontractors are named as additional insureds, or in the alternative, shall be accompanied by a statement from the Contractor to the effect that no work on this particular project shall be subcontracted. 17. LABOR AND WORKING HOURS Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract documents. The wage rate which must be paid on this project shall not be less than specified in the schedule of general prevailing rates of per diem wages as above mentioned. The bidders' attention 4 is further directed to the requirements of Article 5159a, Vernon's Annotated Civil Statutes providing for the payment of the wage schedules above mentioned and the bidder's obligations thereunder. The inclusion of the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages in these contract documents does not release the Contractor from compliance with any wage Law that may be applicable. Construction work under this contract requiring an inspector will not be performed on weekends or holidays unless the following conditions exist: (1) The project being constructed is essential to the City of Lubbock's ability to provide the necessary service to its citizens. (2) Delays in construction are due to factors outside the control of the Contractor. The Contractor is approaching the penalty provisions of the contract and Contractor can show he has made a diligent effort to complete the contract within the allotted time. 4 Before construction work requiring an inspector is to be performed on weekends or holidays, the Contractor must notify the Owner's Representative not Less then three full working days prior to the weekend or holiday he desires to do work and obtain written permission from the Owner's Representative to do such work. The final decision on whether to allow construction work requiring an inspector on weekends or holidays will be made by the Owner's d Representative. •� in any event, if a condition should occur or arise at the site of this project or from the work being done under this contract which is hazardous or dangerous to property or life, the Contractor shall immediately commence work, regardless of the day of the week or the time of day, to correct or alleviate such condition so that it is no longer P^ dangerous to property or life. I 18. PAYMENT OF EMPLOYEES AND FILING OF PAYROLLS The contractor and each of his subcontractors shall pay each of his employees engaged in work on the project under 8 this contract in full (less mandptory legal deductions) in cash, or by check readily cashable without discount, not Less often than once each week. The Contractor and each of his subcontractors engaged at the site of the work shall *., not later than the seventh day following the payment of wages, file with the Owner's Representative, or Engineer, a certified, sworn, legible copy of such payroll. This shall contain the name of each employee, his classification, the number of hours worked on each day, rate of pay, and net pay. The affidavit shall state that the copy is a true and correct copy of such payroll, that no rebates or deductions (except as shown) have been made, or will in the + future be made from the wages paid as shown thereon. The Contractor must classify employees according to one of the classifications set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages, which schedule is included in the contract documents. The Contractor shall forfeit as a penalty to the City of Lubbock on whose behalf this contract is made, ten dollars for each laborer, workman, or mechanic employed for each calendar day, or portion thereof, such laborer, workman or mechanic is paid less than the wages assigned to his particular classification as set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract documents. 7 19. PROVISIONS CONCERNING ESCALATOR CLAUSES Poposals submitted containing any conditions which provide for changes in the stated bid price due to increases or decreases in the cost of materials, labor or other items required for the project will be rejected and returned to the bidder without being considered. 20. PREPARATION FOR PROPOSAL The bidder shall submit his proposal on forms furnished by the City. All blank spaces in the form shall be correctly filled in :and the bidder shall state the price both in words and numerals, for which he proposes to do the work contemplated or furnish the materials required. Such prices shall be written in ink, distinctly and legibly, or typewritten. In case of discrepancy between the price written in words and the price written in figures, the price written in words shall govern. If the proposal is submitted by an individual, his name must be signed by him or his duly authorized agent. if a proposal is submitted by a firm, association, or partnership, the name and address of each member aunt be given and the proposal signed by a member of the firm, association or partnership, or person duly authorized. If the proposal is submitted by a company or corporation, the company or corporate name and business address must be given, and the proposal signed by an official or duly authorized agent. Powers of attorney authorizing agents or others to sign proposals must be properly certified and aunt be in writing and submitted with r` the proposal. The proposal shall be executed in ink. Each proposal shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope, addressed as specified in the Notice to Bidders, and endorsed on the outside of the envelope in the following manner: (a) Bidder's name (b) Proposal for (description of the project). Bid proposals may be withdrawn and resubmitted at any time prior to the time set for opening of the bids, but no proposal may be withdrawn or altered thereafter. t 21. BOUND COPY OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS r Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by bidder shall be bound and include the following: (a) Notice to Bidders. (b) General Instructions to Bidders. (c) Bidder's Proposal. (d) Statutory Bond (if required). (e) Contract Agreement. (f) General Conditions. (g) Special Conditions (if any). (h) Specifications. 0 ) Insurance Certificates. M All other documents made available to bidder for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. If Plans and Specifications are too bulky or cumbersome to be physically bound, they are to be considered incorporated by reference into the aforementioned contract documents. I BID PROPOSAL BID PROPOSAL Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, TX 79457 DATE: (;�--( - H� PROJECT NUMBER: 12734 - HVAC RENOVATIONS - PHASE II, LUBBOCK INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT Proposal of c_-A 4 IT c_. (hereinafter called Bidder) To the Honorable Mayor and City Council City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called Owner) Gentlemen: The Bidder, in compliance with your invitation for bids for the Replacement of HVAC Equipment, Phase II, Lubbock International Airport, Lubbock, Texas, has carefully examined the plans, specifications, instructions to bidders, notice to bidders and all other related contract documents and the site of the proposed work, and being familiar with all of the conditions surrounding the construction of the proposed project including the availability of materials and labor, hereby proposes to furnish all labor, materials, and supplies; and to construct the project in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, within the time set forth therein and at the price stated below. The price to cover all expenses Incurred in performing the work required under the contract documents. r MATERIALS: n lnz t SERVICES: (1�•e:f� -+ � 1� -�icws4:..� d�o(/�r'•> — ($ L 2_�, i�"L = ) BASE BID: e^r— r' d ALTERNATE NO. ONE (Ase 9 DEDUCE f-w :-�y - 5 % ��� y s u:.,4 A lla ($7 ALTERNATE NO. TWO (ADD OR DEDUCT — i,%, + _ ($ no �► T� ) ALTERNATE NO. THREE (ADD eT) r ALTERNATE NO. FOUR (ADDOR•BEBkJe� s,'k �'�...;�LsQ,., c a�r-s U �� ($ r, C G (l _ ) �., }�r1 ' ALTERNATE NO. FIVE (A99 GR DEDUCT) vnv_ k,, J(-- i ($_ IQ R, O I3 — ) (Amount shall be shown in both words and figures. In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern.) 7 7 F Bidder hereby agrees to commence the work on the above project on or before a date to be specified in a l written "Notice to Proceed" of the Owner and to fully complete the project within ;� !, ; consecutive days thereafter as stipulated in the specifications and other contract documents. Bidder hereby further agrees to pay the Owner as liquidated damages the sum of $750.00 (SEVEN HUNDRED FIFTY DOLLAR) for each consecutive calendar day in excess of the time set forth herelnabove for completion of this project, all as more fully set forth in the general conditions of the contract documents. Bidder understands and agrees that this bid proposal shall be completed and submitted in accordance with instruction number 20 of the General Instructions to Bidders. Bidder understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any formality in the bidding, The Bidder agrees that this bid shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) calendar days after the scheduled closing time for receiving bids. �• The undersigned Bidder hereby declares that he has visited the site of the work and has carefully examined the plans, specifications and contract documents pertaining to the work covered by this bid, and he further agrees to commence work on or before the date specified in the written notice to proceed, and to subsequently complete the work on which he has bid; as provided in the contract documents. The undersigned Bidder agrees that the Cashier's check or proposal bond In the amount of five percent (5%) of his proposal, payable to City of Lubbock, Lubbock, Texas, which is left in escrow with the Architect, and that this amount is the measure of liquidated damages the Owner will sustain by the failure of the undersigned to execute and deliver the above named agreement or in furnishing the bond within ten (10) days of written notification of the award of the contract to him then the cashier's check or proposal bond shall become the �^ property of the Owner, but if this proposal is not accepted within sixty (60) days of the time set for the submission of bids, or If the undersigned executes and delivers said contract and bond, the check shall be returned to him on receipt thereof. F Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by Bidder shall be bound and include all contract documents made available to him for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. f Contractor BY - (Seal If Bidder is a Corporation) ATTEST i •�!- Z G'!'�' l I 1 ��I Secretary The D FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND ° COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY CompaNes HOME OFFICES: P.O. BOX 1227 BALTIMORE, MD 21203 BID BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we, (Here insert the name and address or legal title of the Contractor) 52 5--F 0 ST -_-_ LUBBOCK,_ TEXA c 2 A04- ______ _ as Principal, (hereinafter called the "Principal"), and_COLONIAL�AMERICAN CASUALTT-A,UU_ UgETgof Baltimore, Maryland, a corporation duly organized (Here insert the name of the Surety) COMPANY under the laws of the State of Maryland, as Surety, (hereinafter called the "Surety") are held and firmly bound unto THE CITY OF__LUBBOCK_---__ (Here insert the name and address or legal title of the Owner) _—~— .w______________ ------as Obligee, (hereinafter called the "Obligee"), in the sum of ---FIVE PERCENT OF THE GREATEST_ AMOUNT BID--w=--Dollars for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, the said Principal and the said Surety, bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has submitted a bid for_._..—_.-__�____ �.. _--_-_M _ LUBBOCK INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT 1994__ i-VAC_ PROJECT #12634 r..----------------------__---------- NOW, THEREFORE, if the Obligee shall accept the bid of the Principal and the Principal shall enter into a contract with the Obligee in accordance with the terms of such bid and give such bond or bonds as may be specified in the bidding or contract documents with good and sufficient surety for the faithful performance of such contract and for the prompt payment of labor and material furnished in the prosecution thereof, or in the event of the failure of the Principal to enter into such contract and give such bond or bonds, if the Principal shall pay to the Obligee the difference not to exceed F the penalty hereof between the amount specified in said bid and such larger amount for which the Obligee may in good faith contract with another party to perform the work covered by said bid, then this obligation shall be null and void, �. otherwise to remain in full force and effect. E 1ST of DECEMBER A.D., 1993_ Signed and sealed this.___ ____ y Witness ^_ANTHONY MECHANICAL, -----_-____ Principal Tftte ❑ FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND W COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY urety -� - By-,-,, y--- - ---- - --- - - ----- -- (SEAL) KEVIN J. D ATTORNEiP44ii-FACT 025bax)—IM. 10-92 ZM'= ' Conforms to Amcrican Imitutc of Architom Docvmem AJ10. Fcbnrary 1970 Edition. i The FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND �p o COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY HOME OFFICES: BALTIMORE. MD. 21203 POWER OF ATTORNEY KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND, and the COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY, corporations of the State of Maryland, by C. M. PECOT, JR. , Vice -President, and C. W. ROBBINS , Assistant Secretary, in pursuance of authority granted by Article VI, Section 2 of the respective By -Laws of said Companies, which are set forth on the reverse side hereof and are hereby certified to be in full force and effect on the date hereof, do hereby nominate, constitute and appoint Howard Cowan and Kevin J. Dunn, r both of Lubbock, Texas, EACH ............. 1 ..... e true and1a`wful agent and Attorney -in -Fact of each, to make e, seal er, for, and on its behalf as surety, and r. as its act and deed: any and all bonds and unde ngs.. PT bonds on behalf of Independent Executors, Community Surv" and nity Guardians........... 6 And e execution of—sueof-such Fonds or undertakings in pursu f these pr ,shall be as binding upon said Companies, as fully and amply, to all intents and purposes, as if they had my execy d acknowledged by the regularly elected officers of the respective Companies at their offices in Baltimor d., in thei proper persons. This power of attorney revokes that issued on behalf warden, etal, dated February 18, 1991. t �O °o t IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Vice -Pr i� , and As ' secretaries have hereunto subscribed their names and affixed a the Corporate Seals of the said FIDEL DEPOSIT NY OF MARYLAND and the COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY this____________ __ _________—o __ _____day of___—_____ __—,7xZR1ds3Xy_ _—_--, A.D. 19-92. ATTEST: FIIY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY MAR D -- - I?' ------- By — — — - SEAL 3 - - ---- - - --(-------- ------- Ask ecretary Vi e-President COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND S TY MPANY iiSEAI� B --------- Assistant Secretary V =e-Presidentr� STATE OF MARYLAND I CITY OF BALTIMORE 1 SS: On this I St day of January A.D. 1992 , before the subscriber, a Notary Public of the State of Maryland, in and �. for the City of Baltimore, duly commissioned and qualified, came the above -named Vice -Presidents and Assistant Secretaries of the FIDELITY { AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND and the COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY, to me personally known to be the individuals and officers described herein and who executed the preceding instrument, and they each acknowledged the execution of the same. and being by me duly sworn, severally and each for himself deposeth and saith, that they are the said officers of the Companies aforesaid, and that the seals affixed to the preceding instrument are the Corporate Seals of said Companies, and that the said Corporate Seals and their signatures as such officers were duly affixed and subscribed to the said instrument by the authority and direction of the said Corporations. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed my Official Se. t o c st above written. r" Naurt '+ ovary Public Carol J. Fader My commission expires__ AugtLst__I_._--1492_____—_____-_ CERTIFICATE 1, the undersigned Assistant Secretary of the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND and the COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY do hereby certify that the original Power of Attorney of which the foregoing is a full, true and correct copy, is in full force and effect on the date of this certificate; and I do further certify that the Vice -Presidents who executed the said Power of Attorney were Vice -Presidents specially authorized by the Board of Directors to appoint any Attorney -in -Fact as provided in Article VI, Section 2 of the respective By -Laws of the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND and the COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY. This certificate may be signed by facsimile under and by authority of resolutions of the Board of Directors of the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND at a meeting duly called and held on the 16th day of July, 1969 and of the Board of Directors of the COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY at a meeting duly called and held on the Sth day of December, 1991. RESOLVED: "That the facsimile or mechanically reproduced signature of any Assistant Secretary of the Company, whether made heretofore or hereafter, whenever appearing upon a certified copy of any power of attorney issued by the Company, shall be valid and binding upon the Com- pany with the same force and effect as though manually affixed." IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I have hereunto subscribed my name and affixed the corporate seals of the said Companies, this ___1ST ----- of__ 19.43. -- - -- - -- - - - - ---------------- ------------ - i 168-5048 Assistant Secretary a w PAYMENT BOND 4 �md W o . 6 1990 73 -T STATUTORY PAYMENT BOND PURSUANT TO ARTICLE 5160 OF THE REVISED CIVIL STATUTES OF TEXAS AS AMENDED BY ACTS OF THE 56TH LEGISLATURE, REGULAR SESSION, 1959 KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS tha ���d (hereinafter called the PrinciPa l(s) as Principal(s), and Colonial AMCric n Czsuclty and Surot'y COrnFany (hereinafter called the Suret s) as"Su ety( a e d'a f,9�a 'C�oLAdlko the City of Lubbock (hereinafter called the mo Obligee), in the aunt o ai i ���� l or s (S/�_ �% lawful honey of the United States for the payment whereof, the si `and Surety bind themse ves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the��P,,r//incipal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the f day of 19�1�1 "to w /a'7)4 IJA end said Principal under the law is required before commencing the work provided for in said contract to execute a bond in the amount of said contract which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall pay all claimants a+ supplying labor and material to him or a subcontractor in the prosecution of the work provided for in said contract, then, this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect; PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Article 5160 of the Revised Civil r" Statutes of Texas as amended by Acts of the 56th Legislature, Regular Session, 1959, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Article to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. �.., IN WITNESS WHEREOF the said Principal (s) and Surety (s) have signed and sealed this instrument this Q day 1 of 19. Colonid Amcrlc?n Casualty and Suroty Company r � Surety Principal /4�4,Title) By: BOND CHECK HOWARD COWAN (Title) Ct BEST RATING ATTY IN FACT LICENSED IN TEXAS r By: DATE 3 kilt BY ( itle) r By: _.. (Title) 4 r r The undersi ned surety company represents that it is duty �}-IO1�i"J':J C OWA y qualified to do business in Texas, and hereby designates n agent resident in Lubbock County to whom any requisite notices may be delivered and on whom service of process may be had in matters arising out of such suretyship. V ColoN-zl Arrcec n i':,s„,,)ft4 Cnd S=- Company Surety '~ * sy. ATTY IN FACT 4 HOWAr O COWAN Mtle) Approved as to form: City of Lubbock ` ! By. City Attorney. Er"` * Note: if signed by an officer of the Surety Company there must be on file a certified extract from the by-laws showing that this person has authority to sign such obligation. If signed by an Attorney in Fact, we must have copy of power of attorney for our files. d r PERFORMANCE BOND F i �04 710. 6 199a 13 -T- STATUTORY PERFORMANCE BOND PURSUANT TO ARTICLE 5160 OF THE REVISED CIVIL STATUTES OF TEXAS AS n AMENDED BY ACTS OF THE 56TH LEGISLATURE, REGULAR SESSION 1959 - i - KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that /V`r- (hereinafter called the Principal(s), as Principal(s), and Colonial Ar: cdc"m CavuaRy and Sur6ty Company (hereinafter called the Suret (s as S rreny s) re ld a in y, bound unto the City of Lubbock (hereinafter called the Obligee), in the amount o �z Do Bars (s 9y% lawful money of the United States for the payment whereof, the s d Princ l n -curet �ir►d"TFRselves and their heirs administrators executors successors PBY� Pa Y and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Princi l has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the /'01 ay of L4'4_L h u y , , to and said principal under the law is required before commencing the work provided for in said contract to execute a bond in the amount of said contract which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall faithfully perform the work in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Article 5160 of the Revised Civil Statutes of Texas as amended by Acts of the 56th Legislature, regular session 1959, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said article to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. �uIN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal (s) and Surety (a) have signed and sealed this instrument this � ay of Q .—I 19H. 0donial Am= prCacvalty o oty, Ca-nq�arly (� F SurI-A. Principa By: By: W (TinwARD COWAN rd--11 ATTY IN FACT (Title) BOND CHECK BEST RATING t� ritt ) LICENSED IN TEXAS i DATE BY By: (Title) r The undersigned surety company represents that it is duly qualified to do business in Texas, and hereby designates 1402,JA A-PD. C OW ag A K',t resident in Lubbock County to whom any requisite notices may be delivered and on whom service of process may be had in matters arising out of such suretyship. r., Colonial Am rlmn Casualbj and Suroiy COMPanY Surety *g (Title) , �^ Approved as to Form HOWARD�ICQWAN City of Lubbock ATTY IIV_.FACT City Attorney Note: If signed by an officer of the Surety Company, there must be on file a certified extract from the by-laws showing R that this person has authority to sign such obligation. If signed by an Attorney in Fact, we must have copy of power of attorney for our files. The FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND o D COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY HOME OFFICES: BALTIMORE, MD. 21203 POWER OF ATTORNEY l KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND, and the COLONIAL AMERICAN l CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY, corporations of the State of Maryland, by C. M. PECOT, JR. , Vice -President, and C. W. ROBBINS , Assistant Secretary, in pursuance of authority granted by Article VI, Section 2 of the respective By -Laws of said Companies, which are set forth on the reverse side hereof and are hereby certified to be in full force and effect on the date hereof, do hereby nominate, constitute and appoint Howard Cowan and Kevin J. Dunn, both of Lubbock, Texas, EACH ............... ...... . . tL .................... e true and lawf0agent and Attorney -in -Fact of each, to make, , seal an er, for, and on its behalf as surety, and PtIg2 as its act and deed: any and all bonds and undes.. T bonds on behalf of Independent Executors, Community Survi and nity Guardians--, AMTMe execution of such bonds or undertakings in pursu thes*prsd, shall beas binding upon said Companies, as fully and amply, to all intents and purposes, as if they had ly exeacknowledged by the regularly elected officers of the respective Companies at their offices in Baltimor°,., in theioper persons. This power of attorney revokes that issued on behalf o'�ward Cetal, dated February 18, 1991. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said ViLIT ce-Pre i and Ass' t Secretaries have hereunto subscribed their names and affixed the Corporate Seals of the said FIDEDEPOSIT Y OF MARYLAND and the COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY this ----- —______________--- —----- ----- ------day of------------------A.D. 19-42 ATTEST: FI Y AND DEPOSIT COMPANY 0 —`xMR ND '--------- By--------------- --/------------- reremry President— - COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND S TY MPANY [sent.�lL -------------- � -----� _ - a-Lo- Q- _ - B Assistant Serretary V e-Presidents STATE OF MARYLAND CITY OF BALTIMORE ` SS: On this 1 St day of January . A.D. 1992 , before the subscriber, a Notary Public of the State of Maryland, in and f for the City of Baltimore, duly commissioned and qualified, came the above -named Vice -Presidents and Assistant Secretaries of the FIDELITY f AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND and the COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY, to me personally known to be the individuals and officers described herein and who executed the preceding instrument, and they each acknowledged the execution of the same, and being by me duly sworn, severally and each for himself deposeth and saith, that they are the said officers of the Companies aforesaid, and that the seals affixed to the preceding instrument are the Corporate Seals of said Companies, and that the said Corporate Seals and their signatures as such officers were duly affixed and subscribed to the said instrument by the authority and direction of the said Corporations. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed my Official t' o c t above written. c� �. ----- -------------- --- -------- - ---------- ----------------- v'MOTAR �s otary Public Carol J. Fader f � � My commission expires ---- Auguat--- 1-.___1991----- -___-_____ CERTIFICATE I, the undersigned Assistant Secretary of the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND and the COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY do hereby certify that the original Power of Attorney of which the foregoing is a full, true and correct copy, is in full force and effect on the date of this certificate; and I do further certify that the Vice -Presidents who executed the said Power of Attorney r were Vice -Presidents specially authorized by the Board of Directors to appoint any Attorney -in -Fact as provided in Article VI, Section 2 of the respective By -Laws of the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND and the COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY ` COMPANY. This certificate may be signed by facsimile under and by authority of resolutions of the Board of Directors of the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND at a meeting duly called and held on the 16th day of July, 1969 and of the Board of Directors of the COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY at a meeting duly called and held on the 5th day of December, 1991. RESOLVED: "That the facsimile or mechanically reproduced signature of any Assistant Secretary of the Company, whether made heretofore or hereafter, whenever appearing upon a certified copy of any power of attorney issued by the Company, shall be valid and binding upon the Com- pany with the same force and effect as though manually affixed." IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I have hereunto subscribed my name and affixed the corporate seals of the said Companies, this ____14T4_day of__ FEARUARY__________- 199_4__. --- - -� 168-5048 Assistant Secrets " EXTRACT FROM BY-LAWS OF FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND "Article VI, Section 2. The Chairman of the Board, or the President, or any Executive Vice -President, or any of the Senior Vice - Presidents or Vice -Presidents specially authorized so to do by the Board of Directors or by the Executive Commmittee, shall have power, by and with the concurrence of the Secretary or any one of the Assistant Secretaries, to appoint Resident Vice -Presidents, Assistant Vice -Presidents and Attorneys -in -Fact as the business of the Company may require, or to authorize any person or persons to execute on behalf of the Company any bonds, undertaking, recognizances, stipulations, policies, contracts, agreements, deeds, and releases and assignments of judgements, decrees, mortgages and instruments in the nature of mortgages,... and to affix the seal of the Company thereto. " EXTRACT FROM BY-LAWS OF COLONIAL AMERICAN CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY "Article VI, Section 2. The Chairman of the Board, or the President, or any Executive Vice -President, or any of the Senior Vice - Presidents or Vice -Presidents specially authorized so to do by the Board of Directors or by the Executive Committee, shall have power, by and with the concurrence of the Secretary or any one of the Assistant Secretaries, to appoint Resident Vice -Presidents, Assistant Vice -Presidents and Attorneys -in -Fact as the business of the Company may require, or to authorize any person or persons to execute on behalf of the Company any bonds, undertakings, recognizances, stipulations, policies, contracts, agreements, deeds, and releases and assignments of judgements, decrees, mortgages and instruments in the nature of mortgages,... and to affix the seal of the Company thereto." L1419d(rX)--rtU IMPORTANT NOTICE To obtain information or make a complaint: You may call the Fidelity and Deposit Company of Maryland or Colonial American Casualty and Surety Company's toll —free telephone number for information or to make a complaint at: 1-800-275-3528 You may contact the Texas Department of Insurance to obtain information on companies, coverages, rights, or complaints at: 1-800-252-3439 You may write the Texas Department of Insurance: P.O. Box 149104 Austin, TX 78714-9104 FAX # (512) 475-1771 PREMIUM OR CLAIM DISPUTES: Should you have a dispute concerning your premium or about a claim, you should first contact Fidelity and Deposit Company of Maryland or Colonial American Casualty and Surety Company. If the dispute is not resolved, you may contact the Texas Department of Insurance. ATTACH THIS NOTICE TO YOUR POLICY: This notice is for Information only and does not become a part or condition of the attached document. S8543(TX)(5/92) .- 1. A CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE ACHI D. PRODUCER ` The InWest Group, Inc. 6 Desta Drive, Suite '5,31, 0 Midland, Texas 71'705 INSURED _ DINT t-IUNY ME_C)lAN I CAL , I PIC . ANT•14ON`r' (lk-(>I:aNtCHL ,E�tt/lCE= INC P.O. Box 2706 Lubbock f ){ 79400 URANCE'rgl',�51S'S'JEVATE(MM1DDlYY) 2/17/94 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF -INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE COMPANIES AFFORDING COVERAGE COMPANY A LETTER Higi1ilanr l.n suranc-�4 Company COMPANY B LETTER F'irentartI s h"und I risur ar-tce Co COMPANY C LETTER FOV� L1 SLJV'plus Liries It" rts. Co COMPANY D LETTER Highland Insurance Coy-pany COMPANY E LETTER I-iF-toertix As-_,urartce C(.')lm ,arty J T HIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD ii INDICATED, NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. CO POLICY EFFECTIVE POLICY EXPIRATION TR TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER DATE (MM/DDIYY) DATE (MMlDDIYY) LIMITS t-i GENERAL LIABILITY w - X% COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CLAIMS MADEX OCCUR. OWNER'S & CONTRACTOR'S PROT. AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY ANY AUTO ALL OWNED AUTOS SCHEDULED AUTOS i� HIRED AUTOS }i NON -OWNED AUTOS GARAGE LIABILITY U 181641_1 7/0 1 /9-3 7/-3 1 % ` 4 GENERAL AGGREGATE S 2GCi(JLiU0 PRODUCTS-COMP/OP AGG. S 1 000000 PERSONAL & ADV. INJURY $ 1 G 0 L! L1 Ci G EACH OCCURRENCE $ 10U1.)0013 FIRE DAMAGE (Any one lire) S 5 6 0 U 0 MED. EXPENSE (Any one person) $ 50011 0 1 3cl55 1 7/0 1 /93 7/0 1 "4 COMBINED SINGLE 1 Ci000Q0 LIMIT S BODILY INJURY = (Per person) BODILY INJURY _ (Per accident) PROPERTY DAMAGE S E EXCESS LIABILITY '?/U 1/9-3 7/ U 3 /94 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1 bioo _ a i{ IUMBRELLA FORM AGGREGATE $ OTHER THAN UMBRELLA FORM WORKER'S COMPENSATION B WC 22 4.' 7 7/0 1 19: 7/0 1 / 9 4 i{ STATUTORY LIMITS EACH ACCIDENT a AND DISEASE —POLICY LIMIT $ 5 0 0 0 0 0 EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY DISEASE —EACH EMPLOYEE a 5 G G ii u U E: OTHER ECIP998332 7/01 /9:3 7/01 /94 IIySTALLATION bi`1jti , U 0 0 CA f L111I7 10U, 00 TRAI.461T of j LIEDUCTIBLE: ` DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS!LOCATIONS/VEHICLES/SPECIAL ITEMS RE: CITY OF LUBBOCK - BID #12734 - LUBBOCK INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT - HVAC RENOVATIONS - PHASE II. ADDITIONAL INSURED IN FAVOR OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK. CERTIFECAT 1 L�E2R CANCELLAT= - CITY OF LUBBOCK SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE ` I P . 0. BOX 2000 EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING COMPANY WILL ENDEAVOR TO ( LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79457 MAIL 10 DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT, BUT FAILURE TO MAIL SUCH NOTICE SHALL IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY OF ANY KIND UPON THE COMPANY, ITS AGENTS OR REPRESENTATIVES. AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE #CORD.25-5 (2/9�) / • j� OACORD CORPORATION .1990' ISSUE DATE (MM/DD/YY) A/alta�. CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE 2 17 94 PRODUCER THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE THE INWEST GROUP, INC. DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE 6 DESTA DRIVE, SUITE 5550 POLICIES BELOW. MIDLAND, TEXAS 79705 COMPANIES AFFORDING COVERAGE COMPANY A i LETTER HIGHLAND INSURANCE COMPANY COMPANY B INSURED LETTER ANTHONY MECHANICAL, INC. ETTERNY `. ■ ANTHONY MECHANICAL SERVICES, INC. ; P. 0. BOX 2706 LETTER Y D LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79408 ■ COMPANY E LETTER COVERAGES THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED, NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. CO TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER LTR POLICY EFFECTIVE POLICY EXPIRATION LIMITS DATE (MM/DD/YY) DATE (MM/DD/YY) GENERAL LIABILITY GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 500,000 A X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY FORTHCOMING 2/17/94 2/17/95 PRODUCTS-COMP/OPAGG. $ CLAIMS MADE X OCCUR. PERSONAL & ADV. INJURY $ ■ X OWNER'S IL CONTRACTOR'S PROT. EACH OCCURRENCE $ 500,000 FIRE DAMAGE (Any one tire) $ MED. EXPENSE (Any one person) $ ■ AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY COMBINED SINGLE ti ANY AUTO LIMIT ALL OWNED AUTOS BODILY INJURY i SCHEDULED AUTOS (Per person) ■ HIRED AUTOS BODILY INJURY s NON -OWNED AUTOS (Per accident) GARAGE LIABILITY ■ PROPERTY DAMAGE S EXCESS LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE 5 UMBRELLA FORM AGGREGATE $ ■ OTHER THAN UMBRELLA FORM WORKER'S COMPENSATION STATUTORY LIMITS EACH ACCIDENT $ AND DISEASE —POLICY LIMIT = EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY DISEASE —EACH EMPLOYEE S OTHER NAMED INSURED: THE CITY OF LUBBOCK P. 0. BOX 2000 LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79457 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS/LOCATIONS/VEHICLES/SPECIAL ITEMS RE: CITY OF LUBBOCK - BID #12734 - LUBBOCK INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT - HVAC RENOVATIONS - PHASE II j CERTIFICATE HOLDER w CANCELLATION SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE CITY OF LUBBOCK EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING COMPANY WILL ENDEAVOR TO P. 0. BOX 2000 MAIL i0 DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79457 LEFT, BUT FAILURE TO MAIL SUCH NOTICE SHALL IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY OF ANY KIND UPON THE COMPANY, ITS AGENTS OR REPRESENTATIVES. dft j AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE yCWNRATION :ACORD 25-S (7/90) _ ACO 1990 CONTRACT F F F F CONTRACT STATE OF TEXAS COUNTY OF LUBBOCK THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this loth day of February. 1994, by and between the City of Lubbock, County of Lubbock, State of Texas, acting by and through David R. Langston, Mayor, thereunto authorized to do so, hereinafter referred to as OWNER, and ANTHONY MECHANICAL. INC. of the City of LUBBOCK. County of LUBBOM and the State of TEXAS. hereinafter termed CONTRACTOR WITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the payments and agreements hereinafter mentioned, to be made and performed by the OWNER and under the conditions expressed in the bond bearing even date herewith (if any) the CONTRACTOR hereby agrees with OWNER to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements described as follows: BID #12734 - LUBBOCK INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT - RVAC RENOVATIONS - PHASE H FOR $1,428,987.00. and all extra work in connection therewith, underthe terms as stated in the contract documents and at his (or their) own proper cost and expense to furnish all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance and other accessories and services necessary to complete the said construction in accordance with the contract documents as defined in the General Condition of Agreement. The CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to commence work within ten days after the date written notice to do so shall have been given to him and to substantially complete same within the time specified in the contract documents. The OWNER agrees to pay the CONTRACTOR in current funds for the performance of the contract in accordance with the proposal submitted therefore, subject to additions and deductions, as provided in the contract documents and to make payment on account thereof as provided therein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to these presents have executed this agreement in Lubbock, Lubbock County, Texas in the year and day first above written. ATTEST: Secretary ATTEST: Corporate Secretary CONTRACTOR-- ANTHONY MECHANICAL, INC. I: 0 COMPLETE ADDRESS: P.O. Box 2706 Lubbock. Texas 79408 No Text P- .- GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT 1110010liht517 Whenever the word Owner, or the expression Party of the First Part, or First Party, are used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to the City of Lubbock, Texas. "1 2. CONTRACTOR 3. Whenever the word Contractor, or the expression Party of the Second Part, or Second Party, is used, it shall be understood to mean the person, persons, co -partnership or corporation, to -wit: ANTHONY MECHANICAL, INC. who has agreed to perform the work embraced in this contract, or to his or their legal representative. Whenever the word Owner's Representative or representative is used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to ROD PAINE, DEPUTY DIRECTOR OF MARKETINGIMANCE, City of Lubbock, under whose supervision these contract documents, including the plans and specifications, were prepared, and who will inspect constructions; or to such other representative, supervisor, or inspector as may be authorized by said Owner to act in any particular under this agreement. Engineers, supervisor or inspectors will act for the Owner under the direction. of Owner's Representative, but shall not directly supervise the Contractor or men acting in behalf of the Contractor. 4. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The contract's documents shall consist of the Notice to Bidders, General Instructions to Bidders, Proposal, Signed Agreement, Statutory Bonds (if required), General Conditions of the Agreement, Special Conditions of the Agreement (if any), Specifications, Plans, Insurance Certificate, and all other documents made available to Bidder for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. S. INTERPRETATION OF PHRASES Whenever the words "Directed," "Permitted," "Designated," "Required," "Considered Necessary," "Prescribed," or words of like import are used, it shall be understood that the direction, requirement, permission, order, designation or prescription of the Owner's Representative is intended; and similarly, the words "Approved," "Acceptable," "Satisfactory," or words of like import shall mean approved by or acceptable or satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. 6. SUBCONTRACTOR The term Subcontractor, as employed herein, includes only those having a direct contract with the Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents. Owner shall have no responsibility to any Subcontractor employed by Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents, but said Subcontractors will look exclusively to Contractor for any payments due Subcontractor. 7. WRITTEN NOTICE Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent certified mail to the last business address known to him who gives the notice. 8. WORK Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance, and all water, light, power, fuel, transportation and all other facilities necessary for the execution and completion of the work covered by the contract documents. Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be new and both workmanship and materials shall be of a good quality. The Contractor shall, if required, furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials. Materials or work described in words which so applied have well known, technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer such recognized standards. All work shall be done and all materials furnished in strict conformity with the contract documents. SUBSTANTIALLY COMPLETED The term "Substantially Completed" is meant that the structure or project contemplated by the contract documents has been made suitable for use or occupancy or the facility is in a condition to serve its intended purpose, but still may require minor miscellaneous work and adjustment. — 10. LAYOUT Except as specifically provided herein, the Contractor shall be responsible for laying out all work and shall accomplish this r' work in a manner acceptable to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative will check the Contractor's layout of all major structures and any other layout work done by the Contractor at Contractor's request, but this check does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of correctly locating all work in accordance with the Plans and Specifications. — 11. KEEPING OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSIBLE The Contractor shall be furnished with one copies of all Plans, Profiles and Specifications without expense to him and he shall keep one copy of same consistently accessible on the job site. 12. RIGHT OF ENTRY The Owner's Representative may make periodic visits to the site to observe the progress of quality of the executed work and to determine, in general, if the work is proceeding in accordance with the contract documents. He will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous onsite inspections to check the quality or quantity of the work, nor will he be responsible for the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or the safety precautions incident thereto. His efforts will be directed towards providing assurances for the Owner that the completed project will conform to the requirements of the contract documents, but he will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. On the basis of his onsite observations, he will keep the Owner informed of the progress of the work and will endeavor to guard the Owner against defects and deficiencies in the work of the Contractor. B. LINES AND GRADES All lines and grades shall be furnished by the Owner's Representative whenever necessary for the commencement of the work contemplated by these contract documents or the completion of the work contemplated by these contract documents. Whenever necessary, Contractor shall suspend his work in order to permit Owner's Representative to comply with this requirement, but such suspension will be as brief as practical and Contractor shall be allowed no extra compensation therefore. The Contractor shall give the Owner's Representative ample notice of the time and place where lines and grades will be needed. All stakes, marks, etc., shall be carefully preserved by the Contractor, and in case of careless destruction or removal by him, his Subcontractors, or his employees, such stakes, marks, etc., shall be replaced by the Owner's Representative at Contractor's expense. — dM 14. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE'S AUTHORITY AND DUTY Unless otherwise specified, it is mutually agreed between the parties to this Agreement that the Owner' s Representative shall review all work included herein. He has the authority to stop the work whenever such stoppage r„ may be necessary to insure the proper execution of the contract. In order to permit delays and disputes and to discourage litigation, it is further agreed that the Owner's Representative shall, in all cases, determine the amounts and quantities of the several kinds of work which are to be paid for under this contract. He shall determine all questions in relation to said work and the construction thereof, and shall, in all cases, decide every question which may arise relative to the execution of this contract on the part of said Contractor. The Owner's Representatives's estimates and findings shall be conditions precedent to the right of the parties hereto to arbitration or to any action on the contract, and to any rights of the Contractor to receive any money under this contract; provided, however, that should Owner's Representative render any decision or give any direction, which in the opinion of either party hereto, is not in accordance with the meaning and intent of this contract, either party may file with said Owner's Representative within 30 days his written objection to the decision or direction so rendered, and by such action may reserve the right to submit the questions so raised to arbitration as hereinafter provided. It is the intent of this Agreement that there shall be no delay in the execution of the work, therefore, written decisions or direction of the Owner's Representative as rendered shall be promptly carried out, and any claim arising therefrom shall be thereafter adjusted to arbitration as hereinafter provided. The Owner's Representative shall, within a reasonable time, render and deliver to both the owner and the Contractor a written decision on all claims of the parties hereto and on all questions which may arise relative to the r execution of the work or the interpretation of the contract, specifications and plans. Should the Owner's Representative fail to make such decision within a reasonable time, an appeal to arbitration may be taken as if his decision had been rendered against the party appealing. 15. SUPERINTENDENCE AND INSPECTION It is agreed by the Contractor that the Owner's Representative shall be and is hereby authorized to appoint from time to time such subordinate engineers, supervisors, or inspectors as the said Owner's Representative may deem proper to inspect the materials furnished and the work done under this Agreement, and to see that said material is furnished and said work is done in accordance with the specifications therefore. The Contractor shall furnish all reasonable aid and assistance required by the subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors for the proper inspection and examination of the work. The Contractor shall regard and obey the directions and instructions of any subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors so appointed, when such directions and instructions are consistent with the obligations of this Agreement and accompanying plans and specifications provided, however, should the Contractor object to any orders by any subordinate engineer, supervisor or inspector, the Contractor may within six (6) days make written appeal to the Owner's Representative for his decision. 16. CONTRACTOR'S DUTY AND SUPERINTENDENCE The Contractor shall give personal attention to the faithful prosecution and comioletion of this contract and shalt keep on the work, during its progress, a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory to Owner's Representative. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in his absence and all directions given to him shall be binding as if given to the Contractor. Adequate supervision by competent and reasonable representatives of the Contractor is essential to the proper performance of the work and lack of such supervision shall be grounds for suspending operations of the Contractor. The work, from its commencement to completion, shall be under the exclusive charge and control of the Contractor and all risk in connection therewith shall be borne by the Contractor. The Owner or owner's Representatives will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of the Contractor, or any subcontractors, or any of his agents or employees, or any other persons performing any of the work. a• 17. `CONTRACTOR'S UNDERSTANDING It is understood and agreed that the Contractor has, by careful examination, satisfied himself as to the nature and Location of the work, the confirmation of the ground, the character, quality and quantity of materials to be encountered, the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the work, and the general and local conditions,' and all other matters which in any way effect the work under this contract. No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, agent, or employee of the Owner, either before or after the execution of this contract, shall effect or modify any of the terns or obligations herein contained. 18. CHARACTER OF WORKMEN The Contractor agrees to employ only orderly and competent men, skillful in the performance in the type of work _ required under this contract, to do the work; and agrees that whenever the Owner's Representative shall inform him in writing that any man or men on the work, are, in his opinion, incompetent, unfaithful, or disorderly, such man or men shall be discharged from the work and shall not again be employed on the work without the Owner's Representative's written consent. 19. CONSTRUCTION PLANT The Contractor shall provide all labor, tools, equipment, machinery and materials necessary in the prosecution and completion of this contract where it is not otherwise specifically provided that Owner shall furnish same, and it is also understood that Owner shall not be held responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, or protection of any materials, tools, equipment or machinery or any part of the work until it is finally completed and accepted. The building of structures for the housing of men or equipment will be permitted only at such places as the Owner's Representative shall direct, and the sanitary conditions of the grounds in or about such structure shall at all times be maintained in a manner satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. 20. SANITATION Necessary sanitary conveniences for the use of laborers on the work site, properly secluded from public observation, shall be constructed and maintained by the Contractor in such manner and at such points as shall be approved by the Owner's Representative and their use shall be strictly enforced. 21. OBSERVATION AND TESTING The Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right at all reasonable times to observe and test the work. Contractor shall make necessary arrangements and provide proper facilities and access for such observation and testing at any location wherever work is in preparation or progress. rContractor shall ascertain the scope of any observation which may be contemplated by Owner or Owner's Representative and shall give ample notice as to the time each part of the work will be ready for such observation. Owner or Owner's Representative may reject any work found to be defective or not in accordance with the contract documents, regardless of the stage of its completion or the time or place of discovery of such errors and regardless of whether Owner's Observer has previously accepted the — work through oversight or otherwise. If any work should be covered without approval or consent of the Owner, it must, if requested by Owner or Owner's Representative, be uncovered for examination at Contractor's expense. In the event that any part of the work is being fabricated or manufactured at a location where it is not convenient for _ Owner or Owner's Representative to make observations of such work or require testing of said work, then in such event Owner or Owner's Representative may require Contractor to furnish Owner or Owner's Representative certificates of inspection, testing or approval made by persons competent to perform such tasks at the location where that part of the work is being manufactured or fabricated. All such tests will be in accordance with the methods prescribed by the American Society for Testing and Materials or such other applicable organization as may be required by law or the contract documents. a ,....s.i. m- 40"i1 3 r if any work which is'required'to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered up without written approval or consent r of the Owner or Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by the Owner or Owner's Representative, be uncovered for observation and testing at the Contractor's expense. The cost of all such inspections, tests and approvals shall be borne by the Contractor unless otherwise provided herein. Any work which fails to meet the requirements of any such tests, inspections or approval, and any work which meets the requirements of any such tests or approval but does not meet,the requirements of the contractdocuments shall be considered defective. Such defective work shall be corrected at the Contractor's expense. Neither observations by the owner or Owner's Representative, nor inspections, tests, or approvals made by Owner, owner's Representative, or other persons authorized under this agreement to make such inspections, tests, or approvals shall relieve the Contractor from his obligation to perform the work in accordance with the requirements of the contract documents. 22 DEFECTS AND THEIR 'REMEDIES It is further agreed that if the work or any part thereof, or any material brought on the site of the work for use In the work or selected for the same, shall be deemed by the Owner or Owners' Representative as unsuitable or not in conformity with plans, specification and contract documents, the Contractor shall, after receipt of written notice r., thereof from the owner0s Representative, forthwith remove such material and rebuild or otherwise remedy such work so that it shall be in full accordance with this contract. It is further agreed that any remedial action contemplated as hereinabove'set forth shall be at Contractor's expense. r 23. CHANGES AND ALTERATIONS The Contractor' further agrees that the Owner may make such changes and alterations as the owner may see fit, in the Line, grade, form dimensions, plans or or materials for the work herein contemplated, or any part thereof, either before or after the beginning of the construction, without affecting the validity of this contract and the accompanying bond. If such changes or alterations diminish the quantity of the work to be done, they shall not constitute the basis for a claim for damages, or anticipated profits on the work that may be dispensed with. If they inCrease the amount of work,` and the increased work can fairly be classified under the specifications, such increase shall be paid !� according to the quantity actually done and at the unit price established for such work under this contract; otherwise such additional' work shall be,pafd for as provided under Extra York. In case the owner shall make such changes or alterations as shall make useless any work already done or material already furnished or used in said r work, then the Owner shall recompense the Contractor for any material or labor so used, and for any actual .loss occasioned by such change, due to actual expenses incurred in preparation for the work as originally planned. 24. EXTRA WORK Oft The, term "extra work" as used in this contract shall be understood to mean and include all work that may be required by the Owner or Owner's Representative to be done by the contractor to accomplish any change, alteration or addition P- to the work as shown on the plans and specifications or contract documents and not covered by Contractor's proposal, except as provided under Changes and Alterations herein. r,, it is agreed that the Contractor shall perform all extra work under the direction of the Owner's Representative when presented.'with a written work order signed by the Owner's Representative; subject, however, to the right of the Contractor to require written confirmation of such extra work order by the Owner. It is also agreed that the compensation to be paid to the Contractor for performing said extra work shall be determined by the following methods: I i Method (A) - By agreed unit prices; or r., Method (B) - By agreed lump sum; or Method (C) - If neither Method (A) or Method (B) be agreed upon before the extra work is commenced, then the Contractor shall be paid the actual field cost of the work, plus fifteen (15X) per cent. In the event said extra work be performed and paid for under Method (C),.then the provisions of this paragraph shall apply and the "actual field cost" is hereby defined to include the cost of all workmen, such as foremen, timekeepers, mechanics and laborers, materials, supplies, teams, trucks, rentals on machinery and equipment, for the time actually employed or used on such extra work, plus actual transportation charges necessarily incurred, together with all expenses incurred directly on account of such extra work, including Social Security, Old Age Benefits, Maintenance Bonds, Public Liability and Property Damage and Workmen's Compensation and all other insurances as may i be required by law or ordinances or directed by the Owner or Owner's Representative, or by them agreed to. Owner's Representative may direct the form in which accounts of the actual field cost shall be kept and records of these accounts shaft be made available to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative may also specify in writing, before the work'commences, the method of doing the work and the type and kind of machinery and equipment to be used; otherwise, these matters shall be determined by the Contractor. Unless otherwise agreed upon, the prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be determined by using 100%, unless otherwise specified, of the latest _ Schedule of Equipment and Ownership Expenses adopted by the Associated General Contractors of America. Where practical, the terms and prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be incorporated in the written extra work order. The fifteen percent (15%) of the actual field cost to be paid to Contractor shall cover and compensate him for his profit, overhead, general superintendence and field office expense, and all other elements of cost and expense not embraced within the actual field cost as herein defined, save that where the Contractor's Camp or Field Office must be maintained primarily on account of such Extra Work, then the cost to maintain and operate the same shall be included in the "actual field cost." No claim for extra work of any kind will be allowed unless ordered in writing by Owner's Representative. In case any orders or instructions appear to the Contractor to involve extra work for which he should receive compensation or an adjustment in the construction time, he shall make written request to the Owner's Representative for a written order authorizing such extra work. Should a difference of opinion arise as to what does or does not constitute extra work or as to the payment therefore, and the Owner's Representative insists upon its performance, the Contractor shall proceed with the work after making written request for written order and shall keep adequate and. accurate account of the actual field cost thereof, as provided under Method (C). The Contractor will thereby preserve the right to submit the matter of payment to arbitration as herein below provided. 25. DISCREPANCIES AND OMISSIONS It is further agreed that it is the intent of this contract that all work described in the proposal, the specifications, plans and other contract documents, is to be done for the prices quoted by the Contractor and that —' such price shall include all appurtenances necessary to complete the work in accordance with the intent of these contract documents as interpreted by Owner's Representative. If the Contractor finds any discrepancies or omissions in these plans, specifications, or contract documents, he should notify the Owners' Representative and obtain a clarification before the bids are received, and if no such request is received by the Owner's Representative prior to the opening of bids, then it shall be considered that the Contractor fully understands the work to be included and has provided sufficient suns in his proposal to complete the work in accordance with these plans and specifications. It is further understood that any request for clarification must be submitted no later than five days prior to the opening of bids. 26. RIGHT OF OWNER TO MODIFY METHODS AND EQUIPMENT If at any time the methods or equipment used by the Contractor are found to be inadequate to secure the quality of work with the rate"of progress required under this contract, the Owner or Owner's Representative may order the Contractor in writing to increase their safety or improve their character and efficiency and the Contractor shall comply with such order. If, at any time, the working force of the Contractor is inadequate for securing the progress herein specified, the Contractor shall, if so ordered in writing, increase his force or equipment, or both, to such an extent as to give reasonable assurance of compliance with the schedule of progress. r-• 27. PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENT TO EMPLOYEES AND THE PUBLIC _?4 The Contractor shall take out and procure a policy or policies of Workmen's Compensation Insurance with an insurance company licensed to transact business in the State of Texas, which policy shall comply with the Workmen's Compensation laws of the State of Texas. The Contractor shall at all times exercise reasonable precaution for the safety of employees and others on or near the work, and shall comply with all applicable provisions of federal, state and municipal laws and building and construction codes. All machinery and equipment and other physical hazards shall be guarded in accordance with the "Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction" of Associated General Contractors of America, except where incompatible with federal, state or municipal laws or regulations. The Contractor, his sureties and insurance carriers shall defend, indemnify and save harmless the Owner and all of its officers, agents and employees from all suits, actions, or claims of any character whatsoever, brought for or on account of any injuries or damages received or sustained by any person or persons or property, on account of any negligent act or fault of the Contractor or any subcontractor, their agents or employees, in the execution and supervision of said contract, and the project which is the subject matter of this contract, on account of the failure of Contractor or any subcontractor to provide necessary barricades, warning lights, or signs and will be required to pay any judgment with costs which may be obtained against the Owner or any of its officers, agents, or employees including attorney's fees. The safety precautions taken shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor, in his sole discretion as an Independent Contractor; inclusion of this paragraph in the Agreement, as well as any notice which may be given by the owners or the Owner's Representative concerning omissions under this paragraph as the work progresses, are intended as reminders to the Contractor of his duty and shall not be construed a3 any assumption of duty to supervise safety precautions by either the Contractor or any of his subcontractors. 28. CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE The Contractor shall procure and carry at his sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance protection as hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A. Comprehensive General liability Insurance The contractor shall have Comprehensive General liability Insurance with limits of $500.000 Combined Single Limit in the aggregate and per occurrence to include: Premises and Operations Explosion & Collapse Hazard Underground Damage Hazard Products & Completed Operations Hazard Contractual Liability Independent Contractors Coverage Personal Injury (with exclusion "c" waived) The City is to be named as an additional insured on this policy for this specific job, and copy of the endorsement doing so is to be attached to the Certificate of Insurance. B. Owner's Protective or Contingent Public Liability Insurance and Property Damage Liability Insurance. The Contractor shall obtain an Owner's Protective or Contingent Public Liability Insurance policy naming the City of Lubbock as insured and the amount of such policy shall be as follows: For bodily injuries, including accidental death and or property damage, $500.000 Combined Single Limit: C. Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance The Contractor shall have Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance with limits of not less than; Bodily Injury/Property Damage, $500,000 Combined Single Limit, to include all owned and nonowned cars including: Employers Nonownership Liability Hired and Nonowned Vehicles. The City is to be named as an additional insured on this policy for this specific job and copy of the endorsement doing so is to be attached to the Certificate of Insurance. — D. Builder's Risk Insurance The Contractor shall obtain a Builder's Risk policy in the amount of (100% of potential loss) naming the City of Lubbock as insured. E. Excess or Umbrella Liability Insurance The Contractor shall have Excess or Umbrella Liability Insurance in the amount of $500,000 with coverage to correspond with Comprehensive General Liability and Comprehensive Automobile Liability coverages. The City is to be named as an additional insured on this policy for this specific job and copy of the endorsement doing so is to be attached to the Certificate of Insurance. F. Worker's Compensation and Employers Liability Insurance As required by State statute covering all employees whether employed by the Contractor or any Subcontractor - on the job with Employers Liability of at least $500,000 G. Proof of Coverage Before work on this contract is commenced, each Contractor and subcontractor shall submit to the Owner for approval five .Certificates of Insurance covering each insurance policy carried and offered as evidence of compliance with the above insurance requirements, signed by an authorized representative of the insurance company setting forth: (1) The name and address of the insured. Q) The location of the operations to which the insurance applies. (3) The name of the policy and type or types of insurance in force thereunder on the date borne by such certificate. (4) The expiration date of the policy and the limit or limits of liability thereunder on the date borne by such certificate. (5) . A provision that the policy may be canceled only by mailing written notice to the named insured at the address shown in the bid specifications. (6) A provision that written notice shall be given to the City ten days prior to any change in or cancellation of the policies shown on the certificate. (7) The certificate or certificates shall be on the form (or identical copies thereof) contained in the job specifications. No substitute of nor amendment thereto will be acceptable. (8) If policy limits are paid, new policy must be secured for new coverage to complete project. 29. DISABLED EMPLOYEES Contractors having more than 15 employees agree to comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, and agree not to discriminate against a qualified individual with a disability because of the disability of such individual in regard to job application procedures, the hiring, advancement, or discharge of employees, employee compensation, job training, and other terms, conditions, and priviliges of employment. 30. PROTECTION AGAINST CLAIMS OF SUBCONTRACTORS LABORERS MATERIALMEN AND FURNISHERS OF MACHINERY EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES The Contractor agrees that he will indemnify and save the Owner harmless from all claims growing out of any demands of subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, materialmen and furnishers of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, all suppliers, including commissary, incurred in the furtherance of the performance of this contract. When Owner so desires, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged or waived. If during the progress of the work, Contractor shall allow any indebtedness to accrue for work furnished by any of those designated in the preceding paragraph and shall fail to pay and discharge any such indebtedness within five (5) days after demand is made, then owner may, during the period for which such indebtedness shall remain unpaid, withhold from the unpaid portion of this contract, a sum equal to the amount of such unpaid indebtedness or may apply the sum so withheld to discharge any such indebtedness. Any and all communications between any party under this paragraph must be in writing. 31. PROTECTION AGAINST ROYALTIES OR PATENT INVENTION The contractor shall � pay all royalties and license fees, and .shall provide for the use of any design, device, material or process covered by letters patent or copyright by suitable legal agreement with the Patentee or Owner thereof. The Contractor shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent or copyrights and shall r~ indemnify and save the Owner harmless from any loss on account thereof, except that Owner shall defend all such suits and claims and shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular design, device, material or process or the product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is specified or required in these contract documents by Owner; provided, however, if choice of alternate design, device, material or process is allowed to the Contractor, then Contractor shall indemnify and save owner harmless from any loss on account thereof. If the material or process specified or required by Owner is an infringement, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless he promptly gives written notice to the Owner of such infringement. 32. LAWS AND ORDINANCES The Contractor shall at all times observe and comply with all federal, state and local laws, ordinances and regulations, which in any manner effect the contract or the work, and shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner against any claims arising from the violation of any such laws, ordinances, and regulations, whether by the Contractor or his employees. If the Contractor observes that the plans and specifications are at variance therewith, he shall promptly notify the Owners' Representative in writing and any necessary changes shall be adjusted as provided in the contract for changes in the work. If the Contractor performs any work knowing it to be contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, and without such notice to the Owner's Representative, he shall bear all costs arising therefrom. The owner is a municipal corporation of the State of Texas and the law from which it derives its powers, insofar as the same regulates the objects for which, or the manner in which, or the conditions under which the Owner may enter into contracts, shall be controlling, and shall be considered as part of this contract to the same effect as though embodied herein. 33. ASSIGNMENT AND SUBLETTING The Contractor further agrees that he will retain personal control and will give his personal attention to the fulfillment of this contract. The Contractor further agrees that subletting of any portion or feature of the work, or materials required in the performance of this contract, shall not relieve the Contractor from his full obligations to the owner, as provided by this contractual agreement. 34. TIME FOR COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES It is hereby understood and mutually agreed by and between the Contractor and the Owner, that the date of beginning and time for completion as specified in the contract of work to be done hereunder are essential conditions of this contract; and it is further mutually understood and agreed that the work embraced in this contract shall be commenced on a date to be specified in the Notice to Proceed. If the Contractor should neglect, fail, or refuse to complete the work within the time herein specified, or any proper extension thereof granted by the Owner, then the Contractor does hereby agree as part of the consideration for the awarding of this contract, the Owner may withhold permanently from Contractor's total compensation, the sum of $100.00 Cone Hundred) PER DAY, not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages for the breach of the contract as herein set forth for each and every calendar day that the Contractor shall be in default after the time stipulated for completing the work. It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between Contractor and the Amer, that the time for the completion of ` the work described herein is reasonable time for the completion of the same, taking into consideration the average climatic change and conditions and usual industrial conditions prevailing in this locality. The amount is fixed and agreed upon by and between the Contractor and the owner because of the impracticability and extreme difficulty in fixing and ascertaining actual damages the Owner would in such event sustain, and the amount is agreed to be damages the Owner would sustain and shall be retained by the Owner from current periodical estimates for payments or from final payment. It is further agreed and understood between the Contractor and Owner that time is of the essence of this contract. i 35. TIME AND ORDER OF COMPLETION It is the meaning and intent of this contract, unless otherwise herein specifically provided, that the Contractor shall be allowed to prosecute his work at such time and sessions, in such order of precedence, and in such manner as shall be most conductive to economy of construction; provided, however, that the order and time of prosecution shall be such that the work shall be substantially completed as a whole and in part, in accordance with this contract, the -� plans and specifications, and within the time of completion designated in the proposals; provided, also, that when the owner is having other work done, either by contract or by his own force, the Ownerss Representative may direct the time and manner of constructing work done under this contract so that conflicts will be avoided and the construction of the various works being done for the Owner shall be harmonized. The Contractor shall submit, at such times as may reasonably be requested by the Ownerts Representative, schedules which shall show the order in which the Contractor proposes to carry on the work, with dates at which the Contractor will start the several parts of the work and estimated dates of completion of the several parts. 36. EXTENSION OF TIME r The Contractor agrees that he has submitted his proposal in full recognition of the ,time required for the completion of this project, taking into consideration the average climatic range and industrial conditions prevailing in this Locality, and has considered the liquidated damage provisions of paragraph 33 hereinabove set forth and that he r shall not be entitled to, nor will he request, an extension of time on this contract, except when his work has been delayed by an act or neglect of the Owner, Owner's Representative, employees of the Owner or other contractors employed by the owner, or by changes ordered in the work, or by strike, walkouts, acts of God or the public enemy, r fire or flood. The Contractor may apply in writing for an extension of time, suhmitting therewith all written justification as may be required by Owner's Representative for such an extension as requested by Contractor. The Owner's Representative within ten (10) days after receipt of a written request for an extension of time by the OM Contractor supported by all requested documentation shall then submit such written request to the City Council of the City of Lubbock for their consideration. Should the Contractor disagree with the action of City Council on granting an extension of time, such disagreement shall be settled by arbitration as hereinafter provided. 37. HINDRANCE AND DELAYS In executing the contract agreement, the Contractor agrees that in undertaking to complete the work within the time herein fixed, he has taken into consideration and made allowances for sit hindrances and delays incident to such work, whether growing out of delays in securing material or workmen or otherwise. No charge shall be made by the Contractor for hindrance or delays from any cause during the progress of any part of the work embraced in this contract except where the work is stopped by order of the Owner or Owner's Representative for the Owner's convenience, in which event, such expense as in the judgment of the Owner's Representative that is caused by such stoppage shall be paid by Owner to Contractor. 38. QUANTITIES AND MEASUREMENTS No extra or customary measurements of any kind will be allowed, but the actual measured or computed length, area, solid contents, number and weight only shall be considered, unless otherwise specifically provided.In the event this contract is let on a unit price basis, then Owner and Contractor agree that this contract, including the specifications, plans and other contract documents are intended to show clearly sit work to be done: and material to be furnished hereunder. Where the estimated quantities are shown for the various classes of work to be done and material to be furnished under this contract, they are approximate and are to be: used only as a basis for estimating the probable cost of the work and for comparing their proposals offered for the work. It is understood and agreed that the actual amount of work to be done and the materials to be furnished under this contract may differ somewhat from these estimates, and that where the basis for payment under this contract is the unit price method, payment shall be for the actual amount of work done and materials furnished on the project. 39. PROTECTION OF ADJOINING PROPERTY The Contractor shall take proper means to protect the adjacent or adjoining property or properties in any way encountered, which may be injured or seriously affected by any process of construction to be undertaken under this agreement, from any damage or injury by reason of said process of construction; and he shall be liable for any and sit claims for such damage on account of his failure to fully protect all adjacent property. The Contractor agrees to indemnify, save and hold harmless the Owner against any claim or claims for damages due to any injury to any adjacent or adjoining property, arising or growing out of the performance of this contract, but such indemnity shall not apply to any claim of any kind arising out of the existence or character of the work. 40. PRICE FOR WORK In consideration of the furnishing of all necessary labor, equipment and material and the completion of all work by the Contractor, and on the delivery of all materials embraced in this contract in full conformity with the ^. specifications and stipulations herein contained, the owner agrees to pay the Contractor the price set forth in the proposal attached hereto, which has been made a part of this contract, and the Contractor hereby agrees to receive such price in full for furnishing sit materials and all Labor required for the aforesaid work, also, for sit expenses incurred by him and for well and truly performing the same and the whole thereof in the manner and according to this agreement, the attached specifications, plans, contract documents and requirements of Owner's Representative. 41. PAYMENTS No payments made or certificates given shall be considered as conclusive evidence of the performance of the contract, either wholly or in part, nor shall any certificate or payment be considered as acceptance of defective work. Contractor shall at any time requested during the progress of the work furnish the Owner or Owner's Representative with a verifying certificate showing the Contractor's total outstanding indebtedness in connection _ with the work. Before final payment is made, Contractor shall satisfy Owner, by affidavit or otherwise, that there are no outstanding liens against Owner's premises by reason of any work under the contract. Acceptance by Contractor of final payment of the contract price shall constitute a waiver of all claims against Owner which have not theretofore been timely filed as provided in this contract. _ 42. PARTIAL PAYMENTS on or before the tenth day of each month, the Contractor shall submit to Owner's Representative an application for partial payment. Owner's Representative shall review said application for partial payment and the progress of the work made by the Contractor and if found to be in order shall prepare a certificate for partial payment showing as completely as practical the total value of the work done by the Contractor up to and including the last day of the preceding month; said statement shall also include the value of all sound materials delivered on site of the work that are to be fabricated into the work. The Owner shall then pay the Contractor on or before the fifteenth day of the current month the total amount of the Owner's Representative's Certificate of Partial Payment, less 5% of the amount thereof, which 5% shall be retained until final payment, and further, less all previous payments and all further sums that may be retained by Owner under the terms of this agreement. It, is understood, however, that in case the whole work be near to completion, and this fact is certified to by Owner's Representative and some unexpected and some unusual delay occurs due to no - fault or negligence on the part of the Contractor, the Owner may upon written recommendation of Owner's Representative pay a reasonable and equitable portion of the retained percentage due Contractor. 43. FINAL COMPLETION AND ACCEPTANCE within thirty-one (31) days after the Contractor has given the Owner's Representative written notice that the work has been completed or substantially completed, the Owner's Representative and the owner shall inspect the work and within said time, if the work be found to be completed or substantially completed in accordance with the contract documents, the Owner's Representative shall issue to the Owner and Contractor his certificate of completion, and thereupon it shall be the duty of the Owner within thirty-one (31) days to issue a certificate of acceptance of the work to the Contractor. V• 44. FINAL PAYMENT Upon the issuance of the certificate of completion, the Owner's Representative shall proceed to slake final measurement and prepare a final statement of the value of all work performed and materials furnished tinder the terms of the agreement, and shall certify same to the Owner, who shall pay to the Contractor on or before the 31st day after the date of certificate of completion, the balance due Contractor -under the terms of this agreement, provided he has fully performed his contractual obligations under the terms of this contract; and said payment shall became due in any event upon said performance by the Contractor. Neither the certificate of acceptance nor the final payment, nor any provisions in the contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of the obligation for fulfillment of any warranty which may be required in the special conditions (if any) of this contract or required in the specifications made a part of this contract. 45. CORRECTION OF WORK BEFORE FINAL PAYMENT FOR WORK Contractor shall promptly remove from Owners' premises all materials condemned by the Owner's Representative on account of failure to conform to the contract, whether actually incorporated in the work or not, and Contractor shall at his own expense promptly replace such condemned materials with other materials conforming to the requirements of the contract. Contractor shall also bear the expense of restoring all work of other contractors damaged by any such removal or replacement. If Contractor does not remove and replace any such condemned work within a reasonable time after a written notice by the Owner or the Owner's Representative, Owner may remove and replace it at Contractor's expense. 46. CORRECTION OF WORK AFTER FINAL PAYMENT 47. 48 r Neither the final payment nor certificate nor any provision in this contract shall relieve the Contractor of responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship, and he shall remedy any defects due thereto and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom, which shall appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of substantial completion. The Owner or the Owner's Representative shall give notice of observed defects with reasonable promptness. PAYMENT WITHHELD The Owner may, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, withhold or nullify the whole or part of any certificate to such extent as may be necessary to protect himself from loss on account of: (a) Defective work not remedied. (b) Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating possible filing of claim•:. (c) Failure of the Contractor to make payments promptly to subcontractors or for materials or labor. (d) Damage to another contractor. When the above grounds are removed, or the Contractor provides a surety bond satisfactory to the Owner, which will protect the Owner in the amount withheld, payment shall be made for amounts withheld because of them. TIME OF FILING CLAIMS It is further agreed by both parties hereto that all questions of dispute or adjustment presented by the Contractor shall be in writing and filed with the Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) days after the Owner's Representative has given any directions, order or instruction to which the Contractor desires to take exception. The owners' Representative shall reply to such written exceptions by the Contractor and render his final decision in writing. In case the Contractor should appeal from the decision of the Owner's Representative, any demand for arbitration shall be filed with the Owner's Representative and the Owner in writing within ten (10) days after the date of delivery to Contractor of the final decision of the Owner's Representative. It is further agreed that final acceptance of the work by the Owner and the acceptance by the Contractor of the final payment shall be a bar to any claim by either party, except where noted otherwise in the contract documents. 49. ARBITRATION All questions of dispute under this agreement shall be submitted to arbitration at the request of either party to the dispute. The parties may agree upon one arbitrator, otherwise, there shall be three; one named in writing by each party and the third chosen by the two arbiters selected; or if the arbiters fail to select a third within ten (10) days, he shalt be chosen by the District Judge, 72nd Judicial District of Texas. Each arbiter shall be a resident of the City of Lubbock. Should the party demanding arbitration fail to name an arbiter within ten (10) days of the demand, his right to arbitrate shall lapse, and the decision of the Owner's Representative shall be final and binding on him. Should the other party fail to choose an arbiter within ten (10) days, the Owner's Representative shall appoint such arbiter. Should either party refuse or neglect to supply the arbiters with any papers or information demanded in writing, the arbiters are empowered by both parties to take Ex Parte Proceedings. The arbiters shall act with promptness. The decision of any two shall be binding on both parties to the contract, unless either or both parties shall appeal within ten (10) days from date of the award by the arbiters, and it is hereby agreed that each party shall have the right of appeal and all proceedings shall be according to and governed by Arbitration Statutes of Texas, being Article 224, et seq., Vernon's Annotated Civil Statutes. THE DECISION OF THE ARBITERS UPON ANY QUESTION SUBMITTED TO ARBITRATION UNDER THIS CONTRACT SHALL BE A CONDITION PRECEDENT TO ANY RIGHT OF LEGAL ACTION. The arbiters, if they deem the case demands it, are authorized to award the party whose contention is sustained, such sums as they deem proper for the time, expense and trouble incident to the appeal, and if the appeal was taken without reasonable cause, they may award damages for any delay occasioned thereby. The arbiters shalt fix their own compensation, unless otherwise provided by agreement, and shall assess the costs and charges of the arbitration upon either or both parties. The award of the arbiters must be made in writing and shall not be open to objection on account of the form of proceedings or award. 50. ABANDONMENT BY CONTRACTOR In case the Contractor should abandon and fail or refuse to resume work within ten (10) days after written notification from the Owner or the Owner's Representative, or if the Contractor fails to comply with the orders of the Owner's Representative, when such orders are consistent with this contract, this Agreement, or the Specifications hereto attached, then the Surety on the bond shall be notified in writing and directed to complete the work and a copy of said notice shall be delivered to the Contractor. After receiving said notice of abandonment, the Contractor shall not remove from the work any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies then on the job, but the same, together with any materials and equipment under the contract for work, may be held for use on the work by the owner or the Surety of the Contractor, or another contractor, in completion of the work; and the Contractor shall not receive any rental or credit therefore (except when used in connection with Extra .Work, where credit shall be allowed as provided for under paragraph 24 of this contract); it being understood that the use of such equipment and materials will ultimately reduce the cost to complete the work and be reflected in the final settlement. In the Surety should fail to commence compliance with the notice for completion hereinbefore provided for within ten (10) days after service of such notice, then the Owner may provide for completion of the work in either of the following elective manners: (a) The Owner may employ such force of men and use of machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies as said Owner may deem necessary to complete the work and charge the expense of such labor, machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies to said Contractor, and the expense so charged shall be deducted and paid by the Owner out of such moneys as may be due, or that may thereafter at any time become due to the Contractor under and by virtue of this Agreement. in case such expense is less than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by the Contractor, then said Contractor shall receive the difference. In case such expense is greater than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by said Contractor, then the Contractor and/or his Surety shall pay the amount of such excess to the owner; or OM (b) The Owner, under sealed bids, after notice published as required by lain, at least twice in a newspaper r having a general circulation in the County of location of the work, may let the contract for the completion of the work under substantially the same terms and conditions which are provided in this contract. In case of any increase in cost to the Owner under the new contract as compared to what would have been the cost r under this contract, such increase shall be charged to the Contractor and the Surety shall be and remain bound therefore. However, should the cost to complete any such new contract prove to be less than that which would have been the cost to complete the work under this contract, the Contractor or his Surety shall be credited therewith. When the work shall have been substantially completed, the Contractor and his Surety shall be so notified and certificates of completion and acceptance, as provided in paragraph 42 hereinabove set forth, shell be issued. A ,., complete itemized statement of the contract accounts, certified to by Owner's Representative as being correct shall then be prepared and delivered to Contractor and his Surety, whereon the Contractor or his Surety, or the Owner as the case may be, shall pay the balance due as reflected by said statement within 30 days after the date of certificate of completion. oft In the event the statement of accounts shows that the cost to complete the work is less than that which would have been the cost to the Owner had the work been completed by the Contractor under the terms of this contract, or when the Contractor and/or his Surety shall pay the balance shown to be due by them to the Owner, then all machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies left on the site of the work shall be turned over to the Contractor and/or his Surety. Should the cost to complete the work exceed the contract price, and the Contractor and/or his Surety fail to pay the amount due the owner within the time designated hereinabove, and there remains any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies on the site of the work, notice thereof, together with an itemized list of such equipment and materials shall be mailed to the Contractor and his Surety at the respective addresses designated in this contract; provided, however, that actual written notice given in any manner will satisfy this condition. After mailing, or other giving of such notice, such property shall be held at the risk of the Contractor and his Surety subject only to the duty of the Owner to exercise ordinary care to protest such property. After fifteen (15) days from the date of said notice the Owner may sell such machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies and apply the net sum derived from such sale to the credit of the Contractor and his Surety. Such sale may be made at either public or private sale, with or without notice, as the Owner may elect. The Owner shall release any machinery, equipment, tools, materials, or supplies which remain on the *jobsite and belong to persons other than the Contractor or his Surety, to their proper owners. 51. ABANDONMENT BY OWNER In case the Owner shall fail to comply with the terms of this contract, and should fail or refuse to comply with said terms within ten (10) days after written notification by the Contractor, then the Contractor may suspend or wholly abandon the work, and may remove therefrom all machinery, tools, and equipment, and all materials on the Vonground that have not been included in payments to the Contractor and have not bo=en incorporated into the work. Thereupon, the Owner's Representative shall make an estimate of the total amount earned by the Contractor, which estimate shall include the value of all work actually completed by said Contractor at the prices stated in the the attached proposal, the value of all partially completed work at a fair and equitable price, and the amount of all Extra work performed at the prices agreed upon, or provided for by the terms of this contract, and a reasonable sum t to cover the cost of any provisions made by the Contractor to carry the whole work to completion, and which cannot be utilized. The OwnerNs Representative shall then make a final statement of the balance due the Contractor by deducting from the, above estimate all previous payments by the owner and all other sums that may be retained by the i Owner under the terms of this Agreement, and shall certify same to the Owner who shall pay to the Contractor on or ° before thirty (30) days after the date of the notification by the Contractor the balance shown by said final statement as due the Contractor, under the terms of this Agreement. 52. BONDS The successful bidder shall be required to furnish a performance bond and payment bond in accordance with Article 5160, Vernon's Annotated Civil Statutes in the amount of 100% of the total contract price, in the event said i contract price exceeds $25,000.00. If the contract price does not exceed $25,000.00, the statutory bonds will not be required. All bonds, if required, shall be submitted on forms supplied by the Owner, and executed by an approved Surety Company authorized to do business in the State of Texas. And it is further agreed that this contract shall not be in effect until such bonds are so furnished. _ 53. SPECIAL CONDITIONS In the event special conditions are contained herein as part of the contract documents and said special conditions conflict with any of the general conditions contained in this contract, then in such event the special conditions shall control. 54. LOSSES FROM NATURAL CAUSES Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss or damage to the Contractor arising out of the nature of the work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance and the prosecution of the same, or from unusual obstructions or difficulties which may be encountered in the prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at his own cost and expense. 55. INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR Contractor is, and shall remain, an independent contractor with full, complete and exclusive power and authority to direct, supervise, and control his own employees and to determine the method of .the performance of the work covered hereby. The fact that the Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right to observe Contractor's work during his performance and to carry out the other prerogatives which are expressly reserved to and vested in the Owner or Owner's Representative hereunder, is not intended to and shall not at any time change or effect the status of the Contractor as an independent contractor with respect to either the Owner or Owner's Representative or to the Contractor's own employees or to any other person, firm, or corporation. 56. CLEANING UP The Contractor shall at all times keep the premises free from accumulation of debris caused by the work, and at the completion of the work he shall remove ell such debris and also his tools, scaffolding, and surplus materials and shall leave the work room clean or its equivalent. The work shall be left in good order and condition. In case of dispute Owner may remove the debris and charge the cost to the Contractor. CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS .- r MINIMUM WAGE RATES The following wage rates have been established pursuant to authority of Article 5159a, Revised Civil Statutes of the state of Texas. Said statue includes the following provision which is made a part of this contract. "The Contractor shall forfeit as a penalty to the science Spectrum, Inc., $10.00 for each laborer, workman, or mechanic employed for each calendar day, or portion thereof, such laborer, workman, or mechanic is paid less than the said stipulated rates r for any work done under this contract by him, or by any sub- contractor under him." POSTING WAGE RAGES Minimum Wage Rates shall be posted on job site in a conspicuous place so that all workmen may be able to inspect. EMPLOYEE CLAIMS Any employee who alleges that he has not been paid the minimum wage rate may file a written claim with the owner. PAYMENT OF EMPLOYEES AND PAYROLL RECORDS The Contractor and each sub- contractor shall pay each of his employees engaged "in work on the project under this contract in full (less mandatory legal deductions) in cash or by check easily cashable without discount, not less often than once each week. The Contractor and each sub -contractor engaged at the site of the work shall prepare and maintain weekly payroll records certified to be correct. Payroll records shall contain the name, social security number, classification, rate per hour, hours worked each day, including regular hours and. overtime hours. PAYROLL RECORDS . Payroll records shall be made available upon request for inspection by the Architect or by a designated representative of the owner to ascertain compliance with the minimum wage scale provisions of this contract. Nothing herein contained, however, shall be construed to prohibit the payment to any laborer, workman, or mechanic employed on the work of more than the prevailing rate of wages. Attention is called to the fact that there must be paid on this project not less than the general prevailing rates which have been established by the owner as follows: ra P"' LIA 01.500-1 Exhibit A Building Construction Trades Prevailing Rates Craft Hourly Rate Acoustical Ceiling Installer $11.60 Air Conditioner Installer 8.35 Air Conditioner Installer Helper 5.50 Bricklayer- 10.50 Bricklayer Helper 5.00 Carpenter 11.00 Carpenter Helper 5.50 Cement Finisher 7.35 Drywall Hanger 8.70 Electrician 10.50 Electrician Helper 5.25 Equipment Operator, Heavy 8.00 Equipment Operator, Light 5.70 Floor Installer 8.00 Glazier 7.50 Insulator, Piping/Boiler 9.50 Insulator Helper 5.00 Iron Worker 7.30 Laborer, General 4.75 Mortar Mixer 5.60 Painter 8.75 Plumber 9.25 Plumber Helper 6.00 Roofer 7.65 Roofer Helper 4.75 Sheet Metal Worker 8.75 Sheet Metal Worker Helper 5.50 Welder, Certified 8.00 r LIA 00.500-2 P• SPECIAL CONDITIONS (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) SPECIAL CONDITIONS .� PART I AIRPORT OPERATIONS - SktlRIJY A.. General Airport security is a vital part of the Contractor's responsibilities during the course of this project.. Airport security, nationwide, has come under close scrutiny in the last few _._ years. The following security guidelines'tand the rules and regulations of the Lubbock International Airport Police Department (LIAPD)...•and the'.Federal Aviation Adkinistration (FAA)., shall be r, followed by the -Contractor and the.Contractor's employees, subcontractors,.suppliers and representatives at all times during the execution of this project.. The Contractor shall be•directly responsible for.any and all fines or penalties levied. -against the Airport as a result of any' breach. of securityor 'safety 'caused by the Contractor or the Contractor's employees, subcontractors, suppliers or representatives: B. Airport Operations Area`(AOA)fTerminal The Airport operations area (AOA) shall.be defined as any portion'of.the'Airport.property normally secured against • . unauthorized.' entry.:. • The .AOA, includes all areas specifically reserved for the operations of, aircraft and aircraft support r equipment and personnel. Generally, the AOA is defined by the Airport's outer security fencing and other security measures at the Airport -terminal building. C. `LIAPD - Issued Security Badges'' The Contractor shall be -responsible for obtaining a• photo -identification security badge issued by the LIAPD for each supervisor or foreman of each work crew working within the AOA or terminal work area. The Contractor shall obtain LIAPD security badges -for at least one member of each -work crew working in separate areas -of -the AOA or terminal building or terminal building. It is' the • intent :of -these �snecifications that all -individuals responsible to'the'Contractor: includincr'the Individual displaying a current LIAPD security badge. The Contractor may obtain LIAPD security badges from the Lubbock International Airport Police '• Department at the Lubbock International Airport. The LIAPD reserves the right to limit the number of 'security badges issued to the Contractor. -The LIAPD will charge the Contractor a twenty-five dollar ($25..00) fee for each security..badge.issued. An additional fee will be charged, as noted later in this:section'; for lost or destroyed badges. SC 1 r P" The LIAPD security badges shall be worn in an easily visible location on the person issued the badge at all times while working within the AOA or secured area. The badge holder shall be - familiar with and shall obey all security and safety rules and regulations. The LIAPD security badge may be confiscated and all security rights revoked by the LIAPD upon.the breach of any - security or safety regulations at the discretion of the LIAPD. The _ holder of an LIAPD security badge shall surrender the badge at the completion of this project,.upon transfer or'termination of. employment, or at any other.time'at the'request of the LIAPD. The.Contractor shall conduct a background check of each applicant for an LIAPD security badge utilizing standard background _ check forms.provided by the LIAPD. The Contractor shall be responsible for completing the required forms, and for submitting the forms to the LIAPD for their review as early in'the project as possible to avoid any construction delays. Forms for completing the required background check shall,be,available through the LIAPD office after award of the project.: The background check will show proof of.a.minimum five (5).year employment.record and will be reviewed by the LIAPD.. The LIAPD-shall;be responsible for reviewing the background checks. Only persons whose application is approved by the LIAPD shall be issued security badges. The LIAPD reserves the right to bar from the AOA:;or terminal any individuals .found by the background check to be, in the opinion of the LIAPD, a.. risk to AOA/terminal security or safety.. At the completion of this project, the Contractor shall return all LIAPD-issued security badges.to the LIAPD. The LIAPD will charge an additional twenty-five dollar ($25.00) fee for each lost or -destroyed LIAPD-issued security badge. All LIAPD-issued security badges must be accounted for and surrendered at the. completion of this project. Failure to account -for and surrender all LIAPD-issued security badges will constitute grounds for withholding retainage from the final pay estimate amount. D. Contractor -Issued Identification Badctes The.Contractor shall be responsible for the identification of each of.the.Contractor's employees,subcontractors, suppliers and representatives while these individuals, operate within the secured area.' The Contractor shall be responsible for issuing identification badges to each of the Contractor's employees,. subcontractors, suppliers and representatives operating within -the AOA or terminal secure area. The Contractor shall maintain a record of all persons issued a Contractor's identification badge. This record.shall.include the home address.and telephone number of each person issued a badge. The Contractor's record of all- ` employees issued.an identification badge shall be made available upon the request of the LIAPD, the Director of -Aviation or the Engineer. SC 2 PM Oft The format and content of the Contractor -issued identification badge shall be approved by the LIAPD prior to issuing. -The identif ication. badge shall display the Contractor's company name, the employee's name, and'the badge's effective and expiration dates, and shall be plastic -laminated with a clip -on or' pin -on method of attaching the badge to the holder's outer clothing. The identification badge shall be -worn in an easily visible location on the person issued the badge at all times while operating within.the AOA. Contractor -issued identification badge shall not be transferable from individual to individual, but shall be issued to and carried by the specific employee, subcontractor, supplier to representative, issued the badge. The Contractor -issued identification badges shall be renewed by the Contractor every thirty (30) days during the project construction period. The Contractor shall be responsible for all Contractor -issued identification badges. All expired identification badges or badges invalidated by termination of the holder's employment, completion of construction activities, -or other reasons, shall be confiscated by the* Contractor and retained by, the Contractor until the'end of the. project. It shall- be the Contractor's responsibility to record and account for all Contractor -issued identification badges. All identification badges issued by the Contractor during the project and the records of said badges shall` -be transferred to the possession of the LIAPD at thecompletion of the project. The. Contractor -issued identification badge does not allow unlimited access to all areas within the AOA or.terminal, but will permit only escorted or directly supervised access to only -those portions of the AOA/terminal under construction by the Contractor. badge at all times. All individual employees, subcontractors, suppliers or representatives, or groups of employees, subcontractors, suppliers or representatives, must be escorted or directly supervised by an individual bearing a valid LIAPD-issued security badge at all times while within'the AOA. Persons within the AOA not possessing a valid LIAPD-issued security badge-, or escorted or directly supervised by an individual possessing a valid LIAPD-issued security badge., shall be considered in violation of LIAPD security requirements and shall be subject to immediate removal from the AOA and any other disciplinary actions necessitated by LIAPD security arrangements.. E. Contractor's Entrance Gate The Contractor shall provide an entrance gate -to the AOA for the Contractor's employees, subcontractors, suppliers and representatives at a location.directed by the Engineer. This entrance gate shall be provided, installed, and at the end of all construction activities, shall be *removed, and the existing fence SC - 3 reinstalled tothe satisfaction of the Engineer,.by the Contractor at no additional.expense to the Owner.Adjacent to the Contractor's entrance gate, outside the'AOA, the Contractor shall provide a parking area'for the Contractor's..employee's personal automobiles. This area may also'be used forstorageof-the. Contractor's equipment and materials. The.limits of this parking/storage area shall be as directed by the Engineer. -At the - completion of this project, any damage done by the Contractor to this storage area shall.be repaired to the'.satisfaction of the Engineer at no additional cost to the Owner. Repairs shall include, but not be limited*to, regrading,'and reseeding any damaged areas. r -The Contractor shall be responsible for, and shall control all movement through.the..Contractor's entrance gate.. Only authorized personnel and vehicles shall -be -allowed to enter the AOA through this gate. When not in immediate use by the Contractor, the gate shall be securely locked by the Contractor to prevent entrance by unauthorized persons or.vehicles. Upon request, the Contractor shall provide the Director of.:Aviation and the LIAPD with duplicate keys (for key locks) or combinations (for - combination locks) to the lock or locks used to secure the Contractor's entrance gate to.the AOA.. If construction activities, such as hauling materials, - require that the Contractor's entrance gate to the AOA remain -open for long periods of time, the Contractor may, upon approval from the Engineer,. leave the gate open and provide a full-time - watchguard,at the gate.. The watchguard shall be approved for and shall possess an LIAPD-issued security badge. If this security arrangement is desired and.approved, the gate shall be manned by the watchguard as long as the gate remains open. The watchguard shall be the Contractor's representative and shall be responsible. for all movement.through the gate. Again, only authorized persons and vehicles.shall be allowed by the..Contractor's watchguard to enter the AOA.- At the Contractor's option, and upon approval of the Engineer,, an -;automatic gate.operator..may be installed in lieu of providing a watchguard. - F.• Vehicle Escorts All vehicles'.responsible to the -,:Contractor, such as.' supplier's vehicles, entering the AOA.shall-be.escorted.by an approved Contractor escort vehicle from the point of AOA entry to the Construction site. The escort vehicle shall be clearly identified with standard FAA markings -and/or FAA flags., In addition` the.escort vehicle shall be marked.with-the Contractor's name. The escort vehicle will be responsible for leading supply; delivery or other vehicles across the active airfield. To _ facilitate safe movement.of the escort vehicle and the escorted vehicles, the driver of the escort vehicle shall be approved for, SC - 4- shall be issued, and shall .display an LIAPD security badge. Further, the escort vehicle driver shall be familiar with airport �.. security and safety procedures:' The escort vehicle shall be equipped with an FAA radio, as specified herein,. and the driver of the escort vehicle shall be familiar with the FAA radio and its operation, and shall obey all instructions from the Air Traffic r' Control. Tower. G. Challenging Unauthorized Personnel or Vehicles The Contractor and the Contractor's employees, subcontractors, suppliers, and representatives who have been issued an LIAPD security badge shall be responsible for challenging any person.or vehicle found on the AOA or other non public areas, who is not displaying a valid LIAPD security badges', cannot produce a valid LIAPD security badge., or who is not under escort or under the direct supervision of a person possessing a valid LIAPD security.. badge. 'The challenge shall consist of notifying the person that he is within a restricted area, and informing the person of an appropriate exit route. Should the unauthorized person refuseto exit the restricted area, the LIAPD shall be.immediately notified for further action, and the unauthorized person shall be kept under• surveillance.until.the LIAPD arrive. Any expired or altered badge, or any badge.bearing a photograph not matching,the bearer, shall be brought to the attention of the LIAPD and shall be immediately confiscated by the LIAPD or the Director of Aviation. H. Barricades. Signs, and Hazard Markings The Contractor shall provide, erect,.and maintain all necessary barricades, signs, danger signals, and lights for the protection of the work and the safety of the public for both land and air traffic. Before closing existing apron, runways or taxiway, warning signs for air traffic shall be placed at such locations and shall be.visible day and night. A runway closed because of construction or other activities or hazards shall have appropriate FAA standard markings. Any. movement of Contractor's vehicles or equipment on or across landing, areas shall carry FAA standard markings or flags. Taxiways closed'to traffic shall be protected by effective barricades. Suitable warning signs illuminated at night by acceptable light units,•shall be provided for closed runways apron, taxiways and.roadways. Obstructions. shall be illuminated at night. All warning lights shall be equipped with photocell.controls to automatically turn on the lights 'at night and turn them off at daytime. The lights shall be checked regularly by the 'Contractor to assure that batteries or power cells are in working order. SC -. 5 PART II. CRANES AND HOISTS A.. Any construction activity utilizing a crane or any other — hoisting device shall have a prior, written approval of the Federal Aviation Administration. ..The Contractor shall be responsible for filing the prescribed forms for airspace clearance in accordance with Part 77 of the Federal Aviation Regulations. Applications for airspace clearance must be submitted at least thirty (30) days prior to the beginning.of construction activities. To avoid construction delays, the Contractor is urged to file the prescribed forms in a timely manner. Airspace clearance from the.FAA must be approved prior to the erection of the crane or other hoisting device. - B. Notice of Proposed Construction'or Alterations, FAA form 7460=1, can be obtained from the Flight Standards District office located at the West Airport District. _ C. When requesting approval for the use of a crane or other hoisting device, the following information is required: 1. Exact location of construction activities utilizing a crane or other hoisting device. 2. Maximum extendable height of crane or other hoisting device. 3. Duration of construction activities utilizing a crane or other hoisting device. 4'. Daily hours of•crane or other hoisting device • operation. The -top of the crane or other hoisting device shall be marked with a.3-foot by-3-foot safety -orange and white checkered flag. The crane or other hoisting device shall be lowered at night or at the conclusion of construction activities, or during periods of poor visibility (ILS conditions)'asI'directed by. the Director of Aviation or the Engineer,.or at any other time at the direction of the Director of Aviation or the Engineer. D. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer`and Director of Aviation at least forty-eight (48) hours prior to actual' erection of the crane or other hoisting device. E. The Lubbock.International Airport has,.a one hundred and fifty (150) foot cap above which nothing may extend. SC - 6 r NOTICE OF ACCEPTANCE r • A TO: The City of Lubbock, having considered the proposals submitted And opened on the _day of- �.. 198_, for work to be done and materials to be furnished in and for: as set forth in detail in the Specifications, Plans, and Contract Documents for such work for the City of Lubbock; r� It appearing that your proposal is fair, equitable and to the best interest of said City, please take notice that said proposal was accepted by the City Council of the City of Lubbock on the day of 198 at the bid price contained therein, subject to the execution of and furnishing of all contract documents, bonds, cer- tificates of insurance, and all other documents specified and required to be executed and furnished under the can- t FM It will be necessary for you to execute and furnish to the City of Lubbock all such documents within ten (10) days from your receipt of this Notice. The five percent (5%) bid security, submitted with your proposal, will be returned. upon the'exeeution of such contract documents and bonds within the above specified ten (10) day period. In the event you should fail to execute and furnish such contract documents and bonds within the time limit specified, said bid security will be re- tained by the City of Lubbock. I CITY OF LUBBOCK Owners Rrprescntatjvv i r r� K- NOTICE OF ACCEPTANCE TO: The City of Lubbock, having considered the proposals submitted and opened on the _day of 199_, for work to be done and materials to be furnished in and for: as set forth in detail in the Specifications, Plans, and Contract Documents for such work for the City of Lubbock; it appearing that your proposal is fair, equitable and to the best interest of said City, please take notice that said proposal was accepted by the City Council of the City of Lubbock on the day of _ 199 at the bid price contained therein, subject to the execution of and furnishing of all contract documents, bonds, certificates of insurance, and all other documents specified and required to be executed and furnished under the contract documents. It will be necessary for you to execute and furnish to the City of Lubbock all such documents within ten (10) days from your receipt of this Notice. The five percent (5%) bid security, submitted with your proposal, will be returned upon the execution of such contract documents and bonds within the above specified ten (10) day period. In the event you should fail to execute and furnish such contract documents and bonds within the time limit specified, said bid security will be retained by the City of Lubbock. CITY OF LUBBOCK Owner's Representative r r., SECTION 01010 - SPECIAL CONDITIONS 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Applicable requirements of the General Conditions and r Supplementary General Conditions apply to work specified in this section. 1.02 EXAMINATION OF SITE: A. Bidders are expected to visit the site of the building and compare the drawings and specifications with existing conditions, and inform themselves of all conditions which will affect this work. Failure of the successful bidder to do so will in no way relieve the bidder from necessity of furnishing any materials, labor, or equipment, or performing any work that may be required to complete work in accordance with drawings and specifications, without additional cost to the Owner. 1.03 NOTIFICATIONS: A. The Contractor shall give the Architect verbal r notification at least 48 hours prior to commencing any of the following: 1. Applying Roofing 2. Painting Mechanical Equipment !" 3. Testing Mechanical Equipment 4. Testing Various Utility Services to Mech. Equipment r•• 1.04 PROTECTION AND ACCESS: A. The Contractor shall adequately protect the adjacent property at all times, and shall make good at his own expense any damage to such property arising out of any operation connected with his contract. B. The Contractor shall at all times protect the building from damage from rain water, backing up of drains or r sewers, and all other water. He shall provide pumps.and equipment and enclosures to provider this protection. C. The Contractor shall at all times provide protection against weather --rain, wind, storms, frost, or heat --so as to maintain all work; materials, apparatus and fixtures from injury or damage. At the end of the day's work all new or old work likely to be damaged shall be protected. 1.05 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK: A. Before the award of'the Contract, the Prime Contractor shall furnish to the Architect in writing for acceptance by the Owner and the Architect a list of the names of Sub- contractors proposed for the various portions of the work, including the federal identification number of the Contractor and each Subcontractor. Pay estimates will not be considered until Subcontractors are approved. �' LIA 01010-1 1.46 SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES: A. ALTERATIONS AND ADDITIONS TO EXISTING FACILITIES: 1. The contractor shall cooperate with the Owner in scheduling his work. Due to the nature of the work required by this contract, all operations must be _ coordinated with the Owner to insure a minimum of interference with the continuing use of the existing facilities. _ 2. This contract shall include alterations to existing building as indicated on the drawings. Each bidder will be expected to familiarize himself with conditions affecting the execution of this work. 3. The drawings and notes do not indicate complete existing building, or water, sewer, waste, electrical or other construction conditions and each bidder shall -- visit the site prior to submitting his proposal and shall inspect the installation and conditions to be met and work to be accomplished in removing and modifying the existing work and installing any new work in the existing building. Failure to comply with this shall not constitute grounds for any.additional payments in connection with removing or modifying any part of the - existing installations and/or installing any new work to meet the requirements of this contract. 4. Certain information is shown on the drawings concerning — the existing installation for general information purposes, but shall not be interpreted as representing ".as built" conditions. Where the existing conditions are found to be different from that indicated, the contractor shall notify the Architect and Owner so a resolution of the situation can be resolved without additional expense to the Owner in so far as possible. — 5. The Owner shall retain possession of all moveable equipment and other equipment not attached to the building. In addition the Owner may elect to retain _ possession of -.other materials not re -used in the Construction. Materials not retained by the Owner or to be re -used in 4e project shall be removed from the site by the Prime Contractor. 6. Where alterations to existing building is required, the contractor shall, after his work is otherwise complete, repair adjacent finishes and do patching work as — necessary to leave the adjacent work in good shape. He shall paint, plaster, trim out, and finish new work and as much adjacent.existing work as is necessary to leave the job clean, neat and attractive. 7. All existing piping and/or circuits which are disconnected during the course of this work shall be reconnected and left in satisfactory operating order — unless they are specifically noted to be removed or disconnected. 8. It is the intention of this specification section to convey to the Prime Contractor that all unnecessary, existing roof penetrations and their respective components, whether mechanical, electrical, architec- tural or sructural in nature, which is rendered inoperative by the installation of the new mechanical LIA 01010-2 r ,.. system upgrading, shall be removed from the site. Once removed, all penetrations shall be covered with a 1/4 steel plate perlite board insulation and a modified bitamen roof patch. Final roof patching shall be at existing roof level so as to avoid ponding. Various pitch pans encompassing refrigerant, water and gas lines, conduit and duct penetrations which are to be removed are examples of areas needing roof patches. Within the next few months after installation and removal of old and new mechanical system components, a �. roofing project shall be underway, at which time the temporary steel plates, perlite insulation and roof patches will be removed and permanently sealed. It is also the responsibility of the Prime Contractor to have all existing pitch pans (which are to remail) "topped off"{ with a quality roofing mastic so that water will not continue to collect during the r� new few months, and until the roofing project kicks off, at which time these pitch pans will be better addressed. B. WORKING AND STORING AREAS: 1. The Owner shall provide a designated staging area adjacent to the facility. The Contractor shall provide secured fencing around staging area. C. FACILITIES: 1. The contractor shall take precautions to protect existing facilities and features within the designated construction limits and along the access to the construction site. Any damage caused by the Contractor or his Subcontractor shall be repaired immediately at his expense. D. REPAIR OF DAMAGE: 1. The Contractor shall be responsibile for any loss or damage caused by him, his workmen, or his sub- contractors to the work or materials, to tools, and equipment of one another, to adjacent property and persons, and shall make good any loss, damage or injury without cost to the Owner. E. NEW UTILITY CONNECTIONS: 1. Utility Service: Coordinate with Owner for shut-off, capping and continuation of utility services as required. 2. Outages: Two days prior notice of all utility outages must be given to the Owner, and all work of this nature must be approved and coordinated with thee Owner. F. CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE: 1. During the course of the construction of this project, a roofing contract will be let to reroof the facility which may interfere with the installation of some HVAC equipment. The Contractor will coordinate with the roofing contractor a construction sequence of work for the installation of HVAC equipment, in so far as possible. P• i 0" LIA 01010-3 2. This Contractor shall cooperate and coordinate with the _ Owner and other on -site contractors so as not to interfere with each other's work. If a problem arises with conflicts in work areas, it shall be brought to the Architect's attention for resolution. G. Penetration Construction Measures: An extremely important fact that the Owner wishes to convey, relates to the possibility of blown — off or thrown off materials, especially onto the tarmak side of the building. The Prime Contractor is expected to erect a dismantible 4-sided, 8 ft. tall polypropylne mesh "catch fence" barricade around all areas where work is to be performed. This precautionary measure will be required of the prime contractor as a minimum form of action in eliminating any possibility of various construction materials or packaging from leaving the roof work areas. In such case that material is blown or thrown off of the roof work areas, on to 'either side of the building, a designated employee of the prime contractor shall immediately retrieve those items and dispose of them properly. Prior arrangements will have to be made with airport security personnel, practicallyon a daily basis if need be, to allow for the retrieval of such items before they are able to cause damage or hinder normal airport operations. — Extra precautionary measures during high wind days should be inacted if deemed necesary by both the Architect and the Prime Contractor's job site superintendent. H. Interior Roof Access: Interior access onto the various roof levels by construction personnel shall be through upper level corridors and roof hatch. These access points will be pointed out during the pre -bid conference. The plans show a section through the upper level corridor with instructions on how to protect it from construction activities. ._ 1.08 COORDINATION: A. All -contractors and subcontractors on the project shall coordinate their work with each other and with Owner's contractors, advising on work schedules, equipment locations, etc. B. Mechanical and Electrical subcontractors shall coordinate routes of piping, ductwork, etc., with each other prior to start of installation. C. The Prime Contractor will schedule a weekly meeting at the job site to be attended by all subcontractors and Owner's representative to keep project on schedule and expedite solution to any conflicts which might arise. 1.09 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: A. PERMITS AND LAWS: 1. The Contractor shall comply with all Federal, State and Municipal Laws, Codes and Ordinances applicable to the work of this contract, and he shall also comply with all regulations of the National Board of Fire Underwriters having jurisdiction, and he shall obtain and pay for all permits required in connection with the LIA 01010-4 t •- execution of his work. The Architect shall be furnished with certified copies of these permits if requested. 2. If the above Laws, Codes or Ordinances conflict with ,., the Contract Documents, then the laws, codes or ordinances shall govern instead of the documents, except in such cases where the documents exceed them in quality of materials, or labor; then the documents shall be followed. 1.10 PROJECT MEETINGS: A. PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE: 1. Prior to the Contractor beginning work at the site, the Architect will hold a preconstruction conference at a time and place to be established by the Architect. B. PROJECT BRIEFINGS: 1. Each week, the Contractor shall brief the Owner and Architect on project progress during the preceeding week. Any slippage in schedule shall be discussed during the briefings. 2. Briefings shall be held at a time and place established by the Owner. 1.11 SUBMITTALS: A. CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE: 1. Within fifteen (15) days after signing of Contract, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect a Progress Chart or CPM showing the sequence of construction, together with proposed completion dates for the various' trades. 2. Schedule shall indicate the start and finish dates for the various major subcontracts or operations and shall incorporate the critical milestones to interface with the installation of Owner's equipment and furnishings. r 1.12 TEMPORARY UTILITIES: A. The Owner will furnish all power, natural gas, and water required during construction. The Contractor shall make all arrangements necessary to connect to existing utility systems. B. The Contractor shall provide adequate temporary lighting in the building for all trades i� C. Telephone: Contractor shall be responsible for his own telephone. The Contractor shall provide and pay for a telephone at the building site in order to expedite his r work. Local telephone service shall be made available to all persons connected with the work. Use of Owner's telephone is prohibited, except pay phones. r. D. Toilets: The Contractor shall provide and maintain in good order temporary toilets on the site. Toilet shall be an approved chemical type. Toilets shall be completely enclosed and of neat appearance. Toilet locations shall be '~ approved by the Architect. "'` LIA 01010-5 E., Temporary Heat and Ventilation: Provide temporary heat and ventilation as required to maintain adequate environmental conditions to facilitate progress of .the Work, to. meet specified minimum conditions for the installation of materials, and to protect materials and finishes from damage due to temperature or humidity. F. Provide and maintain warning lights and signs as necessary to prevent damage or injury. Keep warning lights burning from dusk to dawn. 1.13 BARRIERS: A. CONSTRUCTION FENCES: 1. This Contractor shall construct and maintain protective temporary fences around entire equipment staging site. Due to the nature of the work required by this contract, all fencing must be coordinated with the Owner so as to interfere with other building activities and programs as little as possible. 2. Upon completion of the project, the storage and access areas shall be restored to pre -construction condition. 3. Contractor to post warning signs as necessary to keep public out of staging site. 1.14 TEMPORARY CONTROL AND DISPOSAL OF WASTE: A. DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIALS: — 1. The Contractor shall remove all combustible and non- combustible waste materials completely from the Owner's property and legallydispose of same. — 2. Burning of any materials will not be permitted within the boundaries of the Owner's property. B. DAILY SITE CLEANUP: 1. The Contractor shall, on a daily basis, have all loose, discarded, material debris and packaging materials picked up and placed in a proper trash receptacle for removal from the site.. -- 2. The interior space shall have all construction debris picked up and held in designated area so as not to interfere with daily work progress. 1.15 FIRE PROTECTION DURING CONSTRUCTION: A. The Contractor, subcontractors, and their personnel are required to be in compliance with the fire protection and prevention requirements of the Occupational Safety and health Act for Construction. B. Fire extinguishers shall be available at all times while work is being performed. The number and type are to be as specified in Subpart F of OSHA. The Contractor is required to furnish his own extinguishers. C. Waste combustible materials shall not be allowed to accumulate at the work site and shall be removed from the site and disposed on a regular basis. LIA 01010-6 ,.. 1.16 TRAFFIC REGULATION: A. PARKING: Parking of private cars permitted only in areas designated as working and storing area. Notify employees and subcontractors of this requirement at beginning of ON` work. 1.17 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION REQUIREMENT A. SIGNS: 1. No signs or advertisements will be permitted without approval of the Architect and Owner. 2. The Contractor shall erect one (1) painted sign, approximately 64 sq.ft. as approved by the Architect, giving the names and addresses of: The Architect -Engineers The General Contractor The Various Subcontractors The Name of the Building or Project 3. The Architect shall approve the size, color, lettering and location of sign. The above sign shall be the only sign or advertisement displayed on the building or site. 1.18 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT:, A. STORAGE AND PROTECTION: 1. T h e Contractor shall carefully consider material storage, so as to avoid interference with other phases of construction. 2. He shall so store, pile and arrange his materials that they will not be injured by the elements, by the progress of erection, by contact with the ground or from any other cause. He shall provide and do all covering necessary for this purpose and shall remove from the premises any damaged materials when so directed by the Architect. 3. The Owner will designate an area immediately adjacent to the Building site for storage of materials. Storage area shall be fenced to keep unauthorized persons from having access to area. 1.19 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT: A. FINAL CLEANING: 1. Use experienced workmen, or professional cleaners, for final cleaning. 2. At completion of construction and just prior to acceptance of occupancy, conduct a final inspection of exposed interior surfaces and perform final cleaning. 3. Remove grease, dust, dirt, stains, labels, fingerprints and other foreign materials from interior surfaces. 4. Repair, patch and touch up marred surfaces to match adjacent finishes. 5. Replace air conditioning filters if units were operated during construction. 6. Clean ducts, blowers and coils if air conditioning units were operating without f ilters during construction. LIA 01016-7 7. Dust and wash plumbing and electrical fixtures 8. Broom clean paved surfaces; rake clean other surfaces of grounds: B. RECORD DRAWINGS: 1. The Contractor shall.keep a set ofdrawings in his office at the site, on which he shall legibly indicate all changes in construction, equipment, mechanical and electrical systems, and connections .as installed or — built. 2. Upon completion of'thecontract, the Contractor shall deliver to the Architect the completed record drawings. END OF SECTION. — LIA 01010-8 - r ON SECTION 01030 - ALTERNATIVES 1.01 GENERAL: A. The Contractorshallsubmit with his bid an alternative proposal stating the difference in price (additions or deductions) from the total estimate for adding or changing r the following materials or construction from that shown on the drawings and specified. B. The difference in prices shall include all omissions, ,.. additions, and adjustments of all trades as may be necessary because of each change, substitution or omission. C. All work and materials required by alternates shall be in accordance with applicable requirements of the r' specifications. 1.02 BID ITEMS: ALTERNATE NO.1 The General Contractor shall indicate on the bid proposal the amount of add/deduct cost required for Carrier Chiller in lieu of Trane Chiller. ALTERNATE NO. 2 r The General Contractor shall indicate on the bid proposal the amount of add/deduct cost required for York Chiller in lieu of Trane Chiller. ALTERNATE NO. 3 The General Contractor shall indicate on the bid proposal the amount of add/deduct for an alternative secondary water loop system and heating water loop system in lieu of Bell and Gossett system. Name System. ALTERNATE NO. 4 The General Contractor shall indicate on the bid proposal the amount of add/deduct for a Honeywell Facility Management System (FMS) in lieu of Johnson Controls FMS. ALTERNATE NO. 5 ,. The General Contractor shall indicate on the bid proposal the amount of add/deduct for an Andover Facility Management System (FMS) in lieu of Johnson Controls FMS. END OF SECTION. "M LIA 01030-1 ►w SECTION 01340 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES 1.01 GENERAL: A. Refer to General Conditions. B. Submit to the Engineer shop drawings, product data and samples required by speficiation sections. C. Prepare and submit a list of required submittals of Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples. List submittal items in numerical order of specification section numbers. Identify each submittal in list with an item number, specification section number, name of product and type of submittal (Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples). Include dates for submission and need dates for each item. 1.02 SHOP DRAWINGS:' A. Original drawings, prepared by Contractor, subcontractor,supplier or distributor, which illustrate some portion of the work, showing fabrication, layout, setting or erection details, prepared by a qualified detailer. B. Reproductions for Submittals: Reproductible transparency with one opaque print. 1.03 PRODUCT DATA: A. Manufacturer's standard schematic drawings: 1. Modify drawings to delete information which is not applicable to Project. 2. Supplement standard information to provide additional information applicable to Project. B. Manufacturer's catalog sheets, brochures, diagrams, schedules, performance charts, illustrations and other standard descriptive data: 1. Clearly mark each copy to identify pertinent materials, products or models. 2. Show dimensions and clearances required. 3. Show performance characteristics and capacities. 4. Show wiring diagrams and controls. 1.04 SAMPLES: A. Physical examples to illustrate materials, equipment and workmanship, and.to establish standards by which completed work is judged. B. Field samples and mock-ups: 1. Erect at Project site at location acceptable to Architect. 2. Construct each sample or mock-up complete including work of all trades required in finished work. 1.05 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES: A. Review shop drawings, product data and samples prior to submission to Engineer. Initial, sign, or stamp, certifying to review of submittal. B. Verify: 1. Field measurements. 2. Field construction criteria. 3. Catalog numbers and similar data. LIA 01340-1 C. Coordinate each submittal with requirements of work and contract documents D. Contractor's responsibility for errors and omissions in submittals is not relieved by Engineer's review of submittals. E. Contractor's responsibility for deviations in submittals from requirements of Contract Documents is not relieved by Architect's review of submittals, unless Engineer gives written acceptance of specific deviations. F. Notify Engineer, in writing at time of submission, of deviations in submittals from requirements of Contract Documents. G. Begin no work which requires submittals until return of submittals with Engineer's stamp and initials or signature indicating review. H. After Engineer's review, distribute copies. 1.06 SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS: A. Schedule submissions at least 30 days before date reviewed submittalswill be needed, in accordance with approved submittal schedule. B. Submit 1 reproducible transparency and one opaque print of. shop drawings for structural steel and preengineered metal building. C. Submit number of copies of product data which Contractor requires for distribution, plus 3 copies which will be retained by Engineer. D. Submit number of samples specified in each of specification sections. E. Accompany each submittal with transmittal letter, in duplicate, containing: 1. Date. 2. Project title and number. 3. Contractor's name and address. 4. The number of each Shop Drawing, Product Data and Sample submitted. 5. Notification of deviations from Contract Documents. 6. Other pertinent data. F. Submittals shall include: 1. Date and revision dates. 2. Project title. 3. Names of Engineer, Contractor, subcontractor, supplier and manufacturer. 4. Identification of product or material. 5. Relation to adjacent structure or materials. 6. Field, dimensions, clearly identified as such. 7. Applicable reference standards. 8. Other pertinent data.required by Specifications. 9. Identification of deviations from Contract Documents. 10. Contractor's stamp, initialed or signed, certifying to review of submittal, verification of field measurements and compliance with Contract documents. 11. Space large enough to accept Engineer's approval stamp (3"x 1-1/2"). 1.07 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS: A. Shop Drawings: 1. Revise initial drawings as required and resubmit as specified for initial submittal. 2. Indicate on drawings any changes which have been made, other than those requested by Engineer. B. Product Data and Samples: Submit new data and samples as required for initial submittal. 1.08 DISTRIBUTION OF SUBMITTALS AFTER REVIEW: A. Distribute copies of shop drawings and product data which carry Engineer's stamp as required for construction, including Contractor's file, job site file, record documents file, other prime contractors, subcontractors, supplier and fabricator. LIA 01340-3 r� .• SECTION 01600 - MATERIALS 1.01 UNAVAILABILITY OR LATE DELIVERIES: Contractor shall order and schedule delivery of materials in ample time to avoid delays in construction. If an item is found to be unavailable, Contractor shall notify Architect/ Engineer immediately to permit mutual selection of suitable "`. substitute. If Contractor fails to order materials in ample time to avoid delays in construction, an approved material shall be substituted at no extra cost to the Owner. Or, at the Architect/Engineer's discretion, approval of a substitute will be given only upon agreement by the Contractor to remove substituted material at a later date agreeable to Owner, and PM replace it at Contractor's expense with material originally specified. Such approval shall be subject to the same terms as for "Substitutions". 1.02 MATERIAL TESTING: A. Laboratory tests and inspections specified or required of material and finish articles incorporated in the work shall be made by bureaus, laboratories or agencies approved by the Architect/Engineer. Reports will be submitted to the Architect/Engineer or distributed as established at the preconstruction conference. Cost of testing and inspections will be paid for by the Contractor. B. Contractor shall furnish promptly, without additional charge, all reasonable facilities, labor, and materials necessary for safe and convenient inspection and tests required by the Architect/Engineer. Inspection and tests will be performed in manner not to delay work unnecessarily. Contractor will be charged with cost of extra inspection when material or work is not ready at time inspection is required. C. Test samples as Architect/Engineer may deem necessary shall be procured from material or equipment delivered for use in the work. If any te$t sample fails to meet specification requirements: 1. Previous approval may be withdrawn and such material or equipment may be subject to removal and replacement by Contractor at his expense with. material or equipment meeting specification requirements. 2. Architect/Engineer may refuse consideration of further samples of same brand or make for testing. Contractor shall bear cost of all further testing until Architect/Engineer's approval is granted. 3. At Owner's discretion, defective material. and equipment may be permitted to remain in place subject to adjustment of Contract price. 1.03 MATCHING MATERIALS: Materials required to match existing work and not otherwise specified, shall be equal to the existing work in quality, color and finish. Workmanship and installation shall be comparable to adjacent existing work. The Owner shall be the sole authority in the determination of an acceptable match. �` LIA 01600-1 1.04 SPECIFIED ITEMS - SUBSTITUTIONS: In addition to the requirements of General Conditions Article V, 5.13 the following applies: A. Whenever catalog numbers and specified brands or trade names, followed by the designation "or equal" are used in conjunction with a designated material, product, thing or service mentioned in these•specifications, they are used to establish -the standards•of quality and utility — required. Substitutions which are equal in quality and utility to those specified will be approved, subject to the following provisions: All substitutions must be approved by the Architect/Engineer and owner in writing. For this purpose the Contractor shall submit to the Architect/Engineer within 35 calendar days after recording of the Contract, a typewritten list containing a description of each proposed substitute item or material. Sufficient data, drawings, samples, literature or other detailed information as will demonstrate to the — Architect/Engineer that the proposed substitute is equal in quality and utility to the material specified shall be appended to this list. The Architect/Engineer will approve after receiving written concurrence from the Owner, in writing, such proposed substitutions as are, in his opinion, equal in quality and utility to the times or materials specified. Such approval shall not relieve the .Contractor from complying with the requirements of the Drawings and Specifications, and the Contractor shall be responsible at his own expense for any changes resulting _ from his proposed substitutions which affect other parts of the work. B. Failure of the Contractor to submit proposed substitutions for approval in the manner described and within the time prescribed shall be sufficient cause for disapproval by the Architect/Engineer or any substitutions otherwise proposed. C. Whenever catalog numbers and specific brands or trade names are not followed by the designation"or equal" or used in conjunction with a designated material, product, thing or service mentioned in these specifications, no substitutions will be approved. 1.05 SUBSTITUTIONS: Substitutions of any materials other than those specifically called for shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer for approval. 1.06.ITEMS SPECIFIED BY TRADE NAME: Reference to items by specific trade name is made as a basis of quality and function. Equivalent items may be used in their stead; however, the right of determining such quality shall remain with the Owner's Representative. The terms "similar to", "approved", or "or equal" or similar phrases shall be interpreted similarly. LIA 01600-2 1.07 LABELS: Manufacturer's or trade names together with model or serial designations," grade markings-, fire ratings, etc. will be permitted and are required on certain components of the work. These items shall be placed in concealed, but accessible locations, and absolutely no labels advertising any manufacturer or trade name will be permitted on exposed portions of components without written authorization from Architect/Engineer. 1.08 MATERIALS STORAGE: A. The Contractor will be allowed space on the grounds for the storage of his materials, but he shall provide all necessary enclosures, doors, and locks, and he shall be solely responsible for the safekeeping of all materials, tools, etc., stored therein. B. Such storage facilities shall be moved when so directed by the Architect/Engineer at the Contractor's expense. After completion of the work, they shall be completely removed and all materials taken from the premises. 1.09 MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS: A. All manufactured articles, materials and equipment shall be applied,,installed, connected, erected, secured, used, cleaned and put in operation as recommended, directed or specified by the manufacturer,for the type of installation called for. B. Where work is specified to be in accordance with product manufacturer's directions, Contractor shall procure such information in sufficient quantities to supply interested parties. END OF SECTION. LIA 01600-3 r. SECTION 04100 - MORTAR PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: Provide mortar and grout for masonry construction. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General Conditions, Special Conditions, and General Requirements, apply to the work specified in this section. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: r, Section 04200 - Unit Masonry 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Reference Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) ASTM C5-59 (1974), Quicklime ASTM C91-75, Masonry Cement ASTM C144-76, Aggregate for Masonry Mortar ASTM C150-76, Portland Cement ASTM C27-76, Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes ASTM C270-73, Mortar for Unit Masonry B. Source Quality Control: Initial compressive strength r laboratory tests in accordance with ASTM C270. r 1.05 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01340. Include product data sheets for each named product. B. Test Reports: If requested submit independent laboratory test reports of initial mortar tests, including design mix proportions, for each mortar. C. Certification: Submit manufacturer's certification that materials meet specification requirements. D. Samples: Refer to sample wall requirements in Section 04200. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Deliver and store manufactured products in original, r. unopened containers. B. Store cementitious ingredients in weather -tight enclosures and protect against contamination and warehouse set. Protect from freezing. C. Stockpile and handle aggregates to prevent contamination from foreign materials. 1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS: A. Heat mixing water when air temperature is below 40 deg. F. and heat aggregates when air temperature is below 32 deg. F., to assure mortar temperatures between 40 deg. F. and 120 deg. F. until used. B. Produce subsequent mortar batches within +/- 10 deg. F. of first batch. C. Do not heat water or sand above 120 deg. F. r^ 04100-1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, except compying with the staining requirements of ASTM C91 for not more than 0.03% water soluble alkali, Type I, II, or III. Provide natural color except white shall be used for natural stone work. B.-Masonry Cement: ASTM C91, non -staining. Prepared masonry cements may be used subject to Architect's approval. C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S. D. Quicklime: ASTM C5. E. Aggregates: ASTM C144. Use natural white sand or ground white stone for white mortar at natural stone, color to match stone. F. Water: Clean and potable, free of organic matter. G. Shrinkage Control Admixture: Hydratite Plus by Grace Construction Products. 2.02 MIXES: 2.03 A. Mortar Mix Masonry: 1. ASTM C270, proportion specifications, Type N. 2. Minimum compressive strength of 750 psi in 28 days. 3. Maximum air content 12%. 4. Incorporate shrinkage control admixture in mortar at rate of 1 lb.per bag of cement and 1 lb. per cu. ft. of lime. 5. Incorporate+color pigment in mortar for brick masonry in amounts required to achieve desired color/match existing mortar color. B. Mixing Procedures: 1. Measure materials by volume or equivalent weight. 2. Mix cementitious materials and aggregate for 3 to 5 minutes in a mechanical batch mixer. 3. Add maximum amount of water to produce workable consistency. 4. If mortar begins to stiffen from evaporation'or absorption of a part of mixing water, re.temper'by adding water and re -mix. 5. Use mortar and grout within 2-1/2 hours of initial mixing. 6. Do not use mortar after it has begun to set. GROUT: A. Grout for filling of reinforced cells and door frames in concrete block walls shall have a strength of 2500 pounds per square inch in 28 days. B. Aggregate for masonry grout shall meet Uniform Building Code No.24-23, 1976 Edition. Maximum aggregate size shall be 3/8 inch. Fine aggregates shall meet ASTM C33 and shall consist of clean, hard sand.. 04100-2 ft r PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: Installation of mortar and grout is specified in Section 04200. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: Control mortar batching by measuring materials by volume in accordance with approved mix design proportions. Maintain uniform mortar color for entire work. END OF SECTION.. 04100-3 SECTION 04200 - UNIT MASONRY l PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: A. Provide unit masonry construction shown and as noted on the plans. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General Conditions, Special Conditions, and General Requirements, apply to the work specified in this section. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: r' Mortar and Grout - Section 04100 is Caulking and Sealing - Section 07900 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames - Section 08100 1.04 SUBMITTALS: Submit in accordance with Section 01340. A. Certificates: Prior to delivery, submit certificates attesting compliance with applicable specifications for grades, types, and classes and strengths of brick units. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data sheets for each named product. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: 1. Local Building Codes 2. Source Quality Control: Testing Reports of each masonry unit as specified above. 1.06 STORAGE OF MATERIALS: A. Store masonry materials off ground. B. During freezing weather, protect masonry units with tarpaulins or other suitable material. C. Protect reinforcement and accessories from elements. 1.07 JOB CONDITIONS: A. Protection of Works 1. During erection, cover top of wall with strong waterproof membrane at end of day or shutdown. 2. Cover partially -completed walls when work is not in progress. 3. Extend cover minimum of 24" down both sides and hold cover securely in place. - B. Staining: 1. Prevent mortar from staining face of 'masonry. 2. Immediately remove mortar in contact with face of masonry. 3. Protect sills, ledges and projections from droppings or mortar; protect door jambs and corners from damage during construction. LIA 04200-1 1.08 COORDINATION: A. Build openings and chases for heating, plumbing and electrical ducts, pipes and conduits into masonry walls. B. Provide for installation of bolts, toggles, flashings, beams, anchors, hangers, nailing strips, wall plugs ,and frames. C. Consult other trades in advance and make provisions for installation of their work to avoid cutting and patching. - D. Cooperate with Roofer in locating flashing receivers and wall flashings PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMU) A. CMU shall be manufactured standard units, 16" long x 8" high x 7-5/8" wide, unless otherwise indicated and of standard sizes required to accomplish work called for. B. CMU units at all firewalls to be rated fire block. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION: A. Examine other construction which is to support or interface with masonry work for conditions that would prevent proper installation of masonry. B. Where footings and shelves are not sound or level, where anchorage devices have not been installed, where interferences exist, or where there are other conditions unsuitable for proper installation of masonry, do not start masonry work until other construction has been corrected. 3.02 CMU INSTALLATION: A. Lay units plumb and true to lines, with level courses, head joints lined up vertically. Use no more than one cut closure in a length of wall. Line up closures vertically. B. Lay up units with completely -filled mortar joints. Do not furrow bed joints. Butter ends of brick with sufficient mortar,to fill head joints, then shove in place. Rock — closures in place with head jointsthrownagainst two adjoining bricks in place. C. Tap each unit to line and level as it is placed. Do not disturb any one unit once in place,•except to remove — completely and set in fresh bed of mortar.. D. Do not pound corners and jambs to fit stretcher units after they have been set in position. Where an adjustment must be made after mortar has started to harden, remove mortar and replace with fresh mortar. E. Make cuts with a power masonry saw.. Do not use saw --cut faces in exposed work. — LIA 04200-2 1 �., F. Lay up only units which have no chipped, cracked or discolored exposed faces. Lay up with good face showing. G. Lay units in common running bond unless otherwise noted. Lay rowlocks, soldiers and patterns or special coursing as detailed. H. Provide at least 2 courses of brick under steel beams bearing on masonry walls and 1 course under steel joists, unless bond beams are shown. J. Keep cavity and wall clean and free of mortar droppings. Excess mortar on cavity slide shall be cut off with r. trowel-. 3.03 JOINTING: A. Provide tightly -tooled joints to match adjacent CMU construction. 3.04 BUILDING IN OTHER WORK: A. Build in lintels, door frames, windows, flashing, inserts, anchors, blocking, sleeves, wall plugs, boxes, cabinets, piping, conduit, and other items, whether provided as part of masonry work, as preparation for other work or furnished by other trades. B. Fully grout hollow metal door frames in masonry walls with mortar. C. Provide passage for electrical and mechanical lines. Make provisions for passage of lines, and other chases and openings, during laying up of masonry, so that later cutting is not necessary. Fill holes after lines and boxes are in place. D. Provide special jamb units where required to execute control joint details. Maintain sealant clearances at door opening. E. Provide lintels at opening in masonry work as necessary to form opening for in -wall equipment, through -wall ducts and piping, and as otherwise needed to support openings over 8" wide. Set lintels in full beds of mortar. 3.05 CLEANING AND POINTING A. At completion of masonry work, inspect masonry for defective joints. B. Cut out and repoint defective joints. Fill holes and tool smooth. C. Dry brush masonry surface after mortar has set, at end of each day's work and after final pointing. D. Clean exposed masonry surfaces with stiff fiber brush and clear water. No metal cleaning tools will be permitted. E. Acid solutions for cleaning shall be used only upon recommendation of the product manufacturer and approval of the Architect. Follow manufacturer's instructions. F. Leave work and surrounding surfaces clean and free of mortar spots, droppings and broken masonry. END OF SECTION. LIA 04200-3 j OW SECTION 07600 SHEET METAL VLASHING5 q1 t PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: Provide sheet metal flashing for mechanical curbs. See drawing details and notes for location and quantity of sheet metal flashings. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General Conditions, Special Conditions, and General Requirements, apply to the work specified in this section. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: Equipment - Section 15500 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit copies of specifications and installation instructions from the manufacturer for each major product or system required. Include certification or other data substantiating compliance with the requirements. Submittal shall be in accordance with Section 01300. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawing of each fabricated item. Before any fabrication is begun, shop drawings of all flashing shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. The drawings shall show guages and types of metal, method of assembly and/or anchorage, shapes, dimensions and finishes. Submittal shall be in accordance with Section 01340. 1 1.05 JOB.CONDITIONS: Proceed with sheet metal work only after substrate construction, mechanical curbing, and penetrating work have been completed. The Installer must examine the substrate and the conditions under which work is to be performed, and -notify tte.Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. r, PART 2 - PRODUCTS I 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Sheet Metals: 1. Flashing zinc co ted steel, ASTM A361, 24 guage with minimum 1.25 oz/:q.ft. 2. Pitch pockets - Galvanized steel, ASTM A526, 24 guage r• with minimum 1.25 oz/sq.ft. galvanizing. B. Accessory Materials and Components: 1. Fasteners: Concealed hook, strip, or clip type; of same r, material and guage as flashings, sized to suit application. LIA 07600- 1 i 2. Solder and Flux: Type recommended for.materials being used. 3. Plastic Cement: Cutback asphaltic type; FS SS C000153a. 4. Bituminous Paint: Acid and alkali resistant type; black color. 5. Sealant: One component acrylic; conforming.to requirements to FS'TT-S-00230; non-staining;'non- bleeding; non -sagging; of color selected by Architect/Engineer. 2.02 FABRICATION: A. Flashing 1. Form sections square, true and accurate to size, free from distortion and other defects detrimental to appearance or performance, in conformance with details shown on the drawings. 2. Form sections in the longest continuous length possible while still making allowances for expansion joints. 3. Seams are to be flat lock type except corners. Fabricate corners minimum 18" x 18" mitered, soldered or welded, and sealed as one piece. 4. Wipe and wash clean, solder joints to remove traces or flux immediately after soldering. 5. Hem exposed edges of flashing on underside `1/2 6. Fabricate flashings.to allow it to extend minimum of 2" horizontally over roofing and return brake edge. 7. Backpaint flashing with bituminous paint where expected to be in contact with cementitious materials or dissimilar metals. B. Pitch Pockets: 1. Conform to SMACNA Manual, Plate 61,,Figure C, 2. 4" high with hemmed edge, 4" flange all around, 2" greater'in width and length than equipment enclosed. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION: A. Verify that substrates, curbs, blockings, cants and other construction to receive sheet metal work are _completed, securly fastened, clean and smooth, thoroughly dry and free of defects that could affect application. B. Beginning installation means acceptance of substrate. 3.02 INSTALLATION: A. Flashings, Counter Flashings,`and Valleys 1. Nailing a. Not'over 8" on center'and'not less than 1/2" from edge. b."Do not nail through exposed face of flashings. 2. Jointing a. Overlap seams in direction of `flow. LIA 07600- 2 r b. Make joints with f 6t.-Iock seams, 3/4" wide minimum or soldered lap seams 1" wide minimum. c. Make corner seams double locked. d. Provide expansion and concentration joints where rindicated or at 32 ft. maximum intervals. Expansion l joints shall be loose lock slip joints, sealed with plastic cement. e. Comply with SMACNA manual, Plate 131,.and other plates applicable to installations for specific seams and joints. rr 3. Soldering f a. Thoroughly clean and treat metals in accordance with metal producer's recommendations prior to soldering. b. Apply flux compatible with sheet metal prior to soldering. c. Solder full width and length of seam or joint. d. Remove acid flux residue by neutralizing with ammonia or baking soda and rinsing with clear water. B. Pitch Pockets: Rework existing pitch pans to provide a positive seal from moisture entry into the building. END OF SECTION. r LIA 07600- 3 r SECTION 07900 - CAULKING AND SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: A. Provide interior caulking in conjunction with interior painting operations. Caulk all joints between dissimilar materials including H.M. frames, louvers, and other items mounted through walls. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General Conditions, Special Conditions, and General Requirements, apply to the work specified in this section. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: Unit Concrete Mason? - Section 04200 r' Painting - Section 09900 1.04 SUBMITTALS: .- A. Manufacturer'.s Literature: Submit manufacturer's name and product proposed for use, and manufacturer's color charts for Architect's selections and approval. Submittal shall be in accordance with Section 01340. B. Samples and Test Reports: For materials other than those specified, furnish a unit sample of each material proposed (include primer), accompanied by certified independent laboratory test reports showing that materials to be furnished have been tested and meet requirements of applicable contract documents and manufacturer's pal certification that no major formula change has taken place since date of test. Sample containers shall be labeled as to supplier, name of material, specifications numbers, and FIR colors. Include letters or published recommendations by manufacturer to support selection and compatibility of ? various related materials with respect to type of joints for which each material is intended. C. Upon completion of the job, furnish a.list of all caulks and sealants used, as well as blueprint marked with the installed locations of each. Provide one tube of each type of caulk and/or sealant to the Owner. Include a copy of rthe invoice from the caulk vendor for future acquisition by the Owner. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Sonneborn division of Contech OM 2. Pecora Chemical Corp. 3. Tremco Mfg. Co. ^, 1.06 DELIVERY AND STORAGE: Deliver materials in unopened containers as packaged by manufacturer. Store in a manner to protect materials from weather. r LIA 07900-1 r 1.07 GUARANTEE: Provide Owner a written guarantee which shall guarantee sealant operations to be free of leaks and defects in material and workmanship for a period of two years from date of acceptance. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Sealant: (Exterior and Interior Joints Subject to Movement) 1. Qualities: One part non -sag polysulfide base synthetic rubber sealant. Manufacturer's standard color as selected by Architect." 2. Standards: FS TT-S-0027E, Type II, Non -sag Class B; FS-TT-S-00230C, Type II, Class A, Gun Grade. B. Interior Caulking: 1. Type: Acrylic. Latex capable of being painted with latex or oil base paints. Pecora AC-20 acrylic Latex -Caulk. 2. Conformance: ASTM C 834-76 3. Consistency: Gun Grade 4. Colors: As selected by the A-E for the particular use. C. Joint Backing: Closed cell polythylene joint backing material as recommended by sealant manufacturer. Select a size that will cause about 30% compression in joint. D. Bond -Preventive Materials: Polyethelene tape, pressure - sensitive adhesive,or masking tape, FS UU-T-106. E. Primer As recommended by sealant manufacturer for each type of working surface PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE PREPARATION: A. Concrete and masonry surfaces shall be smooth,,dry, sound. Brush and wipe surfaces dust free. Remove oil, grease, release agents, coatings, or other contaminates from surface. B. Remove loose mill scale from steel surfaces. Remove dirt, oil or grease by solvent cleaning and wipe surfaces. C. Reportunsatisfactory surfaces to Architect. D. Prime and prepare surfaces in strict accordance with sealant manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.02 JOINT SIZES AND BACKING: A. Sealant: Minimum and maximum joint sizes shall be as recommended by sealant manufacturer and as shown on drawings. Use joint backing material to control depth of'' joints. In joints 1/2" and wider, depth equal to.1/2 width with minimum depth of 1/4". B. Caulking: Depth equal to 3 times joint width. 3.03 APPLICATION: A. Joint Backer: Install joint,backer to achieve required depth of joints. Where not used, install a bond -preventive material in joint. LIA 07900-2 r l PM i B. Sealant: Apply sealant to joints prior to water repellant or clear coating operations. Apply sealant within 8 hours after primer has dried. Gun -apply sealant, completely filling joint. Tool joints smooth and wrinkle free. C. Caulking: Caulk joints before final coat of paint is applied to adjacent surface. Apply caulking with a pressure gun having a nozzle of proper size to fit joint. Completely fill joint and firmly tool against backing to. make a smooth, convex bead, and assure good adhesion. Caulking shall develop a firm skin before paint is allowed. 3.04 USE LOCATIONS: A. Use Exterior Joint Sealant where indicated on drawings and following: 1. Around perimeter of all exterior door and window frames. 2. Around perimeter of all pipes, conduit,. mechanical or electrical devices, and other items built into or penetrating exterior walls. 3. At thresholds: Provide full bed for exterior thresholds. 4. As otherwise required to make building airtight and weathertight. 5. At control joints in unit masonry walls. 6. At all joints in precast concrete panels. B. Use Interior Caulking at all interior joints in materials requiring a painted or stained finish and as directed by Architect/Engineer. 3.05 CLEANING: Remove excess ealant and caulking materials and smears from adjacent surf ces as work progresses. Solvent recommended by manufactur r may be used to remove sealant. Remove debris from site. END OF SECTION. LIA 07900-3 i SECTION 08100 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES - PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: Furnish manufactured hollow metal doors or door frames where scheduled or noted on plans. 1.02-RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General Conditions, Special Conditions, and General Requirements, apply to the work specified in this section. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: Caulking & Sealants - Section 07900 Painting - Section 09900, 1.04 QUALIFICATIONS: Manufacturer and supplier of hollow metal doors and frames shall show proof of at least 5 years experience in fabricating custom hollow metal work. Manufacturer is subject to Architect's approval and, if requested, shall submit a list of recent local representative projects completed. 1.05 SUBMITTALS: A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01340. Indicate each type of door and frame, frame conditions, and complete anchorage details, supplemented by suitable schedules covering doors and frames. Also indicate field splice joints, hardware locations and reinforcement, and other misc. items. B. Samples: Submit following samples if requested: (1) 12" x 12" section of door showing internal construction, edge detail, and butt reinforcement (2) 12" x 12" "L"" section of frame -showing corner detail. 1.06 DELIVERY AND STORAGE: Deliver, store, and handle hollow metal work in'manner`to prevent damage and deterioration. Provide individual cardboard containers for doors. Store doors and frames upright 'in a protected dry area. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 BASIC MATERIAL: A. Sheet steel for frames: Cold rolled commercial quality carbon.steel, ASTM A366. B. Sheet steel for doors: Cold rolled stretcher leveled sheet steel,ASTM A366. 2.02 DOOR FRAMES: A. Combination type with integral stop and trim, fabricated to profiles and shapes detailed with 16 ga. steel for interior frames, 14 ga.steel for exterior frames. B. Corners and connections mitered and welded with exposed welds ground flush and smooth. F '- LIA 08100-1 C. Provide 16 ga. jamb anchors at 2'-5" o.c. (min. 3 per, jamb)suitable for fastening to adjacent construction. Provide adjustable 14 ga.sill anchor at bottom of each jamb for fastening to floor. Provide removable steel spreaders at bottom. Provide mullion anchors where required. D. Machine, mortise, reinforce, drill, and tap frames for _attachment,of finish hardware., Reinforcing shall be not. y. less than the followings Hinge and Pivot reinforcements - 7gage, 1-1/2' x 10" minimum size _ Strike reinforcements - 12 gage Flush bolt reinforcements - 12 gage Closer reinforcements - 12 gage Reinforcements for: surface -mounted hardware 12"gage hold -open arms - 12 gage surface panic devices 12 gage Provide for 3 rubber silencers at each strike jamb on single doors,and provide for,2 at heads of pairs of doors. E. Where required, provide applied stops formed of 18 gage steel with corners closely fitted and secured at ,12" o.c. with countersink #4-40 Phillips head machine screws. F. Provide mortar guards at all hardware mortises. 2.03 DOORS': A. Face sheets shall be of 16 guage steel on.exterior doors, 18 ga. steel on interior doors, with no visible,joints or seams. B. Provide internal stiffeners of 20 gage steel, space at 6" o.c. and welded to face sheets at 57 o.c. Fill space between stiffeners with sound deadening material, minimum 3 lb. density. C. Provide continuous 18 gage channel'reinforcement spot welded around perimeter of door. Close tops of exterior doors. D. Door edges shall be fully welded, ground smooth, with no' visible seams on faces or edges. E. Mortise, reinforce, drill and tap doors for attachment of finish hardwar''e. Reinforcement shall be not less than the following: Hinge and pivot reinforcements - 7 gage Reinforcements for lock face, flush bolts - 7 gage concealed holders, concealed or surface mounted closures 11 gage Reinforcements for all other surface -mounted hardware - il gage 2.04 FINISH: Remove oil, dirt, and grease from exposed surfaces of doors and frames and apply a mineral filler to assure a smooth surface. Apply l shop coat of zinc chromate rust inhibitive primer, baked on. LIA 08100-2 - PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF HOLLOW METAL FRAMES: 7 A. Exercise care in setting of frames to maintain scheduled dimensions. Hold head level and maintain jambs plumb and square. B. Secure anchorages and connections to adjacent construction. C. Leave frame spreader bars intact until frames are set perfectly square and plumb, and anchors are securely attached. D. Make field splices in accordance with Shop Drawing details. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF METAL DOORS: Install doors with 1/16" clearance at head and jamb, 1/2" clearance at floors, and 1/4" clearance at thresholds with no binding. 3.03 PRIME COAT TOUCH-UP: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch-up of compatible air drying primer. END OF SECTION. OM r• LIA 08100-3 SECTION'08330 - ROLLING SERVICE DOOR PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Rolling service door shall be Model BN4 as manufactured by the Overhead Door Corporation. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General Conditions, Special Conditions, and General Requirements, apply to work specified in this section. r. 1.03 RELATED WORK A. Opening preparation`,.miscellaneous or structural' metal work and finish and field painting, are in the Scope of Work of the other divisions or as noted. PART 2 - PRODUCT 2.01 CURTAIN A. Slats: shall be type F-265 flat crown, pitch 2-5/8", depth of crown 5/8" minimum 20 gauge galvanized steel. B. Endlocks: shall be used on alternate slats. Windlocks shall be used as required to meet design wind load, minimum 20 psf. C. Bottom Bar: shall be two steel angles 2" x 1-1/2" x 3/16". Provide a loop type PVC weatherseal on bottom bars. 2.02 GUIDES A. Guides: shall be roll formed steel shapes. Guides shall be 2 structural steel angles 3/16" minimum thickness. B. Guides: shall be equipped with windlock bars as required to meet design windload. 2.03 BRACKETS A. Brackets: shall be minimum 3/16" thick steel plate to support the barrell, counterbalance, and hood. 2.04 COUNTERBALANCE A. Counterbalance: shall be helical torsion springs housed in a steel pipe barrell, supporting the curtain with a deflection limited to .03" per foot of width. B. Counterbalance: shall be adjustable by means of an external adjusting tension wheel. 2.05 HOOD +� A. Hood: shall be 24 guage galvanized steel minimum. t ' 2.06 FINISH ,. A. Curtains & Hood: shall be galvanized per ASTM A 525 Standards and shall receive a baked on prime coat of manufacturer's standard paint prior to roll forming. LIA 08330-1 B. All non -galvanized, exposed, ferrous surfaces shall receive one coat of manufacturer's standard factory applied rust inhibitive primer. 2.07 OPERATION A. Doors shall be manual push up operation. 2.08 LOCKING A. Manual push up doors shall have interior, coil side, ,slide bolt locks'suitable for'padlocks by others. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install Rolling Service Door in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and standards. B. Installation shall be'by authorized manufacturer's representatives. LIA 08330-2 r SECTION 09500 - ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEMS ,PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: Provide lay -in type suspended acoustical ceilings. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of contract, including General Conditions, Sepcial Conditions, and General Requirements, apply to work specified in this section. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: Existing A/C Diffusers and Grilles - As Noted On Plans Existing Light Fixtures - As Noted On Plans 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01340. Indicate materials and construction of systems and locate suspension grid members and show their relationship with walls, partitions, furr downs, light fixtures, grilles, and diffusers. Include manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of acoustical system component. B. Samples: Submit full size samples of each acoustical board and suspension system for Architect's approval. C. Maintenance Instructions: Submit manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning each type of acoustic material. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE: ? A. Qualifications of Installer: Subcontract the acoustical ceiling and related work to an experienced installer acceptable to the manufacturer of primary acoustical materials,as shown by current written statement from manufacturer. B. Fire Hazard Classification: 1. Maximum Flame Spread: UL (ASTM E84): 25, Class 25 FS SS-S-118A. 1.06 COORDINATION: Coordinate installation with other trades and make provisions for their work to prevent cutting and patching. 1.07 DELIVERY AND STORAGE: Deliver materials in factory packages with factory labels attached indicating brand, pattern, size and fire rating as applicable. Store acoustical materials at normal room temperature in a protected enclosure having a stabilized moisture content. Comply with manufacturer's storage recommendations. 1.08 WARRANTY: A. Furnish written warranty that the work under this division shall be free from defects of materials and workmanship for a period of two (2)'years from the date of final 4, acceptance. LIA 09500-1 s. B. The following shall be adjudged as defective work: loosening, buckling, undue shrinkage, warping, sagging, cracking, settling, chipping, spotting or loss of acoustical properties of materials. 1.09 EXTRA STOCK: At completion of project, furnish Owner with one full unopened carton of each type of acoustical board/tile material. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Ceiling Systems: 1. TvneII: All renovated areas shown on the plans at the main level. Ceiling Panels to be mineral acoustical board conforming to FS SS-S-118B, Class A, equal to USG Acoustone Checkmate. STC: 35-44 NRS: .50-.70 Light Reflectance: 75 or more Size: 24" x 24" x 5/8", Lay -in SQ'Edge Finish: Standard White Suspension System: -Exposed USG Donn Meridian, 9/16" White. 2. Type 2: Corridor noted on the plans at the main -- level.Ceiling Panels to match existing panel removed with new.Suspension System: Match existing grid removed with new. B. Exposed Lay -In Suspension System: 1. Exposed tee grid system to be indicated for ceiling types above. Suspension to be inverted -tee type, direct hung system meeting "intermediate" or°'better structural standards of ASTM C635. 2. Main and cross tees (each 1-1/2" high) fabricated with double webs of .015 cold -rolled steel,`'electro-zinc �- coated and factory painted as noted above. 9/16" exposed flange, paint finish to match grid. 3. Edge molding, 0.020" steel, channel or hemmed edge angle shaped, 9/16" exposed flange, paint finish to match grid. 4. Maximum deflection: 1/.360 span. D. Hanger Wire: Minimum 12 ga.,.galvanized, soft -annealed, mild steel wire. E. Attachment Devices: Where hanger wires cannot be directlwire-tied to framing members, provide attachment devicefor type of construction used in the work, with a carrying capacity not less than 5 times design loads'` involved. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PROJECT CONDITIONS: A. In areas to receive acoustical materials, maintain relative humidity at not more than 70% and temperature between 60OF 750F., 24 hours before, during, and after installation. LIA 09500-2 r• B. Examine areas for conditions that would affect quality and I' execution of work and report descrepancies. 1;. 3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERAL: A. Install suspension systems in accordance with ASTM C636. 6 B. Minimum width of border tile of board allowed: one-half unit width. 1 3.03 INSTALLATION - EXPOSED GRID SYSTEM: A. Space main tees at 48" o.c., suspend from structure with r.. hanger wire spaced at 48" o.c. Install additional hanger wires at 6" from ends of each suspension member and at corners of light fixtures, and other items supported by ceiling suspension system. B. Space cross tees at 24" o.c., connect to main tees. Rest main and cross tees on wall moundlings. C. Rigidly brace entire system in both directions, leave bottom surface of members flush and level. V D. Install ceiling board according to manufacturer's recommendations and in level plane bearing on suspension ,., members. Neatly cut out board around items installed by other trades. 3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING: Replace damaged members of exposed suspension system. Replace ceiling and wall board that is damaged, installed inproperly, or shows visible sign of sagging. Clean soiled areas of ceiling material and exposed suspension system; comply with manufacturer's instructions. Replace ceiling units and members which are damaged or cannot be cleaned. 3.05 PROTECTION: Advise Contractor and Owner of proper procedures for protection'of acoustical ceilings from damage or deterioration. 3.06 SALVAGING: Note Sheet M-17. Also, Contractor shall be required to salvage any spline type ceiling which is affected by this work. Consult with Architect as to storage areas and procedures. END OF SECTION r� I^ LIA 09500-3 k r" SECTION 09900 - PAINTING'AND FINISHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: A. Provide complete painting and finishing of surfaces throughout interior and exterior of building, in areas of new masonry and drywall construction. B. Examine specifications for various other trades and their provisions regarding their painting. Surfaces that are left unfinished by other sections of specifications shall be painted or finished as a part of this section. C. Copper, bronze, chromium plate, nickel, stainless steel, lead, and lead coated copper shall not be painted or finished except as otherwise specified or scheduled. D. Other surfaces not to be painted include precast concrete panels, marblecrete, ceiling, and floor coverings; items with factory applied final finish; chases; and plenums above suspended ceilings, except as noted otherwise. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of contract, including General Conditions, Sepcial Conditions, and General Requirements, apply to work specified in this section. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: Unit Masonry - Section 04200 Caulking & Sealants - Section 07900 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Product Labels: Include paint, stock number, col containers. B. Field Quality Control: on a representative are quality and workmanship. applications shall serve project. manufacturer's name, type of or and label analysis on label of Apply each type of finish required a for approval of color, texture, After approval, these e as standard of quality for entire 1.05,SAMPLES AND COLORS: A. Colors, including deep tones, will be selected by Architect. Number of cdlors to be used on job will be determined by the adjacent finish which shall be matched or as noted. B. Prepare .two 12" x 12" samples of each color and sheen selected, on properly prepared paint -out cards or hardboard. Approved samples shall remain at project site. C. Submit 12" x 12" samples of drywall textures. D. Submit paint schedule in accordance with submittal requirements of Section. List each surface and its proposed paint products and systems. 1.06 SUBSTITUTIONS: A. Comply with provisions of Section 01600.. B. Submit substitute paint schedule listing each surface and its proposed products. LIA 09900-1 C. Submit complete supporting data, specifications, and identifying numbers of each proposed product. D. Do not order or deliver materials until Architect's approval is obtained. 1.07 DELIVERY AND STORAGE: A. Deliver materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact. B. Store materials and equipment in a single lockable area of project site. Provide adequate means to protect floors and adjacent surfaces of this area from damage. C. Store clean rags, paint, and solvents in closed metal containers located in designated area. Dispose of soiled rags daily. D. Comply with applicable health and fire regulations. -- 1.08 SCAFFOLDS AND PROTECTION: A. Provide adequate safe ladders, scaffolds, and stages necessary to complete work. B. Protect completed finish and painted work, and protect adjacent finish surfaces from paint splatter, spills and stains. Use adequate drop cloths and masking procedures during progress of work. 1.09 EXTRA PAINT: Upon completion of the work, deliver to the -- Owner one (1) gallon of each color of each enamel color used. 1.10 GUARANTEE: This Contractor shall guarantee all work performed under this contract for a period of one (1) year from date of acceptance. Cracking, peeling and scaling of paint shall be judged as defective work. PART'2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Products specified in Schedule of Painting are as manufactured by Kelly -Moore, unless otherwise indicated; equivalent products of Pittsburgh Paints, Sherwin- Williams, Glidden may furnished in lieu of those listed, provided that they are of equal type and quality. B. Materials selected for coating systems shall be products of a single manufacturer unless otherwise `specified. C. Secondary products such as linseed oil, turpentine and shellacs shall be'first line quality products of a .reputable manufacturer. D. Lead Free Paint: All paint specified for use under this section shall be lead free and mercury free and shall be in full compliance with Federal Hazardous Substances Act. 2.02 MIXING AND TINTING: A. Accomplish job site tinting and mixing only when approved by Architect. Use tinting colors recommended by paint manufacturer for specific type of finish. B. Thin paints only when specifically allowed by' - manufacturer, do"not exceed thinning directions. LIA 09900-2 r" .. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION: A. Examine surfaces scheduled to receive paint and finished for conditions that will adversely affect execution, permanence, or quality of finish work, and which cannot be put into an acceptable condition through normal preparatory work. B. Notify Architect in writing of such,unacceptable conditions. C Do not proceed with surface preparation or coating applications until conditions are suitable. D. Application of paint or finish to surfaces shall constitute acceptance of that surface. 3.02 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS: A. The intent of these specifications is to produce highest quality appearance of paint and finish surfaces. Employ skilled mechanics only. B. Do not apply exterior paint while surface is damp, or during cold, rainy, or frosty weather, or when temperature is below 50 deg. F. Avoid painting surfaces exposed to hot sun. C. Floors and adjacent surfaces, as well as surfaces to be painted, shall be clean before painting. D. Finish tops, bottoms, and edges of doors same as balance of doors after they are fitted. Seal top, bottom, opening and hardware recesses immediately after hanging doors. E. Clean surfaces free of foreign matter before applying paint or finishes. F. Maintain ambient temperature in building of not less than 60°F for 24 hours prior to and minimum of 24 hours after interior painting. G. Do not paint masonry surfaces with a moisture content exceeding 12%. H. Provide a minimum._of 20 foot candles illumination for surfaces to be painted or finished. I. Apply materials with adequate ventilation; maintain ventilation in occupied rooms. 3.03 PREPARATION OF SURFACES: • A. Wash metal surfaces with mineral spirits to remove dirt, oil, or grease before applying primer. Remove rust or scale by wire brushing or sanding clean before painting. Clean marred shop coats and touch-up with primer. B. Pretreat galvanized metal surfaces with a crystalline zinc phosphate treatment such as Lithoform, by American Chemical Paint Co., Ambler, Pa., or Galvaprep #5, by Neilson Chemical Co., Detroit, Mich. C. Fill scratches, cracks, and abrasions in drywall with a spackling compound flush with adjoining surface. When dry, sand smooth and seal before application of priming coat. D. Fill and sand metal door frames as required to provide a smooth surface before finishing. Touch-up factory prime �- coat before applying first coat. '" LIA 09900-3 E. Touch-up shop coats on metal surfaces before applying finish. F. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces,,or conditions otherwise detrimental to -the formation of a durable paint film. G." Clean surfaces to be painted before applying paint or surface treatments. 3.04 JOINT TREATMENT: A. Treat joints, interior angles`, fastener depressions and finishing trim on face -layer wallboard. 'Prefill, tape, fill and finish in strict accordance with manufacturer's directions. Sand finish coat'and leave surfaces smooth, uniform and free of fins, depressions, cracks and other imperfections. Treat joints of all face layers and all gypsum board fireproofing. 3.05 APPLICATION: A. Final coat of paint shall have visual evidence of solid hiding and uniform appearance, and shall be smooth, free of brush marks, streak , sags, runs, laps, or skipped areas. B. Apply paint, stain, ani varnish with suitable brushes, or rollers,as recommended my manufacturer. Spray application will be allowed only u on written approval of the Architect. C. Allow previous coats to thoroughly dry _before applying succeeding coats. D. Edges of paint adjoining other materials or colors shall be sharp and clean with no overlapping. E. Slightly vary color of successive coats. F. Sand and dust between each coat as required to remove visual defects. G. Each coat of paint applied shall be inspected by Architect before application of succeeding specified coats. Only inspected coats of paint will be considered in determining number of coats. Provide Architect a report of each coat applied when completed for inspection to comply with above. Architect reserves right to make revisions within color range of paint prior to'final coat. H. Apply each coat of paint uniformly to minimum wet film (MWF) thickness specified in Schedule, or as recommended by manufacturer. Additional coats shall be applied if required to produce full coverage. 3.06 CLEANING AND PATCHING: A. Upon completion of work, remove paint and varnish spots from floor, glass, and other finished surfaces. Remove from premises rubbish and accumulated materials. Leave .work in clean, orderly, and acceptable condition. B. Spot painting will be allowed to correct soiled or damaged 'paint surfaces only when touch-up spot will blend into surrounding finish and is invisible to normal viewing. Otherwise, re -coat entire section to -corners or visible stopping point. LIA 09900-4 3.08 SCHEDULE OF PAINTING: CONCRETE BLOCK - LATEX FINISH -REMODEL WORK First Coat:, Kelly -Moore High Hide Vinyl Wall Sealer #970 (MWF 3.2 Mils) Second Coat: Kelly -Moore Kel Cote Alkyd Semi -Gloss Enamel #1630 (MWF 3.6 Mils) END OF SECTION. LIA 99900-5 NOTE TO BIDDERS These Bid Documents contain work indicated as Bid Item #1 and Bid Item #2. The work under Bid Item #1 has been completed under a previous contract. This project consists only of work identified as Bid Item #2. r� r SECTION 15000 - GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL PART 1 - GENERAL r 7 I FM r I 6 1.01 CHECKING DOCUMENTS: A. The drawings and the specifications are numbered consecutively. The Contractor shall check the drawings and specifications thoroughly and shall notify the Engineer of any discrepancies or omissions of sheets or pages. Upon notification, the Engineer will promptly provide the Contractor with any missing portions of the drawings or specifications. No discrepancies or omissions of sheets or pages of the contract documents will relieve the Contractor of his duty to provide all work required by the complete contract documents. 1.02 GENERAL: A. In general, the lines and ducts to be installed by the various trades under these specifications shall be run as indicated, as specified herein, as required by particular conditions at the site, and as required to conform to the generally accepted standards as to complete the work in a neat and satisfactorily workable manner. The following is a general outline: concerning the running of various lines and ducts and is to be excepted where the drawings or conditions at the building necessitate deviating from these standards. B. All piping, conduit and ductwork for the mechanical and electrical trades shall be concealed in chases in finished areas, except as indicated on the drawings. Horizontal lines run in areas that have ceilings shall be run concealed in those ceilings, unless otherwise specifically indicated or directed. C. Piping, ductwork, conduits and raceways may run exposed in machinery and equipment spaces, where serving as connections to motors and equipment items in finished rooms where exposed connections are required, and elsewhere as indicated on the drawings or required D. All conduits in any space where they are exposed shall run parallel with the building walls. They shall enter the concealed areas perpendicular with the walls, ceilings or floors. Fittings shall be used where necessary to comply with this requirement. E. The Contractor shall thoroughly acquaint himself with the details of the construction and finishes before submitting his bid as no allowances will be made because of the Contractor's unfamiliarity with these details. Place all inserts in masonry walls while they are under construction. All concealed lines shall be installed as required by the pace of the general construction to precede that general construction. F. The mechanical and electrical plans do not give exact details as to elevations of lines and ducts, exact locations, etc., and do not show all the offsets, control lines, pilot lines and other installation details. The Contractor shall carefully lay out his work at the site to conform to the architectural and structural conditions, to provide proper grading of 15000-1 lines, to -avoid all obstruction, to conform to details of installation supplied by the manufacturers of the equipment to be installed, and thereby to provide an integrated, satisfactorily operating installation. G. The electrical plans show diagrammatically the locations of the various electrical outlets and apparatus and the method of circuiting and controlling them. Exact locations of these d outlets and apparatus shall be determined by reference to the general plans and to all detail drawings, equipment drawings, roughing -in drawings, etc., by measurements at the building, and in cooperation with other sections, and in all cases shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. The Engineer reserves the right to make any reasonable change in location of any outlet or apparatus before installation (within 10 feet of location shown on drawings) or after installation if an obvious conflict exists, without additional cost to the Owner. H. The mechanical plans do not give exact locations of outlets, fixtures, equipment items, etc. The exact location of each item shall be determined by reference to the general plans and to all detail drawings, equipment drawings, roughing -in drawings, etc., by measurements at the building, and in cooperation with other sections. Minor relocations necessitated by the conditions at the site or as directed by the Engineer shall be made without any additional cost accruing to the Owner. I. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper fitting of his material and apparatus into the space. Should the particular equipment which any bidder proposes to install require other space conditions than those indicated on the drawings, he shall arrange for such space with the Engineer before submitting his bid. Should changes become necessary on account of failure to comply with this clause, the Contractor shall make such necessary changes at his.(the Contractor's) own expense. J. The Contractor shall submit working scale drawings of all his apparatus and equipment which in any way varies from these specifications and plans, which shall be checked by the Engineer before the work is started, and interferences with the structural conditions shall be corrected by the Contractor before the work proceeds. K. Order of precedence shall be observed in laying out the pipe, ductwork, material, and conduit in order to fit the material into the space above the ceiling and in the chases and walls. The following order shall govern: 1. Items affecting the visual appearance of the inside of the building such as lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, outlets, panelboards, etc. Coordinate all items to avoid conflicts at the site. 2. Large ducts and pipes with critical clearances. 3. Conduit, water lines, and other lines whose routing is not critical and whose function would not be impaired by bends and offsets. 15000-2 r" L. Piping, ducts, and conduits sei-'viitg outlets on items of equipment shall be run in the most appropriate manner. Where the equipment has built-in chases, the lines shall be contained r. therein. Where the equipment is of the open type, the lines shall be run as close as possible to the underside of the top and in a neat and inconspicuous manner. M. Exceptions and inconsistencies in plans and specifications shall rbe brought to the Engineer's attention before the contract is signed. Otherwise, the Contractor shall be responsible for any and all changes and additions that may be necessary to accommodate his particular apparatus, material, or equipment. N. The Contractor shall distinctly understand that the work described herein and shown on the accompanying drawings shall result in a finished and working job, and any item required to accomplish this intent shall be included whether specifically mentioned or not. 0. Each bidder shall examine the plans and specifications for the General Construction. If these documents show any item requiring work under Division 15 or 16 and that work is not indicated on the respective "M", "P" or "E" drawings, he shall r-• notify the Engineer in sufficient time to clarify before bidding. If no notification is received, the Contractor is assumed to require no clarification, and shall install the work r� as indicated on the General Plans in accordance with the specifications. 1.03 DIMENSIONS: A. Before ordering any material or doing any work, the Contractor shall verify all dimensions, including elevations, and shall be responsible for the correctness of the same. No extra charge or ,., compensation will be allowed on account of differences between actual dimensions and measurements indicated on the drawings. Any difference which may be found shall be submitted to the Engineer for consideration before proceeding with the work. 1.04 INSPECTION OF SITE: A. The accompanying plans do not indicate completely the existing r" mechanical and electrical installations. The bidders for the work under these sections of the specifications shall inspect the existing installations and thoroughly acquaint themselves with conditions to be met and the work to be accomplished in removing and modifying the existing work, and in installing the new work in the present building and underground serving to and from that structure. Failure to comply with this shall not constitute grounds for any additional payments in connection with removing or modifying any part of the existing installations and/or installing any new work. 1.05 ELECTRICAL WIRING: A. All electric wiring, except for temperature controls, will be done under Division 16 of these specifications. The Contractor for each section shall erect all his motors in place ready for connections. The Contractor, under Division 16, shall mount all the starters and controls, furnishing the supporting structures and any required outlet boxes. 15000-3 r i B. Every electrical current consuming device furnished as a part of this project, or furnished by the Owner and installed in this project, shall be completely wired up under Division 16. Verification of exact location, method of connection, number and size of wires required, voltage requirements, and phase requirements is the responsibility of the Contractor under Division 16. If conflicts occur between the drawings and the actual requirements, actual requirements shall govern. 1.06 MOTORS AND CONTROLS: A. All motors furnished under any of the several sections of these specifications shall be of recognized manufacture, of adequate capacity for the loads involved and wound for the current characteristics shown on the electrical drawings. All motors shall conform to the standards of manufacture and performance of the National Electrical Manufacturers' Association as shown in their latest publications. They shall further be listed by Underwriters Laboratories. B. Unless otherwise noted, the Contractor under Division 16 shall furnish each motor with a starter and all controls of the types specified or required. These starters shall be of the totally enclosed type, of capacity rating within the required limits of the motors which they are to serve, shall be suitable for the motor current characteristics and shall provide thermal overload protection. All starters shall be standard of manufacture and performance of the National Electrical Manufacturers' Association. They further shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories. Provide overload protection in each phase wire. 1.07 MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS: A. All manufactured articles shall be applied, installed and handled as recommended by the manufacturer. 1.08 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP: A. All materials shall be new unless otherwise specified and of the quality specified. Materials shall be free from defects. All materials of a type for which the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. have established a standard shall be listed by the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. and shall bear their label. B. Wherever the make of material or apparatus required is not definitely specified, the Contractor shall submit a sample to the Engineer before proceeding. C. The Engineer reserves the right to call for samples of any item of material offered in substitution, together with a sample of the specified material, when, in the Engineer's opinion, the quality of the material and/or the appearance is involved and it is deemed that an evaluation of the two materials may be better made by visual inspection. This shall be limited to lighting fixtures, wiring devices, plumbing brass, grilles, registers, ceiling outlets and similar items and shall not be applicable to major manufacturers' items of equipment. 15000-4 i r D. The Contractor shall be responsible for transportation of his l materials to and on the job, and shall be responsible for the storage and protection of these materials and work until the r final acceptance of the job. t E. The Contractor shall furnish all necessary scaffolding, tackle, tools and appurtenances of all kinds, and all labor required for r, the safe and expeditious execution of his contract. F. The workmanship shall in all respects be of the highest grade and all construction shall be done according to the best practice of the trade. 1.09 SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIAL: A. Unless noted otherwise, where a definite material or only one ,. manufacturer's name is mentioned in these specifications, it has been done in order to establish a standard. The product of the particular manufacturer mentioned is of satisfactory construction and any substitution must be of quality as good as ! or better than the named article. No substitution shall be made without review by the Engineer, who will be the sole judge of equality. B. The Contractor shall submit for approval a complete list of the materials he proposes to use. This list shall give manufacturers' names and designations corresponding to each and r,.. every item and the submission shall be accompanied by complete descriptive literature and/or any supplementary data, drawings, etc., necessary to give full and complete details. C. Should a substitution be accepted under the provisions of the conditions of these specifications, and should this substitute prove to be defective or otherwise unsatisfactory for the service for which it is intended within the guarantee period, rw the Contractor who originally requested the substitution shall replace the substitute material with the specified material. 1.10 SHOP DRAWINGS: A. Wherever shop drawings are called for in these specifications, they shall be furnished by the Contractor for the work involved after review by the Engineer as to the make and type of material and in sufficient time so that no delay or changes will be caused. This is done in order to facilitate progress on the job and failure on the part of the Contractor to comply shall render .� him liable to stand the expense of any and all delays, changes in construction, etc., occasioned by his failure to provide the necessary details. Also, if the Contractor fails to comply with this provision, the Engineer reserves the right to go directly to the manufacturer he selects and secure any details he might deem necessary and should there be any charges in connection with this, they shall be borne by the Contractor. B. Shop drawings will be reviewed by the Engineer for general compliance with the design concept of the project and general compliance with the information given in the contract r documents. Review by the Engineer and any action by the Engineer in marking shop drawings is subject to the requirements of the entire contract documents. Contractor will be held 15000-5 r responsible for quantities, dimensions which shall be confirmed and correlated at the job site, fabrication processes and techniques of construction, coordination of all trades and the satisfactory performance of his work. C. Shop drawings submitted shall not consist of manufacturers, catalogues or tear sheets therefrom that contain no indication of the exact item offered. Rather, the submission of individual items shall designate the exact item offered and shall clearly identify the item with the project. D. All shop drawings shall be submitted at one time and shall consist of a bound catalogue of all shop drawings under -each section, properly indexed and certified that they have been checked by the Contractor. E. The omissions of any material from the shop drawings which has been shown on the contract drawings or specified, even though reviewed by the Engineer, shall not relieve the Contractor from furnishing and erecting same. 1.11 PROTECTION OF APPARATUS: A. The Contractor shall at all times take such precautions as may be necessary to properly protect his new apparatus from damage. This shall include the erection of all required temporary shelters to adequately protect any apparatus stored in the open on the site, the cribbing of any apparatus above the floor of the construction, and the covering of apparatus in the incompleted building with tarpaulins or other protective covering. Failure on the part of the Contractor to comply with the above to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer will be sufficient cause for the rejection of the pieces of apparatus in question. 1.12 PERMITS, FEES, ETC.: A. The Contractor under each section of these specifications shall arrange for a building permit from the City of Lubbock for record purposes. In as much as all utilities at the site are owned by the City, there are no connection fees. If any charges are made by any of the utility companies serving the facility due to work on this project, the Contractor shall pay these charges. The Contractor shall pay for any inspection fees or other fees and charges required by ordinance, law, codes or these specifications. 1.13 TESTING: A. The Contractor under each division shall at his own expense perform the various tests as specified and required by the Engineer and as required by the State and local authorities. The Contractor shall furnish all fuel and materials necessary for making tests. 1.14 LAWS, CODES AND ORDINANCES: A. All work shall be executed in strict accordance with all local, state and national codes, ordinances and regulations governing the particular class of work involved, as interpreted by the inspecting authority. The Contractor shall be responsible for the final execution of the work under this heading to suit those 15000-6 r requirements. Where these specifications and the accompanying drawings conflict with these requirements, the Contractor shall report the matter to the Engineer, shall prepare any .- supplemental drawings required illustrating how the work may be installed so as to comply and, on approval, make the: changes at no cost to the Owner. On completion of the various portions of the work the installation shall be tested by the constituted r' authorities, approved and, on completion of the word:, the Contractor shall obtain and deliver to the Owner a final certificate of acceptance. 1.15 TERMINOLOGY: A. Whenever the words "furnish", "provide", "furnish and install," r. "provide and install', and/or similar phrases occur, it is the intent that the materials and equipment described be furnished, installed and connected under this Division of the Specifications, complete for operation unless specifically noted to the contrary. B. Where a material is described in detail, listed by catalogue number or otherwise called for, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to furnish and install the material. j C. The use of the word "shall" conveys a mandatory condition to the contract. r.. D. "This section" always refers to the section in which the statement occurs. E. "The project" includes all work in progress during the construction period. r F. "Concealed" areas are those areas which cannot be seen by the building occupants from the floor with all building components in place. r G. "Exposed" areas are all areas which are exposed to view by the building occupants, including mechanical rooms. H. In describing the various items of equipment, in general, each item will be described singularly, even though there may be a ? multiplicity of identical or similar items. 1.16 COOPERATION AND CLEANING UP: A. The contractor for the work under each section of these specifications shall coordinate his work with the work described in all other sections of the specifications to the end that, as a whole, the job shall be a finished one of its kind, and shall carry on his work in such a manner that none of the work under any section of these specifications shall be handicapped, hindered or delayed at any time. B. At all times during the progress of the work, the Contractor shall keep the premises clean and free of unnecessary materials and debris. The Contractor shall, on direction at any time from the Engineer, clear any designated areas or area of materials and debris. On completion of any portion of the work, the Contractor shall remove from the premises all tools and machinery and all debris occasioned by the work, leaving the premises free of all obstructions and hindrances. 15000-7 1.17 CUTTING AND PATCHING: A. All cutting and patching for work under Divisions 15 and 16 shall be done by the Contractor under the section for which the trade is specified. 1.18 PAINTING: A. All painting shall be done by the Contractor under Division 9. Following is a general outline of the required work for Divisions 15 and 16. 1. When the factory finish on any apparatus or equipment is marred, it shall be touched up and then given one coat of half flat half enamel, followed by a coat of machinery enamel of a color to match the original. Paint factory primed surfaces. 2. Paint all new exposed pipe, conduit, boxes, cabinets, hangers and supports and miscellaneous metal. 3. Paint all new exposed sheet metal to match existing. 4. Paint all new insulated surfaces exposed to view, including piping, equipment, etc. Size surfaces until a smooth, non grainy surface is obtained. 5. Generally, painting is required on all surfaces such that no exposed bare metal or insulation surface is visible. 1.19 SEALING AROUND PIPES, CONDUITS, DUCTS, ETC.: A. The Contractor installing pipes, conduits, ducts, etc. shall seal all spaces between pipes and/or sleeves where they pierce walls, partitions or floors with Dow Corning No. 2000 fire resistant caulk. The packing shall effect a complete fire and/or air seal where pipes, conduits, ducts, etc., pierce walls, floors or partitions. 1.20 OWNERS OCCUPANCY: A. It shall be understood that the building in which the work is to be done is a necessary part of the Owner's operation, and shall continue in use throughout the construction period without interruption. Take all precautions required by the Owner for the protection of his equipment and property. B. Contractor shall cooperate with the owner in scheduling areas in which work is permitted. Owners schedule will govern. 1.21 SCHEDULE OF WORK: A. The Contractor shall program his work in such manner as to interfere as little as possible with the normal routine of the Owner. It must be understood that the Owner will continue to function throughout the construction period. All water, electrical and sanitary facilities shall therefore be continued in operation with a minimum of interruption and the Contractor shall make any temporary connections necessary to comply with this requirement. 15000-8 r 1.22 RELOCATION OF EXISTING INSTALLATIONS: A. There are portions of the existing plumbing system, r- heating, ventilating and air conditioning system and electrical system which shall remain in use to serve: the finished building in conjunction with the indicated new installations. By actual examination at the site, each f -bidder shall determine those portions of the remaining l present installations which must be relocated to avoid interferences with the installations of new work of his r^ particular trade and that of all other trades. All such existing installations which interfere with new installations shall be relocated by the Contractor under the Division in which the existing material normally belongs, and in a manner as directed by the Engineer.. For example: 1. Existing plumbing piping, etc. shall be relocated under Division 15 where it interferes with the installation of new work. 2. Where existing piping, ductwork, etc. interferes with �^ the installation of new work, it shall be relocated l under Division 15. 3. Where existing conduit and electrical equipment interferes with the installation of new work, it shall be relocated under Division 16. B. Failure to become familiar with the extent of the relocation work involved shall not relieve the Contractor rof responsibility and shall not be used as a basis for additional compensation. r 1.23 SALVAGE MATERIALS: A. The Contractor shall remove existing equipment, piping, duct, grilles, conduit, wire, junction boxes, light fixtures and other items associated with the mechanical, plumbing and electrical systems where shown on the drawings. Where such items are exposed to view or uncovered by any cutting or removal of general construction and has no continuing function (as determined by the Engineer), they shall be removed by the contractor under the section in which the item normally �. falls. B. Unless noted otherwise, existing items (see above) where concealed in/above construction which is not disturbed, abandon in place. Plug, cap, disconnect or otherwise render harmless all such items. C. All items or materials removed from the project shall be made available for the Owner's inspection. The Owner retains the option to claim any item or material. FKlllllm Contractor shall deliver any claimed item or material in good condition to the place designated by the Owner. All item not claimed become the property of the contractor and shall be removed from the site. 1.24 INSTALLATION DRAWINGS: A. It shall be incumbent upon the Contractor to prepare special drawings as called for elsewhere herein or as directed by the Engineer to coordinate the work under each section, to illustrate changes in his work, to facilitate its concealment in finished spaces to avoid obstructions or to illustrate the adaptability of any item of equipment which he proposes to use. B. These drawings shall be used in the field for the actual installation of the work. Unless otherwise directed, they shall not be submitted for approval but three copies shall be provided to the Engineer for his information. 1.25 ROUGH -IN AND MAKE FINAL CONNECTION FOR EQUIPMENT: A. The shop drawings for all equipment are hereby made a part of these specifications. The Contractor under each section of the specifications shall rough -in for the exact item to be furnished on the job, whether in another section of the specifications or by the Owner. The Contractor shall refer to all drawings and other sections of the specifications for the scope of work involved for the new equipment, and by actual site examination determine the scope of the required equipment connections for the Owner furnished equipment. B. Should any of the equipment furnished require connections of a nature different from that shown on the drawings, report the matter to the Engineer and finally connect as directed by the Engineer. C. Should any shop drawings not be available for equipment furnished under other contracts or by the Owner, the Contractor under each section of these specifications shall bid the work as detailed on the drawings. D. Minor differences in the equipment furnished and that indicated on the drawings will not constitute ground for additional payment to the Contractor. 1.26 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS: A. The Contractor for each section of the work hereunder shall, in cooperation with the representatives of the manufacturers of the various equipment items, carefully instruct the Owner's representatives in the proper operation of each item of equipment and of each system. During the balancing and adjusting of systems, the Owner's representative shall be made familiar with all procedures. 15000-10 i 1.27 OPERATING MANUALS: A. Prepare and submit 3 copies of the operating manuals bound in hard covers. Three weeks prior to completion of r the work, the Engineer will check the manuals and any additional material necessary to complete the manuals shall be furnished and inserted by the Contractor. B. Manuals shall contain the following data: r' 1. Catalogue data of all equipment. 2. Shop drawings of all equipment. 3. Temperature control drawings (reduced in size) 4. Start-up instructions for major equipment. 5. Trouble shooting procedures for major equipment. 6. Wiring diagrams. �., 7. Recommended maintenance schedule for equipment. S. Parts list for all items. 9. Name and address of each vendor. 10. List of fuse sizes required for equipment. 1.28 GUARANTEE: A. Unless a longer guarantee is hereinafter called for, all work, material and equipment items shall be guaranteed for a period of one year after acceptance by the Owner. All defects in labor and materials occurring during this period, as determined by the Engineer, shall be repaired and/or replaced to the complete satisfaction of the Engineer. Guarantee shall be in writing and in rtriplicate. i 1.29 COMPLETION REQUIREMENTS: A. Before acceptance and final payment the Contractor under .• each Division of the specifications shall furnish: 1. Accurate record drawings, shown in red ink on blue line prints furnished for that purpose all changes from the original plans made during installation of the work. Drawings shall be filed with the Engineer when the work is completed. 2. All manufacturers' guarantees. 3. All operating manuals. 4. Guarantees. r 5. Test and Balance Report. 0 1.30 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR FINAL INSPECTION: A. Before calling for the final inspection, the Contractor under each Division shall carefully inspect his work to be sure it is complete and according to plans and specifications. End of Section 15000-11 r r r SECTION 15200 - PIPING AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 NOTE: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to -work of.this section. 1.02 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.03 SCOPE: A. This section of the specifications pertains to all labor, r' materials, equipment and service necessary for and incidental to the piping and accessories as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein. 1.04 INSPECTION: A. All pipe, valves, fittings, and other accessories shall be inspected upon delivery and during the course of the: work. Any defective materials found during field inspection or. during ' hydrostatic and leakage tests shall be removed from the site of the work and replaced by the Contractor. I 1.05 PROTECTION DURING STORAGE: A. The interior of all pipe, fittings, and other accessories shall be kept free from dirt and foreign matter at all times. Valves r and fittings shall be drained and stored in a manner that will protect them from damage by freezing. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. All materials shall be manufactured or fabricated in the United States of America. B. Materials shall conform to the listed standards. Refer to r- specific sections for materials to be used under that section. The following tabulation is for reference only to identify the applicable standard. Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Push On Gaskets for C.I. Soil Pipe Caulked Joints for C.I. Soil Pipe No Hub Joints 15200-1 r ASTM A74, Class SV ASTM C564 Fed. Spec. HH-P-117 Type II ASTM D3183 Copper Tubing Wrought Copper Solder Fittings Cast Bronze Solder Fittings Steel Pipe Butt Weld Fittings Socket Weld Fittings Steel Flanges Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings Cast Iron Threaded Fittings Flange Bolt, Sets PVC Water Pipe Push on Joints for PVC Water Pipe ASTM B75-76 ANSI B16.22 ANSI B16.18 ASTM A53B ANSI B16.9 ANSI B16.11 ANSI B16.5 ANSI B16.3 Fed. Spec. WW-P-501E ASME Pressure Piping ASTM D1584 Type 1120 ASTM D1585, AWWA C900 C. Unions in Ferrous Lines: 150 pound malleable iron, screwed pattern, ground joint with brass to iron seat; equal to Crane. D. Insulating Fittings: Equal to Clear Flow fitting designed to meet requirements of ASTM F-492. E. Unions in Copper or Brass Lines: 125 pound all brass, screwed pattern, bround joint, equal to Chase, Crane or Mueller. F. Mechanical Couplings: Victaulic Style 77 2.02 VALVES: A. General Service Valves: 3" and smaller, all bronze, screwed body, malleable handle, square stem top; 3-1/2" and larger, flanged, iron body, bronze trimmed, equal to the following Crane Nos: Type Fluid Pressure Below 125 PSIG Gate 3" and smaller 428 Gate 3-1/2" and larger 465-1/2 Globe 3" and smaller 1 Globe 3-1/2" and larger 351 B. Where valves have discs, select the discs for the intended service using materials as recommended by the valve manufacturer. C. Acceptable General Service Valve Manufacturers: Stockham, Jenkins, OIC, Walworth, Hammond. D. Check Valves: Use "Silent" check valves at the discharge of circulating water pumps. Unless specifically noted to the contrary, use horizontal swing check valves in all other locations. E. Silent Check Valves 1-1/2" and Smaller: Bronze body; bronze trim; stainless steel spring; equal to Combination Pump Valve Company No. 36. F. Silent Check Valves 2" and Larger: Iron body, bronze trim, stainless steel spring, equal to Combination Pump Valve Company No. 10B or 20B up to 125 psi 11B, or 21B up to 250 psig. G. Swing Check Valves 2" and Smaller: All bronze screwed, equal to Crane No. 37 for pressures to 125 psi or No. 36 for pressures to 200 psi SWP or 400 PSI WOG. 15200-2 7 H. Swing Check Valves 2-1/2" and Larger: Iron body, flanged, bronze trimmed; equal to Crane No. 373 for pressures to 125 psi or No. 39E for pressures from 125 psi to 250 psi. r.. I. Butterfly Valves: Ductile iron body, flanged or with drilled and tapped lugs, bronze discs, stainless steel shafts with bronze bushings, resilient EPDM seats and 0-rings, "Bubble Tight" shut-off at 150 psi pressure. On valves 4" and smaller, handle shall -be infinite position with memory stops. On valves 6" and larger, provide geared operators. Norris, Keystone, Center Line, Demco or Crane valves are acceptable. Mechanical coupling valves equal to Victaulic "Vic-300" are acceptable. J. Ball Valves: Bronze threaded body, chrome plated full port bronze ball, teflon seats and 0-rings, bronze shafts, and �,.. infinite position handle with memory stops. Valve shall be three piece break away for in -line service. Furnish stem ` extensions in insulated lines. Apollo, Crane, Jamesbury and Stockham are acceptable. K. Gas Valves: Iron body, lubricated plug valves equal to j Nordstrom Fig. 143 in sizes 2-1/2" and larger. Valves 2" and smaller equal to Crane No. 270 threaded gas stop. 2.03 PIPE FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS: A. Flexible connections shall be molded expansion joints as manufactured by Proco Series 240. Construction shall include neoprene cover and tube elastomer, retaining flanges and control rod plate. 2.04 AUTOMATIC AIR VENTS: 7 A. ASME labeled; equal to Hoffman No. 78 cast brass body (150 psig) on pipe sizes 3" and smaller; Hoffman No. 792 cast iron body (250 psig) on pipe sizes 4" and larger. Crane and Sarco acceptable. Pipe discharge to a floor drain or as directed. 2.05 STRAINERS: r A. Pump Inlets: Y-pattern Muellar Steam Specialty Type 761. At Contractor's option, y-pattern Muellar Steam Specialty Type 752C with grooved ends for Mechanical couplings. Provide blowdown valves and Type 304 stainless steel screens. i B. Coil Inlet Strainers: 2-1/2" and smaller, Muellar Steam Specialty #251-DI; 250 psig, cast iron, screwed end with 20 mesh r.. type 304 stainless steel screen. Provide blowoff valves. 3" and larger, Muellar Steam Specialty #758, 200 psig, cast iron, flanged, with 20 mesh type 304 stainless steel screen. Provide blowoff valves. Hoffman acceptable. r" C. Domestic Water Application: Muellar Steam Specialty #351, 200 P psig, bronze, screwed end, with 20 mesh type 304 stainless.steel screens. Provide blowoff valves. Hoffman acceptable. 2.06 AUTOMATIC FLOW CONTROL VALVES: A. The Contractor shall install automatic pressure compensating r. flow control valves at each chilled water coil, heating water coil and elsewhere as shown on the drawings. Valves shall have the capacities indicated on the drawings. Valves shall be as manufactured by Autoflow or Griswold. r 15200-3 r• B. Valves shall be factory set and shall automatically limit the rate of flow to required engineered capacity within plus or minus 5% accuracy over a 3# to 40# differential range. C. The control mechanism of the valve shall consist of a self-contained, open -chamber cartridge assembly with unobstructed flow passages that eliminate accumulation of particles and debris. All internal working parts shall be type 300 passivated stainless steel: No plates materials are acceptable. D. The type 300 passivated stainless steel cartridge assembly shall consist of a spring -loaded cup. The cup shall be guided at two points and shall utilize the full available differential pressure across the valve to actuate the cup and thereby reduce friction and hysterisis and eliminate binding. It shall have a thin orifice plate for self cleaning of the variable inlet ports over the full control range. E. Cast iron valve bodies shall be provided with inlet and outlet tappings suitable for connection of instruments for verification of flow rates. Valve bodies shall be rated for use at not less than 150% of system designed operating pressures. F. Certified performance data for the flow control valve, based on independent laboratory tests, supervised and witnessed by a registered professional engineer, shall be available. G. All flow control valves shall be supplied by a single source responsiblity. H. Provide a metal identification tag, with chain, for each installed valve. The tag to be marked with unit identification, valve model number and rated flow in GPM. I. Flow control valves serving small coils or other applications and scheduled as Autoflow FV series shall have an integral ball shutoff valve and at least one temperature and pressure test port, with screwed ends. J. Flow control valves serving large coils or other applications and scheduled as Autoflow GE series shall have two pressure/temperature test ports with extensions to extend through insulation. Valves shall have grooved ends for installation with mechanical couplings. At Contractor's option, Autoflow BR series with screwed ends may be used on sizes 3" and smaller. 2.07 VENTURI FLAW MEASURING DEVICE: (SMALL COILS) A. Provide where shown on the drawings a combination ball valve/Venturi flow measuring device for use to verify flow rates of automatic flow control valves. B. The ball valve/indicator device shall have an integral 300 lb. rated shutoff stainless steel ball valve. The venturi section shall have combination pressure/temperature test ports and unions. Indicators shall be furnished with chained metal tag showing location, size, and GPM. C. Provide a Meter Kit with readout instrumentation to include a pressure gauge, thermometer, a 6" face differential pressure meter with hoses, connections and pressure taps. Provide transparent meter faces to read flow directly in GPM for all valve sizes. The entire kit shall be contained in a single carrying case. 15200-4 r�- r D. The ball valve/indicator device shall be as manufactured by Flowset or approved equal. E. The following items of equipment shall receive this type flow measuring device: 1. Existing unit heaters (9) 2. Existing door heaters (24) 3. Preheat coil in boiler room 4. Heating water and chilled water at fan coil units 5. Heating water and chilled water at blower coil units. 6. Heating water bypass at AHU-3 and AHU-11 7. Chilled water bypass at AHU-3 and AHU-11 8. AHU-4, Zone 1 & 2 - heating water 9. AHU-10, Zone 1 & 2 - heating water I' 2.08 FLOW MEASURING DEVICES: (LARGE COILS, SYSTEM PIPING) A. Furnish and install Venturis as shown on drawings. B. Venturis shall have a maximum pressure drop of .8 ft. Venturis 1-1/4" thru 2" brass screwed, 2-1/2" and over for butt welding to piping. Nipples, valves and disconnects to be included with each venturi. C. Venturis shall be Gerand, Barco or Robertson with compatible meter. D. Each flow measuring device shall be furnished with a permanent meter equal to Annubar Eagle Eye. Meters shall read directly in GPM. Each mechanical room shall have a 14 gauge surface mounted enclosure in which the flow meters in that space shall be flush mounted in the door. The door shall be hinged and lockable. r' Tubing within the enclosure shall be polyethylene and shall be neatly fastened along the hinge side and protected against abrasion. Each meter shall be identified by engraved formica nameplates (white letters on black background) under each meter. Nameplates shall indicate design GPM flow rate. E. Provide a permanent metal identification tag attached to each instrument. F. Provide one portable Eagle Eye model 77C flow meter in a I portable case, including tubing, a complete set of direct reading scales, filter, and heat seal valve. Meter shall be 6" r scale with dampener, zero adjustment, bleed valves, and equalizing valves. All wetted parts shall be stainless steel. Accuracy of the meter shall be 1.5% of flow. G. The following items of equipment shall receive this type flow measuring device: 1. Chilled water system piping, pumps and chillers as shown on the drawings. r 2. Heating water system piping, pumps and boilers as shown on i the drawings. 3. Cooling coils at RTU-1 thru RTU-8. 4. Cooling coils at AHU-4, AHU-5, AHU-6, AHU-7, AHU-9, AHU-10. 5. Heating coils at AHU-5, AHU-6, AHU-7, AHU-9. ` 6. Heating coils at RTU-1 thru RTU-8. 15200-5 2.09 GAUGE COCKS AND GAUGES: A. Where gauge connections are installed in insulated lines, install a ConBraCo No. 41-380 T-handle gauge cock on a nipple of sufficient length that the cock handle will be free of the pipe _ insulation, and position each cock in relation to surrounding piping and equipment so that the gauge may be easily read, and so that a gauge having a 6" diameter dial can be screwed into and out of the cock. B. Install gauge cocks at pumps as close to pump suction and discharge connections as possible. Where drilled and tapped gauge connections are provided in the pump casing by the — manufacturer, use these tappings. C. Pressure Gauges: Phosphor bronze, seamless Bourdon spring type with phosphor bronze bushed rotary movement and link; 4-1/2" — dial, nickel plated ring, free standing cast aluminum case; equipped with micrometer adjustment pointer. Furnish each gauge with scale range suitable for the duty. D. Water Pressure Gauges: Equal to Weksler No. BA14-I with cast aluminum case; Weksler, Weiss, and Trerice acceptable. 2.10 THERMOMETER WELLS: A. Furnish and install brass or stainless steel closed separable thermometer wells for all thermometer and controller bulbs which are designated for liquid measurements. Whenever a thermometer or controller bulb is inserted in a pipe for either remote or local temperature indication or control, locate the thermometer well so that it will be completely surrounded by flowing fluid. Such thermometer locations as shown on the drawings are diagrammatic only -install thermometer wells for maximum effectiveness and in the case of locally indicating instruments, for easy readability. 2.11 TEST WELLS: A. Test wells for use with etched stem thermometers shall be Bolton No. 615 brass, with a threaded brass plug and keeper chain. Install these test wells so that they can be filled with oil to facilitate temperature measurements. 2.12 MERCURIAL THERMOMETERS: A. Industrial type with Cycolac plastic cases, glass fronts, 9" scale, adjustable straight or angle pattern as required for ready readability. Furnish thermometers with 2-1/2" stem extensions where they are installed in insulated lines. Select scale ranges for maximum readability at the design temperature of the medium being measured. Thermometer equal to Weksler No. AA5H9. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Weksler, Trerice, Weiss, Moeller. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS: A. Install runs of piping essentially as indicated on the drawings and/or as required. The location, direction and size of the various lines are indicated on the drawings. 15200-6 r r B. Make up all systems straight and true and properly graded for correct flow of contained materials and to provide drainage. Cut pipes accurately to measurements established at the building and work into place without forcing or springing. Except as required for specified grading, run all piping above: ground parallel with the lines of the building. C. Make all changes in pipe sizes with reducing fittings. Use no i long screws or bushings. D. Install and support piping systems with loops, bends, expansion joints and/or flexible connectors as required for flexibility, t" to accommodate expansion and contraction of piping due to temperature changes in the contained fluids and in the surrounding space, and to minimize the transmission of vibration r� to the building structure. E. Provide unions in the lines assembled with screwed and soldered fittings, at points of connection to equipment, and elsewhere as indicated or required to permit proper connections to be made, or to permit valves, equipment items, etc, to be removed. Provide unions also in welded lines at connections to equipment where flanges are not provided. Provide insulating unions where ferrous material joins non-ferrous material. ! F. In piping systems assembled by welding, use factory -fabricated welding fittings of the same material and the same schedule or weight as the piping in which they are installed, except that branches or take -offs of sizes not exceeding 2/3 of the nominal diameter of the mains may be made with Bonney Weldolets or Thredolets. Mitering of pipe to form elbows, notching of r straight runs to form tees, and any similar construction will not be permitted. G. In general, use listed materials in fabricating the various piping systems. The method of assembly may be varied only to meet special conditions where it is impossible to comply with the specified method of joining piping. Where special classes r, of piping are involved and are not listed, request exact instructions as to the class of material involved and the method of fabricating it before ordering materials. 3.02 ESCUTCHEONS, CEILING PLATES: A. Except as otherwise noted provide and install concealed hinge, chrome plated escutcheons or ceiling plates with spring catches P► around each pipe passing through any wall, floor, or ceiling in any space, except in underfloor and attic spaces. Plates shall be sized to fit snugly against the outside of the pipe, or against the outside of the insulation on lines which are insulated. B. No floor plates will be required around the iron pipe sleeves on exterior walls. 3.03 FABRICATION OF PIPE JOINTS: A. Threaded Pipes: Ream and deburr pipe after it is cut and before r it is threaded. Stand each pipe on one end and hammer to remove i all foreign material. Full cut threads, but not more than 3 pipe threads shall remain exposed when joint is completed. Make r r 15200-7 r up joints with graphite and oil or an approved graphite compound applied to male threads only. Caulking of threaded joints to stop or prevent leaks is prohibited. B. Copper Tubing: Cut tubing square and deburr. Clean insides of fittings and outsides of tubing with sand cloth before assembly. Exercise care to prevent annealing of fittings on hard drawn tubing. Make all joints with solid string or wire solder, using non -corrosive paste flux of the proper type -for each application. No cored solder will be permitted. Use 95-5 solder for all copper tubing, 95% tin, 5% antimony. C. Welded Joints: Make all welded joints by the metallic arc process. Use base material conforming to ANSI B31.1 for welded pipe ASTM A106 and ASTM A53. Use filler material conforming to ASTM A233 and in accordance with ANSI B31.1. Machine the ends of the material to be joined or gas cut. Make the cut smooth in order that good fit can be made and a full penetration weld made. Use direct current for welding with the electrode positive. Limit the depth of deposit to 1/8" per pass. Remove all slag or flux remaining on any bead of welding before laying down the next successive bead of welding. Remove any cracks or blow holes that appear on the surface of any bead of welding by chipping or grinding before depositing the next successive bead of welding. D. Mechanical Couplings: Mechanical couplings and fittings shall be used to connect mechanical equipment and piping systems where specified. Couplings shall be equal to Victaulic Style 77 with housing fabricated in two or more parts of malleable iron castings, in accordance with Federal Specification AA-1-666C Grade 11. Couplings gasket shall be equal to Victaulic Grade "H" molded synthetic rubber, per ASTM D-735-61, Grade No. R615BZ. Coupling bolts shall be oval neck track head type with hexagonal heavy nuts, per ASTM-A-183-60. E. All pipe fittings used with couplings shall be fabricated of malleable iron castings in accordance with Federal Specification QQ-1-66C Grade 11. Where malleable fitting pattern is not available, fittings fabricated from Schedule 40 steel pipe or standard wall seamless welding fittings with grooved or rolled ends may be used. F. Before assembly of couplings, lightly coat pipe ends and outside of gaskets with coupling manufacturer's recommended lubricant to facilitate installation. G. Pipe grooving or rolling shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications contained in the latest published literature. H. Flanged Joints: Flanged joints shall be made using bolts and gaskets as specified. Faces of the flanges shall be cleaned of all dirt, rust or other foreign matter. The pipe, valve, or fitting shall be properly aligned and free to move while bolting, and the bolts shall be gradually tightened at a uniform rate around the entire flange. No strain shall be put on the flanges in making up the joint. 15200-8 i i r 3.04 REVISIONS AND RELOCATION OF EXISTING SYSTEMS: A. Where conflicts occur between the new work and the existing piping systems which cannot be resolved, the Contractor shall relocate the existing piping system. Relocated positions of ` piping shall be tested for new work. All piping systems shall be free from leaks. 3.05 REPAIR OF LEAKS: A. All leaks in piping systems shall be corrected as follows: r' 1. Repair leaks in solder joints by remaking the joint; no soldering or brazing over existing joints will be permitted. 2. Repair leaks in screwed joints by tightening the joint; r remake the joint if the tightening fails to stop the leak. E 3. Repair leaks in welded joints by removing the defective weld f completely through the base metal and grind smooth. Re -weld, accomplishing 100% penetration of the base metal. The repair weld should in no case be less than 4" in length. B. When any defect is repaired, retest that section of the system. +� 3.08 ALIGNMENT AND GRADES: A. General: All pipe shall be laid and maintained to the required lines and grades with fittings, valves, at the required r„ locations; spigots centered in bells; and all valve stems plumb. All pipe shall be installed straight and true to line. B. Deviations Occasioned by Other Structures: Whenever obstructions not shown on the plans are encountered during the progress of the work, the lines and/or grades shall be adjusted so to not interfere with existing obstructions. r 7 End of Section 15200-9 r t F r i r r SECTION 15210 - PLUMBING SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 NOTE: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.02 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.03 SCOPE: A. This section of the specifications requires the furnishing and installation of all equipment, labor, materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the installation of the plumbing systems. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Refer to Section "Piping and Accessories". B. Interior Sanitary Soil, Waste and Drain Lines: Piping shall be bell and spigot, service weight cast iron soil pipe and fittings, each heavily coated at the factory with asphalts or coal tar pitch and each having the manufacturer's mark or name and the date of manufacture cast on it. C.I. joints may be caulked or push -on. C. Sanitary Vent Lines: Vents in the sanitary system shall be service weight cast iron bell and spigot pipe and fittings for all lines 2" and larger and Type L copper for lines smaller than 2". C.I. joints may be caulked or push -on. Above grade, no -hub may be used. D. Domestic Water Lines (Hot, Cold and Recirculating): All interior water lines shall be Type L hard drawn copper tubing. Copper tubing shall be assembled using solder -joint fittings. E. Gas Lines: Schedule 40 black steel with 150 lb. banded malleable iron fittings. F. Drain Lines: Type L copper with solder joint fittings. 2.02 DRAINS: A. Provide all drains as scheduled. Wade, Josam or Zurn are acceptable. B. All floor drains shall have deep seal p-trap. Floor Drain FD'A' Fixture Wade No. W-1104-STD8 with flange, integral clamping collar, cast iron body, nickel bronze strainer. Floor Drain FD'B' Fixture Wade No. W-1744 with square cast iron hinged top, cast iron body, sediment bucket. 15210-1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS: A. Refer to PIPING AND ACCESSORIES for requirements for installing pipes. In addition, the following specifications shall apply. B. Drain Lines and Sanitary Waste: Grade down toward the sewer connection at a uniform slope of 1/4" per foot to serve individual fixtures or not less than 1/8" per foot to serve multiple stacks or outlets. Slope shall be greater where possible and shall never be less than required to produce a flow velocity of 2 feet per second. C. Gas Lines: All gas piping shall run exposed. D. A drip pocket shall be installed at connection to an item of equipment and at each low point of the gas distribution system. Grade all lines to drip pockets. Drip pockets shall consist of a nipple and cap screwed to the bottom of the drop. E. Provide a gas cock, union and gas pressure regulator at each connection to a gas consuming appliance. 3.02 TESTING: A. Test all pipes before they are concealed in furrings or chases insulated, painted, or otherwise covered up or rendered inaccessible. Accomplish testing by sections of lines or systems, as required by conditions during construction. Clean all piping and equipment before testing. B. Gas Lines: Test with 15 psig air pressure for 24 hours with no pressure drop (except for temperature correction). If any drop occurs, soap test all joints, correct leaks and retest. End of Section 15210-2 OM r, SECTION 15230 - CHILLED WATER SYSTEMS i ` PART 1 - GENERAL r 1.01 NOTE: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract. including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification " sections, apply to work of this section. 1.02 SUBMITTALS: .. A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. ` 1.03 SCOPE: A. This section of the specifications pertains to all labor, materials, equipment and service necessary for and incidental to the chilled water systems as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein. B. Install chilled water circulating piping complete and connect to coils, pumps, and other equipment. Include drain lines where shown or required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: r` A. Refer to Section "Piping and Accessories". i B. Chilled Water Lines: Standard weight black steel. Piping larger than 2" shall be assembled by mechanical couplings. r— Lines 2" and smaller may be screwed using malleable iron banded fittings. C. Drain Lines: Type L hard copper assembled with wrought copper solder joint fittings. PART 3 - EXECUTION r 3.01 INSTALLATION OF SYSTEMS: t A. Lay all water circulating lines on an even slope throughout to insure freedom from air locks and traps. Grade the system .• downward to the circulating pumps with valved drain connections from the low points to floor drains. Where additional low points are unavoidable, provide service drains to permit the complete drainage of the system. B. Provide automatic air vents at all high points of the system which may be isolated with the valves shown or required. Where horizontal mains change size, employ eccentric reducing couplings so installed as to keep the tops of coupled pipes on the same level. C. Install drains from each pump base and from each air unit pan to the nearest floor drain in each case. Drains are required for sections of circulating systems which may be isolated with the valves shown or required. Provide any other drain lines indicated on the drawings or required. D. Extend condensate drain lines from rooftop units to the nearest roof drain. i 15230-1 E. Install manual valves where required to segregate individual items of equipment or sections of circulating systems or where indicated on the drawings or required. F. Provide ball valve shutoffs and fire hose connection at a low point in the chiller room to drain the system. 3.02 CLEANING: A. Fill the new piping system with a solution consistingofeither one pound of caustic soda or three pounds of trisodium phosphate per 100 gallons of water. Eliminate all air and circulate this solution for 48 hours. Drain the system and thoroughly flush it with fresh water. Clean out all strainers. Refill the system with fresh water. B. Furnish temporary pump and bypass piping and valves as necessary. 3.03 TESTING: A. Before insulating or concealing any lines, test all new piping. Test all lines at 150% of the system working pressure or 100 psig, whichever is greater, for not less than 4 hours with no leaks. 3.04 CHEMICAL TREATMENT: A. The Contractor shall furnish the initial chemical treatment. Provide a water chemical analysis report to the Engineer indicating system condition after initial fill. End of Section 15230-2 0. SECTION 15235 - HEATING WATER SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 NOTE: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification 7 sections, apply to work of this section. i 1.02 SUBMITTALS: ow A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.03 SCOPE: A. This section of the specifications pertains to all labor, materials, equipment and service necessary for and incidental to i the heating water systems as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein. B. Install heating water circulating piping complete and connect to coils, pumps, and other equipment. Include drain lines where shown or required. t PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Refer to Section "Piping and Accessories". B. Heating Water Lines: Standard weight black steel. Piping larger than 2" shall be assembled by mechanical couplings. r Lines 2" and smaller may be screwed using malleable iron banded i fittings. C. Drain Lines: Type L hard copper assembled with wrought copper solder joint fittings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF SYSTEMS: A. Lay all water circulating lines on an even slope throughout to insure freedom from air locks and traps. Grade the system downward to the circulating pumps with valved drain connections from the low points to floor drains. Where additional low points are unavoidable, provide service drains to permit the complete drainage of the system. B. Provide automatic air vents at all high points of the system. Where horizontal mains change size, employ eccentric reducing couplings so installed as to keep the tops of coupled pipes on r the same level. C. Install manual valves where required to segregate individual items of equipment or sections of circulating systems or where !� indicated on the drawings or required. D. Provide ball valve shutoffs and fire hose connecting at a low point in the boiler room to drain the system. ! 3.02 CLEANING: A. The entire heating water system shall be thoroughly cleaned. Fill the system with a solution consisting of either one pound of caustic soda or three pounds of trisodium phosphate per 100 15235-1 poll gallons of water. Eliminate all air, heat to operating _ temperature, and circulate this solution for 48 hours. Drain the system and thoroughly flush it with fresh water. Clean out all strainers. Refill the system with fresh water. B. Furnish temporary pump and bypass piping and valves as necessary. 3.03 TESTING: A. Before insulating or concealing any lines, test all piping. Test all lines at 150% of the system working pressure or 100 psig, whichever is greater, for not less than 4 hours with no leaks. 3.04 CHEMICAL TREATMENT: A. The Contractor shall provide and install the initial chemical treatment. Provide chemical analysis report to Engineer indicating system condition after initial fill. End of Section 15235-2 7 F F lr 7 r i r i SECTION 15250 - CONDENSING WATER $YSTrM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 NOTE: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section., 1.02 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.03 SCOPE: A. This section of the specifications pertains to all labor, materials, equipment and service necessary for and incidental to the condensing water systems as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein. B. Install condensing water circulating piping complete and connect to tower, condenser, pumps, and other equipment. Include drain lines where shown or required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Refer to Section PIPING AND ACCESSORIES. B. Condensing Water Lines: Standard weight black steel. Use mechanical couplings on lines 4" and larger. Weld smaller lines. Lines 2" and smaller may be screwed using 150 lb. malleable iron banded fittings. C. Drain Lines: Type L hard copper tubing assembled with wrought copper solder joint fittings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF SYSTEMS: A. Lay all water circulating lines on an even slope throughout to insure freedom from air locks and traps. Grade the system downward to the circulating pumps, with valved drain connections from the low points to floor drains. Where additional low points are unavoidable, provide service drains to permit the complete drainage of the system. B. Install drains from the cooling tower pan to the nearest drain in each case. Provide any other drain lines indicated on the drawings or required. C. Install manual valves where required to segregate individual items of equipment or sections of circulating systems or where indicated on the drawings or required. D. Provide ball valve shutoffs and fire hose connections in the chiller room to drain the system. 3.02 CLEANING: A. Fill the system with a solution consisting of either one pound of caustic soda or three pounds of trisodium phosphate per 100 gallons of water. Eliminate all air and circulate this solution "M 15250-1 for 48 hours. Drain the system and thoroughly flush it with fresh water. Clean out all strainers. Refill the system with fresh water. 3.03 TESTING: A. Test all lines at 150% of the system working pressure or 100 psig whichever is greater, for not less than 4 hours with no leaks. 3.04 CHEMICAL TREATMENT: A. The Contractor shall provide and install the initial chemical treatment. Provide chemical analysis report to Engineer indicating system condition after initial fill. End of Section 15250-2 r i f" SECTION 15290 - MARKING AND IDENTIFICATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 NOTE: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.02 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.03 SCOPE: A. This section applies to piping systems used to transport gases, liquids or semi -liquids. The term "piping systems", includes pipes, fittings, valves and pipe: coverings located either inside or outside the buildings. This identification scheme does not apply to piping systems buried in the ground. 1.04 REFERENCES: A. Occupational Safety and Health Standards - Part 1910.144. B. Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems - ANSI A 13.1 C. Safety Color Code for Marking Physical Hazards - ANSI 253.1 1.05 METHOD OF IDENTIFICATION: A. The primary identification of a piping system shall be made by a positive identification of the material content 7 of the system by lettered legend, giving the name of the content in full or abbreviated form. This mark shall be conspicuously placed at frequent intervals on straight runs, close to all valves, at changes of direction and r where pipes pass through walls, floors or ceilings. Arrows shall be used to indicate direction of flow. B. The entire exposed length of any new piping system shall r" be painted white before application of any identification. C. In addition, the existing condensing water supply and r,. condensing water return piping in the chiller room and boiler room shall be painted white and properly marked. D. Markers shall be placed on piping at each connection to an item of equipment, at each pump, and on each drop to r an outlet. Markers shall be placed on each run of piping at intervals not exceeding 50 feet where exposed in a room and 25 feet when installed above removable ceilings, except that no exposed line shall enter a room without being identified therein. Markers on lines above removable ceilings shall be applied on the undersides of the lines and ducts and in other areas shall be applied to be most visible. Also supply directional flow indicators adjacent to identification markers similarly sized. r 15290-1 I E. Size of Identification: Outside Diameter Size of Legend of Pipe or Covering Letters (" Height) 3/4 to 1-1/4 1/2 1-1/2 to 2 3/4 2-1/2 to 6 1-1/4 8 to 10 2-1/2 Over 10 3-1/2 1.06 IDENTIFICATION: A. The Contractor shall provide and install, on each valve and cock which he installs, a Seton P-250 tag with depressed, black filled numbers and letters identifying the service by letters and the number of the valve. Each valve shall be numbered with the suffix '-90' so as not to conflict with any existing identification. Attach these to the handles of the valves and cocks using meter seals, approved brass S hooks, or heavy copper clad annealed iron wire. B. Furnish and install where directed a chart or directory listing the complete identification of every valve and cock. This chart shall designate class of service, and shall itemize the valve or cock identified, shall list its exact location, shall give its number, and shall be neatly typed and mounted under a glass pane in a suitable frame. 1.07 IDENTIFICATION AND LABELING: A. The Contractor shall make it possible for the personnel operating and maintaining the equipment and systems in this project to readily identify the various pieces of equipment, valves, piping, etc., by marking them. All items of equipment such as fans, pumps, etc., shall be clearly marked using engraved nameplates as hereinafter specified. The item of equipment shall indicate the same number as shown on the drawings. B. All items of mechanical and electrical equipment shall be identified by the attachment of engraved nameplates constructed from laminated phenolic plastic, at least 1/16" thick, 3-ply, with black surfaces and white core. Nameplates shall be secured with stainless steel screws. Engraving shall be condensed gothic, at least 1/2" high, appropriately spaced. Nomenclature on the label shall include the name of the item, its mark number, area, space, or equipment served, and other pertinent information. Equipment to be labeled shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Boilers 2. Chillers 3. Pumps 4. New AC Units 5. New Air Conditioning Control Panels and Switches 6. Miscellaneous - similar and/or related items 7. Cooling Towers End of Section 15290-2 r SECTION 15320 - AIR DISTRIBUTION + PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 NOTE: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.02 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.03 SCOPE: A. This section of the specifications comprises the furnishing of all labor, materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the: installation of ductwork, plenums, linings, air distribution devices, dampers and control devices, and other materials and accessories as described herein and/or as shown on the accompanying drawings, or reasonably implied therefrom. B. In addition, connect all air conditioning units, automatic dampers, filters and all other materials and install (and/or cooperate in the installation with other trades) those various items of equipment and materials. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 METAL DUCTWORK: A. Except as otherwise specified herein, in other sections of the specifications, and/or noted on the drawings, low pressure ducts shall be constructed of galvanized steel sheets in accordance with the recommended construction for low pressure ductwork insofar as gauges of metal to be used, bracing of joints and joint construction as established in HVAC DUCT CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS, First Edition, as published by Sheetmetal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA). B. Unless indicated otherwise, all duct shall be constructed in conformance with 1" w.g. pressure class. C. Make square elbows where shown or required, with factory -fabricated turning vanes. Make all other changes in direction with rounded elbows having a centerline radius equal to 1-1/2 times the width of the duct in the plane of the bend. D. Make transformations in duct shape or dimension with gradual slopes on all sides. Make increases in dimensions in the direction of air flow, with a maximum slope of 1" in 7" on any side. Make decreases in dimensions in the direction of air flow preferably with a slope of 1" in 7" on any side, but with a maximum slope of 1" in 4" where conditions necessitate. E. Ducts shall be routed in conjunction with pipes, electrical conduits, ceiling hangers, etc. so as to avoid interferences insofar as possible. Where duct penetrations are unavoidable, provide streamline shaped sleeves around such material penetrations, made airtight at duct surfaces, except that such 7 15320-1 r� sleeves are not required at tie rods. Where obstructions are of a size to exceed 10% of the duct area, the duct shall be transformed to maintain the same duct area. F. Transverse duct joints 36" and larger shall be made with The — Ductmate System or an approved equal. The Ductmate System components shall be of standard catalogue manufacture as supplied by Ductmate Industries, Inc. G. The installation of The Ductmate System shall be in accordance with the manufacturers printed instruction and installation manuals. H. The standard Ductmate 35 System joint is the equivalent of a — SMACNA "J" connection. The Ductmate 25 System joint is the equivalent of a SMACNA "F" connection. Construction of the duct, such as gauge, reinforcing, etc., shall be as indicated in _ the addendum to the SMACNA manuals as provided by the manufacturer and as tested by Pittsburgh Testing Laboratory. 2.02 DUCT LINER: A. All sheet metal supply, return, and fresh air duct shall be lined. B. The listed ducts shall be lined to a thickness of 1" with Mansville "Linacoustic" mat faced duct liner, or equal duct liner coated with neoprene on one side. C. Duct liner shall have an average thermal conductivity of .26 _ btu-in./sq. ft.-degree F. at a mean temperature of 75 F. D. The duct liner shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations with the coated side away from the metal, using weld pins or adhesive Tuffbond and adhesive type metal clips, Gemco, or equal, of the type which do not protrude through the duct. The size of the ducts indicated are actual internal sizes and the sheet metal sizes shall be 2" greater in both dimensions to accommodate the lining. No voids are permitted. E. Use 100% adhesive coverage and clips at the rate as specified by SMACNA. — 2.03 DUCT SEALER: A. All supply air ductwork shall be sealed to provide airtight — construction. Metal surfaces to be joined shall be clean, dry and free of dirt or grease. Apply a heavy coat of Kingco Seal -Rite 18-120 to the interior metal surface of the slip — joint, then interlock into place metal duct sections. Apply a heavy coat of 18-120 to the exterior metal surface duct joint, making sure any voids are filled to secure a continuous air pressure sealant. B. Allow sealant to dry a minimum of 48 hours before pressurizing system. C. Blue Glue or Hardcast will be considered equal. — 2.04 AIR CONTROL DEVICES: A. Manual dampers shall be installed as required to afford complete control of the air flow in the various duct systems. In rectangular supply ducts, a splitter damper shall be installed 15320-2 at each point where a branch is taken off and additional volume dampers shall be installed where shown or required to achieve the final air balance. B. Volume dampers of the "butterfly" type shall be constructed of 20 gauge galvanized steel riveted or welded to sgUSLre operating ` rods. Dampers shall have bearings of brass, bronze: or approved plastic in most instances. The length of any splitter damper " blade shall'be 1-1/2 times the width of the smaller split in the t duct, but shall be not less than 12". Volume dampers of the butterfly type shall be used only in cases where neither r' dimension of the damper exceed 18". The metal used shall match that of duct system containing the damper in each case. Use special metals for damper rods and bearings as required to �. resist corrosion. C. In cases where either dimension of the smaller branch duct ' exceeds 24", volume dampers shall be of the opposed blade type with blades linked together and controlled from a single point. r" They shall be constructed of No. 16 gauge steel either galvanized or with a baked enamel finish.' Dampers shall have brass, bronze or approved plastic sleeve bearings. Blades shall be not more than 12" in width and shall be opposed acting, and those for automatic dampers shall be fitted with felts to insure tight closure. Felts shall be both glued and riveted to the �., damper blades. Blades shall be mounted in suitable band or angle iron frames strongly braced to insure rigidity. l D. Each splitter or volume damper, unless specified for automatic operation, shall be fitted with an adjusting device having a r' locking mechanism. Wherever the ducts are rendered inaccessible behind non -removable ceilings or furrings, or other construction that is not easily removable to permit access to the ducts, the f- devices shall be equal to Young Regulator Co. No. 896 concealed air split regulators. On exposed or easily accessible ducts the adjusting devices shall be equal to Young No. 1 or No. 900 and shall be fastened to the ducts. E. Damper rods and operators on insulated ducts shall have extended i rods and stand off brackets. 2.05 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS: A. Provide sound isolating flexible connections between connecting ducts and the inlet and outlet of each fan. These connections r- shall in each case be long enough to permit a minimum separation of 3" between the duct and the fan or unit housing with at least ` 1" slack in the flexible material itself. B. The material shall be of a glass cloth type equal to 30 ounce Ventglas as manufactured by Ventfabrics. It shall be fire resistant, waterproof and mildew -resistant. 2.06 FIRE DAMPERS: A. Weighted fire dampers having bronze bearings and held open by fusible links shall be constructed and installed in accordance ,.. with the recommendations of the National Fire Protection Association as published in NFPA Bulletin 90A and applicable ordinances and the Building Code. All fire dampers shall have Underwriters' Laboratory labels. 15320-3 B. Specifically. fire dampers shall be provided at the points indicated on the drawings, where a duct penetrates a fire rated partition. They shall also be installed at any other location as required by applicable codes. Provide access panels in the duct and access doors in the ceiling or wall to service and test the damper. C. Furnish fire dampers with fusible links rated for 160 degrees F unless indicated otherwise. Fire dampers shall, be constructed of galvanized steel and shall be 1-1/2 hour rated unless noted otherwise. Blades shall be of the interlocking type. Fire dampers shall be suitable for either horizontal or vertical mounting as required and shall be furnished with factory fabricated sleeve minimum of two gauges heavier than connecting ductwork. D. Fire dampers in low pressure duct shall be equal to Ruskin IBD2, Style A. 2.07 ACCESS PANEL: A. Access doors of sufficient size shall be installed in ducts to permit servicing of contained equipment including fire extinguishing equipment, dampers, etc. Where those panels are in insulated ducts, they shall be double wall panels with material to match the lining and of the same thickness. In uninsulated ducts they shall be single wall construction. All access panels shall have No. 310 Ventlock catches and pulls, No. 260 hinges and No. 390 gaskets. At the Contractor's option, he may use "Sandwich" frameless access door as manufactured by Ductmate. B. Where access panels are not exposed or readily accessible above removable ceilings, provide access doors in the general construction. C. Each door providing access to fire dampers shall have a label with letters not less than 1/2" in height reading "FIRE DAMPER". 2.08 LOUVERS - FIXED: A. Provide louvers as shown and scheduled on the drawings. Provide with galvanized blades and frames to fit wall construction. Provide with inside insect screen on exhaust louvers and birdscreen on intake louvers. Units shall be factory finished. B. Dimensions shown are nominal. Coordinate exact dimensions with the general construction. End of Section 15320-4 SECTION 15330 - HANGERS AND'SUPObktS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 NOTE: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.02 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.03 SCOPE: A. The Contractor for the work covered by each section of the specifications shall furnish and install all hangers, supports and isolation required by pipe or equipment included in this work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Materials shall be provided for the support of all piping and equipment. The following tabulation lists materials suitable for this duty. Equal materials manufactured by Fee and Mason, Carpenter -Patterson, Grinnell or Modern will be considered. MATERIAL SERVICE FEE AND MASON CAT. Hanger Copper Tubing 4" and larger 364 copper plated Hanger Copper Tubing 3" and smaller 361 copper plated Hanger Steel Lines 3" and smaller 215 or 199 Hanger Steel lines 4" and larger 239 Hanger Outside Insulation -all lines 239 Pipe Clamps 2" and Smaller 304 Pipe Clamps 3" and Larger 241 Pipe Rest All 295 or 291 Pipe Rest All 295 or 291 Exp Shield Concrete 374 Adjuster All 2381 2.02 HANGER RODS: A. All individually suspended horizontal pipes shall be: supported by steel rods sized as follows: Rod Diameter Size of Steel pipe or Size of Cast Iron Copper Tube Supported Pipe Supported 3/8" 2-1/2" and smaller 3" and smaller 1/2" 3" and 4" 4" through 6" 5/81- 5" through 8" 8" through 10" 3/4" 10" and larger 12" and larger 15330-1 2.03 HANGER SPACING: A. All hangers shall be so located as to properly support horizontal lines without appreciable sagging of these lines. Locate a hanger within 12 inches of every elbow or tee. The following table gives minimum spacing for copper, and steel lines, but hangers shall be more closely spaced. Where necessitated by conditions or the type of pipe involved or requried by code. Size of Line Hanger Spacing in Feet 3/4" and smaller 5 1" through 1-1/2" 7 2" and larger 10 All cast iron lines 5 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTS: A. All pipes shall be adequately supported. All piping shall be installed with due regard to expansion and contraction, and the type of hanger, method of support, location of supports, etc. shall be governed in part by this consideration. Transmission of vibration and noise shall also be considered and any special suspension with vibration dampeners required to minimize transmissions shall be used where specified or required. B. All exposed vertical risers running near walls shall be supported from the walls. Each line shall have a minimum of 2 supports, not greater than 10'0" on centers, with the additional provision that there shall be a support near the top of the riser. All supports shall be aligned. C. All vertical pipes shall be supported with riser clamps sized to fit the lines and to adequately support their weight. At the bases of lines, where required for proper supports, furnish and install anchor base fittings or other approved supports. _ D. Where vertical lines run down to a point near the floor and a support is needed, they may be supported by means of a pipe leg welded to the pipe, extending down to the floor and terminating in a capped end resting on the floor. E. Where pipes other than those specified hereinbefore, are running along walls, they shall be supported using hangers as described hereinbefore, but suspended from brackets bolted to the wall. Specially fabricated clips or U-braces may be used where commercially manufactured items are not available in the proper size. F. Where pipes or equipment are suspended under existing concrete construction, drill and use Grinnell Fig. 117 expansion case or Phillips concrete fasteners in sizes not exceeding 1/2" and for loads of 200 lbs or less. For larger rods or loads above 200 lbs drill through the beam above the bottom steel and bolt a Grinnell Fig. 202 bracket to the side of the beam for support. Size brackets per manufacturer's recommendations. Use pipe stands where required. 15330-2 M PON r r r G H. I. Where multiple lines are run horizontally at the same elevations and grades, they may be supported on trapezes formed of sections of Unistrut, angle iron, or channels suspended on rods or pipes. Trapeze members, including the suspension rods, shall each be properly sized for the number, size and loaded weight of the lines they are to support. Trapeze spacings shall be in accordance with the preceding table for the smallest line supported on or from the trapezes. Perforated strap iron and wire will under no circumstances be acceptable as hanger material. Hangers supporting insulated lines which are specified to be finished with a vapor seal shall be fitted outside the insulation. The insulation on horizontal lines shall be protected by low compression insulation shields. On all pipes the shields shall be Fee and Mason Fig. 81 or rolled 14 gauge galvanized. The shields on horizontal lines shall be positioned so that they encompass the bottom half of the pipe and are centered on the hanger or support. On vertical lines there shall be two shields of the same type fully encompassing the pipe at each clamp. Shields shall be secured with a 3/4" wide lacquered steel band at each end. 3.02 DUCT HANGERS: A. All ductwork shall be supported in accordance with standards published by Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association Inc. 3.03 FOUNDATIONS FOR MACHINERY: A. Concrete subbases not less than 4" high unless indicated otherwise, shall be provided for all floor mounted mechanical and electrical equipment. Subbases shall rest on structural floor. B. Electric motor shall be mounted on the same foundation as the driven machine. Piping connections at pumps shall be supported on the same foundation as the pumps. C. Foundation for machines shall be a minimum of 3000 psi concrete with all exposed surfaces steel troweled smooth, reinforced with 6 x 6 No. 3 mesh. Chamfer corners of all foundations.. D. Machines shall be secured to bases with anchor bolts of ample size. All machine having bedplates and motors shall be grouted under the full area of the bedplates with a nonshrinking, premixed grout. After grout has set, all wedges, shims, and Jack bolts shall be removed and the spaces filled with grout. 3.04 STRUCTURAL MEMBERS: A. All structural steel shall conform to ASTM A-36. All steel shall be new, clean and straight. B. All holes shall be drilled or punched for the proper size. Burning of holes with a torch is not permitted. C. Clean all surfaces of steel of mill scale, rust and other foreign matter and prime with at least one shop coat of red lead or zinc chromate. 7 15330-3 D. Fabricate and erect all structural steel supports, anchors and guides in accordance with the drawings to support any large chilled water, steam, condensate and other piping. E. All structural steel shall conform to the requirements of Division 5. F. Concrete anchor bolts for supporting structural steel members shall be Molly Parabolt or equal and shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Minimum, imbedment and minimum spacing requirements must be met. Concrete holes for the bolts shall be cored through the concrete and the embedded reinforcing steel. Voids between concrete anchor bolts and structural members shall be filled by welding to fill the void. End of Section 15330-4 I t .• SECTION 15335 - VIBRATION ISOLATION l PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 NOTE: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. i 1.02 SUBMITTALS: r A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.03 SCOPE: A. The Contractor for the work covered by each section of the specifications shall furnish and install all vibration isolation required by pipe or equipment included in this work. PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.01 ISOLATION: 7 A. Mechanical equipment and associated piping and ductwork shall be mounted on vibration isolators as specified and required to minimize transmission of vibrations and structure borne noise to building structure or spacers. l B. All rotating equipment shall be balanced both statically and dynamically. The equipment supporting structure: f" shall not have any natural frequencies within plus or minus 30% of the operating speeds. The equipment when mounted and placed in operation shall not exceed a self excited vibration velocity of 0.10" per second when measured with a vibration meter on the bearing caps of the machine in the vertical, horizontal and axial directions or measured at the equipment mounting feet if the bearings are concealed. i C. Isolation shall be stable during starting and stopping of equipment without any traverse and eccentric movement of equipment that would damage or adversely affect the equipment or attachments. D. Isolation shall be selected for the lowest operating, speed of equipment. E. Isolation shall be selected and located to produce uniform loading and deflection even if equipment weight is not evenly distributed. F. Spring Isolators: Spring isolators shall be free j standing, laterally stable without any housing, and complete with neoprene acoustical friction pads, a i.• minimum of 1/4" thick between the base plate and the support. All mountings shall have leveling bolts that must be rigidly bolted to the equipment or base. Coil outside diameters shall not be less than 0.8 of the operating height of the spring. Spring shall have an additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the operating 15335-1 deflection. The horizontal stiffness of spring isolators shall be not less than 0.8 of the vertical axial stiffness. All spring isolators shall be selected for 1" initial deflection or more. Isolators for air units shall be selected for 2" deflection. Isolators shall be galvanized where installed outside. G. Suspension Type Isolation: Suspension type spring isolation for piping system or equipmenthangers shall be a combination of spring and neoprene in series. The spring and elastomer combination shall be encased in a structurally stable steel bracket. Spring diameters shall be large enough to permit a 15 degree angular misalignment of the rod connecting the hanger to the equipment or pipe without rubbing on the hanger box. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 VIBRATION ISOLATION HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PIPES: A. Furnish vibration isolation in accordance with the following: 1. Each pipe connected to equipment mounted on vibration isolators shall have a minimum of 3 spring hangers. 2. Hanger vibration isolators shall be selected for not less than the deflection provided for the equipment to which the piping is connected. The vibration isolator units selected shall accommodate the thermal movement of the piping systems. 3.02 SCHEDULE OF VIBRATION ISOLATION: EQUIPMENT Rooftop Air Units Chiller Blower Coil Units Air Compressors PRIMARY ISOLATION Internal Isolators Neoprene Pads Spring Isolators - 2" Neoprene Isolator End of Section 15335-2 SECTION 15400 - INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 NOTE: i A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to -work of this section. 1.02 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.03 SCOPE: A. This section of the specifications comprises the furnishing of all labor, materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the installation of thermal insulation, coverings, jackets, supports, shields, !' etc. as described herein and/or as shown on the accompanying drawings, or reasonably implied therefrom. All surfaces which may vary from the ambient temperature shall be insulated unless .. specifically excepted. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: I A. In describing the various materials, application procedures, and finishes, each item will be described singularly, even though there may be a multiplicity of identical applications. Also where the description is only general in nature, exact dimensions, arrangements and other data shall be determined by reference to plans, schedules, and details, including those j provided by equipment manufacturers. 11 B. Where materials are described under other sections of the specifications and are pertinent to this section, they shall be installed hereunder as though they were repeated herein. C. All insulation shall have composite fire and smoke hazard ratings as tested by procedure NFPA 225, not exceeding flame r` spread 25, smoke developed 50. Accessories such as adhesives, t mastics, cement, tape, cloth, etc. shall have these same component ratings. D. All materials installed under this section of the specifications shall be manufactured in the United States of America. I' i 2.02 VAPOR BARRIER JACKETS: A. Factory -applied vapor -barrier jackets shall be one of the following: 1. An All Service Jacket (ASJ) laminated of flame resistant white kraft paper, glass scrim reinforcement, and kraft paper. 2. Foil Reinforced Kraft (FRK) Jacket laminated of flame resistant 0.001" aluminum foil, glass scrim reinforcement and kraft paper. 15400-1 B. Where specified, insulate valves and fittings with Hamfab or approved equal molded glass fiber fitting covers equal in thickness to the adjoining pipe covering, vapor sealed with two 1/8 inch wet coats of vapor barrier mastic equal to Benjamin Foster No. 65-07 reinforced with an open mesh glass fabric. Finish with preformed Manville Zeston PVC covers with taped seams. C. Where specified, insulate valves and fittings with two fiberglass inserts and preformed Manville Zeston covers with taped seams. 2.03 SHIELDS: A. Provide shield of No. 16 U.S. standard gage galvanized metal to protect insulation at hangers and supports on piping 3 inches and smaller. For pipe 4 to 6 inches, use 14 gage; and for pipe 8 inches and larger, use 12 gage. Use a shield extending at least 6 inches on each side of the support bearing area. B. Under each shield on pipe 2" and larger, install a high density fiberglass insert equal to Hamfab H Block, 20 lb. density, or approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. The installation of all thermal insulation shall be performed by a recognized firm regularly engaged in the insulation business, using skilled insulation mechanics and using insulation materials which are the product of reputable manufacturer of the materials, using any special materials as required by these specifications and by those published standards. B. Any insulation which is not applied in a workmanlike manner will be rejected and replaced. All coverings shall be smooth, flush, dressed to line and tight. Mastic shall be neatly applied and tooled. The Architect reserves the right to reject any insulation whose appearance he deems unacceptable. 3.02 APPLICATION OF INSULATION: A. Apply insulation and pipe covering after all work has been tested, found to be tight and accepted as such by the Architect. Thoroughly clean and dry all surfaces to be covered. 3.03 INSULATION ON EQUIPMENT AND PIPING SYSTEMS: A. The following describes materials, thicknesses and finishes for insulation and coverings. B. Also included in this section is the requirement for patching and repair of existing insulation where new connections are made. C. Chilled Water Lines: Insulate with molded sectional glass fiber pipe covering with factory applied All Service Jacket (ASJ) equal to Owens-Corning ASJ/SSL-II. Insulation shall be 1-1/2" thick. Insulate concealed valves and fittings with fiberglass inserts and "Zeston" PVC covers. Insulate exposed valves and fittings with Hamfab insulation fittings. Vapor seal all insulation. 15400-2 r l r r r /M. n� E. F. C. H. I. J. K. Heating Water Supply and Return Lines: Insulate with molded sectional glass fiber pipe covering with factory applied All Service Jacket (ASJ) equal to Owens-Corning ASJ/SSL-II. Insulation shall be 1" thick. Insulate exposed valves and fittings with fiberglass inserts and "Zeston" PVC covers. Insulate exposed valves and fittings with Hamfab insulation fittings. Domestic Hot Water and Circulating Lines: Insulate with 1" thick Owens-Corning Fiberglas ASJ/SSL-II molded sectional glass fiber pipe covering with an All Service jacket (AS,J). Insulate concealed valves and fittings with preformed "Zeston" PVC covers over fiberglass insulation. Insulate exposed valves and fittings with Hamfab insulation fittings. Domestic Cold Water Lines: All cold water lines throughout with those exceptions noted hereinbefore, shall be insulated with 1/2" thick Owens-Corning ASJ/SSL-II'molded glass fiber pipe covering with factory applied All Service Jackets (ASJ). Insulate concealed valves and fittings with preformed "Zeston" PVC covers over fiberglass insulation. Insulate exposed valves and fittings with Hamfab insulation fittings. Vapor seal all insulation. Drain Lines: 3/8" thick Manville Type II "Aerotube". Insulation may be slit flange type or threaded on during fabrication. Rectangular Air Duct (Exterior): Insulate rectangular supply and return air ducts with 1 1/2" thick, unfaced Johns -Manville "Springlas No.814", 3 lb. density fiberglas, applied with 100% adhesive coverage and graham pins 12" OCEW. Apply with corner bead and cover with glass cloth jacket. Seal with exterior grade sealant equal to Childers CP-10. Boiler Breeching and Flues: 2" thick, Owens-Corning "Kaylo-10" molded pipe covering or blocks, wired in place. Fill all cracks and voids with insulating cement. Finish with aluminum jacket. Chiller: Factory insulated. Boiler: Factory Insulated. End of Section 15400-3 I SECTION 15500 - EOUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 NOTE: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections; apply to work of this section. 1.02 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit manufacturer's data and shop drawings on all items specified. 1.03 SCOPE: r A. This section of the specifications pertains to all labor, materials, equipment and service necessary for and incidental to the mechanical equipment as shown on the drawings and/or as specified herein. B. This section requires the furnishing of all equipment specified and/or shown on the drawings. Equipment referred to singularly shall mean each item, and the total number of items shown or specified shall be furnished. All equipment shall be manufactured in the USA. C. All appurtenances and auxiliary equipment necessary to the function of any specified item of equipment shall be. furnished with the item of equipment, whether specifically mentioned or not. Each item of equipment shall perform the function for 7 which it is intended, and all work necessary to provide a complete functional system shall be provided. D. This specification requires that all items of equipment be completely installed, finally connected, tested and placed in service. E. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to verify all requirements of the equipment and the contract and certify with r the submittal of the shop drawings that all requirements have been met, including: 1. Space requirements r- 2. Electrical requirements (voltage, phase, wires - No. and size) 3. Capacities 4. Clearance for maintenance 5. Quality 6. Quantity PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MOTORS: A. Motors shall be furnished for all motor driven equipment. Motors with special operating conditions such as multiple speed or in hazardous locations shall be as specified under the equipment served. General service motors driving through flexible couplings or belts shall conform to the following requirements: 15500-1 B. Less than 1/6 HP: Split phase, 40 degree C ambient, dripproof or enclosed as required by exposure, with a service factor of 1.0. C. Fractional larger than 1/6 HP: Capacitor start, 40 degree C ambient, dripproof or enclosed as required by exposure, with a service factor of 1.0 or greater. D. Integral Horsepower, Single Phase: Capacitor type, 40 degree C ambient, dripproof or enclosed as required by exposure, with a service factor of 1.15. E. Three Phase: High efficiency continuous duty squirrel cage type, 40 degree C ambient, dripproof or totally enclosed fan cooled as required by exposure with a service factor of 1.15. Power factor shall be 85% or greater. Motors shall be equal to Gould E-Plus. 2.02 STARTERS: A. Starters, except those furnished as an integral part of the equipment as specified herein, shall be furnished by the Contractor under Division 16. Coordinate exact starter requirements and details. 2.03 COOLING TOWER, CERAMIC TYPE: A. Furnish and install all material, equipment and appurtenances, complete erection labor, as well as any expenses required for the manufacturer, transportation, delivery, erection, testing and adjustment of a complete counterflow induced draft cooling tower. This cooling tower shall include fill, hardware, drift eliminators, fan assemblies, speed reducers, fan drives, water distribution system, fiberglass membrane on all walls and all other materials and parts required to make this cooling tower complete. A reinforced concrete basin, internal structural members and wall sections matching the companion building and including the required coping and copper flashing under coping are specified under another section of these specifications. B. The cooling tower shall be a fireproof permanent type cooling tower having aesthetics and life expectancy in keeping with total project concept, and full thermal efficiency throughout its life. There shall be no free water carryover out the fan stack to cause spotting of surroundings and automobiles. C. The cooling tower furnished shall be a regularly cataloged product of a cooling tower manufacturer who has produced towers which have seen at least ten (10) years satisfactory service using the manufacture and type of fill material and other components proposed for this project. Under no conditions will wood, plastic, cement asbestos or asbestos metal fill components be considered. D. Each cooling tower cell shall cool the scheduled GPM of water from 95 degrees F. to 85 degrees F. when operating at an inlet wet bulb of 76 degrees F. and shall be from the line of towers produced by the tower manufacturer which has been certified by the Cooling Tower Institute in accordance with the CTI Bulletin STD-201; or in the event the tower is not certified by the Cooling Tower Institute, one (1) cell shall be tested upon 15500-2 r completion, when there is adequate heat load available, in accordance with the Cooling Tower Institute's Acceptance Test Procedure, CTI Bulletin ATC-105 in the presence of a Cooling j Tower Institute test observer. E. In the case of the acceptance test, if the tower does not meet design specifications, necessary alternations to the tower to produce the design specifications shall be made, and the tower retested in accoreance with the foregoing to verify same to the satisfaction of the Engineer. F. Upon completion, issue a written guarantee duly signed covering the following components and should any of these components fail during the specified time, they shall be replaced. The guarantee shall cover the following components: 1. Manufacturer shall guarantee against unserviceability the fill and fill supports for a period of twenty five years. 2. Remaining internal components shall carry the manufacturer's standard one year guarantee. G. The cooling tower shall be constructed where indicated on the drawings. The dimensions of the individual cells shall not exceed those indicated on the contract drawings. The cooling r. tower manufacturer shall take these space limitations into consideration for the various designs required, including water cooling capacity and performance, fan air handling and motor brake horsepower requirements. H. The following components shall be furnished with the cooling tower and installed: 1. Cast Iron Lintels: The cast iron tee section lintels !" supporting the tile fill shall conform to ASTM Specification A48-26, Class 25 for gray iron castings designed with a safety factor of three, plus 1/8 inch of additional r2. thickness for corrosion. Tile Fill: The tile fill shall be of ,multi -cell design, set without mortar, in a patter, and of sufficient height to meet the performance specifications. The tile shall be I dense and vitreous, with a water absorption such that it C will pass a freze-thaw test conducted in accordance wth ASTM C67-73. The tile shall have a minimum crushing strength of �- 400 psig over the gross area of the tile when the load is applied parallel to the cells, as tested in accordance with ASTM C67-73. 3. Mist Eliminators: The eliminators shall be of the three -pass zigzag type, assembled into sections, making a strong stable unit. Free water carryng over shall not exceed .05 of 1 percent of the water flow. These sections i� shall be supported on PVC tee sections. The tee sections shall be suspended with 1/4 inch brass rods connected to stainless steel clips embedded in the bottom side of the t- roof deck at the time of casting. 4. A stainless steel access door shall be provided for passage through the eliminators. 5. Eliminator parts shall be profile extrusions of polyvinyl chloride resin. The resin shall conform to ASTM D-1874-75 Type I Grade 2. The PVC eliminators and supporting framework shall have a flame spread rating of 25 or less r� when tested in accordance with ASTM E-84. 15500-3 6. Speed Reducers: The speed reducer gears shall be rated in accordance with practices of the American Gear Manufacturers Association, using serving factor of two for cooling tower services. Gear reducers shall be of the spiral bevel, single reduction type. The gear reducer shall be bolted and pinned on a galvanized steel base plate and grouted to structure. 7. An oil level sightglass, fill/drain line and vent line shall be installed outside the fan stack. 8. Fan Assemblies: The complete fan assembly (fan and mounting) shall be designed to give maximum fan efficiency and long life when handling saturated air at high velocities. Fan shall be of multi -blade design. The fan blades shall be fiberglass reinforced epoxy. The fan hub shall be made of cast iron with adequate surface protection against corrosion. 9. Drive Shafts: To be of the full floating type with flexible couplings at both ends. Drive shafts shall be of all stainless steel, fitted each end with Thomas flexible couplings (stainless steel plate type). Each drive shaft shall be provided with a galvanized steel guard. 10. Motors: Motors shall be NEMA approved and shall be of the TEFC type. The motor horsepower shall be of the next larger standard motor than that calculated as required for the individual fan brake horsepower, and shall be three phase, ingle winding continuous duty type wound for the scheduled voltage with normal starting torque. Motor horsepower shall be as scheduled. 11. A vibration switch shall be installed to protect mechanical equipment against excessive damage due to malfunction of rotating equipment. Switch shall be 115 VAC with remote reset. 12. Distribution System: The distribution system for each cell shall consist of a centrally located header complete with junction boxes and side laterals, fittings and nozzles. All piping shall be either cast iron, ductile iron or Schedule 80 CPVC, depending on size. Nozzles shall be brass. Bolts shall be cadmium plated. Supply piping up to spray tree shall be fiberglass. 13. All basin piping make-up, overflow and drains, and suction lines shall be provided. 14. The above components are to be arranged as shown on the drawings, and shall be installed in such a manner as to provide a leakproof seal between the piping and the basin wall. 15. Fan Deck: The fan deck shall be constructed of reinforced light -weight concrete, precast in two (2) sections per cell, forming a complete vibration -free basin for mounting the fan, speed reducer, drive shaft and motor. 16. Exhaust Fan Stacks: The exhaust fan stacks shall be constructed of concrete. The stacks shall be contained with galvanized steel bands. 15500-4 r t: 17. Sump Heater: Electrical resisting horizontal immersion t heater for over -the -side mounting. Heater shall be weatherproof and shall be furnished with sludge legs for mounting in sump. Furnish with contactor, low water cut-off, and thermostat. Heater shall be sized for -10 degrees F. ambient temperature. Heater shall be: equal to Indeeco Model No. 743N215, 7.5 KW per cell. 18. Start-up: A factory authorize& technician shall check out j V the tower and place it in operation. 19. The cooling tower shall be as manufactured by Ceramic Cooling Tower Company or Tower Engineering. r 2.04 CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLER: A. General: 1. Under Bid Item #2, furnish and install one centrifugal water chiller. The chiller will be installed parallel with two Trane CVHE centrifugal chillers. ! 2. Under Base Bid, the Contractor shall include in his bid the r amount to furnish and install a Trane chiller. 3. Under Alternate Bid No. 1, the Contractor shall indicate the amount to be added or deducted from the Base Bid if a Carrier chiller is furnished and installed. 4. Under Alternate Bid No. 2, the Contractor shall indicate the r amount to be added or deducted from the Base Bid if a York chiller is furnished and installed. 5. The alternate chillers shall meet the specification is every way. r B. Equipment: 1. Physical Characteristics: Space to install the chiller is at a premium. The outside extreme dimensions of the unit shall not exceed 5'-6" wide x 15'-6" long x 8'-0" high. Cut sheets indicating dimensions of the unit, including recommended clearance requirements, shall be submitted after bid date if requested by the Engineer. The Contractor is r" encouraged to inspect the jobsite to verify space limitation. 2. Evaporator and Condenser: The evaporator and condenser r" shall be built in accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE 15/1978 safety code for unfired pressure vessels. The water piping connections shall be Victaulic or flanged. The evaporator and condenser shall both be 2 pass. The evaporator and condenser and all low temperature surfaces shall be factory insulated with 3/4" foam insulation. The insulation shall be painted. 3. Compressor and Motor: a. The compressor shall be centrifugal. b. Chiller should be able to unload to 10% of design �- tonnage with constant entering water temperature. C. The motor shall be hermetic or open. d. Motors shall be 460 volt, 3 phase. e. Motors and compressors shall be compatible with alternative refrigerants. I 15500-5 4. Lubrication: Lubricating oil shall be provided to all moving contact surfaces at all times by a force feed lubricating system. The oil pump shall be capable of operating at any time to provide post -lubrication to all bearings during machine coastdown. 5. Control Panel: a. The unit control panel shall provide control of chiller operation and monitoring of chiller sensors, actuators, relays and switches. The panel shall be electronic or microprocessor based, with factory packaging and testing of all required control components for reliable equipment operation. b. The following operating status information is monitored and is accessible at the front panel: Current chiller operating mode power off standby/reset, chiller off, manually off-line auto, chiller off, on-line restart time not elapsed condenser water flow established, inlet vanes closed start running: normal operation running: current limit running: high condenser refrigerant pressure limit running: low evaporator refrigerant temperature limit post lube manual reset required Status indicating lights or Digital Panel Readout chilled water flow proven cooling required unit running unit loading manual reset required remote chilled water set point active remote current limit set point active Set point and water temperature display chilled water set point current limit set point entering evaporator water temperature leaving evaporator water temperature entering condenser water temperature leaving condenser water temperature Starts counter and running hours meter Pressure gauges evaporator refrigerant pressure condenser refrigerant pressure low oil (oil sump) pressure high oil (oil supply) pressure 3. The following switches and adjustments are provided at the front panel: chiller - standby - reset/auto-local/auto-remote oil pump auto/on purge (where required) - timed/off/manual 15500-6 r- inlet vane control service switch - load/hold/unload/auto leaving chilled water set point r current limit set point 4. The control panel shall provide for evaporator freeze protection and limit controls. This control shall be used to avoid low evaporative refrigerant temperature tripouts during critical periods of chiller operation. The control shall take progressively more aggressive load limiting action in response to the severity of the rate of change and f- the actual value of the evaporator refrigerant temperature. A diagnostic code, reflecting the operating status shall be automatically displayed at the front panel whenever this control mode is in effect. r5. The chiller control panel shall provide a relay output to start the condenser water pump and/or enable the cooling tower temperature controls. 6. The control panel shall monitor motor starting and running, time between compressor/motor starts, high refrigerant pressure condition in the condenser, low refrigerant temperature condition in the evaporator, evaporator and condenser water flows, oil pressure, and proper operation of unit controls and input elements such as sensors. 7. The control panel shall incorporate advanced motor protection to protect the motor throughout the starting and running cycles from the adverse affects of phase loss, phase unbalance, phase reversal, or distribution fault (phase loss r" or momentary power loss). Auto restart after distribution fault shall be incorporated as standard. 8. The control panel shall provide one stage of condenser capacity control and/or alarm. The condenser capacity control relay shall be energized whenever excessive condenser head pressure and/or compressor surge conditions are detected. F. Purge System: The manufacturer must provide a separate purge system, when required, that operates independent of the unit and can be operated while the machine is shut down. A purge !� pressure gauge, number of starts counter and and hour meter shall be included on the purge system. G. Starter: The compressor motor starter shall be supplied by the centrifugal chiller manufacturer. Starter shall be Star -Delta closed transition type. The starter shall be floor mounted. Starters shall have a standard NEMA-1 enclosure with amp and voltage meters. Starter shall include a control power OM transformer with fused primary and secondary. The starter must be able to operate in temperatures up to 120 deg. F. The starter shall include an integral main power disconnect switch. r- H. Performance: 1. Each chiller shall have 345 ton capacity with HCFC-123 refrigerant. Power consumption by the machine, including ^„ controls and other parasitic energy requirements, shall not 15500-7 exceed 0.68 kW/ton at 100% load. Performance shall be based on 44 degree leaving chilled water temperature at 828 gpm, 85 degree entering condensing water temperature at 994 gpm. Pressure drop through the evaporator shall not exceed 33 feet of water column. Pressure drop thru condenser not more than 28 feet. Fouling Factor Allowance shall be 0.00025 for both the evaporator and the condenser. I. Sequence of Operation: 1. General - These chillers will be installed parallel to an existing Trane CVHE chiller. The chiller manufacturer shall provide a standalone system control panel to control the chiller plant. The sequence described below shall be achieved automatically by the system control panel. The system control panel shall be capable of completely controlling three chillers to achieve the sequence described. The standalone microprocessor based chiller control panel shall monitor and control the chillers in a standalone mode, perform the following chiller plant control strategies, provide the points as listed on the Chiller point list and support their specified monitoring and diagnostics. 2. Chiller Sequencing - The System Control Panel (SCP) shall start and stop primary chilled water pumps and chillers based upon the loading of the operating chillers to maintain the leaving water temperature (adjustable) to the secondary chilled water loop. a. The points at which chillers are started and stopped shall be designated by chiller. b. The chiller sequencing routine shall allow automatic rotation of chiller operation in order to equalize chiller run time. C. On an automatic command from the SCP, the chilled water system shall be enabled Start the lead chiller primary chilled water pump and prove flow through the evaporator. Provide output signal to cooling tower to provide condenser water and prove flow through the condenser. Start chiller after both chilled water and condenser water flow is proven. d. Lag chillers shall start whenever operating chillers' current draw continuously exceeds a user definable setting. The length of time the chiller load must remain above the load setting shall vary depending upon supply water temperature deviation from the setpoint. The lag chiller shall start -in a similar manner to the lead chiller start sequence. The SCP shall unload operating chillers prior to starting a lag chiller to prevent system water flow disturbances, caused by a lag chillers evaporator pump, from interrupting chiller operation-. The lead chiller will unload to match the lag chiller current draw. 15500-8 r r- The chillers shall then operate in unison as they load and unload to meet system demands. ` When the system current draw drops below a user definable setting, the lag chiller shall shut down. r, r The lag chiller pump shall not shut down until the chillers compressor is proven off. e. Upon sensing a chiller failure, the SCP shall lockout that chiller and immediately initiate the start sequence of the next chiller. f. Automatic rotation of chiller operation will equalize �. chiller runtime, without cycling chillers unnecessarily Il to cause rotation. 3. Chiller System Status Display: The chiller sequencing software shall provide an operating status report for the r system. The display shall include: i a. System Chilled Water Setpoint b. System Chilled Water Temperature r" c. System Current Limit Setpoint d. System Load e. Condenser System Temperature ,,. 4. System diagnostic and alarm indication: a. Individual chiller diagnostic and alarm statuses shall include the following items for each chiller: Normal n Evaporator Refrigerant Temperature Range Motor Temperature Sensor #1 Motor Temperature Sensor #2 r Motor Temperature Sensor #3 Maximum Acceleration Time Range Oil Temperature Sensor Leaving Water Temperature Sensor Condenser Refrigerant Pressure Sensor Evaporator Refrigerant Temperature Sensor Surge Condenser Water Flow Overdue c Phase Imbalance Phase Reversal High Motor Temperature Differential Oil Pressure Switch Stop Relay Running Overload Exceeded Maximum Acceleration Time Transition Running External Interlock Low Oil Temperature High Oil Temperature High Condenser Refrigerant Pressure �. Improper Unit Identification - SCP Actuator Low Evaporator Refrigerant Temperature External Interlock r Unit Control Module 15500-9 r"' b. Individual chiller diagnostic and alarm statuses shall include the following non -latching items for each chiller: Extended Power Loss Momentary Power Loss Chilled Water Flow Condenser Water Flow c. Chiller plant system diagnostics and alarm status shall include: System Leaving Water Temperature Sensor Unit Communication Failure Power Loss (Program Lost) System Control Module Power Loss (Program Retained) J. Start-up Service: 1. Manufacturer shall furnish a factory -trained service engineer without additional charge to start the unit. Representatives shall provide leak testing, evacuation, dehydration, and charging of the unit. Start-up procedure shall include oil analysis. 2. A start-up log shall be furnished by the manufacturer to document the chiller's start-up date and shall be signed by the owner or the owner's authorized representative prior to unauthorized use of the machine. 3. The chiller manufacturer shall provide a minimum four (4) hour training period to the Owner for chiller operation. 4. The chiller manufacturer shall provide a minimum four (4) hour training period to the Owner for system control operation. 5. Six (6) copies of manufacturer's operating and maintenance instruction manual and parts list shall be provided to the Owner. K. Warranty: Manufacturer shall furnish five year warranty from the date of substantial completion. Warranty shall include preventative maintenance, materials, parts, labor, emergency calls as well as scheduled calls and refrigerant for entire machine. 2.05 WATER -TUBE BOILER: A. General Description: 1. Furnish where shown on the plans one water -tube boiler. Each boiler shall be complete with all components, accessories, and appurtenances as hereinafter specified. Boilers shall be as manufactured by IBW, Bryan or approved equal. The capacity of each unit at normal rating shall be as scheduled on the drawings. Both design and construction shall be in accordance with A.S.M.E. Code requirements for a design pressure of 150 PSIG. 2. Each packaged boiler shall be A.S.M.E. stamped and must also conform to all state and local codes and ordinances. In addition, a Certificate of Hartford Steam Boiler Inspection and Insurance Company shall be furnished with each unit. 15500-10 r 3. Each'unit shall be furnishia as a packaged water boiler, r consisting of boiler, burner, forced draft fan, controls, and accessories. Each unit shall be furnished with required wiring and piping, and factory -assembled on a structural j steel base as a self-contained unit. B. Boiler Design: 1. Boiler shall be of the bent tube watertube type with a r' tangent waterwall tube furnaces 2. The fireside of the boiler shall have longitudinal gas passes separated with waterwall tubes to ensure maximum r linear gas travel. 3. All tubes shall be exposed to radiant heat in the boiler furnace to provide proper thermal water flow rates at all loads. 4. All boiler tubes shall be 1-1/2" diameter and be easily removable and replaceable with standard tools without requiring expanding or welding at the attachmentto the drums . 5. Boiler shall have a large downcover at the rear outside the flue gas section to provide natural circulation without .. being dependent on external pumps. 6. Boiler shall have a vent connection at the highest point on the upper drum and one inspection opening in each drum end. 7. The boiler combustion chamber floor and ends shall be constructed with ceramic fiberboard insulation and high temperature castable refractory. 8. The boiler inner casing shall be fabricated of 11-gauge steel and 2"-thick 1,900 degree F. insulation. The casing shall be constructed with bolts and gaskets to ensure that the products of combustion are contained within the boiler. r„ 9. The boiler outer casing shall consist of 3/4"-thick fiberglass insulation enclosed in 18-gauge steel panels. The outer casing shall be removable sections finished with hard baked enamel paint. r10. The boiler shall have access panels to the furnace with an i observation port at the rear and to the flue gas passages at the front. A front flame observation port shall be provided t- at burner enclosure. 11. The entire inner casing and combustion chamber access door shall be easily removed and replaced for inspection and r„ maintenance. 12. Tube removal and replacement shall be readily accomplished from sides of boiler. 13. Round flanged smoke outlet to be located at top of boiler r with top outlet position. l 14. Lifting lugs shall be provided to facilitate installation. C. Boiler Trim: +-1. Safety valves, size and quantity, shall be in strict accordance with A.S.M.E. Code requirements. 2. Primary low water cutoff of the probe type shall be mounted and wired on the boiler at the factory. 15500-11 D. Burner Equipment: 1. The burner shall be capable of burning natural gas. 2. The burner shall be arranged to operate automatically with full modulation and proven low fire start. 3. The burner shall be equipped with an integral forced draft fan of the centrifugal type, with a direct -connected motor. 4. The burner shall be equipped with gas -electric ignition. The ignition system shall be factory -mounted and consist of gas pilot, burner, ignition transformer, pilot gas regulator and pilot gas solenoid valve and pilot gas shutoff cock. 5. Main gas train, complete with two (2) motorized gas valves, gas metering valve, gas pressure regulator, two (2) lubricated gas cocks, high and low gas pressure interlocks, and proof -of -closure switch. 6. The packaged boiler shall be equipped with full complement of controls, including dual fuel shutoff valves and pressure controls and programmable combustion control. E. Controls: 1. Each unit shall be equipped with necessary controls and safety devices to operate automatically. The combustion safety control shall be of electronic type with positive, timed programming sequences, and with safety lockout control in the event of a flame failure. Safety lockout shall require manual reset before automatic recycling can continue. 2. The burner control cabinet shall be mounted on the boiler and shall contain the necessary fuses, motor contactor or magnetic motor circuit transformer. The control cabinet shall also contain the electronic flame safeguard and programmer, control circuit switch, necessary switching relays and indicating lights, all wired to a numbered terminal strip. 3. All electronic equipment, wiring devices, and operating sequences shall be approved by Underwriter's Laboratories. 4. Power voltage shall be 460 volts, 3-phase, 60 Hertz. Control voltage shall be 115 volts, 1-phase, 60 Hertz. 5. Operating high limit. 6. Safety high limit. 7. Modulating high limit. S. Low water probe cutoff. F. Tests: 1. Boiler inspection shall include hydrostatic test A data report shall be delivered with the boiler as evidence of A.S.M.E. compliance. The boiler shall bear an A.S.M.E. symbol. 2. A factory fire test shall be performed and performance data shall be rendered on the complete unit with specified fuel prior to shipment. An operation check shall be evidenced on adjustment of controls, check of all safety devices, recording of stack temperature and analysis of flue gases. 15500-12 r i G. Efficiency: 1. Each packaged boiler shall be adjusted at the factory to operate at a minimum efficiency of 83% at all firing rates. 2. The flue gas exit temperatures shall not fall below the dew point of the flue gases to prevent condensation corrosion within the boiler. H. Warranties: 1. Each packaged boiler shall be warranted against defects in l workmanship and material for a period of twelve (12) months from date of substantial completion. All defective items P" shall be replaced with no charge for the one (1)-year 1 period. 2. The boiler pressure vessel shall be warranted against thermal stress cracking for a period of ten (10) years from the date of shipment providing the boiler is operated and maintained in accordance with the conditions specified in the Owner's Manual. The warranty shall cover the boiler r pressure vessel under all operating conditions and include temperature differentials between inlet water temperature and outlet water temperature up to 150 degree F. This .r warranty shall cover in full all leaks in headers and downcomers caused by any conditions other than corrosion. I. Start-up and Service: 1. Start-up and service of each packaged boiler shall be provided by factory -trained technicians in the direct employ of the manufacturer's local authorized representative. 2. Provision shall be made for the start-up of each packaged !" boiler, as well as a two-hour instruction period to owner's personnel concerning operation and maintenance. �.. 2.06 WATER CIRCULATING PUMPS: 3 A. Pumps shall be as indicated in the schedule on the drawings. Each shall be of the type, rotational speed, and have the flow rate and characteristics listed. The name and model number r listed for each pump establishes a standard which the pump r furnished must equal to exceed. B. Acceptable makers of scheduled pumps are Allis-Chalmeres, Buffalo, Weinman, Peerless, Aurora, Paco, Bell and Gossett. ! C. Pumps casings and glands shall be suitable for operation under 150 psig static heads. r., D. Rotational speeds shall not exceed those scheduled. Under no circumstances shall a pump be offered with an impeller radius greater than 90% of the distance from the shaft centerline to the cutoff in the casing. r E. The head capacities are listed for bidding purposes only. The Contractor shall carefully calculate the head of each pump, . taking into consideration the pressure drops in all equipment, exact lengths of pipe, valves, fittings, etc. These calculations shall take into account actual routing of the piping and all other factors that would determine the actual pumping head of each system, and shall form the basis of final pump selection. F. Motors shall be constant speed, drip proof motors, and shall be so sized with relation to the pump impeller that the required brake horsepower will not exceed the rated motor horsepower at i r 15500-13 I � i1 any point on the pump curve. Motors shall be suitable for operation with variable frequency drives. Copies of manufacturer's performance curve shall be submitted as shop drawings on each pump. Each curve shall be clearly marked to indicate the diameter of the impeller and the selection point. All pump motors shall have 1.15 service factor. G. All pumps shall have gauge tappings. H. Pumps baseplates shall be of cast iron or welded structural steel shapes, and shall have a raised lip and threaded drain connecton. Each baseplate on a pump handling chilled water shall be of sufficient size to extend under and catch the drip from connecting flanges and the outboard bearing. I. All pumps shall be factory enameled. J. Horizontal Split Case Pump: Pump construction shall consist of cast iron casing with double suction dynamically balanced bronze impeller, horizontal split case with flanged inlet and outlet. The shaft shall be carbon steel with bronze sleeves. Ball bearings shall be 250,000 hour average life, grease lubricated with Slinger. The outboard bearing shall be double row thrust ball bearing. Wearing rings shall be bronze. Provide with mechanical seals. The flexible coupling shall be of the elastomer type with guard. Provide extended cast iron base with drain connection. K. Vertical Split Case Pump: At the contractors option, and upon approval by Engineer, vertical split case pumps as manufactured by ITT Bell and Gossett may be substituted. The contractor shall verify that pumps will fit in alloted floor space. Pump construction shall consist of cast iron casing with double suction dynamically balanced bronze impeller, vertical split case with flanged inlet and outlet. The shaft shall be carbon steel with bronze sleeves. Ball bearings shall be 250,000 hour average life, grease lubricated with slinger. The outboard bearing shall be double row thrust ball bearing. Wearing rings shall be bronze. Provide with mechanical seals. The flexible coupling shall be of the elastomer type with guard. Provide extended cast iron base with drain connection. 2.07 ADJUSTABLE FREQUENCY MOTOR DRIVES: A. Each variable speed AC drive shall consist of an adjustable frequency controller to produce a 3 phase output capable of driving a standard NEMA or IEC design AC induction motor. B. The adjustable frequency controller shall convert 460 volt, +/- 10% 60 Hertz, 3 phase power, to an adjustable frequency 1.5 to 60 Hertz output for speed control of 10% to 100% of base speed. The adjustable frequency control shall be designed exclusively for and give efficient operation of a variable torque load. C. The adjustable frequency drive (AFD), shall comply to IEEE 519-1981 without external modification on a power system. Line noise created shall be no greater than 3% harmonic distortion. D. The AFD shall produce adjustable frequency, adjustable voltage output. The drive shall convert the AC utility power to a fixed voltage DC through the use of a full wave diode bridge. This shall provide a power factor of 0.95 throughout the speed 15500-14 r 7 P" r 7 r 4 E. F. G. IM I. range. The use of isolation transformers, line reactors, or other suppression equipment is not allowed. The AFD shall then convert the fixed voltage DC to an adjustable level of DC. The AFD shall then convert the adjustable level of DC into a six step adjustable frequency and voltage fan speed controller. The AFD shall include the following protective features: 1. Protection against input transient voltage spikes, input power under voltage, over voltage, phase loss, output current overload, overcurrent, enclosure over temperature. 2. DC bus discharge circuit. 3. Any disconnect switches between the AFD and the motor shall include the auxiliary contact interlocked to the AFD fault trip circuit. In the event that a disconnect switch is opened while the drive is running, the drive shall shut down. The AFD shall include an adjustable time delay to prevent the AFD from starting into a rotating motor when the disconnect switch is closed. The drive shall be housed in a NEMA 1 enclosure. As a minimum the drive shall have the following features: 1. Drive input disconnect, door interlocked and pad -lockable. 2. Auto restart after voltage interruption 3. HOA switch 4. Remote output contacts to indicate run mode, fault mode. 5. Isolated signal follower for 4-20 mA, 0-10 Vdc. 6. Percent speed and percent load indication. 7. Speed adjustment, minimum and maximum. 8. Auto/manual selector switch. 9. Manual speed potentiometer. The drive shall have, as a minimum, the following indicators. 1. Overvoltage 2. Undervoltage 3. Overcurrent 4. Overload 5. Run 6. Fault 7. Auto/Manual 8. Power on pilot light AFD's serving the cooling tower fans shall include a manual bypass in the AFD enclosure. 1. Manual bypass shall provide all the circuitry necessary to transfer the motor from the AFC to the power line, or from the lne to the controller while the motor is at zero speed. The bypass circuitry shall be mounted in a separate section of the aFC enclosure. Two motor contactors, electrically interlocked, shall be utilized. One contactor is to be between the controller and the motor. The other contactor is to be between the bypass power line and the motor providing across -the -lane starting. Motor overload protection is to be provided in both the controller mode and the bypass mode. r I 15500-15 The bypass section door shall include a switch to transfer motor operation from drive to line or line to drive, and a pilot light to indicate whether motor is operating in drive or line mode. The bypass circuitry shall include a fused disconnect switch or circuit breaker to provide a means of disconnecting all power to both the bypass circuitry and the controller. The disconnect switch or circuit breaker shall be door interlocked and padlockable. The fuses or circuit breaker shall be sized to provide short circuit protection for the motor when in the bypass mode per the NEC. 2. A second disconnect switch or circuit breaker shall be provided to disconnect input power to the controller but not the bypass circuitry. This disconnect will allow troubleshooting and testing of the AFC, both energized and de -energized while operating in the bypass mode. J. The AFD shall be burned in by the manufacturer to minimize premature failures at the jobsite. The AFD shall operate a dynamometor at full load and the load and speed shall be cycled during the test. All optional and special features shall be functionally tested at the factory for proper operation. K. The AFD shall be warranted by the manufacturer for a period of 36 months from the date of substantial completion. The warranty shall include parts, labor, travel costs and living expenses incurred by the manufacturer to provide factory authorized service. L. The manufacturer shall provide start up service in the formof a factory trained service technicians. The service technician shall verify correct installation, start up the drive, and check for proper operation. M. The manufacturer shall provide an authorized factory representative to give the Owner's personnel a four hour training session for the AFDs. N. Drives shall be manufactured by Square D, ABB, or IDM. 2.08 SECONDARY CHILLED WATER LOOP SYSTEM: A. Bidding: The Contractor shall include in his Base Bid the amount for an ITT Bell and Gossett secondary chilled water loop system as specified below. Under Alternate Bid No. 3, in association with the heating water loop system, the Contractor may indicate the amount to be added or deducted from his Base Bid if an alternative system is used. Name the proposed alternative manufacturer on the Bid Proposal. B. General: 1. The secondary loop system shall be a variable speed system. The pumping system shall include, as a minimum, the programmable controller, adjustable frequency drive for each pump motor, remote sensors, motors,and pumps. 2. The pump manufacturer shall take "Unit Responsibility" for the successful operation of the system supplied by him. 3. The pump manufacturer shall supply the complete variable speed system and shall have a minimum of ten years experience with variable speed pumping systems. 15500-16 i .• 4. The system consists of a variable speed pump sized to meet system duty condition as indicated on the pump schedule, adjustable frequency drives, a pump logic controller, and differential pressure sensors. 5. At the time of submittal for approval, the pump manufacturer shall provide a complete system profile analysis which shall include as a minimum: the pumps performance (variable speed r" pump curves) and the operating -characteristics in the system (system curve). 6. This system profile analysis shall include pump motor and �., adjustable frequency drive efficiencies, load profile, staging points, horsepower, and kilowatt/hour draw. L 7. The programmable pump controller, and adjustable frequency drives shall be supplied as separate components. All functions of the components shall be tested at the factory prior to shipment. Power wiring to the motors and interlock wiring shall be the responsibility of the electrical r- contractor. Wiring from the sensors to the programmable controller shall be the responsibility of the controls contractor. A complete wiring diagram shall be supplied at r, time of shipment that shows all field connections. C. Programmable Pump Logic Controller: 1. The controller shall be equal to ITT Bell and Gossett Technologic 2000 pump logic controller. The operator interface shall be flush mounted in the door of the packaged pumping system control cubicle. 2. The manufacturer shall supply and be responsible for the operation of a programmable solid state variable! speed pump controller. The controller shall function to a proven program that safeguards against damaging hydraulic r conditions including: motor overload, pump flow surges, NPSHR above NPSDHA, and hunting. 3. The pump logic controller shall be microcomputer based and hold its firmware in EPROM. On-line field modified data r" entries, such as set point, shall be stored in RAM memory. EPROM memory storage shall prevent accidental loss of memory due to voltage surge or spike. RAM memory shall be backed up .- by standard "D" cell batteries with low battery indication. In event of a catastrophic failure, all factory preset values shall be stored and shall be able to be recalled by the operator. 4. The pump logic controller shall be capable of receiving up to eight differential input analog signals and comparing them to their individual set points. It will then select r" the new analog that has deviated the greatest amount from its set point. This selected signal will be used as the command feedback input for a closed loop hydraulic �• stabilization function to minimize hunting. This system will use three differential inputs. 5. The analog input signal shall be the feedback and the set point(s) shall be the command. The closed loop hydraulic stabilization function must have the capability of performing the traditional proportional, integral and 15500-17 r derivative modes. The proportional function shall have a range and be infinitely programmable within that range. Rates shall be in percent gain. The integral function shall also be infinitely programmable and compatible with the adjustable frequency drives (AFD) and the hydraulic system. It shall be entered as repeats/minute. Derivative shall be entered in units of seconds within a fully programmable range allowing infinite entries within that range. 6. The scan and compare rate that selects proper set point and process signal shall be continuous and automatically set for optimum operation. 7. The pump controller shall have off line and on line diagnostic software. Off line diagnostics shall consist of CPU, EPROM, and RAM memory test. It shall have self calibration of all analog inputs with diagnostics, display test, program test, and all I/O tested and status of above displayed. 8. On line diagnostics include off line diagnostics and operational diagnostics including but not limited to pump fault(s), AFD fault(s), overloads and sensor/transmitter fault(s). 9. Further fault information may be accessed by interrogating the controller through the front mounted keypad. Exact pinpointing of a fault to a specific module shall be possible. In case of failure, the controller shall fail in a pre -determined safe operating mode. Reset after failure shall not result in a no -flow condition unless all equipment fails. 10. The controller shall be powered by 115V/1/60Hz. The incoming power and I/O circuitry shall reject electromagnetic (EMI) and radio frequency (RFI) interference. All digital inputs shall be opto-isolated. All outputs shall be electrically isolated. All inputs and outputs shall be modular and may be replaced without re -wiring or soldering. 11. All external sensor/transmitter furnished by the manufacturer shall be powered by the pump controller through an industrial quality 24 volt power supply. 12. Failure of any pump, motor, or drive in the system shall cause the controller to not only display the fault condition, but alternate or transfer operation to another operating unit. 13. The pump logic controller shall have loop alarms for all analog inputs. Failure of any remote transmitter shall remove that transmitter signal from the remaining control functions, in random order, and display this occurrence. 14. The controller shall command the adjustable frequency drive to accelerate the pump to a point where it satisfies the programmed set point. Speed will remain constant until the set point is no longer satisfied. 15. In the event of failure due to a malfunction of the AFD it shall be turned off and the stand-by pump shall be automatically started through its AFD it shall be protected and controlled by the same pump controller. 15500-18 16. A total of 33 analog and digital input/output shall be furnished. All input shall be overcurrent protected. All digital outputs shall be individually fused. Analog outputs shall be inherently short circuit protected. 17. Pump, AFD, and overload trip faults shall not clear automatically. They must be manually reset after correction of the fault. Turning off the control power shall not reset faults. All above faults shall be -displayed before starting. First faults will always be displayed. Faults will not trigger erroneous fault messages. 18. The pump controller shall be self prompting. It shall display all messages in plain English. The messages shall include, but not be limited to; how to obtain default r.. values, when to turn it on, and if it is in the active remote control mode. 19. The read-out shall be bright vacuum fluorescent capable of displaying any set point value, input or output signals, and alarm function in engineering units. 20. The pump logic controller shall be capable of operating in automatic, manual or off-line diagnostics modes. 21. Keylock and software security shall be provided for protection of field programs and set points. D. Sensor/Transmitters: ,., 1. Provide and install three complete, self-contained, strain gauge type differential pressure transmitters equal to a B 6c G ST-102 DP. The transmitters shall be located where indicated on the drawings. Wiring terminals and electronics l shall be in separate compartments, so the electronics remain ( sealed during installation. Reverse polarity protection shall be included to keep wiring mishaps from damaging the �— transmitter. The 4-20mA DC signal shall be transmitted over a pair of No. 18 gauge shielded cable (supplied and installed by controls contractor). 2. Design range shall be as required by system. External zero and space adjustments, over -pressure to 2000 PSI, and no humidity effects. 3. Minimum accuracy shall be +/- 0.25$ of calibrated span. r" Includes combined effects of linearity, hysteresis and ( repeatability. Stability shall be +/- 0.25% of upper range limit for six months. No internal mechanical linkages shall be used in the transmitters. E. Adjustable Frequency Drives: 1. Refer to previous Section 2.07. F. Sequence of Operation: 1. Sensor/transmitters shall be provided as indicated on the plans 2. The sensor/transmitters shall be installed by the mechanical contractor and wired to the pump logic controller by the controls contractor. 3. Each sensor/transmitter shall send a 4-20mA signal to the r- pump logic controller, indicative of process variable condition. 15500-19 r I 4. The pump logic controller shall compare each signal to the independent, engineer/user determined set points. When all set points are satisfied by the process variable, the pump speed shall remain constant at the optimum energy consumption level. 5. The pump logic controller shall continuously scan and compare each process variable to its individual set point and control to the least satisfied zone. If the set point cannot be satisfied by the designated lead pump, the pump logic controller shall initiate a timed sequence of operation to stage a lag pump. The lag pump shall accelerate resulting in the lead pumps decelerating until they equalize in speed. Further change in process variable shall cause the pumps to change speed together. 6. When the set point can be safely satisfied with fewer pumps, the pump logic controller shall initiate a timed distage sequence and continue variable speed operation. As the worst case zone deviates.from set point, the pump logic controller shall send the appropriate analog signal to the AFD to speed up or slow down the pump/motor. 7. In the event of a system differential pressure failure due to a pump/AFD fault, the pump logic controller shall automatically start the next variable speed pump/AFD set in sequence and continue variable speed operation. 8. In the event of the failure of a zone sensor/transmitter, its process variable signal shall be removed from the scan/compare program. Alternative zone sensor/transmitters, if available, shall remain in the scan/compare program for control. 9. The zone number corresponding to the failed sensor/transmitter shall be displayed on the operator interface of the pump logic controller. In the event of failure to receive all zone process variable signals, all AFDs shall maintain 100% speed, reset shall be automatic upon correction of the zone failure. 10. PUMP/AFD fault shall be continuously scrolled through the display on the operator interface of pump logic controller until the fault has been corrected and the pump logic controller has been manually reset. G. System Start-up: 1. The manufacturer shall provide start-up supervision to the installing contractor. 2. The manufacturer shall provide the owner's operating personnel a four hour training session. 2.09 HEATING WATER LOOP SYSTEM: A. Bidding: The Contractor shall include in his Base Bid the amount for an ITT Bell and Gossett heating water loop system as specified below. Under Alternate Bid No. 3, in association with the secondary chilled water loop system, the Contractor may indicate the amount to be added or deducted from his Base Bid if an alternative system is used. Name the proposed alternative manufacturer on the Bis Proposal. 15500-20 r B. General: 1. The secondary loop system shall be a variable speed system. The pumping system shall include, as a minimum, the r, programmable controller, adjustable frequency drive for each pump motor, remote sensors, motors,and pumps. 2. The pump manufacturer shall take "Unit Responsibility" for the successful operation of the system supplied by him. - 3. The pump manufacturer shall supply the complete variable speed system and shall have a minimum of ten years experience with variable speed pumping systems. 4. The system consists of a variable speed pump sized to meet system duty condition as indicated on the pump schedule, adjustable frequency drives, a pump logic controller, and differential pressure sensors. 5. The pump manufacturer shall provide an analog output paddle wheel type flow measuring device suitable for operation to provide an input signal to the pump logic controller. 7 6. At the time of submittal for approval, the pump manufacturer shall provide a complete system profile analysis which shall include as a minimum: the pumps performance (variable speed r pump curves) and the operating characteristics in the system (system curve). 7. This system profile analysis shall include pump motor and adjustable frequency drive efficiencies, load profile, staging points, horsepower, and kilowatt/hour draw. 8. The programmable pump controller, and adjustable: frequency drives shall be supplied as separate components. All functions of the components shall be tested at the factory prior to shipment. Power wiring to the motors and interlock wiring shall be the responsibility of the electrical contractor. Wiring from the sensors to the programmable controller shall be the responsibility of the controls contractor. A complete wiring diagram shall be supplied at time of shipment that shows all field connections. C. Programmable Pump Logic Controller: 1. The controller shall be equal to ITT Bell and Gossett Technologic 2000 pump logic controller. The operator interface shall be flush mounted in the door of the packaged pumping system control cubicle. 2. The manufacturer shall supply and be responsible for the r., operation of a programmable solid state variable speed pump controller. The controller shall function to a proven program that safeguards against damaging hydraulic . conditions including: motor overload, pump flow surges, iR NPSHR above NPSDHA, and hunting. 3. The pump logic controller shall be microcomputer based and hold its firmware in EPROM. On-line field modified data entries, such as set point, shall be stored in PAM memory. EPROM memory storage shall prevent accidental loss of memory due to voltage surge or spike. RAM memory shall be backed up by standard "D" cell batteries with low battery indication. In event of a catastrophic failure, all factory preset values shall be stored and shall be able to be recalled by the operator. r I 15500-21 r`, 4. The pump logic controller shall be capable of receiving up to eight differential input analog signals and comparing them to their individual set points. It will then select the new analog that has deviated the greatest amount from its set point. This selected signal will be used as the command feedback input for a closed loop hydraulic stabilization function to minimize hunting. This system will use three differential inputs. 5. The analog input signal shall be the feedback and the set point(s) shall be the command. The closed loop hydraulic stabilization function must have the capability of performing the traditional proportional, integral and derivative modes. The proportional function shall have a range and be infinitely programmable within that range. Rates shall be in percent gain. The integral function shall also be infinitely programmable and compatible with the adjustable frequency drives (AFD) and the hydraulic system. It shall be entered as repeats/minute. Derivative shall be entered in units of seconds within a fully programmable range allowing infinite entries within that range. 6. The scan and compare rate that selects proper set point and process signal shall be continuous and automatically set for optimum operation. 7. The pump controller shall have off line and on line diagnostic software. Off line diagnostics shall consist of CPU, EPROM, and RAM memory test. It shall have self calibration of all analog inputs with diagnostics, display test, program test, and all I/O tested and status of above displayed. S. On line diagnostics include off line diagnostics and operational diagnostics including but not limited to pump fault(s), AFD fault(s), overloads and sensor/transmitter fault(s). 9. Further fault information may be accessed by interrogating the controller through the front mounted keypad. Exact pinpointing of a fault to a specific module shall be possible. In case of failure, the controller shall fail in a pre -determined safe operating mode. Reset after failure shall not result in a no -flow condition unless all equipment fails. 10. The controller shall be powered by 115V/1/60Hz. The incoming power and I/O circuitry shall reject electromagnetic (EMI) and radio frequency .(RFI) interference. All digital inputs shall be opto-isolated. All outputs shall be electrically isolated. All inputs and outputs shall be modular and may be replaced without re -wiring or soldering. 11. All external sensor/transmitter furnished by the manufacturer shall be powered by the pump controller through an industrial quality 24 volt power supply. 15500-22 i r 12. Failure of any pump, motor, or drive in the system shall cause the controller to not only display the fault condition, but alternate or transfer operation to another operating unit. 13. The pump logic controller shall have loop alarm:; for all analog inputs. Failure of any remote transmitter shall remove that transmitter signal from the remaining control r functions, in random order, and display this occurrence. 14. The controller shall command the adjustable frequency drive to accelerate the pump to a point where it satisfies the r" programmed set point. Speed will remain constant until the set point is no longer satisfied. 15. In the event of failure due to a malfunction of the AFD it r shall be turned off and the stand-by pump shall be automatically started through its AFD it shall be protected and controlled by the same pump controller. 16. A total of 33 analog and digital input/output shall be furnished. All input shall be overcurrent protected. All digital outputs shall be individually fused. Analog outputs shall be inherently short circuit protected. 17. Pump, AFD, and overload trip faults shall not clear automatically. They must be manually reset after correction of the fault. Turning off the control power shall not reset r faults. All above faults shall be displayed before starting. First faults will always be displayed. Faults will not trigger erroneous fault messages. 18. The pump controller shall be self prompting. It shall r display all messages in plain English. The messages shall include, but not be limited to; how to obtain default values, when to turn it on, and if it is in the active remote control mode. 19. The read-out shall be bright vacuum fluorescent capable.of displaying any set point value, input or output signals, and alarm function in engineering units. 20. The pump logic controller shall be capable of operating in automatic, manual or off-line diagnostics modes. 21. Keylock and software security shall be provided for protection of field programs and set points. D. Sensor/Transmitters: 1. Provide and install three complete, self-contained, strain r gauge type differential pressure transmitters equal to a B & G ST-102 DP. The transmitters shall be located where indicated on the drawings. Wiring terminals and electronics shall be in separate compartments, so the electronics remain sealed during installation. Reverse polarity protection j shall be included to keep wiring mishaps from damaging the transmitter. The 4-20mA DC signal shall be transmitted over r' a pair of No. 18 gauge shielded cable (supplied and installed by controls contractor). 2. Design range shall be as required by system. External zero and space adjustments, over -pressure to 2000 PSI, and no j humidity effects. 15500-23 r E. F. 3. Minimum accuracy shall be +/- 0.25% of calibrated span. Includes combined effects of linearity, hysteresis and repeatability. Stability shall be +/- 0.25% of upper range limit for six months. No internal mechanical linkages shall be used in the transmitters. Adjustable Frequency Drives: 1. Refer to previous Section 2.07. Sequence of Operation: 1. Sensor/transmitters shall be provided as indicated on the plans. 2. The sensor/transmitters shall be installed by the mechanical contractor and wired to the pump logic controller by the controls contractor. 3. Each sensor/transmitter shall send a 4-20mA signal to the pump logic controller, indicative of process variable condition. 4. The pump logic controller shall compare each signal to the independent, engineer/user determined set points. When all set points are satisfied by the process variable, the pump speed shall remain constant at the optimum energy consumption level. 5. The pump logic controller shall continuously scan and compare each process variable to its individual set point and control to the least satisfied zone. If the set point cannot be satisfied by the designated lead pump, the pump logic controller shall initiate a timed sequence of operation to stage a lag pump. The lag pump shall accelerate resulting in the lead pumps decelerating until they equalize in speed. Further change in process variable shall cause the pumps to change speed together. 6. When the set point can be safely satisfied with fewer pumps, the pump logic controller shall initiate a timed distage sequence and continue variable speed operation. As the worst case zone deviates from set point, the pump logic controller shall send the appropriate analog signal to the AFD to speed up or slow down the pump/motor. 7. In the event of a system differential pressure failure due to a pump/AFD fault, the pump logic controller shall automatically start the next variable speed pump/AFD set in sequence and continue variable speed operation. 8. In the event of the failure of a zone sensor/transmitter, its process variable signal shall be removed from the scan/compare program. Alternative zone sensor/transmitters, if available, shall remain in the scan/compare program for control. 9. The zone number corresponding to the failed sensor/transmitter shall be displayed on the operator interface of the pump logic controller. In the event of failure to receive all zone process variable signals, all AFDs shall maintain 100% speed, reset shall be automatic upon correction of the zone failure. 15500-24 " 10. PUMP/AFD fault shall be continuously scrolled through the display on the operator interface of pump logic controller until the fault has been corrected and the pump logic f.. controller has been manually reset. 11. In addition to controlling the heating water pumps, the pump controller shall control the boilers as follows. 12. The boiler plant consists of two existing 250 HP Kewanee i` firetube boilers and a new 300 HP water tube boiler under this contract. 13. The heating water pumps and boilers shall be energized thru r' the pump logic controller when the outside air temperature reaches 65 degrees. 14. Upon activation the pumps shall be enabled as described r. above and the boilers shall begin their operating sequence. 15. The controls contractor shall provide a pneumatic two-way two -position valve at the inlet of each boiler. The pumping system manufacturer shall provide an analog flow measuring f device in the common supply header at the outlet of the boilers. 16. The new watertube boiler shall be Boiler #1 and the r� remaining two existing boilers shall be #2 and 03. 17. The pump logic controller shall open the valve to Boiler ` #1. After a three minute delay, Boiler #1 shall fire and its internal controls shall modulate the burner to maintain r 180 deg. supply water. 18. On an increase in load, Boiler #1 shall modulate its own burners to increase its capacity. 19. When the flow measuring device reaches 650 GPM, the pump logic controller shall open the valve to Boiler #2. After a three minute delay, Boiler #2 will fire and modulate its burners under its own control to produce 180 degree water. 20. Boiler #3 shall come on line in the same manner when the flow measuring device reads 1150 GPM. 21. When load, and therefore flow, decreases the boilers shall go off line. The burners will turn off and after a one minute delay the valve shall close. This sequence will occur for every boiler as they come off line. 22. Boiler #3 shall come off line when the flow measuring device comes down to 1075 GPM. 23. Boiler #2 shall come off line when the flow measuring device r.. comes down to 575 GPM. G. System Start-up: 1. The manufacturer shall provide start-up supervision to the installing contractor. 2. The manufacturer shall provide the owner's operating ( l personnel a four hour training session. 2.10 AIR UNITS (ROOF MOUNTED): A. Roof mounted Air Units RTU-1, RTU-2, RTU-3, RTU-4, RTU-5, RTU-6 and RTU-8 are three deck multi -zone units. RTU-7 is a single ,,. zone unit. Air units shall be provided as detailed on the drawings. Air units shall be special construction weatherproof units for rooftop mounting. Air units shall be designed and r 15500-25 r built for outdoor installation. Indoor units modified for outdoor use are not acceptable. Capacities shall be as scheduled on the drawings. Units shall be as manufactured by Temtrol or approved equal. B. Complete unit floor shall be 3" fiberglass insulated "double bottom" design with 16.ga. galvanized steel mastic coated inner floor and 20 ga. galvanized steel subfloor. C. Each air unit shall have gasketed man-sized double -wall access doors with double "Ventlock" heavy duty hardware latches and hinges. Doors shall be provided in the fan, coil and filter section. Door tieback shall be provided. Doors attached by screws or not continuously gasketed are not acceptable. D. Fan Casing: Fabricated of heavy gage steel sheets bolted to tubular steel structure reinforcing members. E. Casings seams shall be welded or bolted and sealed with a rubber based mastic. Use of sheetmetal screws to fasten side walls to unit framework is not permitted. F. Coil Casing: Fabricated of heavy gauge steel sheets bolted to structural framing and reinforcing members. G. Casings seams shall be welded or bolted and sealed with a rubber based mastic. Use of sheetmetal screws to fasten side walls to unit framework is not permitted. Coil frames shall not be used as structural members of the coil section. All coils shall be able to be removed without affecting the structural integrity of the coil casing. H. Drain pans shall be double clad insulated drain pans. Drains shall be full size as shown on the drawings. Drain pans shall extend under the complete coil section and shall be insulated between pans with 1" high density fiberglass insulation. Rigid inner pan shall be fabricated of 16 gauge 304 stainless steel. I. Fans: All fans shall be Class I AMCA rated, selected for maximum efficiency, delivery, static pressure, and BHP at the operating point. RTU-1, RTU-2, RTU-3, RTU-4, RTU-5, RTU-6, and RTU-8 shall have forward curved return fans and airfoil plug supply fans. RTU-7 shall have forward curved supply fan and return fan. J. Fan sections shall have internal inertia pads with 1" deflection spring isolators, neoprene base and stops. Fans shall have flexible connections. K. Fan curve shall indicate that operation is stable at 20% above and 20% below the selected RPM. L. Fan shaft shall be selected to operate at a speed 30% or more below its first critical speed. The rotating assembly shall be statically and dynamically balanced. When the unit is running there shall be no visible deflection of any panel and no noise of metal to metal contact. If, in the judgement of the Engineer, objectionable noise or vibration is observed, the units shall be aligned and dynamically balanced on the job by a factory mechanic to industrial tolerances, at no additional cost. Balancing method and tolerances shall be approved by the Engineer. Any defective component shall be replaced. 15500-26 r r- 1 PM r r f i r 1 r i M. N. 0. P. Q. R. S. T. U. V. W. X. Y. s Fan scrolls and wheels shall be designed as a unit with smooth belled inlet and cut-off. Fan wheel shall be keyed to the shaft and shall be removable. Bearings shall be ball or roller type rated for 200,000 hour life. Bearing shall be bolted to structural bearing; supports. Extend copper lube lines to a common convenient point. Each fan shaft shall have two bearings only. Motor and Drive: Motor shall be as specified under "Motors," this Section. Drive shall be selected for 120% of the maximum motor horsepower. For motors 30 hp and less provide an adjustable drive, selected for the RPM of the fan with 10% adjustment below the selected speed. The motor shall be installed on adjustable rails or cradle to permit belt tensioning and alignment. Provide flexible conduit for wiring the motor. Provide a heavy belt guard for the belt drive, securely bolted to the unit casing with 1"xl"xl/4" angles. Field fabrication is acceptable for guard brackets if not available from the manufacturer. The unit shall be provided with expanded metal secondary access door to each fan section. Cooling Coils: ARI certified water tube type with copper tubes and aluminum fins, mechanically bonded, pressure tested at 250 psig. Cooling coils shall have not less than 4 rows of tubes. Fin spacing may vary to produce the scheduled capacity, but may not have less than 6 fins per in. or more than 14 fins per inch. Heating Coils: ARI certified water tube type with copper tubes and aluminum fins, mechanically bonded. Insulation: Casings shall be internally insulated with 2" thick 3 lb. neoprene coated fiberglas. Housing shall be mounted on a structural steel curb to be flashed into the roof construction as detailed on the drawings. All services to the unit shall enter the housing inside the curb. Fresh air intake shall have a rain hood with insect screen and louver. Relief outlets shall have raintight louvers. Units shall be complete with return air damper, fresh air damper, and relief damper. Dampers shall be of low leakage type with edge seals and stainless steel jamb seals. Refer to "Temperature Regulation" for sequence of operation. Filters: Each unit shall be furnished with 30% efficient throw away filters. Filter holding frames and locking devices shall be factory installed. Furnish one spare set of filters. Roof Mounted Air Units RTU-1, RTU-2, RTU-3, RTU-4, RTU-5, RTU-6 and RTU-8 shall be provided with motorized low leakage zone mixing dampers one for cold deck/bypass deck and one for hot deck/bypass deck for each zone. Furnish with interconnecting linkage as required for two actuators per zone. Damper actuators are provided by temperature controls contractor. The unit manufacturer shall provide fused starters .for each fan in each unit. Provide each starter with fuses, pilot lights, HOA switch, and 120V control power transformer. Interlock return fan to run with supply fan. Provide each unit with a 480V/120V center tapped transformer connected to main supply r 15500-27 power with 15A primary in -line fuses and 15A secondary fuses to serve lights and convenience outlet. All components with the exception of the 48OV/120V transformer shall be mounted in a NEMA 3R enclosure with a main power disconnect mounted on the outside of each unit. The 480V/120V transformer shall be located in the unit. The unit manufacturer shall completely wire the unit as per NEC for single point unit electrical service. AA. Each access door to a fan and motor shall have safety switches to shutdown the fan when the door is opened. BB. Each major compartment shall be provided with a lamp holder with vaporproof glass housing, wired by the unit manufacturer to a single weatherproof switch mounted in the face of the main power disconnect panel. Provide lamps for each socket. CC. Mount a weatherproof 120V convenience outlet in the face of the main power disconnect panel. DD. In addition, the unit manufacturer shall provide a compartment with an insulated access door to enclose a digital control panel provided by the temperature controls contractor. The dimensions for height, width and depth will be determined from the successful temperature controls bidder. The compartment shall have a steel panel to which a control panel can be mounted. Also provide openings in the compartment for control wiring and pneumatic tubing and air ventilation. The compartment shall be weatherproof. EE. Provide Dwyer Magnahelic gage across each filter bank complete with probes, cocks and tubing. Mount gage on temperature control panel downstream of filter bank. 2.11 BLOWER COIL AIR HANDLING UNITS: A. Furnish and install where shown on the plans blower coils either packaged or assembled from separate sections. Unit shall be installed with ductwork as indicated. Capacities shall be as scheduled. Units shall be Magic -Aire or approved equal. B. Unit enclosure shall be insulated and constructed of galvanized steel, bonderized and finished with baked enamel. Large front service access panels shall provide easy access to all components. Reversible filter rack shall have duct connection flanges and be equipped with permanent type filter that slides out for maintenance. C. Fan shall be forward curved with double inlet, mounted on motor shaft, dynamically and statically balanced. The fan shall deliver scheduled cfm with required external static pressure. The fan motor shall be factory lubricated, have internal overload protection and be resiliently mounted. Fan motor assembly shall slide out for service. D. Cooling coil shall be constructed with aluminum plate fins mechanically bonded to copper tubing with all joints brazed. E. Heating coil shall be constructed with aluminum plate fins mechanically bonded to copper tubing with all joints brazed. F. Provide insulated condensate pan for cooling coil. 15500-28 .-0 *` 2.12 ELECTRIC UNIT HEATERS: A. The Contractor shall furnish and install the electric unit heaters shown and scheduled on the drawings. The unit heaters r,. shall conform to NFPA requirements and shall be UL listed. Units shall be Modine or equal. B. All components and controls, including thermostat, transformers, relays, and switches shall be enclosed inside the double walled, r` heavy gauge enameled steel case. e C. The unit heaters shall be furnished with individually adjustable extruded aluminum louvers, thermal cutout safety switch, and fan :-� delay switch. 2.13 VENTILATION FANS - PROPELLER TYPE: A. Ventilator shall be belt driven axial type. Drive frame assembly shall be constructed of heavy gauge steel angle. Mounting members shall be slotted to allow adjustment and centering of propeller over spun venturi. r B. Propeller construction shall be six die formed blades welded to a steel hub with gussets welded to three quarters of the blade length. The hub bore shall be a machined steel insert welded to r•• the hub. A standard square key with two set screws and two retaining rings shall lock the propeller to the shaft. C. The ground and polished steel propeller shaft shall be mounted r in sealed ball bearings. Fully machined cast iron pulleys shall be keyed to the propeller and motor shafts. All drives shall be adjustable and sized for a minimum of 165 percent of driven horsepower. D. Refer to schedule on the drawings for size and capacities. E. The fan shall be mounted as shown with sheet metal connector to the louver with a flexible duct connector. F. Fan shall be Acme, Cook, Greenheck or equal. 2.14 COOLING COILS: A. ARI certified water tube type with copper tubes and aluminum r fins, mechanically bonded, pressure tested at 250 psig. Cooling coils shall have not less than 4 rows of tubes. Fin spacing may vary to produce the scheduled capacity, but may not have less r' than 6 fins per in. or more than 14 fins per inch. The scheduled pressure drops are maximum allowable valves. 2.15 HEATING COILS: A. ARI certified water tube type with copper tubes and aluminum fins, mechanically bonded. The scheduled pressure drops are maximum allowable valves. r 2.16 CONDENSING WATER OPEN LOOP SAND FILTER: A. Provide sand filter marked SF #1-90 on the drawings with Model r HMF-36 packaged filtration system as manufactured by Process Efficiency Products Inc., or approved equal. Design to filter 142 gpm, filter area of 7.1 square feet. 15500-29 B. The filter system shall include a filter tank with permanent media, recirculating pump with removable pre -strainer, Sch. 80 PVC piping, automatic valves and controls for activating filtration and backwash modes, all mounted on a common base. Tank shall be fitted with pressure gauge and automatic air vent. C. The filter tank shall be constructed of ASTM-A7 carbon steel with working pressure of 100 psi. Tank shall have a manhole in the top of unit. Manhole shall be flange steel with gasket and bolt and yolk. A 4x6 handhole with bolt cover shall be provided in side shell for cleanout. Inlet and outlet connections shall be located in tank shell and shall be Schedule 40 steel pipe. Filter tank shall be supported by 360 degree steel skirt. D. Tank lining shall be epoxy coated and shall be applied toall interior surfaces of the tank. E. Internal components shall include an upper distribution system and lower collection system of Stainless Steel, hydraulically balanced for proper flow in both filter and backwash modes. F. All necessary face piping and valves shall be assembled complete at factory before shipping. Valves shall be (2) brass 3-way valves with single lever linkage. Pressure gauges shall be mounted on effluent and influent piping with gauge cocks. G. Controls shall be for automatic backflushing of media. Controls shall include an electric actuator and pressure activated switch to begin backflush. Controls shall include a pre-set timer for backwash, motor starter with overload and short circuit protection, transformer to provide 110v control power, manual backwash button mounted on access door, all mounted in a NEMA 3R enclosure. H. Filter media shall produce a performance rating based on removal of 5 micron solids and larger with 90% efficiency. I. Pump shall be bronze construction. Manufacturer shall verify pump performance to sufficiently operate with the given design. Pump shall have basket prestrainer. Motor shall be 460V/3PH, 3HP, TEFC, J. Filter shall use city water for backflushing filter media. Upon activation of backflush mode, a signal from the unit shall close three solenoid valves located in the makeup water line to each tower to insure full water flow to the filter. At the end of the backflow mode, each of the three solenoid valves shall open. K. Provide an authorized factory representative to give a two-hour training session to the Owner's operating personnel. 2.17 CHILLED WATER/HEATING WATER CLOSED LOOP SAND FILTER: A. Provide for the chilled water loop a sand filter marked SF #2-90 on the drawings with Model CL 20TP packaged filtration system as manufactured by Process Efficiency Products, Inc., or approved equal. Filter shall be designed to filter 43 GPM and have 2.18 sq. ft. media area. B. Provide for the heating water loop a sand filater marked SF #3-90 on the drawings with Model CL20TP/300 packaged filtration system as manufactured by Process Efficiency Products, Inc., or approved equal. Filter shall be designed to filter 43 GPM and have 2.18 sq. ft. media area. Filter shall be suitable for operation with up to 300 degree water. 15500-30 I r C. The filter system shall include an ASTM carbon steel tank to withstand 150 psi. Overdrain and underdrain of each shall be stainless steel. Tank shall have epoxy lining. All face piping ,., shall be schedule 40 carbon steel. D. Unit shall be valved and linked for automatic operation. Unit shall include all controls to provide for fully automatic operation. Controls shall be mounted in NEMA 3R Cabinet and include a 110V control transformer. E. Pump shall be 1 HP, 460V/3PH. Pump shall be 50 psi bronze construction with TEFC motor. r" F. Media shall be suitable for 90% efficient removal of particles 10 microns or larger. G. Tank shall have 4x6 handhole in top and be suitable for the r.. addition of chemicals through the top of the unit. H. An authorized factory representative shall give a two-hour ` training session to the Owner's operating personnel. r 2.18 FLUE MOUNTED DRAFT INDUCER: A. Install in the flue of the two domestic water heaters as shown on the plans a size 14D-1/4 induced draft fan as manufactured by •� Wing. The fan shall have a capacity of 1400 cfm at 0.35 in sp. and capable of handling flue gas up to 750 deg. F. B. The entire fan, motor, shaft and bearings shall be easily removable as a unit from the casing. C. Casing shall have 2 standard inlets, one fan duct connection and the other fan mounting a barometric damper. D. Motor shall be 1/2 hp, 1750 rpm Class B insulated operating at 120V/lPH. E. The draft inducer shall be interlocked with the water heaters to run when the heaters fire. 2.19. COMBUSTION AIR PREHEAT COIL: A. Install as shown and scheduled on the drawings a combustion air preheat coil manufactured by Wing. B. Each heating coil to consist of built-in series of finned heating elements and bypasses with interlocked dampers. Each coil shall be capable of maintaining a constant discharge air temperature regardless of variations in entering air temperature with full hot water flow on the coil at all times. C. Proportioning of the air shall be such that the temperature at r.. any point in a plane parallel to the face of the coil three feet downstream from the leaving side will not vary more than 5 degrees F. from the average discharge temperature. Dampers shall be 16 gauge roll formed, cold -rolled steel with baked enamel finish. D. Finned heating elements shall be fabricated of seamless return bend type copper tubes with rectangular aluminum fins spaced not closer than 10 fins per inch. Each tube shall be individually secured to the supply and return headers by a mechanical joint consisting of a nut and ferrule compression union, to allow for r.. individual removal of tubes in the event of damage. Tubes shall be secured against vibration by a channel -shaped retainer, permitting expansion and contraction. Finned elements shall be factory tested at 1000 lbs. hydrosttaic pressure. 15500-31 E. Pressure drop of air through the coil shall not vary more than ±5%, regardless of the position of the internal dampers. 2.02 BOILER VENT: A. The Contractor shall furnish and install for the new boiler a 10 gauge black steel flue extending and connecting to the existing boiler flue in the boiler room as shown on the drawings. 2.21 FLUE VENT: A. Provide and install flue vents from the relocated water heaters. Flue vents shall be constructed of Metalbestos double -wall metal conduit and shall be of the sizes recommended by the manufactures of the devices vented. They shall be complete with all couplings and other required fittings. Extend new flue in the boiler room as shown on the drawings. End of Section 15500-32 SECTION 15600 - TESTING. ADJUSTING AND BALANCING MECHANICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 NOTE: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work�of this section. 1.02 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.03 SCOPE OF WORK: A. The Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB) of the air conditioning systems will be performed by an impartial Technical Firm whose operations are limited only to the field of professional TAB. The TAB work shall be done under the direct supervision of a qualified engineer employed by the TAB firm. B. As a part of work under Division 15 the Contractor shall make any changes in the sheaves, belts, motors and dampers as required for correct balance as required by the TAB firm. C. The Contractor shall provide and coordinate work under all sections of the specifications as required to correct, repair or replace any and all deficient items or conditions found during the testing, adjusting and balancing period. D. In order that all systems may be properly tested, balanced and adjusted as required herein by these specifications, the Contractor shall operate said systems for the length of time necessary to properly verify their completion and readiness for TAB and during the TAB period. E. Project contract completion schedules shall provide time frame allowance to permit the completion of TAB services prior to occupancy. Provide simulated design condition loads as necessary. F. Documents: The Contractor shall transmit one copy of the following records for review and comment by the TAB firm. 1. As -installed drawings 2. Approved fixture brochures, wiring diagrams and control diagrams. 3. Shop drawings 4. Instructions PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SERVICES OF CONTRACTOR A. The Contractor shall have all systems complete and in operational readiness prior to beginning the TAB services. B. Complete operational readiness prior to commencement of TAB services shall include the following: 1. Construction status of building shall permit the closing of doors, etc. to obtain projected operating conditions. 15600 - 1 2. Air Distribution Systems: a. Verify installation for conformity to design. All supply, return and exhaust ducts terminated and pressure tested for leakage as required by specifications. b. All volume and fire dampers properly located and functional. Dampers shall provide tight closure and full opening, smooth and free operation. C. All supply, return and exhaust grilles, registers, and diffusers installed. d. Air handling systems, units and associated apparatus, such as heating and cooling coils, filter sections, access doors, etc. shall be blanked and/or sealed to eliminate excessive by-pass or leakage of air. e. All fans (supply, exhaust) are to be operating and verified for freedom from vibration, total air quantities. f. Drive belts shall be of proper size and tension. Heater elements shall be of proper size and rating. Provide record of motor amperage and voltage and verify that they do not exceed nameplate ratings. 3. Automatic Controls: a. Check that all control components are installed in accordance with project requirements and are functional, including all electrical interlock damper sequences, air and water resets, freezestats, POC detectors. b. All controlling instruments calibrated and set for designed operating conditions with the exception of the room thermostats which shall be calibrated at the completion of test and balance. 4. Permanently mark all dampers, volume controls, and other settings after TAB. 3.02 SERVICES OF TAB AGENCY: A. Preliminary Report and Deficiency List: Inspect the installation of heating and cooling piping systems, sheet metal work, temperature controls and other component parts of the heating, air conditioning, and ventilating systems. The inspection of the work shall cover that part relating to proper arrangement and adequate provisions for the testing and balancing. Prepare and submit Deficiency List to Engineer. B. Final Report: Upon Contractor's written response to the Deficiency List, check, adjust, and balance systemic components to obtain optimum conditions in each conditioned space in the building. Prepare and submit complete reports on the balance and operations of the system. C. Final Inspection: Make a total of three inspections within 90 days after completion of the TAB contract to insure that satisfactory conditions are being maintained throughout and to satisfy any unusual conditions. Final inspection with Engineer and Owner Staff with "punch list" and space check. 15600 - 2 r� e D. Offseason Report: Make inspections in the building during { the opposite season from that in which the initial adjustments were made and at those times make any necessary r- modifications to the initial adjustments required to produce optimum operation of the systemic components, and produce the proper conditions in each conditioned space. Report to Engineer. 3.03 CONDITIONS: A. The TAB agency shall be responsible for inspecting, r' adjusting, balancing and logging the data on the performance of fans, all dampers in the duct systems, all air distribution devices. B. During the balancing the temperature regulation will be adjusted for proper relationship between controlling instruments and calibrated. C. In all fan systems, the air quantities shown on the plans. 3.03 DATA REQUIRED: A. Before final acceptance is made, the balancing agency shall furnish the following data. The data shall be neatly entered on appropriate forms together with any typed supplements required to completely document all results. Written explanations of any abnormal conditions are required. B. Submit 4 copies of the report. AIR SYSTEM DATA: Equipment (fan or factory fabricated station unit): 1. Installation Data 2. Manufacturer and Model 3. Size 4. Arrangement, Discharge and Class 5. Motor H.P., Voltage, Phase, Cycles, and Full Load Amps 6. Motor sheave diameter, fan sheave diameter, number and size of belts. 7. Location nd local identification data. Design Data j Data listed in schedules on drawings and specification. r 1. Fan (Air Unit) Recorded (Test) Data 2. C.F.M. and operating static pressure set point. 3. Operating G.P.M. (From pump curves if metering is not provided) 4. No -Load Amps and Full -Load Amps (Where Possible) j 5. Full -Flow Amps 6. Minimum -Flow Amps 15600 - 3 AIR HEATING AND COOLING EQUIPMENT: Design Data 1. Load (B.t.u.h. or MBH) 2. G.P.M. or steam pressure 3. Entering and leaving temperature 4. Entering and leaving air conditions (D.B, and W.B.) each zone 5. C.F.M. 6. Water Pressure Drop Recorded Data 1. Type of equipment and identification (location of number designation) 2. Entering and leaving air conditions (D.B. and W.B.) each zone 3. Entering and leaving water temperature 4. G.P.M. or steam pressure 5. Temperature rise or drop DUCT SYSTEMS: Duct Quantities (Maximum and Minimum) - Mains, Submains 1. Branches, outdoor (Outside) Air, Total Air, an Exhaust. 2. Duct size(s) 3. Number of Pitot tube (Pressure) Measurements 4. Sum of Velocity Measurements (Note: Do Not Add Pressure Measurement) 5. Average Velocity 6. Recorded (Test) C.F.M. 7. Design C.F.M. 8. Static pressure at Static Pressure Sensors in Cold Duct. 9. Static pressure at Static Pressure Sensors in Hot Duct. 3.05 FINAL INSPECTION: A. Recheck: At the time of final inspection, the TAB agency shall recheck, in the presence of the Owner's Representative, specific and random selections of data (water and air quantities and air motion) recorded in the Certified Report. Points and areas for recheck shall be selected by the Owner's Representative. Measurement and test procedures shall be the same as approved for work forming basis of Certified Report. Selections for recheck (specific plus random) in general, will not exceed 25 percent of the total number tabulated in the report, except that special air systems may require a complete recheck for safety reasons. B. If random test elicit a measured flow deviation of ten percent or more form that recorded in the Certified Report listings, by ten percent or more of the selected recheck stations, the report shall be automatically rejected. In the 15600 - 4 3.06 event the report is rejected, all systems shall be readjusted and tested, new data recorded, new Certified Reports submitted, and new inspection tests made, all at no additional cost to the Owner. ACCEPTANCE: A. Following final acceptance of Certified Reports by the Owner, the settings of all splitters, dampers, controllers and other adjustment devices shall be permanently marked so that adjustment can be restored if disturbed at any time. End of Section 15600 - 5 PW- SECTION 15700 - TEMPERATURE REGULATION �.., PART 1 - GENERAL ` 1.01 NOTE: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.02 SUBMMALS: A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials and equipment. Include system schematics indicating all devices, pneumatic piping, electrical wiring and sequence of operation. Sequence of operation shall reference each component device by designation used on schematics. r' 1.03 SCOPE: ( A. The existing temperature control system consists of the following: 1. All air handling units and rooftop units, except AHU-4, 5, b, 7, 9 & 10, have pneumatic control systems. r 2. AHU-4, 5, 6, 7, 9 & 10 are controlled from Johnson Controls Metasys standalone DDC panels installed under Bid Item #1. r 3. The cooling tower is controlled from a Johnson Controls Metasys standalone DDC panel installed under Bid Item #1. 4. The chillers are controlled through a panel furnished by the chiller manufacturer. 5. The variable speed pump speed control is through a panel furnished by the pump manufacturer. B. The scope of this project generally consists of furnishing all labor, materials, tools, requipment and services for a fully integrated facility management system (FMS), incorporating Direct Digital Control (DDC), monitoring and control for all air handling units, rooftop units, cooling tower and other equipment as shown. All l existing control functions except for chillers and variable speed pumps shall be ` maintained and converted from pneumatic to DDC. C. The FMS shall consist of the following elements: 1. Microcomputer based remote control panels interfacing directly with sensors, actuators and enviromental delivery systems (i.e., HVAC equipment, etc.). r" 2. A communication network to allow data exchange between remote panels and between remote panels and the central Building; Management computer. r3. A personal computer (PC) based central and associated operator station and software functioning as the primary operator interface for the FMS. 4. Pneumatic electric and electronic controls for all items indicated on drawings and described hereinafter including dampers, valves, panels, and pneumatic and electrical installation. D. All valve and damper actuators shall be pneumatic. E. Two personal computer workstations shall be furnished. One shall be located in the Administration Office and one in the Engineer's office. r f i 15700-1 F. All equipment, materials, and appurtenances furnished under this section of the specifications shall be new. Materials restored to "like new" condition shall not be acceptable. G. The Temperature Control Subcontractor shall be responsible for all final calibration and adjustment of all control equipment including equipment furnished and installed in accordance with these specifications. 1.04 ALTERNATES: A. Under Base Bid, the Johnson Controls Metasys System shall be extended. B. Under Alternate No. 4, a Honeywell Excel system shall be installed to replace the existing pneumatic system and Johnson Controls Metasys system. C. Under Alternate No. 5, an Andover Infinity system shall be installed to replace the existing pneumatic system and Johnson Controls Metasys system. 1.05 , WORK BY OTHERS: A. Automatic Valves: Installed under applicable piping section under supervision of the FMS Contractor. All reducers and fittings necessary to install smaller than pipe size valves shall be furnished and installed under applicable piping sections. B. Automatic Dampers: Installed under Section 15320, Air Distribution System, under supervision of the FMS Contractor. C. Piping Penetration: Water pressure and differential taps, valve manifolds, flow switches, thermal wells: Installed under Section 15200, Piping and Accessories under supervision of FMS Contractor. 1.06 ELECTRICAL WIRING SPECIFICATIONS: A. All electrical wiring, including wire, cable, fittings, conduit, interlock wiring, and other supplies associated with the systems described in this section of specifications, shall be furnished and completely installed under this section of the specifications in accordance with the requirements of both the National Electrical Code and Division 16 of these specifications. B. Electrical work under this section of the specifications shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Providing and installing power wiring, conduit, and associated supplies to each local control panel and DDC panel. 2. Providing and installation of all electrical control devices. 3. Providing and installing temperature control wiring, conduit, and associated supplies to connect and interconnect electric control devices and connect to coils, relays, and auxiliary contacts in starters. 4. Providing and installing FMS wiring, conduit, and associated materials to connect sensors, relays, and output devices. 5. All wiring to be run in steel conduit. C. Items of electrical work and materials related to this section that shall be furnished and installed by the Electrical Subcontractor under Division 16 work are complete power wiring, conduit, and associated materials to motor starters and motors. D. All electrical work described in this section that is not specifically designated to be furnished and installed by the Contractor under Division 16 shall be furnished and installed by the Temperature Control Subcontractor. 15700-2 7 r 1.07 SERVICE GUARANTEE: i A. The system specified under this section of the specifications shall be guaranteed r„ from defects in workmanship and material under normal use and service for a period of twenty four (24) months from the date of substantial completion. B. Upon completion of the installation, the Control Subcontractor shall thoroughly r inspect, check, adjust, calibrate, and make ready for use all devices comprising the control and data acquisition systems and certify that they are installed in accordance with "as -built" drawings. C. The Control System Subcontractor shall instruct the Owner and its personnel, at completion of the job, in operation and service of the temperature control system. t Provide technical training comparable to that received by factory technicians. All training shall be accomplished after the entire control system is operable. 1.08 DRAWINGS AND MANUALS: A. Contractor shall prepare a complete and coordinated schematic control and ^ interlocking wiring diagram of the entire heating, ventilating, and air conditioning system. The diagram shall include all internal and external control wiring for the equipment furnished. The diagram shall include a complete worded sequence of *' operation, control and panel details. The diagram shall be neat, legible and the j drafting shall be of a professional quality. The final diagram shall reflect any changes or corrections made during contraction so as to be an "As -Built" diagram. 2.01 COMPRESSED AIR: A. Furnish complete, a duplex high pressure quiet reciprocating air compressor in the Temperature Controls Equipment Room with sufficient capacity to handle entire system under both Bid items with not more than 1/3 operation of the compressor system. B. Furnish with the compressor an ASME Code Construction high pressure storage tank including drain connection. Provide with pressure controls, starters, PRV assembly and all accessories, including drain connection. Install a desiccant dryer system from the pump discharge to remove 99.5% of all oil present and any solid particle 0.03 microns and larger. The trapped oil and water shall be purged from the filter after each ON cycle. C. Provide a refrigerated moisture condenser with mounting bracket for dew point control of compressed air. D. Provide a timed automatic drain for both the air compressor and moisture condenser. E. The control air for AHU's 4,5,6,7,9 and 10 and RTU-1 thru 8 shall be supplied from a copper supply main header that extends from grid 1 to grid 15 of the building. This supply main shall be sized to handle the entire facility. Copper runouts shall come off the header to a central point in each mechanical room. Copper runouts shall be extended up each necessary chase to supply air to the roof mounted air units. i 15700-3 2.02 PIPING: A. All exposed tubing and conduit shall be run parallel to or at right angles to the building structure and shall be concealed in all finished spaces. Tubing may be run exposed in mechanical rooms or areas where other piping is exposed. B. Hard drawn copper tubing shall be used where run exposed and either hard drawn or annealed where concealed. Only tool -made bends will be acceptable. Fittings for copper tubing shall be brass or copper solder joint type, except at connections to apparatus, where brass compression -type fittings shall be used. C. Non-metallic tubing may be used in lieu of copper only inside control cabinets or for flexibility with short runs (24" maximum) to controls, and shall be virgin polyethylene, meeting stress -crack test ASTM D1693-60T. Tubing shall be self -extinguishing under ASTM-D635 flammability test. D. Number -coded polyethylene shall be used inside control cabinets and shall be neatly tied and supported. Flexible connections bridging the cabinet and its door shall be neatly fastened along the hinge -side and protected against abrasion. E. It is the intent that all compressed air tubing included in this project be new and clean. All existing controls and tubing shall be removed from the building as much as possible. Tubing may be abandoned in place when removal is not possible. F. The Contractor shall employ a wiling contractor to repair or replace any ceiling which must be removed to install any component of the control system. G. Exception: In inaccessible areas on the second level, existing tubing may be reused. All existing tubing shall be thoroughly purged of oil and water with a solvent. A final purge of dry nitrogen is required to dry the system. All reused tubing shall be tested to hold 20 psi for 24 hours to insure the tubing is free of leaks. Absolutely all proposed tubing to be reused shall be approved by the Engineer. H. The Temperature Controls Contractor shall make himself completely familiar with the project to account for any additional work required to install the control system. 2.03 PRESSURE SENSORS: A. Fan proof -of -flow switches shall be U.L listed adjustable set point and differential pressure type. Switches shall be piped to fan discharge except where fans operate at less than one inch WG, they shall be piped across the fan. For fractional horsepower and non -ducted fans, relays or auxiliary contacts may be used. Maximum pressure rating shall be at least 10 inches WG. B. Pump proof -of -flow switches shall be U.L listed adjustable differential pressure or flow type as specified in the sequence of operation or data point summary. Devices shall be 150 PSI rated except chilled water flow switches shall be provided with totally sealed vapor tight switch enclosure on 300 PSI body. Differential pressure switches shall have valved manifold for servicing. C. Air flow and static pressure analog sensors shall be of high accuracy suitable for the low velocity pressures to be encountered, be selected for approximately 50% overrange, and have a 4 to 20 MA output. These M3 OM, r 4 differential pressure sensors shall be connected to the airflow measuring station with valved lines for testing and calibration, and shall have ,.. adjustments for zero and span. D. Water flow analog sensors shall be provided complete with flow element and shall be an all solid state precision industrial type with stainless steel meter body, maximum error of no more than .5% of span, and 4 to 20 MA output. Sensors shall be rated for 250 PSI minimum and installed in strict accordance to the manufacturer's instructions complete with three -valve manifold for calibration and maintenance. 2.04 DIRECT DIGITAL SENSORS: A. Temperature sensors shall be Resistance Temperature Detector (RTD) type of 500 OHM Balco, 100 or 3000 OHM Platinum. 1. Space temperature sensors shall be provided with blank commercial type locking satin chrome covers, and shall be identical in appearance to the pneumatic space thermostat. 2. Duct temperature sensors shall be rigid stem or averaging type as specified in the sequence of operation. Water sensors shall be provided with a separable copper, monel or stainless steel well. Outside air wall mounted sensors shall be provided with a sun shield. 2.05 SAFETY LOW LIMIT: A. Safety low limits shall be manual reset line voltage type with bellows actuated switches. Twenty foot capillary shall be responsive to the coolest selection of its length. 2.06 ELECTRIC THERMOSTATS: A. Electric thermostats shall be line voltage or low voltage type suitable for the application. Low voltage type shall have heat anticipation. Ratings shall be adequate for the applied load. 2.07 TEMPERATURE SENSORS: r, A. Temperature Sensors: All master space temperature sensors and other space temperature indicating sensors shall be of the linear output type 50-100 degrees F range with blank locking covers. r B. Duct Mounted or Immersion Sensors: Shall have spans of 100 degrees or 200 degrees F as required for a 3-15 psig pressure change. Averaging element sensors shall have a minimum 9' capillary element. Temperature sensors shall be of rigid stem using bi-metallic sensing elements except r where averaging is required. C. Sensors shall be of corrosion resistant construction, tamper proof, suitable for mounting on a vibrating surface. If capillary type sensors are used, exposed capillary shall be temperature compensated, and armored or installed in protective tubing. D. All sensing elements for water pipe mounting shall be of the rod and tube type linear output and shall be furnished complete with separable protecting wells filled with heat conductive compound. Sensors shall be i 15700-5 MO factory calibrated and tamper proof. If easily adjustable sensors are provided, they shall be located inside metal enclosures with cylinder lock and key to prevent unauthorized setting. 2.08 CONTROL VALVES, WATER: A. All modulating straight -through water valves shall be provided with equal -percentage contoured throttling plugs. B. Valves 3" and smaller shall be screwed type, valves 4" and larger shall be flanged. Valves shall be factory -rated to withstand the pressures encountered. Valves shall have stainless -steel stems and spring -loaded teflon packing. C. Water valves shall be sized for a pressure drop equal to the coil they serve but not to exceed 5 psi. Valves shall have replaceable seats and discs. 2.09 AIR FLOW CONTROL DAMPERS: A. The temperature control contractor will provide all control dampers of the types indicated on the plans. Frames shall not be less than 13 gauge galvanized steel. Blades must not be over 8 inches wide nor less than .16 gauge galvanized steel roll formed. Bearings shall be oilite, ball bearing or nylon with 11T shafts. Side seals shall be stainless steel of the tight -seal spring type. Dampers and seals shall be suitable for temperature ranges of -40 degrees to 200 degrees F. B. All proportional control dampers shall be opposed or parallel blade type and all two -position dampers shall be parallel -blade types. C. Dampers shall be minimum leakage type to conserve energy and the manufacturer shall submit leakage and flow characteristic data for all control dampers with the temperature control submitted. Maximum leakage shall be 3% at static pressure of 3 inches of W.C. D. All control dampers shall be standard products of the temperature control manufacturer's factory. Local fabrication of dampers is not allowed. 2.10 PNEUMATIC ACTUATORS: A. Pneumatic operators shall be sized to operate their appropriate dampers or valves with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating action or two -position action as specified B. Where sequencing of actuators is called for such sequencing shall be accomplished by spring ranges adequate for the application. PART 3 - BASE BID FMS PRODUCTS 3.01 GENERAL DESCRIPTION: A. General Description: The facility management system shall consist of the following: 1. Standalone DDC panels 2. Application specific controllers (HVAC etc.) 3. Local Display Devices 4. Portable Operator's Terminals 15700-6 l 5. Personal Computer Operator Workstations. The system shall be modular in nature, and shall permit expansion of both capacity and functionality through the addition of sensors, actuators, standalone DDC panels, and operator devices. B. System architectural design shall eliminate dependence upon any single device for alarm reporting and control execution. Each DDC panel shall operate independently by performing its own specified control, alarm management, operator 1/0, and historical data collection. The failure of any single component or network connection shall not interrupt the execution of control strategies at other operational devices. C. Standalone DDC panels shall be able to access any data from, or send f control commands and alarm reports directly to any other DDC panel or combination of panels on the network without dependence upon a central processing device, such as a central file server. Standalone DDC rpanels shall also be able to send alarm reports to multiple operator workstations, terminals, and printers without dependence upon a central processing device or File Server. i 3.02 NETWORKING/COMMUNICATIONS A. The design of the FMS shall network operator workstations and Standalone DDC panels. Inherent in the system's design shall be the ability to expand or modify the network either via a local area network, or auto -dial telephone line modem connections, or via a combination of r the two networking schemes. d B. Focal Area Network 1. Workstation/DDC Panel Support: Operator workstations and ►— DDC panels shall directly reside on a single shared high speed local area network such that communications may be executed directly between controllers, directly between workstations, and between controllers and workstations on a peer -to -peer basis. 2. Dynamic Data Access: All operator devices, either network resident or connected via dial -up modems, shall have the ability r. to access all point status and application report data, or execute control functions for any and all other devices via the local area network. Access to data shall be based upon logical identification of building equipment. OM Access to system data shall not be restricted by the hardware configuration of the facility management system. The hardware configuration of the FMS network shall be transparent to the user when accessing data or developing control programs. 3. General Network Design: Network design shall include the following provisions: a. High speed data transfer rates for alarm reporting, quick report generation from multiple controllers, and upload/download efficiency between network; devices. The minimum baud rate shall be 1 Megabaud. 15700-7 b. Support of any combination of controllers and Operator Workstations directly connected to the local area network. C. Detection and accommodation of single or multiple failures of either workstations, DDC panels or the network media. The network shall include provisions for automatically re -configuring itself to allow all operational equipment to perform their designated functions as effectively as possible in the event of single or multiple failures. d. Message and alarm buffering to prevent information from being lost. e. Error detection, correction, and re -transmission to guarantee data integrity. f. Default device definition to prevent loss of alarms or data, and ensure alarms are reported as quickly as possible in the event an operator device does not respond. g. Commonly available, multiple sourced, networking components shall be used to allow the FMS to coexist with other networking applications. The following are acceptable technologies: Arenet and/or Ethernet and/or Service Telephone Pairs and/or Broadband. h. Automatic synchronization of the real-time clocks in all DDC panels shall be provided. B. Dial -Up Communications: Auto-dial/auto-answer communications shall be provided to allow standalone DDC panels to communicate with remote operator devices on an intermittent basis via telephone lines. 1. Dial -Up Standalone DDC Panels: Auto -Dial panels shall automatically place calls to workstations to report critical alarms, or to upload trend and historical information for archiving. a. Standalone DDC Panels shall analyze and prioritize all alarms to minimize the initiation of calls. Non -critical alarms shall be buffered in memory and reported as a group of alarms, or until an operator manually requests an upload of all alarms. b. The auto -dial program shall include provisions for handling busy signals, "no -answers," and incomplete data transfers. Default devices shall be called when communications cannot be established with primary devices. 2. Dial -Up Workstations: Operators at dial -up workstations shall be able to perform all control functions, all report functions, and all database generation and modification functions as described for workstations connected via the local area network. Routines shall be provided to automatically answer calls, and either file or display information sent from remote DDC panels. a. An operator shall be able to access remote buildings by selection of any facility by its logical name. The PC Dial - Up program shall maintain a user -definable cross- 15700-5 reference of buildings and associated telephone numbers, so the user shall not be required to remember or manually dial telephone numbers. b. A PC workstation may serve as an operator device on a local area network, as well as a dial -up workstation for multiple auto -dial DDC panels or networks. Alarm and data file transfers handled via dial -up transactions shall 1 not interfere with local area network activity, nor shall local area network activity keep the workstation from handling incoming calls. 3. Modem Characteristics: Dial -up communications shall make use of Hayes compatible 1200 or 9600 baud modems and voice grade j telephone lines. Each standalone DDC panel may have its own 6, modem, or a group of Standalone DDC panels may share a modem. 3.03 STANDALONE DDC PANELS: A. General: Standalone DDC panels shall be microprocessor based, multi- tasking, multi-user, real-time digital control processors. Each standalone DDC panel shall consist of modular hardware with plug-in enclosed processors, communication controllers, power supplies, and input/output modules. A sufficient number of controllers shall be supplied to fully meet the requirements of this specification and the attached point list. B. Memory: Each DDC panel shall have sufficient memory to support its ,.., own operating system and databases including: ` - Control processes Energy Management Applications Alarm Management Historical/Trend Data for all points - Maintenance Support Applications Custom Processes - Operator I/O - Dial -Up Communications - Manual Override Monitoring C. Point types: Each DDC panel shall support the following types of point inputs and outputs: Digital Inputs for status/alarm contacts Digital Outputs for on/off equipment control - Analog Inputs for temperature, pressure, humidity, flow, and position measurements PM - Analog Outputs forvalve and damper position control, and capacity control of primary equipment - Pulse Inputs for pulsed contact monitoring r- D. Expandability: The system shall be modular in nature, and shall permit easy expansion through the addition of software applications, workstation 15700-9 hardware, field controllers, sensors, and actuators. The system architecture shall support 20% expansion capacity of all types of DDC panels, and all point types included in the initial installation. E. Serial Communication Ports: Standalone DDC panels shall provide at least two RS-232C serial data communication ports for simultaneous operation of multiple operator I/O devices such as industry standard printers, laptop workstations, PC workstations, and panel mounted or portable DDC panel Operator's Terminals. Standalone DDC panels shall allow temporary use of portable devices without interrupting the normal operation of permanently connected modems, printers, or network terminals. F. Hardware Override Switches: As indicated in the point schedule, the operator shall have the ability to manually override automatic or centrally executed commands at the DDC panel via local, point discrete, onboard handloff/auto operator override switches for binary control points and gradual switches for analog control type points. These override switches shall be operable whether the panel is powered or not. G. Hardware Override Monitoring: DDC panels shall monitor the status or position of all overrides, and include this information in logs and summaries to inform the operator that automatic control has been inhibited. DDC panels shall also collect override activity information for daily and monthly reports. H. Local Status Indicator Lamps: The DDC panel shall provide local status indication for each binary input and output for constant, up-to-date verification of all point conditions without the need for an operator I/O device. I. Integrated On -Line Diagnostics: Each DDC panel shall continuously perform self -diagnostics, communication diagnosis and diagnosis of subsidiary equipment. The DDC panel shall provide both local and remote annunciation of any detected component failures, or repeated failure to establish communication. Indication of the diagnostic results shall be provided at each DDC panel, and shall not require the connection of an operator I/O device. J. Surge and Transient Protection: Isolation shall be provided at all network terminations, as well as all field point terminations to suppress induced voltage transients consistent with IEEE Standard 587-1980. K. Powerfail Restart: In the event of the loss of normal power, there shall be an orderly shutdown of all standalone DDC panels to prevent the loss of database or operating system software. Non -Volatile memory shall be incorporated for all critical controller configuration data, and battery back-up shall be provided to support the real-time clock and all volatile memory for a minimum of 72 hours. Upon restoration of normal power, the DDC panel shall automatically resume full operation without manual intervention. Should DDC panel memory be lost for any reason, the panel will automatically receive a download via the local area network, phone lines, 15700-10 r Pa r- r r or connected computer. In addition, the user shall have the capability of reloading the DDC panel via the local area network, via the local RS- 232C port, or via telephone line dial -in. 3.04 SYSTEM SOFTWARE FEATURES: A. General 1. All necessary software to forma complete operating system as described in this specification shall be provided. 2. The software programs specified in this section shall be provided as an integral part of the DDC panel and shall not be dependent upon any higher level computer for execution. B. Control Software Description: 1. Pre -Tested Control Algorithms: The DDC panels shall have the ability to perform the following pre -tested control algorithms: a. Two Position Control b. Proportional Control C. Proportional plus Integral Control d Proportional, Integral, plus Derivative Control e. Automatic Control Loop Tuning 2. Equipment Cycling Protection: Control software shall include a provision for limiting the number of times each piece of equipment may be cycled within any one -hour period. 3. Heavy Equipment Delays: The system shall provide: protection against excessive demand situations during start-up periods by automatically introducing time delays between successive start commands to heavy electrical loads. 4. Powerfail Motor Restart: Upon the resumption of normal power, the DDC panel shall analyze the status of all controlled equipment, compare it with normal occupancy scheduling, and turn equipment on or off as necessary to resume normal operation. C. Energy Management Applications: 1. DDC Panels shall have the ability to perform any or all of the following energy management routines: - Time of Day Scheduling - Calendar Based Scheduling - Holiday Scheduling - Temporary Schedule Overrides - Optimal Start - Optimal Stop - Night Setback Control - Enthalpy Switch Over (Economizer) - Peak Demand Limiting - Temperature Compensated Load Rolling - Fan Speed/CFM Control Heating/Cooling Interlock - Cold Deck Reset - Hot Deck Reset 15700-11 - Hot Water Reset - Chilled Water Reset - Condenser Water Reset - Chiller Sequencing 2. All programs shall be executed automatically without the need for operator intervention, and shall be flexible enough to allow operator customization. D. Custom Process Programming Capability: DDC panels shall be able to execute custom, job -specific processes defined by the operator, to automatically perform calculations and special control routines. 1. Process Inputs and Variables: It shall be possible to use any of the following in a custom process: - Any system -measured point data or status - Any calculated data - Any results from other processes - User -Defined Constants - Arithmetic functions (+; ,",/, square root, exponential, etc.) - Boolean logic operators (and, or, exclusive or, eta) - On-delay/Off-delay/One-shot timers 2. Process Triggers: Custom processes may be triggered based on any combination of the following: - Time interval - Time of day - Date - Other processes - Time programming - Events (e.g., point alarms) 3. Dynamic Data Access: A single process shall be able to incorporate measured or calculated data from any and all other DDC panels on the local area network. In addition, a single process shall be able to issue commands to points in any and all other DDC panels on the local area network. 4. Advisory/Message Generation: Processes shall be able to generate operator messages and advisories to operator I/O devices. A process shall be able to directly send a message to a specified device, buffer the information in a follow-up file, or cause the execution of a dial -up connection to a remote device such as a printer. 5. Custom Process Documentation: The custom control programming feature shall be self -documenting. All interrelationships defined by this feature shall be documented via graphical flowcharts and English language descriptors. 15700-12 E. Alarm Management: Alarm management shall be provided to monitor, buffer, and direct alarm reports to operator devices and memory files. r,. Each DDC panel shall perform distributed, independent alarm analysis and filtering to minimize operator interruptions due to non -critical alarms, minimize network traffic, and prevent alarms from being lost. At r no time shall the DDC panel's ability to report alarms be affected by either operator activity at a PC Workstation or local I/O device, or communications with other panels on the network. 1. Point Change Report Description: All alarm or point change reports shall include the point's English language description, and the time and date of occurrence. 2. Ionization: The user shall be able to define the specific system reaction for each point. Alarms shall be prioritized to minimize nuisance reporting and to speed operator response to critical alarms. A minimum of three priority levels shall be provided. 7 Each DDC panel shall automatically inhibit the reporting of selected alarms during system shutdown and start-up. Users shall have the ability to manually inhibit alarm reporting for each point. The user shall also be able to define under which conditions point *- changes need to be acknowledged by an operator, and/or sent to follow-up files for retrieval and analysis at a later date. 3. Report Routing: Alarm reports, messages, and files will be directed to a user -defined list of operator devices or PC disk files used for archiving alarm information. Alarms shall also be r,. automatically directed to a default device in the event a primary device is found to be off-line. 4. Alarm Messages: In addition to the point's descriptor and the r time and date, the user shall be able to print, display or store a 65-character alarm message to more fully describe the alarm condition or direct operator response. Each standalone DDC panel shall be capable of storing a library of at least 250 Alarm Messages. Each message may be assignable to any number of points in the panel. 5. Auto -Dial Alarm Management: In Dial -up applications, only critical alarms shall initiate a call to a remote operator device. In all other cases, call activity shall be minimized by time -stamping and saving reports until an operator scheduled time, a manual request, or until the buffer space is full. The alarm buffer must store a minimum of 50 alarms. 6. Transaction Logging: Operator commands and system events shall be automatically logged to disk in Personal Computer industry standard database format. Operator commands initiated from Direct -connected workstations, dial -up workstations, and local DDC panel Network Terminal devices shall aH be logged to 15700-13 this transaction file. This data shall be available at the Operator Workstation. A utility shall be provided to allow the user to search the transaction file using standard database query techniques, including searching by dates, operator name, data point name, eta In addition, this transaction file shall be accessible with standard third party database and spreadsheet packages. F. Historical Data and Trend Analysis: A variety of historical data collection utilities shall be provided to automatically sample, store, and display system data in all of the following ways: 1. Continuous Point Histories: Standalone DDC panels shall store Point History Files for all analog and binary inputs and outputs. The Point History routine shall continuously and automatically sample the value of all analog inputs at half hour intervals. Samples for all points shall be stored for the past 24 hours to allow the user to immediately analyze equipment performance and all problem -related events for the past day. Point History Files for binary input or output points and analog output points shall include a continuous record of the last ten status changes or commands for each point. 2. Control Loop Performance Trends: Standalone DDC panels -- shall also provide high resolution sampling capability in one - second increments for verification of control loop performance. 3. Extended Sample Period Trends: Measured and calculated analog and binary data shall also be assignable to user -definable trends for the purpose of collecting operator -specified performance data over extended periods of time. Sample intervals of 1 minute to 2 hours shall be provided. Each standalone DDC panel shall have a dedicated buffer for trend data, and shall be capable of storing a minimum of 5000 data samples. 4. Data Storage and Archiving: Trend data shall be stored at the Standalone DDC panels, and uploaded to hard disk storage when archival is desired. Uploads shall occur based upon either user - defined interval, manual command, or when the trend buffers become full. All trend data shall be available in disk file format compatible with Third Party personal computer applications. G. Runtime Totalization: Standalone DDC panels shall automatically accumulate and store runtime hours for binary input and output points as specified in the point charts of this specification. 1. The Totalization routine shall have a sampling resolution of one minute or less. 2. The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit for Runtime Totalization. Unique, user -specified messages shall be generated when the limit is reached. H. Analog/Pulse Totalization: Standalone DDC panels shall automatically sample, calculate and store consumption totals on a daily, weekly, or monthly basis for user -selected analog and binary pulse input -type points. 15700-14 1. Totalization shall provide calculation and storage of accumulations of up to 99,999.9 units (e.g. KWH, gallons, KBTU, tons. eta). 2. The Totalization routine shall have a sampling resolution of one minute or less. 3. The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit. Unique, user -specified messages shall be generated when the limit is reached I. Event Totalization: Standalone DDC panels shall have the ability to count events such as the number of times a pump or fan system is cycled on and off. Event totalization shall be performed on a daily, weekly, or monthly basis. 1. The Event Totalization feature shall be able to store the records associated with a minimum of 9,999,999 events before reset. 2. The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit. Unique, user -specified messages shall be generated when the limit is, reached. 3.05 HVAC DIGITAL CONTROLLERS: A. Each Standalone DDC Controller shall be able to extend its performance and capacity through the use of remote Application Specific Controllers (ASCs). B. Each ASC shall operate as a standalone controller capable of performing its specified control responsibilities independently of other controllers in �- the network. Each ASC shall be a microprocessor -based, multi -tasking, real-time digital control processor. C. Each ASC shall have sufficient memory to support its own operating P" system and data bases including: - Control Processes �., - Energy Management Applications - Operator I/O 6 �. D. The operator interface to any ASC point data or programs shall be through any network -resident PC workstation, or any PC or portable ° operator's terminal connected to any DDC panel in the network. E. Application Specific Controllers shall directly support the use of a portable terminal. The capabilities of the portable terminal shall include but not be limited to the following. 1. Display temperatures 2. Display status 3. Display setpoints 4. Display control parameters 5. Override binary output control 6. Override analog setpoints 7. Modification of gain and offset constants 15700-15 F. Powerfail Protection: All system setpoints, proportional bands, control algorithms, and any other programmable parameters shall be stored such that a power failure of any duration does not necessitate reprogramming the controller. G. Configuration and Download: The ASCs shall have the capability of receiving configuration and program loading by both of the following: 1) locally, via a direct connect portable laptop service tool, 2) over the network, from the portable laptop service tool, and, 3) from the Operator Workstation, via the communication networks. _ H. Continuous Zone Temperature Histories: Application Specific Controllers shall have the capability to automatically and continuously maintain a history of the associated zone temperature to allow users to quickly analyze space comfort and equipment performance for the past 24 hours. A minimum of two samples per hour shall be stored. I. HVAC Application Descriptions: 1. VAV Terminal Unit Controllers: a. VAV Terminal Unit Controllers shall support, but not be limited to, the control of the following configurations of VAV boxes to address current requirements as described in the point charts of this specification, and for future expansion: - Single Duct Only (Cooling Only, or Cooling with Reheat). - Fan Powered (Parallel/Side Pocket, Series/On-Off Logic) - Dual Duct (Constant Volume, Variable Volume) - Supply/Exhaust 2. AHU Controllers: a. AHU Controllers shall support, but not be limited to, the following configurations of systems to address current requirements as described in the point charts of this specification, and for future expansion: - Large Air Handling Units - Mixed Air -Single Path - Mixed Air -Dual Path - 100% Single Path - 100% Dual Path b. AHU Controllers shall support all the necessary point inputs and outputs to perform the specified control sequences in a totally standalone fashion. C. AHU controllers shall have a library of control routines and program logic to perform the sequence of operation as required. d. Occupancy -Based Standby/Comfort Mode Control: Each AHU Controller shall have a provision for occupancy sensing overrides. Based upon the contact status of either 15700-16 r a manual wall switch or an occupancy sensing device, the AHU Controller shall automatically select either Standby r or Comfort mode to minimize the heating and cooling requirements while satisfying comfort conditions. e. Alarm Management: Each AHU Controller shall perform its own limit and status monitoring and analysis to maximize network performance by reducing unnecessary communications. 3. Lab and Central Plant (LCP) Controllers: r a. LCP controllers shall support, but not be limited to, the 4 following configurations of systems to address current requirements described in the point charts of this specification, and for future expansion. - Single boiler or chiller plants with pump logic r" - Cooling towers - Zone pressurization of labs - Generic system interlocking through hardware. b. LCP controllers shall support all the necessary point inputs and outputs to perform the specified control ^- sequences in a totally standalone fashion. C. LCP controllers shall have a built-in status and adjust panel interface to allow for the local adjustment of all r- setpoints, temporary override of any input or output points and status of any points in alarm. ` d. Alarm Management: Each LCP controller shall perform r.. its own limit and status monitoring and analysis to maximize network performance by reducing unnecessary communications. 4. HVAC Application Specific Controller Configuration a. The Application Specific Controllers shall b-. configured using an intuitive, easy -to -use configuration tool. Standard, pre -tested, HVAC applications will be "built-in" the tool. It is. the intent that a non -programmer, fluent with HVAC systems, and not necessarily with computer programming, be capable of using the configuration tool with minimal training. b. The tool will utilize a question and answer format to aid the user in configuration. The tool will automatically query the user for desired operational characteristics, along with desired fail-safe and fault condition configurations, in order to assure proper HVAC system operation and protection. 3.06 OPERATOR INTERFACE: OM A. Personal Computer Operator Workstation Description: Personal Computer Operator Workstations shall be provided for command entry, information management, network alarm management, and database 15700-17 r- management functions. All real-time control functions shall be resident in the Standalone DDC panels to facilitate greater fault tolerance and reliability. 1. A personal computer (PC) based central, with full 32 bit processor, 33 megahertz minimum clock speed and minimum performance of 10 MIPS (Million Instructions Per Second). PC shall be provided with a minimum of 8 megabytes of RAM, 1.2 megabyte and 1.44 megabyte floppy diskette drives, 230 megabyte IDE (Integrated Drive Electronics) hard drive with 15 millisecond access time, built in close -coupled 8 kilobyte cache, integrated math coprocessor and video graphics array (VGA) driver. 2. A primary operator station complete with mouse, keyboard and color monitor. The operator station shall provide for total keyboard -less operation as the primary operator interface. The mouse shall not require the use of more than one button for operation. The operator station shall be provided with full upper/lower case ASCII keyboard, numeric keypad, cursor control keypad and a minimum of 23 programmable function keys. Fifteen inch color monitor shall have minimum VGA resolution (800 x 600 pixels, 16 colors). 3. Printers are to be furnished as follows: a. One printer at the central location shall be dedicated to the recording of alarm traffic only. b. One printer at the central location shall be dedicated to system reports. C. One printer at the central location shall be dedicated for print screens. d. In the event that the alarm or report printer is inoperable, their reports shall automatically be redirected to the other printer. 4. The system architecture shall support 20% expansion capacity of all types of DDC panels, and all point types included in the initial installation. 5. Sufficient hard disk storage shall be provided to accommodate all fully configured point data bases, all application databases, all graphics data bases, all user -defined reports, and all historical data archival as described in this specification. B. Telephone Interface: The Operator Workstation shall have a telephone interface feature that allows users to control lighting and HVAC equipment from a telephone. This interface shall be convenient, easy to use, and available to all tenants who work after hours or during the weekend. 1. The user shall access the telephone interface by dialing the prescribed number on a Touch Tone phone and entering a series of numbers, including a password. Password protection shall protect the telephone interface from intruders. A password shall also be required by those who manage the telephone interface database. 15700-18 2. 3. 4. 5. 7 The user shall control lights and HVAC equipment by simply entering digits. (For example, pressing I" shall turn on the lights in your area.) For monitoring purposes, all telephone interface transactions shall be recorded in a text file for later reference. For consistency, user interface portion of the telephone interface shall resemble the other parts of the Operator Workstation PML The user shall be able to make at least eight different commands for a,particular location. 15700-19 6. The telephone interface shall be capable of supporting a minimum of four telephone lines. 7. The user shall be able to print out summaries that show the contents of the telephone interface database. 8. On-line help screens shall be provided to assist the user who manages the database. C. Staff Workstation (Customizable User Interface): The Operator Workstation shall have custom user interfaces that are specifically designed for particular vertical markets, such as Hospitals or Schools/Universities. These user interfaces shall be in addition to the standard Operator Workstation PMI. The customer or the factory shall be able to modify the user interface to match the individual needs of the customer. Most operations shall be performed with a mouse, which will make the interface simple and obvious to operate. PART 4 - ALTERNATE NO. 4 AND NO.5 FMS PRODUCTS 4.01 CENTRAL HARDWARE: A. General: The central FMS facility shall meet the following minimum criteria: 1. A personal computer (PC) based central, with full 32 bit processor, 33 megahertz minimum clock speed and minimum performance of 10 MIPS (Million Instructions Per Second). PC shall be provided with a minimum of 8 megabytes of RAM, 1.2 megabyte and 1.44 megabyte floppy diskette drives, 230 megabyte IDE (Integrated Drive Electronics) hard drive with 15 millisecond access time, built in close -coupled 8 kilobyte cache, integrated math coprocessor and video graphics array (VGA) driver. 2. A primary operator station complete with mouse, keyboard and color monitor. The operator station shall provide for total keyboard -less operation as the primary operator interface. The mouse shall not require the use of more than one button for operation. The operator station shall be provided with full upper/lower case ASCII keyboard, numeric keypad, cursor control keypad and a minimum of 23 programmable function keys. Fifteen inch color monitor shall have minimum VGA resolution (800. x 600 pixels, 16 colors). 3. Printers are to be furnished as follows: a. One printer at the central location shall be dedicated to the recording of alarm traffic only, b. One printer at the central location shall be dedicated to system reports. C. One printer at the central location shall be dedicated for print screens. d. In the event that the alarm or report printer is inoperable, their reports shall automatically be redirected to the other printer. 15700-20 A 4. The system architecture shall support 20% expansion capacity of all types of DDC panels, and all point types included in the initial installation. B. Plant Control Processors (PCP) shall be 16 bit microprocessor based with EPROM operating system (O.S.). DDC programs and data files shall be non-volatile EEPROM or flash memory to allow simple additions and f changes. Each PCP shall have an on -board realtime clock with battery backup of a minimum of 30 days. Remote PCPs shall be provided where shown or specified with capacity to accommodate input/output (1/0) points required for the application plus spare points specified. These panels shall be configured with analog and digital inputs and outputs, and pulse counting totalizers and such that the primary input, the output and all control logic shall be resident in a single microprocessor to provide network independent stand-alone r' closed loop DDC. Each panel shall be provided with a socket for a Portable Operators Terminal (POT). All panel inputs shall[ be selected for the application utilizing sensor types listed under the sensor section of this specification. PCP outputs shall be binary for On -Off control, and E pneumatic or true variable voltage (0-10v) for driving analog or pneumatic devices. Analog outputs shall have a minimum incremental resolution of one percent of the operating range of the controlled device. PCPs shall be designed for complex DDC and energy management applications, peer -to -peer communications with other PCPs, or optionally for coordination, management, and data concentration for sub -networks of TECs. Each PCP shall have an integral real-time clock for true r, stand-alone operation. ` PCPs shall have LEDs for continuous indication of peer bus r. communications, power, and operational status. PCPs driving TEC i busses shall also have LEDs indicating the status of TEC busses. All LEDs shall be visible without opening the panel door. All panel electronics shall be installed in suitable enclosures. Equipment ' room panels shall have hinged doors and shall also contain all load relays, transducers, and associated equipment. C. Terminal Equipment Controllers (TEC) shall be EEPROM based and modularly expandable to accomodate additional points if required for future functional changes or enhancements, and with 1/0 selected for the application plus specified spares. TECs shall be capable of processing sensor signals of the applications specified, and shall have capability to drive outputs required by the application. TEC enclosures shall be compact, finished steel to fit within or on terminal equipment. 15700-21 r 4.02 OPERATOR STATION SOFTWARE: A. Operator Station (OS) software shall include as a minimum the Operating System, Data Base Manager, Communications Control, Operator Interface (OI), Trend and History Files, Report Generator, and Support Utilities. 1. Real time operating system shall be true multi -tasking providing concurrent execution of multiple real time programs and custom program development. 2. Data Base manager is to manage all data on an integrated and non -redundant basis. It shall allow additions and deletions to the data base without any detriment to the existing data. 3. The system shall support up to three full performance stand-alone OSs connected anywhere on the peer bus without system modifications. B. Operator Interface Software: Provide a hierarchical linked dynamic graphic operator interface for accessing and displaying system data and commanding and modifying equipment operation. The interface shall utilize the mouse to provide "heads up operation" with pull -down menus, dialog boxes, zoom, pan, scroll boxes, coloration and animation to facilitate operator understanding of the system. A minimum of twenty (20) levels of graphic penetration shall be provided. Descriptors for graphics, points, alarms, etc., shall be modified through the operator station under password control. 1. Operator access to the system is to be under personal ID and password control for up to 100 unique operators. Up to 16 alpha -numeric characters for personal ID and up to 16 alpha -numeric characters for password shall be assignable to each operator. The operators shall be permitted to change their own password without permitting access to any other password. Sign -off from a station shall be a manual operation via pull -down menu or, if no mouse or keyboard activity takes place within an assignable time period, shall be automatic. Automatic sign -off period shall be adjustable from zero to 100 minutes for each operator or may be disabled on a per operator basis. 2. Each operator shall be assignable an access level for system use as follows: Level 1: View data Level 2: Modify time programs Level 3: Modify intermediate level data such as setpoints and alarm limits Level 4: Modify high level data such as control parameters Level 5: Define new operators All operators shall have privileges at their assigned level and above. 15700-22 r" l 3. Data to be displayed within a graphic shall be assignable regardless of physical hardware address. Graphics are to be on-line programmable and under ID and password control. r Points may be assignable to multiple graphics where necessary to facilitate operator understanding of system operation and where r specified. Graphics shall also contain calculated or pseudo points. Each physical point and each point assigned to a graphic shall be assigned an English descriptor for use in reports. ,., 4. The OS and software shall be configured to accommodate three printers. Printers shall each be menu -assignable to receive any of three types of outputs; alarms, data reports, and print screen r, outputs. Where less than three printers are initially required, one shall be assignable to combinations of the three outputs. 5. Penetration within a graphic hierarchy shall display each graphic name as they are stacked to facilitate operator understanding. r The "backtrace" of names shall permit the operator to move upward on the hierarchy by mouse click on the stacked backtrace. The backtrace shall show at least the previous four penetration PM levels. The operator shall be provided the option of showing 1 each graphic full screen size with the backtrace as a horizontal header or by showing a stack of graphics. 6. All operator accessed data shall be displayed on the color monitor. The operator shall select further penetration via mouse click on an area, building, floor, fan, etc. Dynamic data shall be 7 assignable to any and all graphics. 7. The operator shall be provided with a means to directly access any graphic or any point without going through the penetration path. s a. Direct access to graphics shall be menu selectable wherein the operator may optionally enter the name of r- the graphic system desired or select the desired graphic via cursor positioning on a scroll bar listing of all graphics. OM b. Graphics shall also be selectable by entering, or selecting via scroll bar of all system points, the user address of any point within the graphic. C. Up to 100 frequently addressed system points shall be definable as "quick access" points. This listing shall be selectable from a screen top menu bar drop down menu item. Each points user address, descriptor, and value/status shall be displayed. 8. By partial data entry, a wild card search utility shall be provided. For example, by entering "Room," all points with the word f "Room" in their name shall be listed or by listing "AHM," all AHUI points shall be listed. The wild card search utility shall be _ usable by the following functions: - Graphic access by point name - Point selections for the "quick access" group 15700-23 - Data access by point name - Point access by point attribute - Alarm history reports, search by date range or critical alarms only - Operator activity report, search by date range 9. Points (physical and pseudo) shall be displayed with dynamic data provided by the system with appropriate text descriptors, status or value, and engineering unit. Coloration shall be used to denote status and alarm states. Coloration conventions shall be variable as chosen by the owner. In addition, animation shall be used where specified, to confirm operator commands (e.g., fan rotation, damper position, fluid flow, etc.). All points shall be dynamic and shall continuously update anytime their field status/value changes. 10. Points shall be commanded directly from the color monitor via mouse selection. For a digital command point such as a valve position, the valve would show its current state (e.g., CLOSED) and the operator could select OPEN via mouse click. Upon selection of analog commandable points (such as discharge air static pressure) from any graphic, a dialog box shall appear containing the decimal value of the setpoint with the adjacent up -down arrows, the selection of which shall vary the setpoints. 11. An on-line context -sensitive help utility shall be provided to facilitate operator training and understanding. The document shall contain text and graphics to clarify system operation. At a minimum, help shall be available for every top level menu bar item and dialog box. 12. Electronic messaging facility shall be provided on the operator station for any operator to enter a message to another operator by selecting the MAIL menu item, selecting the receiving operator's ID from a drop down menu and entering the message (such as "CLEAN PRE -HEAT STRAINER ON AHU-16"). When an operator with a queued message signs onto the OS, the "Mail Message" area of the dialog box shall indicate that a message is waiting. Upon selecting a mail display, the operator shall be presented an index of the title or subject of each message from which he may select the order of display. Upon displaying a mail message, the display shall prompt the operator with three message options to execute; delete, print, and save. Messages shall also include the sender's personal ID and be 300 characters minimum length, plus a brief title or subject description. 13. To enable operators to view graphics in greater detail, a zoom/pan display feature shall be provided. Zooming shall be by dragging the cursor diagonally across the area to be zoomed. Panning shall allow horizontal and vertical scrolling around graphics. To return zoomed/panned graphics to their original view, a "redisplay graphic" feature shall be provided. 15700-24 r I 7 r r- 7 7 C. Site Specific Customizing Software. 1. Provide software which will allow the user to modify and tailor the FMS to the specific and unique requirements of the equipment installed, the programs implemented, and to staffing and operational practices. On-line modification of system configuration, program parameters, and data base shall be provided via menu selection and keyboard entry of data into preformatted self -prompting templates. As a minimum, the following modification capability shall be provided. a. Operator assignment capability shall include: designation of operator names, passwords, access levels, and auto sign -off. b. Peripheral assignment capability shall include assignment of segregation to printers. C. System text add/change capability shall include English descriptors for graphic points, action messages for alarms, and run time and trouble condition messages. d. Time program change capability shall include time/date set, time/occupancy schedules, holiday schedules, and daylight savings time schedules. e. Points shall be definable as to coloration, animation, operator messages (480 characters minimum), critical or non -critical alarm, alarm and warning limits, and engineering units. f. Point related change capability shall include. lockout, run time, and setting a fixed input value. g. Graphic construction is specified under Graphic Creation. D. Point alarms shall be user -classifiable as critical or non -critical. 1. Critical alarms shall be displayed in a dialog box of the color monitor. Display shall include as a minimum: a. Time and date of occurrence, indication of alarm condition, (i.e., ABNORMAL OFF, M AI,A LO ALARM), analog value or status, user address, and alarm message. b. A discrete per point detailed alarm -action taking message shall be user definable from the dialog box; i.e., "The fan has shutdown due to an excessiveb, high discharge duct pressure. There is a strong indication of a system malfunction such as an inlet vane drive failure, or major fire damper closure. The switch should not be manually reset until a thorough investigation of the cause is conducted" of up to 480 characters. 2. Alarms shall be directed to the user selected alarm printer. 3. Alarm silencing shall be by selecting the "silence" button of the dialog box or by authorized operator's acknowledgement. In all cases, alarm acknowledgement shall only be allowed by operators of access level 2 or better. r E. F. 4. Non -critical alarms shall only output to the printer and OS disk in order of occurrence. 5. An unacknowledged alarm indicator shall be provided on the color monitor display to alert the operator that there are unacknowledged alarms in the system. 6. Symbols for critical points in a graphic display that are in an alarm state shall have a flashing red border. 7. Run time limit messages shall be presented and processed as alarm messages except the action message shall be of a maintenance directive nature. Dynamic trends shall provide for each OS of up to eight user selected points to show real time activity of the associated points. This information shall be printed and/or displayed in numeric, bar chart, curve plot, pie chart, eta, as selected by the operator. Graphic plots shall allow a unique color for each point. As new point values are sampled, they shall be processed, scaled, and dynamically appended to the plot being displayed. Sample interval of points selected for dynamic trend shall be user selectable from five seconds to sixty minutes. Standard reports shall be provided which shall be output onto the selected report printer. A "terminate report" command shall be available to allow the operator to stop any report in the process of being printed. The following standard pre -formatted reports shall be provided: 1. The user shall be provided with a command trace feature selectable on a per point basis allowing the archiving of all commands issued to each point. The archived trace shall include the point status, the point ID, and the time and date of the status change. Command trace reports shall be output upon operator demand. 2. A custom report capability shall be provided to allow the user to format reports of any mix of text, points with status/value and descriptors, and points with status/value only. Custom reports may be scheduled or requested manually. A spreadsheet program similar to Microsoft Excel shall be provided fully integrated with the FMS data base, and available to the user. Spreadsheet packages which require off-line execution or manual translation of date files from one program format to another are not acceptable. A time -and -calendar date graphic scheduler shall also be provided to allow simple scheduling of the printout of each custom report. 3. A screen top menu bar item shall allow selection of the following historical reports from continuously -archived data. Alarm history: The last 4000 alarm events shall be disk archived. Viewing or printing shall be by entering a date range (from -to). The display printout may be selectively limited to critical alarms only. Alarm history data shall include time and date of occurrence, point name, alarm type, value/status, alarm message, name of operator acknowledging the point alarm, and time and date of acknowledgement. Operator activity: All operator activity shall be archived. Viewing or printing shall be by entering a desired date range. Activity displays/printouts shall include the time and date of activity, and nature of activity (log on, attempted log on, data point changed notation with point name). 15700-26 Controller alarm history: Alarm event history within a controllers alarm buffer shall be displayable including the point name, time and date, alarm �.. condition, status/value, and alarm message. Controller current alarms. Points within each controller currently in an alarm state shall also be displayable/ printable including data noted for controller alarm history. 4. Standard data reports shall include the following: Time Programs (per controller) Each Time Control Schedule Command Sorted by Time Sorted by Point Name Time Programs overridden (for following 365 days) Teat descriptors (per controller) Parameter files and parameters (per controller) r Listing of all assigned operators Listing of all customer PC programs and custom reports Listing of "Quick Access" points with status/value !" Multiple point group display (per HVAC System) Point Data Record (each point) listing - Point Name Related Graphic Point Description Enable/Disable Analog Alarm Limits (4) Alarm Text Fixed Value/Status Alarm Delay Time Fixed Mode Alarm Status Trend Status Alarm Lockout Status Digital Run Time Last Change (Date/Time) Alarm Delay Time G. Trend reports shall allow the operator to randomly select point archival. Each system point (hardware and software) shall be assignable to PC archive files for display at user selectable intervals of 10 seconds to 24 hours. Trend data sample r resolution shall be a minimum of one degree or one percent of the points range, whichever is smaller. Each point trend file shall have a user assignable selectable archive duration of a day, a week, or a month. For any duration period selected, the file shall retain one full duration period while it collects another (i.e., after collecting data for May, May is retained in total as June data is accumulated). 1. Trend display points shall be subsequently printed/displayed individually or in logical groups of up to any eight points in any group. Points shall be assignable to multiple trend groups. The system shall have up to 500 trend groups which may be predetermined by the user for a unique set of logical points and display characteristics. a. Single point displays. Single point trend reports shall be displayable + by selecting the desired point from any system graphic upon which it is displayed or by entering it's user address. Display characteristics shall be user predeterminable for any desired display range (X-Axis period) and any desired data manupluation wihin the selected range. r 15700-27 Template -selectable display range options shall be "current", "previous", or "date range" with range and appropriate data intervals. "Current" ranges shall be time periods of one hour, two hours, eta, up to one year, starting at the beginning of the range (i.e., a display of the "current" month shall start at 00:01AM the first day of the month and display selected values up to the present time). Data intervals within the selected ranges shall be selectable from ten seconds to one month, dependent upon the sample intervals. The X-Axis resolution shall accommodate up to 100 data values. "Previous" ranges shall be similar to current ranges, except that a full "range" of data (such as a full seven days of data for the past week, up to the present time) shall be provided. Selectable range, data intervals, and X-axis resolution shall be as specified for the "current" display range. "Date range" selection shall provide templates for the entry of year, month, date, hour, and minute for the beginning and the end of X-axis data. Selectable data intervals and X-axis resolution shall be as specified for the "current" range. 1. Data manipulation. Within the selected X-axis intervals of the selected X-axis range of data, data manipulation options shall be template selectable as the actual, last, highest, lowest, or average of the actual data samples within each interval. For example, for data sampled every five minutes one might select the highest value within every two hours for the past week. From that display, noting the two hour period with the peak value, he may subsequently request a display of actual values every five minutes for the related two hour period. b. Point group displays. Point group displays shall be set-up by selecting each point desired to be displayed in a logical trend group and setting up a new group with appropriate group name (such as AHU RETURN AIR TEMPS). Group displays shall then be initiated by selecting a top-level menu -bar option trend, and selecting a trend group from a subsequent drop -down menu. From this point, template selectable display options shall be as specified for single point displays (i.e., current, previous, date range, actual, highest, lowest, average). 2. Trend presentation options. After defining a desired trend display as above, selectable presentation options of display, print, or spreadsheet shall be available. a. Display. Selecting "display" shall present the data in an automatically scaled multi -color curve plot. Curve plots shall include a color legend noting which color is associated with each point. Points shall each have a user modifiable full English point descriptor of no less than 18 characters. An English description of the trend display set up options shall also be automatically included on the display (such as "highest value every two hours for the last week"). 15700-28 r- r M I. J. b. Print. Selecting "Print" shall initiate an immediate printout of the same data values used to construct the above curve plot. Print format shall include a header with a time column and eight eight -digit value columns of data. The appropriate engineering unit shall be at the head of each column. The print header shall include a column point descriptor legend and an English description of the trend display set-up options as specified for the "display" option. c. Spreadsheet. Selecting the spreadsheet option shall present the display values (after data manipulation) in a spreadsheet (Microsoft Excel or Lotus 1-2-3) format. From this screen, the user may edit the values to correct problems (missing data, failed sensors, errors). After editing, display or print options specified above may be executed, or any other standard spreadsheet data manipulation options may be exercised. Graphic Creation. An on-line graphic development facility shall be provided to allow the user to develop or modify graphic displays and assign and position any array of points within each graphic. 1. All graphic displays shall be on-line created via OS graphics package. It shall not require taking the OS off-line or interfere with point archiving and alarms. Graphics shall be created via mouse and keyboard selection of graphic library stored symbols and system profiles. Provide, in addition, the capability to create custom symbols, system profiles, floor plans, buildings, etc., and to store them in the graphic library. 2. The number and type of graphics to be provided is as noted in the Data Control and Graphics summary. The system shall provide expansion to a minimum of 1000 graphics. Digital System Management. The OS shall provide complete utilities necessary for management of the network of digital controllers and devices. 1. Each controller shall be provided with a user definable 16 character name. 2. All RAM -based controllers shall be up -line or down -line loadable to or from the OS disk for backup archival. 3. Provide software to execute and observe diagnostic: of any remote device connected to the peer bus and the ability to deactivate: and restart the device. The OS personal computer shall be provided with the following menu selected graphic system utilities or desktop application packages: Calculator - Basic arithmetic calculation functions (add, subtract, multiply, divide, percent, square root) Calendar - Electronic Appointment Calendar, with Auto Alarm Cardfile - Electronic index card file Control Panel - Basic PC operating characteristic control: cursor blink rate, mouse sensitivity, screen color control, etc. 15700-29 Note Pad - Archive for miscellaneous notes In addition, a word processing utility, graphics package, and spreadsheet shall be available for generic use. The base system software shall include a CRT "windowing" feature to allow the operator to monitor the real time system and use third party software simultaneously. 4.03 PCP SOFTWARE: A. Energy Management application programs and associated data files shall be in non-volatile memory. 1. Optimum Start, Night Cycling and Night Purge for free cooling shall address the unique requirement of each systems Unoccupied Period, which may include one or more of the following as specified: a. Delay equipment start-up based on global outdoor temperature, space temperature, and system response to assure that comfort conditions are reached at scheduled occupancy time (occupancy schedules are defined under time programs), and operate in both heating and cooling cycles. In all cases, the optimum start program shall operate fully stand-alone in the local PCP. b. Night Cycle program shall apply to (heating cycle only) (both heating and cooling cycle) with the outdoor air dampers closed. The space temperature shall be used to determine the "fan on" and/or "supply heat" command to maintain a low limit of 50-55 degrees for the heating cycle and the "fan on" and "supply cooling" command to maintain 82 degrees for the cooling cycle. C. Night Purge program shall apply to cooling cycle only. Night Purge shall introduce 100% outdoor air any time the outdoor air is above 50 degrees F, the space temperature is above 75 degrees F, the outdoor temperature is below space temperature, and the outdoor air dewpoint is less than 60 degrees. Purging shall stop when outdoor air is below 50 degrees F, or space temperature is below 75 degrees F, or outdoor temperature is less than 5 degrees cooler than space temperature, or outdoor air dewpoint is greater than 60 degrees. 2. Provide an enthalpy program which will automatically enable the economizer mode based upon an enthalpy comparison of outdoor air and return air of each AHU. 3. A load reset program shall be provided to assure that only the minimum amount of heating, cooling, and electrical energy is supplied to satisfy zone temperature requirements. The program shall be applicable where specified to hot decks, cold decks, chilled water supply, and AHU static pressure. .Individual programs are to be provided each sensing the worst case zone requirements and providing only the minimum energy source media to satisfy the need. B. Control Software: 1. Each PCP shall contain up to 20 unique user modifiable time programs (TP). Each TP shall consist of daily, weekly, and annual programs plus a "TODAY" temporary function. 15700-30 I 7 C. In DAILY programs shall be definable for day types such as working day, half day, holiday, weekend, eta Each daily program shall allow a list of time based (or optimum time based) analog and digital commands to be issued to user selected plant elements and points. WEEKLY programs shall allow a user selected set of daily programs to be defined for each day of the week (Monday through Sunday). The ANNUAL program shall initially be an automatic compilation of 52 weekly programs.Selecting a date of the ANNUAL program shall allow modification of the daily selection entered into the weekly program (such as changing Dec. 25 from a working day to a holiday). 2. Control Application Software shall be customized strictly to meet the detailed requirements of the "Sequence of Operation" specified hereinafter. PCPs shall be fully programmable. Initial software shall be fully modifiable, and not restricted by vendor's specific configuration guidelines. All PCP control software shall be designed via a graphic programming facility, the detailed graphic design of which shall be provided as system documentation. All control strategies shall be advanced as noted with stabilizing setpoint ramps and procedures to assure slow loading of variable load equipment and economizer modes to prevent unsafe overshoot of controlled pressure and unsafe undershoot of mixed air temperatures during start-up and transition periods. Management Software: 1. Each PCP shall be provided with a trend archive of at least the last 200 events (digital transitions or analog value changes) of any user selected group of up to 20 points. A stored event shall include date and time, and value or status. Events occurring in excess of 200 shall overwrite the oldest events, except where a modem module is specified, events shall be uploaded to the modem module. Point events shall be displayable on the POT as trend logs for evaluation of control system performance. 2. Each PCP shall monitor all analog input points and specified digital points for off -normal conditions. Each alarm shall have an "alarm delay" attribute which shall determine how long (in seconds) a point must be in an off -normal state prior to being considered in an alarm state. Alarms shall be displayable on the POT. 3. PCPs managing sub -networks of TECs shall report TEC alarms and shall be programmed to perform data reduction, sorting, and AHU PCP optimizing routines. In no case shall mass TEC optimizing data be allowed on the peer bus. Communications Software: Each PCP shall have a full master peer -to -peer communications module to support all globaldata sharing, hierarchical control, and global control strategies specified. In addition, certain PCPs shall have hardware and software to support managing a secondary 9600 baud bus of TECs, including hierarchical control specified, management, alarm processing; and prioritization, and TEC to/from PCP peer bus global data sharing and control. 15700-31 r 4.04 TEC SOFTWARE: A. TEC Software shall be configured strictly to meet the detailed requirements of the "Sequence of Operation" specified hereinafter. and shall be field reconfigurable if required to accomodate future functional or additional I/O requirements. TEC software shall be compatible with all the requirements set forth in the POT specification regarding TEC data display and modification. TEC software shall support full PI control. 4.05 PORTABLE OPERATOR'S TERMINALS: A. Portable Operators Terminals (POT) shall be provided for operator readout of system variables, override control, and adjustment of control parameters at all plant controllers and for all TECs. POTS shall be provided which are plug -compatible with PCPs, TECs, and TEC space sensors. POTS shall display points with English -language descriptions. B. The POTS shall be complete with command keys, data entry keys, cursor control keys, and a liquid crystal alpha -numeric display. Access is to be via self -prompting menu selection with next menu/previous menu and step forward/step backward within a given menu. Connection of a POT to a panel shall not interrupt nor interfere with normal network operation in any way, prevent alarms from being transmitted, or preclude remote initiated commands. C. Connection of any TEC POT at arry TEC or TEC space sensor shall provide display access to all TECs on the respective bus. Displays shall provide text via a 64-character minimum screen with unique English descriptors for each specified physical and pseudo point. D. TEC POT functionality shall include: Display for each zone: - Space temperature - Local setpoint value (Degrees F) - Mode: Occupied/Unoccupied - Mode: Heating/Cooling - Actual CFM primary air - Damper percent open - Fan status - Heating status - Zone override status Display and command for each zone: - Minimum CFM setpoint - Maximum CFM setpoint - Damper maximum percent open setpoint - Damper control mode: 0 = open 1 = closed 2 = max cooling CFM 3 = min cooling CFM 4 = automatic control 10-100 = fixed damper percent open 15700-32 - Setpoint select (local/remote) - Allowable local setpoint mid -range ,^. - Allowable local setpoint range - Unoccupied setpoint - cooling - Unoccupied setpoint - heating - Deadband for heating - Proportional band heating - Proportional band cooling - Integral gain cooling .• - Integral gain heating E. PCP POT functionality shall be as follows: j 1. Use of a POT at PCPs shall allow the user to display software information; and, 1 via password control, modify PCP software. Two levels of user controlled passwords shall be provided. The first level shall allow the user to modify, create, r' or delete time programs; and the second level shall allow the user to modify data point text descriptors, reset totalizers, modify setpoints and parameters, set the system clock, and view trend logs and alarms. 2. Selecting TIME PROGRAM from the top level POT menu shall present an English menu of all PCP time programs (such as HEATING ZONE EAST, etc.) Selecting a time program (via up -down scroll bar) shall present options for the C` selected program of TODAY, DAILY, WEEKLY, and ANNUAL a. Selecting TODAY shall present the current time program for the selected zone. Each time program shall list start and stop times along with program OM commands and/or values (for time programmed analog commands). b. Selecting DAILY, WEEKLY, or ANNUAL time programs shall present similar display and command options for these programs. r., 3. Selecting DATA POINTS from the top level menu shall initiate an interactive process to select any point via English menu, select manual or analog commanding of the point, select a display of equipment accumulated runtimes, select a historical trend log display of any trended point, or display all points whose alarm capability has been suppressed and allow the suppression to be cancelled. 4. Selecting PARAMETERS from the top level menu shall initiate a scrolling of all PCP parameters (such as alarm units, control settings, eta) which may be displayed and commanded. ` 5. Selecting ALARMS from the top level menu shall present a menu of four alarm display options. Selecting ALARM MEMORY shall scroll a list of all alarms in 7 memory with English descriptor, alarm value or status, alarm type (low alarm limit, etc.), and time of occurrence. Selecting POINTS IN ALARM will produce a similar display of all points currently in alarm. Selecting CRITICAL ALARMS Poo shall display critical points currently in alarm. Selecting NON -CRITICAL alarms shall display non -critical points still in alarm. 6. Selecting TREND LOG from the top level menu shall initiate a scroll selection *" bar of English descriptors of all points being trended, and allow selection of trend values/events with date and time of each historical occurrence. 7. Selecting SYSTEM CLOCK from the top level menu shall allow the user to modify the calendar/time clock and enter a date for automatic change to/from daylight savings time. 15700-33 8. Furnish POTS at the chiller plant controller and air handling unit plant controller for use at all PCPs and TECs, and TEC space temperature sensors. F. As an alternative to the POTS, a fixed liquid crystal or LED display and entry keyboard may be provided per DDC controller. Functional capability must be equal to that described for the POT as a minimum. 4.06 DATA COMMUNICATIONS: A. All PCPs shall be interconnected via a primary communications network. TECs shall also be connected together via secondary networks managed by PCPs to provide data concentration and parallel processing such that system expansion does not noticeably affect system response. All communications shall be via twisted pair wires, shielded where required. DDC microprocessor failures shall not cause loss of communications of the remainder of any network. All networks shall support sensor sharing, global application programs, and bus -to -bus communications without the presence of a host PC. B. The PCP communications network shall support true peer protocol such that each PCP has equal rights for data transfer and shall report in its token passing time slot. No single device shall be designated as the communications master but each device on the bus shall be capable of taking over the function of bus monitor to assure that loss of any single device will not .cause total bus failure. Those systems using dedicated communication controllers or other single point of failure devices in lieu of a true peer protocol shall provide dual redundant transmission media with automatic switching in the event of line faults. 1. Full communications shall be sustained as long as there are at least two operational devices on any segment of the bus. 2. Error recovery and communication initialization routines are to be resident in each bus connected device. 3. For reliability, maintainability, and performance communication busses shall be extendable to 400 feet with 29 devices and without active links, hubs, or repeaters. 4. Other than sensor/data sharing specified (with failure default procedures), under no circumstances shall DDC programs be reliant on sensor data from another panel. C. TECs shall be managed by PCPs via an active network to provide alarm detection and reporting, data sharing, and response to POT data requests and commands. TEC network shall also support POT communications from TEC to any other networked TEC and from the PCP to any connected TEC, and for TEC program loading/modifying. PART 5 - SEQUENCE OF OPERATION: 1 hl_ _ IQj1_ 04 M*M A. All electrical interlocks shall be provided as specified. B. All electrical interlocks shall be made by means of motor starters or shall be accomplished by separate relays. No motor power lead shall be utilized in an interlock circuit. All interlocked starters with disconnect switches shall be provided with auxiliary contacts on the disconnect switch so that interlocking circuits are interrupted when the disconnect switch in thrown to the OFF position. 15700-34 r C. This contractor shall submit wiring diagrams for his equipment which when approved will become installation drawings. These diagrams shall show all interlock circuits and r shall relate such diagrams of internal wiring of equipment items as are furnished by the manufacturers of that equipment of the system as a whole. 5.02 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION: A. This Contractor shall design and install the temperature ' regulation system using components as hereinbefore described to effect the performance functions described hereinafter. Considerable latitude is permitted in the arrangement and selection of components. However, the sequences described must be achieved automatically, within the tolerance specified, without manual manipulation, and any modification to the r„ submitted design required to achieve this result shall be done at no change in the contract price. 5.03 APRON LEVEL BUILT UP SINGLE ZONE AIR HANDLING UNITS: r BID ITEM # 1 A. AHU-5, AHU-7 and AHU-9 are existing built-up single zone: units being converted from DX cooling to chilled water cooling. This contractor will completely replace all ( existing controls, tubing, actuators, eta. to provide a new control system. B. This contractor shall provide a modulating two-way valve in both the common chilled water coil outlet and common heating water coil outlet. The cooling coil of AHU-9 has already been replaced with a chilled water coil and two-way valve. C. On a call for cooling, the chilled water valve shall modulate to maintain the set point of a wall mounted thermostat in the space. On a call for heating, the heating water valve shall modulate to maintain the set point of the thermostat. There shall be a deadband between heating and cooling so that both valves close to the coil. r D. The return fan shall be interlocked to run with the supply fan.. E. This contractor shall provide a maximum outside air, damper, minimum outside air damper, maximum exhaust damper, minimum exhaust damper, and return air damper r-. to be installed by the mechanical contractor as scheduled on the drawings. 1 F. When the supply fan is running the following sequence shall occur: , 1. Outside air temperature above 75 degrees: Minimum outride air damper open to r provide ventilation air (adjustable). Maximum outside air damper is fully closed j 2. Outside air temperature between 60 and 75 degrees; Minimum outside air damper full open. Maximum outside air damper full open and return air damper full closed. j 3. Outside air temperature below 60 degrees: Maximum outside air damper and return air damper modulate to maintain mixed air temperature of 60 degrees (adjustable). G. The minimumexhaust air damper and maximum exhaust air damper shall modulate in unison with the minimum outside air damper and maximum outside air damper, respectively. H. The outside air dampers shall close when the fans are off. I. These air units shall be provided with night -set -back control. During set -back hours, the supply fan shall stop and control of the fan shall be given to a night -set -back r temperature sensor in the location as shown on the drawings. The night -set -back f thermostat shall cycle the fans to maintain a temperature of 55 degrees (adjustable) when the outside air temperature is 40 degrees or below. C 15700-35 J. See Division 16 for ionization detection. K. A low limit thermostat in the mixed air stream shall stop the supply fan and return fan, close the maximum and minimum outside air dampers, and position both the heating water valve and chilled water valve full open to the coil when the temperature drops below 38 degrees. L. Upon a loss of control air, the heating water valve shall be full open and the chilled water valve shall be full closed 5.04 APRON LEVEL TWO -DECK MULTI -ZONE AIR HANDLING UNIT: BID ITEM #1 A. AHU-6 is an existing two -deck Trane multi -zone unit being converted from DX cooling to chilled water cooling. This contractor will completely replace all existing controls, tubing, actuators, etc. to provide a new control system. B. This contractor shall provide a modulating two-way valve in both the chilled water coil outlet and the heating water coil outlets as shown on the drawings. C. The chilled water valve shall modulate to maintain a cold deck temperature of 55 degrees. D. The heating water valve shall modulate to maintain a, hot deck temperature of 110 — degrees when the outside air temperature is 40 degrees or below and reset to 80 degrees when the outside air temperature is 70 degrees. When the outside air temperature is above 75 degrees the heating water valve shall close. E. The return fan shall be interlocked to run with the supply fan. F. This contractor shall provide new actuators for each of the four existing zone mixing dampers. Each zone mixing damper shall modulate to satisfy the setpoint of a thermostat mounted in the space or in the return air, as shown on the drawings. G. The existing unit has minimum and maximum outside air dampers, minimum and maximum exhaust dampers and return air damper. When the supply fan is running the following sequence shall occur: 1. Outside air temperature above 75 degrees: Minimum outside air damper open to provide ventilation air (adjustable). Maximum outside air damper is fully closed. 2. Outside air temperature between 60 and 75 degrees: Minimum outside air damper and maximum outside air damper full open and return air damper full closed 3. Outside air temperature below 60 degrees: Maximum outside air damper and return air damper modulate to maintain mixed air temperature of 60 degrees (adjustable). H. The minimum exhaust air damper and maximum exhaust air damper shall operate in unison with the minimum outside air damper and maximum outside air damper, respectively. I. AHU-6 shall be provided with night -set -back control. During set -back hours, the supply fan shall stop and control of the fan shall be given to a night -set -back temperature sensor in the location as shown on the drawings. The night -set -back temperature sensor shall cycle the fans to maintain a temperature of 55 degrees (adjustable) when the outside air temperature is 40 degrees or below. J. The outside air dampers shall close when the supply fan is off. K. See Division 16 for ionization detection. 15700-36 L r ` M. A low limit thermostat in the mixed air stream shall stop the supply fan and return fan, close the maximum and minimum outside air dampers and open the heating water valve and chilled water valve full open to the coil when the temperature drops below 38 degrees. Upon a loss of control air, the heating water valve shall be full open and the chilled water valve shall be full closed. 5.05 APRON LEVEL TEXAS MULTI -ZONE AIR HANDLING UNITS: BID ITEM #1 A. AHU-4 and AHU-10 are existing Trane two -deck multizones air handling units being converted to a Texas multizone configuration. Also these units are being converted from DX cooling to chilled water cooling. This Contractor will completely replace all existing controls, tubing, actuators, eta, to provide a new control system. B. This contractor shall provide a modulating two-way valve in the chilled water coil outlet r" and in the outlet of each duct mounted zone heating coil as shown on the drawings. AHU-10 has previously been converted to chilled water cooling and a two-way valve has been installed. C. The chilled water valve shall modulate to maintain a cold deck temperature of 55 degrees. D. The return fan shall be interlocked to run with the supply fan. E. This contractor shall provide new actuators for two zones from each air unit. The existing zone mixing dampers shall be linked as required for the two new zones. F. The dampers shall modulate to maintain the setpoint of a wall mounted thermostat or •- a return air thermostat for each zone as shown on the drawings. G. On a call for cooling, the cold deck and bypass deck dampers shall modulate and the heating water valve shall be closed. On a call for heating, the cold deck damper shall be closed and the bypass damper shall be open. The heating water valve shall modulate to maintain the setpoint of the thermostat for that zone. H. There shall be deadband between cooling and heating when the dampers are in full r, bypass and the heating water valve is closed. I. The existing unit has minimum and maximum outside air dampers, minimum and s maximum exhaust dampers and return air damper. When the supply fan is running the following sequence shall occur: 1. Outside air temperature above 75 degrees: Minimum outside air damper open to provide ventilation air (adjustable). Maximum outside air damper is fully closed. 2. Outside air temperature between 60 and 75 degrees: Minimum outside air damper r and maximum outside air damper full open and return air damper full closed. 3. Outside air temperature below 60 degrees: Maximum outside air damper and return air damper modulate to maintain mixed air temperature of 60 degrees (adjustable). J. The minimum exhaust air damper and maximum exhaust air damper shall operate in unison with the minimum outside air damper and maximum outside air damper, respectively. K. The outside air dampers shall close when the supply fan is off. 7 i 15700-37 L. These air units shall be provided with a night -set -back control. During set -back hours, supply fan shall stop and control of the fan shall be given to a night -set -back temperature sensor in the location as shown on the drawings. The night -set -back thermostat shall cycle the fans to maintain a temperature of 55 degrees (adjustable) when the outside air temperature is 40 degrees or below. M. See Division 16 for ionization detection. N. A low limit thermostat in the mixed air stream shall stop the supply fan and return fan, close the maximum and minimum outside air dampers and open the heating water valve and chilled water valve full open to the coil when the temperature drops below 38 degrees. O. Upon a loss of control air, the heating water valve shall be full open and the chilled water valve shall be full closed. 5.06 ROOFTOP MOUNTED THREE DECK MULTIZONE AIR HANDLING UNITS: BID ITEM #2 A. These units are new blow -through three deck multizone units. The unit manufacturer will provide the cold deck/bypass deck, hot deck/bypass deck zone mixing dampers, chilled water coil, heating water coil, outside air damper, return air damper and exhaust air damper. B. This contractor shall furnish a two-way modulating valve in the chilled water coil outlet. A thermostat, in the cold deck discharge shall modulate the valve to maintain a cold deck temperature of 55 degrees. C. Furnish a two-way modulating valve in the heating water coil outlet. A thermostat in the hot deck discharge shall modulate the valve to maintain a hot deck temperature of 110 degrees when the outside air temperature is 40 degrees or below and reset to 80 degrees when the outside temperature is 70 degrees. When the outside air temperature is above 75 degrees the heating water valve shall close. D. Two damper actuators shall be provided to modulate the mixing dampers for each zone. The dampers shall modulate to maintain the space temperature sensed by a wall mounted thermostat for each zone, as shown on the drawings. On a call for cooling, the cold deck and bypass dampers shall modulate and the hot deck damper shall be closed. On a call for heating, the hot deck and bypass dampers shall modulate and the cold deck damper shall be closed. E. This contractor shall furnish an outside air damper actuator, a return air damper actuator, and two exhaust air damper actuators. When the supply fan is running, the following sequence shall occur: 1. Outside air temperature above 75 degrees: Outside air damper is open to minimum position to provide ventilation air (adjustable). 2. Outside air temperature between 60 and 75 degrees: outside air damper full open and return air damper fully closed. 3. Outside air temperature below 60 degrees: outside air damper and return air damper modulate to maintain a mixed air temperature of 60 degrees. F. The outside air damper shall close when the supply fan is off. G. The exhaust air damper shall modulate in unison with the outside air damper. H. A low limit thermostat in the supply fan discharge shall stop the supply fan and position the heating water valve and chilled water valve full open when the temperature is 38 degrees or below. 15700-38 i f— i OM i. I. Upon loss of control air, the heating water valve shall be full open and the chilled water valve shall be full closed. J. The return fan shall be interlocked to run with the supply fan by the unit manufacturer. K. See Division 16 for ionization detection. L. These air units shall be provided with a night -set -back control. During set -back hours, the supply fan shall stop and control of the fan shall be given to a night -set -back temperature sensor in the location as shown on the drawings. The night -set -back thermostat shall cycle the fans to maintain a temperature of 55 degrees (adjustable) when the outside air temperature is 40 degrees or below. 5.07 ROOFTOP MOUNTED SINGLE ZONE AIR HANDLING UNIT: BID ITEM #2 A. This unit is a single zone draw-thru air unit. The unit manufacturer will provide chilled water coil, heating water coil, outside air damper, return air damper, and exhaust air damper. B. This contractor shall furnish a two-way modulating valve in the chilled water coil outlet and a two-way modulating valve in the heating water coil outlet as shown on the drawings. C. A thermostat in the space shall modulate the chilled water valve on a call for cooling and modulate the heating water valve on a call for heating. There shall be a deadband between the switch over from heating to cooling such that both valves are closed to their coil. D. This contractor shall furnish an outside air damper actuator, a return air damper actuator, and two exhaust air damper actuators. When the supply fan is running, the following sequence shall occur: 1. Outside air temperature above 75 degrees: Outside air damper is open to minimum position to provide ventilation air (adjustable). 2. Outside air temperature between 60 and 75 degrees: outside air damper full open and return air damper fully closed. 3. Outside air temperature below 60 degrees: outside air damper and return air damper modulate to maintain a mixed air temperature of 60 degrees. E. The outside air damper shall close when the supply fan is off. F. The exhaust air damper shall modulate in unison with the outside air damper. G. A low limit thermostat in the supply fan discharge shall stop the supply fan and position the heating water valve and chilled water valve full open when the temperature is 38 degrees or below. H. Upon loss of control air, the heating water valve shall be full open and the chilled water valve shall be full closed. I. The return fan shall be interlocked to run with the supply fan by the unit manufacturer. J. See Division 16 for ionization detection. K. These air units shall be provided with a night -set -back control. During set -back hours, the supply fan shall stop and control of the fan shall be given to a night -set -back temperature sensor in the location as shown on the drawings. The night -set -back thermostat shall cycle the fans to maintain a temperature of 55 degrees (adjustable) when the outside air temperature is 40 degrees or below. 15700-39 OM 5.08 APRON LEVEL BLOWER COIL UNITS: BID ITEM #2 A. These units are a draw thru single zone configuration. The unit manufacturer will provide a chilled water coil and a heating water coil. B. This contractor shall furnish a modulating two-way valve in the chilled water coil outlet and a modulating two-way valve in the heating water coil outlet. C. A thermostat in the space shall modulate the chilled water valve on a call for cooling and modulate the heating water valve on a call for heating. There shall be a deadband between the switch over from cooling to heating such that both valves are closed to their coil. D. Upon loss of control air, the heating water valve shall open and the chilled water valve shall close. E. A safety low limit thermostat located on the upstream side of the heating water coil shall stop the fan and open the heating water valve when the temperature is below 38 degrees. F. When the fan is turned off, both valves shall close. G. See Division 16 for ionization detection. 5.09 APRON LEVEL DOOR HEATERS/UNIT HEATERS: BID ITEM #2 A. These are existing hot water type heaters with existing electric fan cycling thermostats. B. This contractor shall provide a two -position electric valve in the coil outlet to open when the fan cycles on and close when the fan cycles off. 5.10 APRON LEVEL FOUR PIPE FAN COIL UNTTS: BID ITEM #2 A. These are existing four pipe fan coil units. B. This contractor shall provide an electric heating/booling thermostat mounted on the wall in the space as shown on the drawings. Also provide two -position electric valves in the outlet of the cooling coil and the outlet of the heating coil. C. When the cooling thermostat calls for cooling, the electric valve on the chilled water coil shall open and the fan shall cycle on. The valve shall operate with the thermostat and close when the fan is off. D. When the heating thermostat calls for heating, the electric valve on the heating water coil shall open and the fan shall cycle on. The valve shall operate with the thermostat and close when the fan is off. 5.11 EMERGENCY GENERATOR - VENTILATION AIR BID ITEM #1 A. This generator has existing automatic dampers for ventilation and exhaust. B. This contractor shall provide actuators to open the ventilation and exhaust dampers when the unit is running and close the dampers when the unit is off. 15700-40 I PM i 5.12 CHILLER ROOM VENTILATION FAN: BID ITEM # 1 7 A. A wall mounted propeller fan shall cycle to provide ventilation air to the chiller room space when the temperature reaches 80 degrees (adjustable). B. This contractor shall also provide automatic dampers sized as shown on the drawings for intake and fan exhaust. The dampers shall open when the fan cycles on and close when the fan cycles off. 5.13 BOILER ROOM VENTILATION FAN: BID ITEM #2 i A. A wall mounted propeller fan shall cycle to provide ventilation air to the boiler room I space when the temperature reaches 80 degrees (adjustable). B. This contractor shall also provide an automatic damper in the: fan inlet to open when l the fan cycles on and close when the fan cycles off. 5.14 BOILER ROOM COMBUSTION AIR PREHEAT: BID ITEM #2 A. The combustion air preheat coil is a Wing type coil with integral clamshell dampers. This contractor shall provide a damper actuator and a two-way two -position valve in the coil outlet. B. When the outside air temperature is at or below 60 degrees, the two-way valve shall open. C. Upon a loss of control air the two-way valve shall open and the dampers shall open to the coil. D. A thermostat on the downstream side of the dampers shall modulate the dampers to maintain a temperature of 60. degrees (adjustable). 5.15 DOMESTIC WATER HEATER FLUE MOUNTED DRAFT INDUCER: BID ITEM #2 A. The draft inducer will consist of a fan and motor located in the flue of the domestic water heaters. B. The domestic water heaters are Teldyne Laars 335 MBH heaters, each. C. This contractor shall interlock the draft inducer fan to operate when either one or both water heaters are burning. 5.16 SECONDARY CHILLED WATER PUMPS: BID ITEM #1 AND BID ITEM #2 A. The secondary chilled water pumps will be variable speed drive. Each chilled water loop shall have a pressure sensor located in supply and return lines as shown on the drawings. The sensors will be supplied by the pump logic controller manufacturer. B. This contractor shall provide and install the wiring from the sensors to the programmable pump logic controller located in the chiller room. Refer to Section 15500. 15700-41 5.17 WATER COOLED CENTRIFUGAL CHILLER PLANT BID ITEM #1 AND BID ITEM #2 A. The chiller plant will be controlled by system supplied by the chiller manufacturer. All wiring and connections will be done by the chiller manufacturer. 5.18 COOLING TOWERS/CONDENSER WATER LOOP: BID ITEM #1 AND BID ITEM #2 A. The condenser water system consists of an existing 1050 gpm Ceramic cooling tower ` and two new 1050 gpm Ceramic cooling towers. Each tower consist of a condenser water pump, a fan and motor, internal fill and piping. One of the two new towers will be installed under Bid Item #1 and the other under Bid Item #2. The existing tower control system shall be changed to operate as described herein. B. This contractor shall furnish an automatic two -position two-way isolation valve for each tower and a three-way modulating bypass valve for each new tower. C. The cooling towers are intended to be a complete standalone system. They shall be controlled as described hereinafter by a digital control system sized to control all three towers. The digital control panel shall be located in the mechanical fan room at AHU-11 and AHU-12 as shown on the drawings. The digital control panel shall be as specified under "Products", this section. D. Each of the cooling tower fans shall be driven by an adjustable frequency driver. The — logic control for the adjustable frequency driver shall be provided by the digital control panel. E. On a call for condensing water from the chiller plant, the digital control panel, — hereinafter called DCP, shall select the cooling towers with the least run time hours to date. The DCP shall open the two-way isolation valve and start the condenser water pump of the selected tower and prove flow by a differential pressure switch across the pump. The DCP shall provide an output signal to the chiller plant that the pump is providing flow. Upon a call for additional condensing water, the DCP shall select, based on least runtime hours to date, the next tower to come on line. The DCP shall _ open the two-way isolation valve and start the condenser pump of the next selected tower and prove flow by a differential pressure switch across the pump. The DCP shall provide an output signal to the chiller plant that the pump is providing flow. The _ sequence is the same for additional towers. F. The DCP shall select the next tower when the selected tower is manually switched off-line. This is based upon the HOA switch being in the "OFF" position. G. When a cooling tower has been energized and brought on line by the DCP, the cooling tower fan and three-way bypass valve shall be controlled to provide 85 degree condensing water sensed in the common condensing water supply header. H. When the first tower is energized, the three-way modulating valve shall be fully open — to the tower and the DCP shall "soft start" the fan through the adjustable frequency drive, hereinafter called the AFD. On a rise in condensing water supply temperature the DCP shall increase the speed on the fan through the AFD. On a drop in condensing water supply temperature, the DCP shall decrease the speed of the fan through the AFD. The minimum speed of the fan shall be 40 percent of full speed. On a further drop in temperature, the fan shall stop and the modulating three-way valve — shall begin to open to bypass the tower. There shall be dead band between fan off and modulating bypass. The three-way modulating valve shall modulate to full bypass upon 15700-42 PM r r a further decrease in temperature. When a second tower is brought on-line, the DCP shall modulate the three-way valve and the AID to match the operating point of the tower already running. The DCP shall always "soft start" the fans. The DCP shall control the two towers in unison to maintain the condensing water supply temperature. Additional towers shall be started in the same way. I. There shall be a five minute time delay between tower start and control modulating to avoid "hunting". J. The cooling tower manufacturer will provide a vibration switch and an oil level switch for each fan. The DCP shall stop the fan when any of these switches makes contact.. K. The DCP shall report output signals to a remote annunciator panel in the chiller room. This panel shall have labeled LED's mounted on its face to indicate the following for each tower: 1. Condenser pump running 2. Fan running 3. Tower in bypass mode 4. Vibration switch cutout 5. Low oil level I_ Interlock the chillers with the condensing water pumps as recommended by the chiller manufacturer. 5.19 HEATING WATER SYSTEM: BID ITEM #2 A. The heating water pumps will be variable speed drive. Each heating water loop shall have a pressure sensor located in supply and return lines as shown on the drawings. The sensors will be supplied by the pump logic controller manufacturer. B. This contractor shall provide and install the wiring from the sensors and boilers to the programmable pump logic controller located in the boiler room. Refer to Section 15500. C. This contractor shall provide slow acting, pnuematic, two-way two -position valves in the inlet to each boiler and any air supply lines, gauges, PRV's, tra.nsducres, eta required to operate the valve from the pump logic controller output. PART 6 - FMS INPUT/OUTPUT SUMMARY 6.01 I/O SUMMARY: A. The following indicates the items to be monitored and/or controlled by the FMS. 15700-43 POINT SCHEDULE Page 1 Op 23 POI:T POINTPOINT POINT Co IALARM { , I TYPE ION APPLICATION { , { .2 Mixed Air Discharge■©//■/int■■/�/�■//////.■n��■ • ■����n /lanns//■■��/its■ � ■/■<n/��® ■/�1//i///fin■ ■t�t<nttin,�t�t■tttitttt/ttt■ ■ntt//t�tttt®�/®!��/�®/tttt■®/tt� ■Ettt■/n/n/ii//,n/nn///■/n�/ ■■tNt/■■<ntt ■tttttitIREt ■tt<stt■■ntt� ■nm■ttttt<n/nttittiiit■tn�t■ ■t<n/■ ntinttiittt<nt tt�n//� nnt<st<ntt<nttt ��tttt !//n///■■®///�/nNo ME ttttt//��u�n��t■/s®<nnt■ ■�t�rn/<n�■�®ti/n�st�u/tt�nttt■ ■ttttt/<ntt/it�tt■1n//tt■n,t0 ■tt■■//ttt�t�■■//tttt■■t/ti■t�tttt ■stt■<nttenen/���tt�/■■tt///�t■ ■�ttt<ntt�tt�t■■���/��//titt/nt■ ■■tt�t/tttttt�t�,tttttt//ttttiitt■ ®attt//t■tttt�ne//�■<ni■//ttt///nt POINT SCHEDULE Page 2 OF 23 1 POINT I • • 1 1 •AP • 1 • 1 1 • 1 1 POINT DESCRIPTION • i ®�®�n�nnn®■nII�n/nnn■ 2 Mixed n�®nnnn�nnnn© ■nnnnnnn�n■ --Air ■©�nnnn Space/ Der ■nnnnn� • ■■nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn■■nnnnmnnn■ ■■nnntnnnnnnnnnnnnnnlnn®.,�����,�■ ��nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn®nnnnnsnn■ I ■Onnntn nn�ninnnnnsnnnn■ ■nnnntnnnnntnn,lnnl�nnnnnnnnnnnn■ 1 ■�rnnnnnnn�ntnnnnnnnnnn■nnnnn■ ■WEAKEN nnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnn ■nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnmmmo nnnnnnnnnnnnommnnnnnnnnnnnn■ ■nnnnnnIKIMM nn ■nnnnnnnnnnn ■nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnE MMnnnnnn■ ■nnn 'M m n/EnN MEMMUnRM E=n nn no InnnnnME nn nnnnnum nn■ ■nnnnnnnnnnn■ El NEON MM IRM --- MONOMER MINE �gmmonnnnnnnnn NMI I nnnnnnnnnn■ ■®nnnnnnnONOMER nnnnntRnnnnnnnn ■nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn I n®n■®nnnnnnnn®nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn ■■■■nnnnnnnnnnnnn■■nnnnn®nnnnnnnn■ ■nnnnn■nnn®nnnnnnnnnnn■■nnnn ON ■nnnnnnnnnn nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn■ ■■nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn ■■■nilEMe�n�innn■nalnnnnnnnnn■■■nn■ 2206 .141 6 POINT SCHEDULE Page 3 OF 23 POINT POINT POINT Cos DD FUNCTION• • e e • • POINT DtSCrilPT.rON • " Space - , . per ■�®join■��■��■ n■nis�no�■ � ■��e■�nw�nnfnnn�nto���niu■■ ■n��nn��t�u��n�■■���n��nn�e�■ MEMO" non■■�■���n�,�n�®�■■o�■ ■ommmoonm�n���n�n�����o�■n�■ ■■�s�aOEM n ,nn����nn®�n��e��■�n�� MlMMMMM§MMMM 0nn,�un ■�®��■��■n,�� ■n MEN ■ miEMnnnE�n��■ ■�E■ �i�■nn■���inE ONE nn now- n�n,■■uns®■,�lnN■ ueMENn n s�■nn�o��n�■ ■EMManKERWO ■O■t MENmu��■�uii�iin�■i s.n®�nnnnann®��n■®�,®�,■ ■o�■■®nn�n���■ ■�n�■ ■■■ ®�nOl■]REMAINMESON .■ MMEM 00 ,.Tom POINT SCHEDULE Page 4 0 F 23 .0142T . • POINTPOINT FUNCTIONTYPE APPLICATIONCos DDC - Cent;�tninnnnnn • U • U • F C, . • • • MENnnnnl�nn�nnn■ • • • • Hot Deck■►nnnnn©nnrrmn ■ nnnnnn No .. s innnn i®nnnnnn nnnnnnnnnnnnn■® . I■ �®nn/MEMO nnnnt/Ennnpnnnn031. Space Temp. I nn7)Nnnnnnannnnnnn0/nnnnnnnnnnnnnn' NONE nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn■ nnnnnn KRONE vnnnnninnnnnnnnn■ nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnninnnnnnnnnnnn■ MEN NO nnnnnnnn■ NONE nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnsnnnnnnn■ ■nnnEms <nnnnnnnn�nnnnnnnnnnn■ ■ nnn■nnnnnnnnnnntmmonnnnnln■ nnnnnnnnnnnnnnNOnnnnnnnnnnnn■ ■nnnnnnnnnnpn ■nnnnnnnnnnn, MENmm�nn ONES_ n,nnnnMEN mNnnnnnnnn■ n MM n�nnnnmm ®�nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn■ �nnnnMOjnn�nn nnnn®n ERROR nni nnn®nnnnnnn nnnnnnnnmm"® ■nninnn MOM RESUME INN" nnnn nm=nnnnnnnnnEn■ ■nnnnnMORM nnonn RAISES nn0 n,n ■nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn MONO" nnnnnnn■ NEON nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn■ ■nnnnnnnnnn NOR nnnnnnnnnNo ■■nnnnnnnnnnnnnn■■nnnnn "mom nnnn■ ' ■nnnnnnnnnnntnn ■nnnnnnnnnnnnnnn■ 'I ilnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn■nnin_r-Snnnnn POINT SCHEDULE Page . 5 OF 23. DESCRIPTION POINT POINT FUNCTIONTYPE POINT • POINT Cbs DD • NOWIiMt'�iitn// • U • U PI Ci• ' • • • • , • t/■ii/!/i/i/i■ • • , • . • • • . 'Cold /=NUMMi113 iiEl/i ■ii//i■/mil► Deck MEN", MEMMEMMUMAXIM i MEMN OMEN iiiti■■iiE/iii 1 5 Sp ice Temp. ■®/■E/©iniii�nniii■iiiiii//■® .■■/Eit■iii/iiEi�liE■■EE■/�■EiiiEi■ EE/E/EiiEniEvn�■iiin//ii/■Ei■ ■nitll/i�/ti�nninn■n/i/i/tt/■ ■EEEEnEi®IEEE ■EEE®EEEE�EEE ■niinn/Hilt//MAMEt//in/i■i■ ■/iEE■EEMnEEEsoBEiEEEin/ii/iEE■ ■■EEEEEEEi�i�i�EEiiEEIiO/i/EEii■ Ellin■iniEilimm"KNOM oEi/nNE MIMMEMEME ■/E//E/E/EMEi iEniir® iE®E�n�EEE■ sEEEEE■ . ®nEEEimIEEEEEE riiE=■ nEnEi//iiin/E■ MOEN � MWEAR /�nEE/;iEE�■iEiEl EEEEEEEiEiii ONE, MEMO WE EEnEiEN"EEEE EEEE�sEEEiniE lommommMMno EMEEMi■ ii/i■/MENEiiiiiiEEEi/iiii/■i■■/ii■ Ei/i■/MEliliEEi■EEIEEEi�iEE■iEEi■ sommonommossomi i■EEs/■iii/EiiiE�iEi//i■/■/E//Ei liiii/®ill■illi®®/iEMMEMME/i/E■ lliEi■■iiiiiiiE/�iiEii®i®//,/Fill■ POINT SCHEDULE Page 6 OF 23 FUNCTIONPO POINT INT. POINT POINT COS DDC POINTE DESCRIPTION ° Tip ALARM - ►RIE�R�. • U • U ". pi Sl C. 0 • , . , • • , • • , • 3 Cold Deck 4 Mixed Air ONE ii/■//MANOR on sommmus MIME ini///i///■ ■n/tnsn�nn�rnnn/i�i////���■ mammon "WE NEE■U/ii//i/E/E■ ■n/n®/nn//n■/n///m//i//n■ /■///ii/nt//�ii/ni///ii/ii/n// ®/in//i/nn///in[n////i.®///�i/■ �ii///iiinn�nnnn,/■/iiinni/ ni�nnnnilin�/®/■i■■ii/n11/ ,■//i/i/n/n/■ ■/ii/i■//n/■ -MIME NEE niiniinNERMSERESiin/1■ //■ii/MI M /i/// /i,nniniii/i/n/■ MONIMEEMENE ■/i■m//■//i///in/// ■iiiiii/i■/n SEE i/■,i■/,iliiiin/■ /i//■■n/■///E■iii■■i■//ii//■/�/■/ ■■/miii/om MUn■i,����i,i�■//�//■ ■■i/■i/i■/iin/Ni■/iiiitii/iiii/i � ■i//i■ii/,/////■®i/■/'//sill/aii///■ POINT SCHEDULE Page 7 OF 23 .0j4.T DESCRIPTION FUN•N POINTPOINT APPLIC&TION POIN • MARK DD • • • • , III o RAW ►'�i�7�'iiC7i/ini/tti//////ltiiiitiii :.116t Deck■►. REmt E■ttii/tl300l .. , /►Mitt 4 Mixed Air iiitiiQiii/siliss/li/tiiiil�l'isi■+ m . ■iltil®ii//iitt/ni/sitiiilt/lli • allilttl/iiissiit/,ii■■itil■■till■ iiiinsssissnnssiliilitiiitlli■ /ililtt ititli/iniiiil//i■ ■tllsitls® ■/itlliitlll■ ■illitil/ii/ii/i■i/iiiiltiiilnll■ ■lilittis/s/stiit■■tiliiniiiiill■ ■iillttit///snit///li/itt®iitni■ ■■l//tti/sttltillnt/lint®Qilt/il/ /illlttlssis//tn/s,iiilttilitlll/ ■nitttil�ii�t/lnit//ilt/itnitit/ll ■ii/ltt n//lilt/l/ltt/ll /iili nnt/il/itiliil//s■ EE011ttl//ss/� ■l/sl®llinn/■ ®siint///tti/i/ ntnil�n//■ ■<llittt/iitnit/n/li/itilltt//1�■ ■iiiittl/i///■ii■///i■■ltillttl/l/ ■■iiii®siii//isitssiii■ltiiiiil/i■ ■■illttiiil■/■lit■■illlittlitil,l■ � ■■■i�its�tii�t/tO/■lti®it■■itt/��■ i■■iittiiiii/iiiii/iliiitiii■■iii■ � ■liiltt■i//ssiliti//li/ittlliilll■ POINT SCHEDULE Page 8 OF 23 POINT •POINT• POI NT DD CTI• • • e s • 11 e e • 'Mixed ©■©®EEN■nN■■�MA■■■N/;i■/N©■Ea■ 2 ■im M"t ■/■■M■//E _ ■®®/N■ME�nENE©/N�E■EEENE■EE/iE■ i/■ SpaceE©©EM//■iNME■EN"MEN /■EE■EME■EN■N■■■nNM■■N/■/■■/MNN°■ ■N■EiBO/■ . NONE /■MMMEN■■■■"■■ENE■■■E/■■N■■ ■■■■M"M=■�n,/in/■�n■is■■®■on■ ■/NEM/MNNN� ■■■M■■N/■NE//■■■■ ■m■/■!■ni mgin■■t°■■■■■i■■/■■■■■ MEMO /■■EtNn■■/■MNt■■ENEE■■■/n!N■ ■■nE/MNNNNNNE//nOE/EE//■■///nn/ s/sEEOttiNNEtN1 ■E®MENOEOEENN snE■EMEE EN°N■ EE/O�EE snEE/■ m■MnnN nEEE/■ KM- MMM■®M/E■E■ ■■■En ■■tn■■■ ■°■///n/■ ' EN■EO■■Enn°■ IN ■■■■■/<nn■■■ on ME" am ■ ■■■°■ ■/■■■//■■■■■■■■■iim:iii;/®i®iini; 11■/OE■■NNNN■■ME■ENENEEEM■ MEN OOi■■ ■■■■/ OMENS NENNEN■■■■ENN■M/■■■/ONN■ ■/■■MEMO/N■■■0■EE■N POINT SCHEDULE Page 9 OF 23 s IIII • / / • •POINT FUNCTION• POINT POINT COS ALARM 1 1 �n�7C.��C,�rinnnn • 1 1 • 1 1 1 • • • 1 • 1 • 1 1 1 Hot Deck■ ROEM=nnnn innn®nl���nn nn► Co d Deck iilirlmlommonE'�nn�>n nnnnnn�nninnn n■1 • n1�MRSE n on n�nn�nnnnnn�3m Space�� • nNNnnnn©nn m MEME EM3310n I, ■mom - RESSER MERMEn MUM ®n��nnsn�nnfnnn®nnnnnn„■ ■n��n�nns®nm inn■■n■®non■ 1 ®nnn�nnn��nnnnnn��■�nnn�■nn■■■ ■ ENEM ssllSAMERMEMnnn■ ■no■nnn OMEN MmMMmMMIlMm■ ■sn MEN nnlnMENAMENEVEMEW No ■ten■�n■��nnnnneONE IMIKEEMMEMEM ■nn nn lnnnnin MIKER■ ■ Mninnnnnn�■nnE nnnnn■ �nnnnenn��nnnn®■ �n�n mn�nnn�nnnn�na■ nnnn�nn��i ®I EMM s■�nnnnn�t�u�n®nMENOMINEE EnnS nnnnnnneinnn nnMMnnnnE■ ■nnnnun«nnnnnn��nn�nnnninn■ ■■nn ■®n,n�nin�nnsnnnnnn ■ IMENNE®n MIN ®■n EMEMMEME■ NEMEEM Mnn■®®nMEMEnnnnEn MMAIM ■MEMENn■nnnnnn�nnnnnnni�nnnnrnn■ ' ■■EMEMnnnnMnn��■■nnn®nn,nn�in■ s�nnnnn■■n�nnn■n��nnn�nn�nnnnn��n■ ■■n�snnn�rnnn�n,®snnnn�nrnnn�nnnn■■®■ 1 1. MEMO No Text POINT SCHEDULE Page 11 OF 23 • POINT, POINT co . FUNCTION • of o • • i OT VIT DESCRIPTION _ ■���n���sntl�iin�n■n■�■����■ _ ��.■�,i�n�■�®tn���.���s■nQn�■ 4 -Space Temg.-I per ■o�r�������n� n�n���n©a�■ �®��inu�nnf�e�nn����nn„����■ ■n�ni�n��nnn�nnin����neu�■ ■��nn��n��ninm�n����s��s�■ ■MEN �n�������n���n��oo■ ■���n��nn��n"NERN ERME on■ ■■EMANO �,���NnntMERNMEN ONE ■EEMMER&REW mM■REMEMnEn ■nn, E■ mMIZEAR tA■ MERE ■ I§`KM MM I MEnIRN nn'uMOMMOMnns� REAn ffnnn �■■ n�t�■ ONIMEN intnn�en��n������n�ni ■M- I Mans.®■ n��i��n/�■ -mlOOEEEMMO ninNNOMMEMEMEMMEM �ns�nn■�®�■�o�,��n,■ ■�■���nn�rn������n�ann���nn� I POINT SCHEDULE Page 12 OF 23 • DESCRIPT TONKi _ '• • FUNCTIONTYPE • INT • rr ' ms®rEFFER1 • RWEnss�sssn��I U • U • r C• r s�sss�sssnMMMMMM,©ss©■ • • r r • • BERMIMMMEMMEMERNME • ► ► r • • • r mommummommom • • r • • r • r ■■�ssssss�s�ssssnsMMEMNOssssssMEN sssnMsMsnEM■ ■■■sssss��ss�ssss�sssn�s�ss�sss�■ ss���u�sss���sss�■s�s�®�������■■ ■s RIE FIRss��sninn■ni��inn■ • ■sss�sss�n�sssssss�sssn���sss�s�■ ■n�sn�sss�snsiss��ss�sssnnss■ ■���s�s��s�sssn�ssss�sss�sssssse■ ■ssss�s■n��s��ss�s�sssns�ssss�iss■ ■ss�sa�sns�s■sMtsIUsssssss MEN ss�ls■ ■sssssssln Mnn ■ss�sss�ssssss sn�ss■ss sass■ ■ssns■ ■.n■s■ ssn®n�s�m�s�st�ss isRsnss.E sssssnn,sssnn�s nnAIn n��ss�,�ssss�ss nMENEM sni■ ■snssssss= rMENEMsMENnsnn<nnnsn.s■ssnn■■ MINES ninn■ONE n■nisnss■ ■sn®Enonnt�ranmmmunmommoi s ■■■ssasssssss■UNssssssssssssssiss ss■s■nnsansn�s■,sass®i■■ssn�■ ■■■NEMnlss■ssss sssss■sssss■lmns■ ■■sssssssE®s�ss�ss■■n�,nss�sss�■ MEN sssssMEsAI®ssssssssss>sss®sass■ POINT SCHEDULE page 13 OP 23 POINT POINT POINT '• • DD FUNCTIONTyp • ALARK • • • • • • si • • • • • s • • • • • U U C'• • i • DESCRIPTION ©■®©■�inn��ona�onuoneni�i■■��noa�n . ■��onono � ® ■nnoo■����■ . , - . vr�ra���e�tsn����t�n,������a■n�o■ ■c��onnnsuonon� y noonnoon��ruo .. - - - o�c�n00000000000�nnnn■nnonnno�®,■ „. . ..-■onnononoeuuounon000nnun000n000nu■ n■n�n��nnnnonoaonoonoonoo■ ■�nne �nuonnnonon■nno�■ ■■0000snune�non�uuosu000■onoono■ sonoononnnnono■■000noononoonno■ MEMO r000n00000n000u0000non000no■ NONE oonn0000tonouuoonn00000non■ MUSEUM "EMEEMEME no ■nononnMn000uo uoou00000nono ■nonno NonFounou ERME ■nuEoo noNUMm00000so SEEM onnoo��unouiunn�sonnonnuoo n.n ��nnu000000000 so MEMNON son ■0000noono�000noson000000non■ NONE onnn�oinon�nioEM"min�ON onn000nononoson uoouu00000nouuo SEEN ■■nuuunn000000nn000non000mmmoo ■000000uoons�ononoo®noo®nonoonno■■ ■u000non000�000000000000000000nn■ ■nnnn000■®oounon0000nouu00000�no■ 0onso0000000®no.000n0000000no,■ ■nonos,00000noo.00u.0000n0000i®■■ ■■M nonou000000u000�neoon000000■ ,. No Text POINT SCHEDULE Page 15 OF. 23 INT POINT POINT • • DD FUNCTIONTYPE • • POINT DESCRIPTION �iRON i m im iiiiiiiiiuimum . i®Ina itiii ® ®iiiiiiii3li■ ` .. ■111iiii■ ■iiaiiuiiiiiiiiinaDN■ iitiiiostin V •Elmr.1n. ii■iiiummmQi■ - - - i�7�iiifi�■�iOi���iii�iiiii■i�©i■ 111. . MINEW.. • , - ■iiiiiintii��iiiniii,iiiiiiiini iURhn/ii�iiiiiiiiiiiiii■ ■iiiiisisiim it�nniniiiinv■ MIMMEN iinimnn�m��ii�iiiiiiisi■ ' iniinniMOMEMNtiiiii■iiiiiiiiii■ eMiiiiiiMUnEiniin/i�iniiiiit/■ MOMINEMENEE inipin�iiiiiiiiiii�ii ■iiiiiiin��iiiiiniiiiiil�iiiiii■ ■iiiiiii®ii�� ■i�iiiiiiniii ■iiin■ iiii■ INEMEMINEMMEM ■iiiiii nii iiiiiii■ ■iiKiii�s _ �iiii min I MEM s ' ■�I�siii�i ME mom i■ ■0MMENnntn/i��iinsiiii�■ ■iiiil�iinii��iiii�iiiinniiiini ■■iiiiiiiii�iiiiiiiiiiii,iviil�i■ ■■■■■iiiiiii■■i�ii�iiiiiiiiiiiiii■ ■■■■i■■■■it■■�!■■■sii/iii�iliiii/ii■ ■its■iiiiiiii�iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii ■■iiiii,iiiiniiiiiiisiii,iiiiiii■ ■■iiiiiii�ii�iiiiiiii�'iiiiiiiiiii■ 1. L' ■nrimmu■ mommumm ■ POINT SCHEDULE Page 17 OF 23 PCOS POINTNT POINT POINT DD FUNCTIONTYPE PLICATION ALARM • • e • e • • • • POINTDESCRIPTION OMENS NN■ ■ii■//iiM// .. 1 - . WOMEN MIN Mon. n■■i■■"i/■n ■//n■/ii/��/i t■■ii�/�t/nt/s/n��■i®i�/�.■/�■ ■i/iEn i/i�///ii/i//■n//■ ■i■iinnn ■i/■■■//■/�/■ R ///■■i///tiiniiii■iiii!/iii/i/■ � /i■ii,■■nn■i/i■iW/iii//■■■i//■ ■i■■ii■MEME ■■/n■i/n■/S■fn/■ ■■nnii�n�i■■nlni■ni�i///i/i/i ■/i■ii//nines ■■t/,■//■/�/n /nnlii■ nl�i■ ME ■//n/■ ■t/ni■ MEN j /ice■■■ n�W�i�/a!n/�m i/■i/ i/nn■■■i■■■■nn/■ M11R i■/■■i/i��nn/�/t//irl�/inn,■ MENNEN iii//■/n/ii��iin�nii/i://ni/,■ ■iniii/n�/n��ii//■i///t/i/■ //i■■ii/n/�ii■■/i�tiii//■/iii/ni� ■iiii■■/iii��■ ni/�■■i■■i/■iiin■■ ■■i■■■i/iiiiii■■■/i�//■i■i■//■■///■ ■■i■■■■/■/ii■n■■M■ii■■i■!■■i/i/■ ■■■■®i■■ill/■i•E■■/iin/■i,//■i/i/i ■■■ii■,i,iiitii■■■■l�iiiiii//■®■®/■ ■■i■■■■mini/■■■i■/i■i■■ii■■■ii■ RNONE R.arm ■//!!!!1lli�n!!■!liiiii■ in/,S!!llnti!liliis!!!i /i//���/n/!�!lilin!!■ //no!!i!!!!!!!/!!!■ /iiman ooSMOKE 000!!lsiii!■ NONE mom o!/ii!!!!!ii/!ii iii/■/!®■11ioo.ii■®iliiiiii■ POINT SCHEDULE. Page 19 OF 23 POINT POINT cot.. vFUNCTION DESCRIPTION • ©■©o■©©ttttinttt�tnttttiitti�tt�t 2 Mixed Air ■�tnttnttniu13 -mntttttnt■ � .- ■a©ttttt�tttt�ttatttstttttnn,t ■tttttattttttt tttttttntt■ ■■ttttttttttttttntttttt�tttttttt■ Noun ■nttt'utttttttntttttt®t,�t�tttt■ ■nttntn�n��n�nt��tt�uu■ ME NEE ttt/Et mmootttttt m ■ttttntsutnwttttt��tttttt�tt■ ■ttttttt�tt�ttn�tttttttnt.tttt,■ ■EE ONIMtttttttttttt�ttttttttttnt■ ■ttt "MEEMOMMEt t/ ■tt ■�tttttttttttt ■n ■tntNI■ ■�tnttttn QttttttnNEESE" �t■�nittttt■ nttt nnntnttitttnntt NNE NEW ■ttnnt tNittttttttttt ntiiiimumm— t tntttttnttt ■tnttnttnt„n�ntteintttttnit■ ■tttttntttnttttttt,ttnttttnnt ■■tttttttttt�tntt�tttttttttt��tt■ -NEON MEnttttttttttttti�ttt�tt�t'�■ ■ttttttttttttn�tttttt�ttttt�t�m■®■ ■■tttttttt NNE tttttmtmtttitttnm■ ■NE�Ettttttttt ■ttttttttEtttttmttt■ � ■tME ttttttttttttttttttt ■tttt�ttttt■ n 0 - --1 A a --- - -I --A -----I -- - - -- 1 POINT SCHEDULE Page 21 OP 23 POINTDESCRIPTION POINTPOINT TYPE •APPLICATION POINT POINT COS JDDC , ■■■■n■sn■■© ■n■■■■n�■a ■■■■■■■■■■■■� man ■■■n®■n■■■ni■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■A ■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■ ■■s■nit�nn■■■■n■MI■■■an■■E■■■■mom ■n■■�u ■n�■■■■n■■■■■■s■■ ■■■■■■■n■n■■■■n■■■■■n■■■■■■tea■ ■gun■■■■■■■■iu■■■■■ ■■■■■■■ • EMMOi■ ■ir�■■■■■■s■O��n�i■■ M■■■MENNEI nnn■■■■EN■■*N ■■ MIK son ME MENEM ONE ■■■®n■■■M■■ ■■■■■■■u■�s■■■■■■■■■s■■■■■■■■in■■ !� ■■■�■■■■t■�■1s■■■■■■■■■■■n�■■�■■■ ■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■�■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■ ■■■■■■�■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■ ■■■■■■■■■■■■■ ■ ■■■■■■■■■■■■ POINT SCHEDULE Page 22 OF 23 FUNCTION:TYPE APPLICATION • • • • • • • • • • ' • . • • ' • U U C• • e • POINT • ©���iin■�© ■n��■�iiin©■ Supplyj--CHW ■®®■��■■n■■■©■t■■■��■■■�■nn■■ Return oil ■n��n �nnn■n■��■■■�u■ ■n■�n■�n�sI■■■n�■■n■s■n��■■■■■�■ ■■■■■■�nna■in�■■■s■�■■■®�■■■��■■ ■n n■■�■n■�n ■n■■■�r�nni■■■ice■■ s■■n■■ n■■�S!■■�A■■nfA MEMNON nMEANS ■■■n■�■,■■�s■11■��■n�■■ ■iiERMEi■�■Mi ■s®■N■M�n�■n� ■■■■■■■s�nts�n■nn■■■■■■■■M■■nB■ ■■Iln■��n■■■■ ■mmm■n,/■■ ■■■■■■nn���n�■■■/■■■■A■■n■■ NONE ■■■■■ice/�■■■■E■■E■■■■■O■■■■■n■ ■■■■�1!®ilk■■n■n��■®■■■®�ME■■■n■■ ■■■■■■n■■�■■■MO■■M■■■■■■■■■■■�■E■ ■■■■■■■■M■■M■■®M■■M■M■■■M■■■■.S■e■ POINT SCHEDULE Page 23 OF 23 • MA DESCRIPTION POINT POINT FUNCTION:TYPE POINT • .• NT OOIS .. • • , • U • F• C • ' • . • • • , • • , • • • • • • Cooling .- ©��©■©mrrrrrrrr�srrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr ■nrrrrrWrrurr rnrrrrrr■ •- ■o©rrrrrrrnrrr�rr�rrsrrrrrrnnr■ 4 Fan Speed ■©rrr MEMO rrr ► rrrrrrrrrrrrrN • . - Qr©mr®rrrrrrrrrn�rrrrrrr�rrrrrra rrrrrMrrrrrrrrr�r�rrrr��rrrrrr�u■ ■nrr urrrrrrrrrrrrrrrnrrrEMEM ■�rrrr® nrrrnrrrrrrrrrrr■ ■rrnnrrnr/r/■ rrrlrMrrMr■ ■rrrrnnrnuMrrr�rrr�rrrsrrrrsrrr■ ■nrrr�rinnrrnrrrrrrrrnrrrrrrr■ ■rrr ■ ■rrrrrrrrrrrrr ■rrrrrrrrnrrr MOOMM■■rrrrrrnrrrrrrnrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr ■nrrrrrr rrrrrrrrrrirrrnrNo ■ MUNErnr�/ Arrrrr�r�rrrrrrr ■OMrrrr■ m�nrrrrrrrnrrrr MOMMOMEME nnrrrrr�■rrrrrsrrr ■rrrrrrrr�rrrrrnrnr�nrrrrrrnnrr ■rrnrrnrr�rrrr �urrrrnnrr - ■rrr rrrrrrrrrMrrrr ■rrrrEninrrrrrrMINUMrrrnrrIM M ■■rrrerr rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrMrM NONE NErrrrrrrrrrrrrr■■rrrmrrmrrr■ ■■MrrrOrrrrrrrr®rrrrrrrMEMEnrr■ ■■error■■rrrrrr�rrrrnrrrrerrrrrr■ ■■orrrrrr�rrrrrrsrrr■®®rnrrrrrrr■ • ■�rrrrrrnrrrrrrrrrrnrr■®�rrrrrr■ r i l 1 PART 7 - EXECUTION 7.01 GRAPHICS: A. The temperature control contractor shall be responsible for providing a Graphic of each system. All points associated with these systems shall be monitored by the FMS and commandable from the Graphic. 7.02 INSTAII..ATION: A. The FMS contractor shall enter all computer programs and data files into the related computers including all control programs, initial approved parameters and settings, English descriptors, and colorgraphics complete with dynamic dispersed data. In addition, the following, to be user implemented, shall have samples installed for training and validation: 1. Trend Log 2. Alarm Message (action taking message) 3. Run time maintenance message 4. Trouble action message 5. Dynamic Trend Plot (6 points) B. The system shall have the capability for custom event initiated message as shown in the following examples. EVENT 1: VAV fan high discharge pressure limit switch safety shutdown f Message 1: The fan has shutdown due to an excessively high discharge duct pressure. There is a strong indication of a system malfunction such as an inlet vane drive failure, C" or major fire damper closures. The switch should not be manually reset until a thorough investigation of the cause is conducted. r- EVENT 2: Both east and west supply ducts are significantly over the control loop set point and the inlet vanes have been commanded to close. (Vendor shall also provide software to create this event initiator.) Message 2: An abnormally high duct static pressure exists, yet the supply fan inlet vanes have been commanded to close. The inlet vane linkage: and drive mechanism should be inspected immediately. If the pneumatic air pressure: to the inlet vane is not zero, then the problem may be the electronic -pneumatic transducer. C. The FMS contractor shall maintain diskette copies of all data file and application software for reload use in the event of a system crash or memory failure. One copy shall be delivered to the owner during the training session, and one copy shall be archived in local software vault provided by the FMS contractor. 7.03 VALIDATION: A. The FMS Contractor shall completely check out, calibrate and test all connected hardware and software to insure that the system performs in accordance with the approved specifications and sequences of operation submitted. 15700-44 B. Witnessed validation demonstration shall consist of: - Running each specified report. -� - Display and demonstrate each data entry to show site specific customizing capability. Demonstrate parameter changes. - Step through penetration tree, display all graphics, demonstrate dynamic update -, and direct access to graphics. - Execute digital and analog commands in graphic mode. - Demonstrate DDC loop precision and stability via trend logs of inputs and outputs (6 loops minimum). - Demonstrate FMS performance via trend logs and command trace. - Demonstrate scan, update, and alarm responsiveness. - Demonstrate spreadsheet/curve plot software and its integrationwith the database. - Demonstrate on-line user guide and help function and mail facility. - Demonstrate digital system configuration graphics with interactive up -line and downline load, and demonstrate specified diagnostics. - Demonstrate multitasking by showing dynamic curve plot and graphic construction operating simultaneously via split screen. - Demonstrate class programming with point options of beep duration, beep rate, alarm archiving, and color banding. 7.04 MANUALS: A. The following manuals shall be provided: 1. An Operators Manual with graphic explanations of operator functions. Although operator functions are to be self -instructional and menu -interactive from the keyboard terminal, this manual shall be for off-line study and refresher use. 2. A Programmer's Manual with graphic descriptions of functions required for software modifications and development. Although high level languages such as PASCAL are required to be usable on the system, full PASCAL type manuals and training are not requirement. The use and installation of PASCAL type programs shall be included in this manual. This programmer's manual shall include computer generated listings of all DDC programs. 3. Computerized printouts of all . NCP data file construction including all point processing assignments, physical terminal relationships, scales and offsets, command and alarm limits, eta 4. A user manual for the integrated spreadsheet package. 5. A manual including revised "As Builts" documents of all materials required under the paragraph "SUBMITTALS" on this specification. 6. Three Operators Manuals, two Programmer Manuals, and two "As Built" Manuals shall be provided to the owner. 7.05 TRAINING: A. All training shall be by the � FMS contractor and shall utilize specified manuals, "As Built" documentation, and the on-line help utility. The following training shall be repeated quarterly during the warranty period. B. Operator training shall include two initial six -hour sessions encompassing: - Sequence of Operation review - Sign on / Sign off 15700-45 r - Selection of all displays and reports - Commanding of points, keyboard and mouse mode .— - Modifying English text - Use of all dialog boxes and menus - Modifying warning limits, alarm limits and start -stop r., times. System initialization • Download and initialization of remote panels Purge and/or dump of historical data - Use of portable operators terminals - Troubleshooting of sensors (determining bad sensors) - Password modification C. Supervisor training shall include an additional two (2) hour session encompassing: - Password assignment/modification - Operator assignment/modification - Operator authority assignment/modification - Point disable/enable - Terminal and data segregation/modification - Use of portable operator terminal - Use of spreadsheet package with system data. D. Programmer training shall include two additional three hour sessions encompassing: - Software review of Sequence of Operation and flow charts - Modification of control programs r- - Add/delete/modify data points - Use of diagnostics - System maintenance procedures ,.• - Review of initialization - Upload/download and off-line archiving of all system software - Programmer training shall be for two owner personnel and shall be scheduled by the owner with two week notice anytime during the warranty period - Graphic creation 7.06 WARRANTY: A. All components, system software, parts and assemblies supplied by the FMS contractor shall be guaranteed against defects in materials and workmanship for one year from substantial completion date. B. Labor to troubleshoot, repair, reprogram, or replace system components shall be furnished by the FMS contractor at no charge to the owner during the warranty period. C. All corrective software modifications made during warranty service periods shall be updated on all user documentation and on user and manufacturer archived software disks. r 15700-46 7 D. Provide extended warranty for one additional year on all DDC components, system software, labor to troubleshoot, repair, reprogram or replace components, including quarterly inspections shall be furnished by FMS contractor. END OF SECTION 15700 15700-47 f SECTION 16110 - RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 NOTE: A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.02 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.03 SCOPE: A. The work shall include furnishing and installing all rigid steel and flexible metallic conduit, intermediate metallic conduit, electrical metallic tubing, polyvinyl chloride conduit, wireways, pull and junction boxes and outlet boxes, together with all supporting devices and other accessories required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUITS: A. Rigid Steel Conduit: Rigid, threaded, thick -wall; galvanized inside and outside or galvanized outside with .a protective 1, coating inside; UL listed and labeled according to Standard UL6; t conforming to ANSI Standard C80.1;'Pittsburg, Republic Steel, Robroy or Allied. B. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Steel tubing, galvanized outside and provided with a slick corrosion resistant interior coating; UL listed and labeled according to Standard 797; conforming to ANSI Standard C80.3; Pittsburg, Republic Steel, Robroy or Allied. C. Flexible Metal Conduit: Spirally wound with hot dip galvanized steel strips (commercial Greenfield); conforming to UL Standard UL 1 and UL listed and labeled; Triangle Conduit and Cable Company, or equivalent. D: Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit: Spirally wound with hot dip galvanized steel strips as for flexible metal conduit; with polyvinyl chloride cover extruded over the exterior to make condit liquidtight; UL listed; Electri-flex type "LA" or r•. equivalent. 2.02 CONDUIT FITTINGS: A. Couplings and Terminations for Rigid Steel Conduit: Factory made steel threaded couplings;bushing at all boxes and cabinets, with locknuts inside and outside box or cabinet. B. Couplings and Terminations for Electrical Metallic Tubing: Join lengths of EMT with steel compression type couplings and connectors where exposed to the weather or in wet locations. Otherwise use steel,,set-screw couplings and connectors. The connectors shall have insulated throats or a smooth interior so as not to damage the insulation during wire pulling operations. C. Couplings and Terminations for Flexible Metal Conduit: T & B 440 Series couplings at connections between flexible and rigid conduit; T & B 3110 or 3130 Series nylon insulated throat, steel connectors at box or cabinet terminations. D. Couplings and Terminations for Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit: T & B 5271 Series adapters at connections between flexible and rigid conduit; T & B 5331 Series nylon insulated throat, steel connectors at -box or cabinet terminations. 2.03 WIREWAYS: A. Interior Use: UL listed; enamel finished; sizes shown or required; screw covers; complete with all fittings, couplings, hangers and accessories; Square D, General Electric, or equivalent. B. Exterior Use: UL listed; enamel finished; sizes shown or required; removable front cover which is gasketed; weatherproof rainhood. 2.04 PULL BOXES AND JUNCTION BOXES: A. Sheet steel, galvanized inside and outside, with galvanized covers. B. Small Boxes: For boxes where the volume required is not over 100 cubic inches, use standard outlet boxes. C. Larger Boxes: For boxes where the volume required is over 100 cubic inches, use cabinets as specified for panelboard cabinets with covers of same gauge as boxes, secured with corrosion resistant bolts or screws. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF BUILDING RACEWAYS: A. All wiring of every description shall be run in conduit or electrical metallic tubing unless noted or specified otherwise. Conduits may be run exposed in machinery and electrical rooms and unfinished areas. All other conduits shall be run concealed unless otherwise noted. All exposed runs shall be installed parallel to the surface of the building in a neat and orderly manner. B. Types: All conduits installed in wet or damp locations, or on roofs shall be rigid galvanized steel conduits. Above grade interior conduits shall be rigid galvanized steel conduit, intermediate metal conduits. In sizes up to and including 1-1/2", electrical metallic tubing may be used in dry locations where not subject to mechanical damage. EMT may be used in air conditioned spaces, such as accessible ceilings, dry wall partitions and exposed where 6' above the floor. EMT shall not be used outside, in concrete, underground, in underfloor spaces, in locations likely to be damp, or exposed within 6' of the floor. Conduits installed below grade in slabs or buried in earth shall be PVC or rigid galvanized steel. C. Sizes: Size and install raceways so that conductors may be drawn in without injury or excessive strain. Make field bends with approved bending devices. Do not install bends or offsets 16110-2 own dr l in which conduit is crushed, deformed or otherwise injured. Sizes of conduits shown on the drawings are minimum sizes to be installed. D. Connections: Use lengths of flexible metal conduit, not less than 12" long at final connections to all motors, generators, controls and other devices subject to movement because of vibration or mechanical adjustment. Use flexible metal conduit also ---at connections to recessed lighting fixtures, and elsewhere as required. In damp or wet locations, and where installed outdoors, use liquidtight flexible metal conduit. E. Around Heat Producing Equipment: Do not install raceways within 3" of steam and hot water pipes, breeching and flues, except where crossings are unavoidable, and then keep raceways at least 1" from insulation on the pipe, breeching or flue crossed. Wherever possible, avoid installing raceways directly above or in proximity to boilers and other like objects operating at high temperatures. F. Damp or Wet Locations: In damp or wet locations make every effort to avoid installing raceways in a manner which will create moisture traps. Where they must be so installed, seal both ends of raceways with an approved sealing compound to prevent "breathing" and moisture condensation within the raceways. G. Different Systems: In systems operating at more than 300 volts between phase conductors, where different phase conductors are to be run to a common gang wall switch box, install a separate conduit for each different phase wire and its return switch leg, and provide substantial barriers between adjacent switches in the box so that two different phase wires will not be the same compartment. H. Joining Rigid Conduits: Join with threaded couplings. Ream out all conduit ends after threading. Secure rigid conduits at panel boxes, junction boxes, pull boxes, switchboards, support boxes, or sheet metal outlet boxes by galvanized locknuts, inside and outside, with insulating bushing inside. Unthreaded set screw type couplings or connectors are not acceptable in rigid conduit systems. No running threads shall be used anywhere in conduit systems. I. Protection of Raceways: Seal ends of all raceways with blank discs ("pennies"), push pennies or other approved closers during construction. Do not pull any conductors into raceways until all plastering in the vicinity is completed. Swab out all raceways before pulling in conductors. J. Penetrations: Wherever raceways pass through floors, walls partitions, etc., carefully fill any space between the outside of the raceway and the building material to prevent passage of air, water, smoke and fumes. Filling material shall be fire resistive and, in general, similar to the basic building materials through which the raceway passes. 3.02 CONDUIT SUPPORTS: A. Support spacing: Use minimum spacing as directed by National Electrical Code, but space hangers more closely where required by conditions. 7 16110-3 B. Vertical conduit risers: Support vertical conduits at each floor by means of riser clamps or U-bolts, clamping them to a steel channel bridging the opening in the floor. C. Individual Conduits: Support conduits running vertically or horizontally with galvanized malleable iron one hole clamps. Carry individually supported horizontal conduits 1-1/4" and larger on Kindorf No. 150 or Steel City No. C-149 hangers. Use no perforated strap iron as hanger material. Where -conduits smaller than 1-1/4" are installed above metal lath and plaster ceilings or mechanically suspended dry ceilings of the non -removable type, they may be supported on ceiling runner channels. Where conduits smaller than 1-1/4" are installed above removable ceilings, attach them to the structure or bar joists (where present) or support them on threaded hanger rods with clips. Do not use any wire to support conduits or to attach conduits to supporting members. Locate conduits a sufficient distance above the ceiling to permit removal of the ceiling panels. Locate them so as not to hinder access to mechanical and electrical equipment through the ceiling panels. D. Multiple Conduits: Where multiple raceways are run horizontally at the same elevations, they may be supported on trapezes formed of sections of Unistrut angle iron or channels suspended on rods or pipes. Size trapeze members including the suspension rods for the number size and loaded weight of the conduits they are to support. Space them as required for the smallest conduit supported. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES: A. Sizing: Size all pull and junction boxes in accordance with NEC, using larger sizes than required by code where job conditions so indicate. B. Mounting: Fasten all boxes securely to the building construction, independent of conduit systems. On concealed conduit systems where boxes are not otherwise accessible, set box covers flush with finished surfaces for access. End of Section 16110-4 SECTION 16120 - CONDUCTORS k PART 1 - GENERAL I 1.01 NOTE: A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.02 SUBMITTALS:. A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.03 SCOPE: A. The work shall include the furnishing of all conductors, together with all splices, connections, identification, including pulling devices. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUCTORS (600 VOLTS AND UNDER): A. Type: Soft drawn, annealed copper, UL listed, rated at 600 volts, continuous without weld, splice or joint, uniform cross-section, free from flaws, scale and other imperfections; Okonite, Triangle, Anaconda or Simplex. No. 8 and larger shall be stranded; No. 10 and smaller shall be solid. B. Insulation: Branch circuits shall have type TW, THW, THHN or THWN insulation unless the type is specifically designated or specified. Service feeders shall be type THW or THWN. Feeder circuits shall be Type THW or THWN. C. Circuits Subjected to High Temperatures: Type THHN or THWN conductors for wiring in proximity to boilers, and for motors and devices subject to high temperature because of high ambient temperature or convection or radiant heat. D. Lighting Fixture Conductors: Type and size approved by the NEC for the purpose. 2.02 JOINTS AND SPLICES: A. Stranded Copper Conductors: UL approved solderless bolted pressure connectors or Thomas and Betts Series 54000 compression connectors. All connectors shall be of proper sizes to match •. conductor sizes. All compression connectors shall be applied with properly sized dies and tools. Split -bolt connectors are not acceptable. B. Solid Copper Conductors: UL approved solderless bolted pressure 'connectors; or UL approved electrical spring connectors of t "Scotchlok", Ideal or T & B "Piggy" make. All connectors shall be of proper sizes to match conductor sizes. Split bolt connectors are not acceptable. 2.03 COLOR CODING: A. Use standardized color -coding of conductors throughout. All color coding shall be continuous for the entire length of the conductors, and shall be permanent and readily distinguished after installation. In cases where the specified colors of r" insulated wire and cable are unavailable, such conductors shall i 16120-1 s be color -coded, as specified above, by means of Brady, or equivalent, slip-on colored plastic sleeves or plastic tape at all pull boxes, support boxes, outlet boxes, panelboards, and other terminal and splicing points. B. Neutral conductors shall be white or natural grey. Grounding conductors shall be green, or green with one or more yellow stripes. C. 'Phase conductors shall be black, red and blue for phases, A. B, and C respectively in the 208 volt system. D. Phase conductors shall be yellow, brown and orange for phases A, B, and C respectively in the 480 volt system. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 WIRE PULLING: A. Wire Pulling: Provide suitable installation equipment for pulling conductors into raceways or conduits. Use ropes of polyethylene, nylon or other suitable material to pull in conductors. Attach pulling lines to conductors by means of woven basket grips or by pulling eyes attached directly to conductors. All conductors to be installed in a single conduit shall be pulled in together. Pull no conductors into conduits until all work of a nature which may cause injury to conductors is completed. Use an Underwriters' listed cable pulling compound where necessary. B. Cable Lubricants: All cable lubricants shall be UL listed, and shall be certified by their manufacturer to be non -injurious to the insulation on which they are used. C. Pulling Devices in Empty Raceways: Provide in every empty raceway, not containing conductors to be installed by this Contractor, a suitable pull line to facilitate future installation of wiring. Lines shall be free from splices and shall have ample exposed length at each end. Identify each end of each line with a linen tag bearing complete information as to the purpose of the raceway and the location of its other end. All lines shall be nylon or polyethylene cord with a tensile strength not less than 200 pounds. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF BUILDING WIRE (600 VOLTS AND UNDER): A. Feeders: Run all feeders their entire length in continuous pieces without joints or splices, insofar as practicable. Make joints in branch circuits only where circuits divide as shown on drawings. Such joints shall consist of one through circuit to which shall be spliced the tap circuit. B. Branch Circuits: Not more than one power or lighting circuit shall be installed in a single conduit ,.except that one 3-wire circuit or one 4-wire circuit consisting of 2 different phase wires and a common neutral or 3 different phase wires and a common neutral may be installed in a single conduit. This provision shall not prohibit the installation in a single conduit of all conductors of a circuit with three- and four-way switching. 16120-2 7 C, Sizes: No wire shall be smaller than No. 12 except for signal or control circuits, and except for individual lighting fixture taps as permitted by the National Electrical Code. D. Receptacle and Motor Branch Circuits: No. 12 conductors unless noted or scheduled otherwise. E. Home runs on 120 volt, 20 ampere Lighting Branch Circuits: Where length of run from panelboard to first lighting outlet exceeds 75 feet use No. 10 conductors; otherwise use No. 12 l conductors. F. Power and Lighting circuits of different system voltages (eg. r 208Y/120 and 480Y/277 volts) shall not occupy the same conduit. l G. Joints and Splices: Make joints and splices only where necessary and only at outlet boxes and pull boxes. All joints shall be mechanically and electrically secure. After a joint or splice is complete, insulate it with Okonite rubber tape, and Manson friction tape to make the insulation of the joint or splice equal to that of the conductor. In lieu of this, 3M Company's "Scotch" No. 33 vinyl plastic tape may be. used if applied in at least four layers (half lapped in two directions), with all larger splices, terminals, sharp corners and voids being first protected by application of "Scotchfil" insulating putty. H. Conductor splices in wet locations shall be made in accordance with the conductor manufacturer's recommendations. - I. Identifying Tags: Non-ferrous; stamped to clearly identify each circuit. Securely fasten tags to all cables, feeders and power circuits in pull boxes, lighting, power and distribution panelboards, etc. J. Bundling Conductors: Bundle all conductors in panelboards, cabinets and the like, using marlin twine lacing or nylon straps made for the purpose. Bundle conductors larger than No. 10 in individual circuits. Bundle smaller conductors in larger groups. K. Cable Supports and Boxes: Install cable supports and boxes for all vertical conductors in accordance with National Electrical Code requirements. Boxes shall be of heavy galvanized steel plate construction, not less than No. 10 USS gauge, riveted to an angle iron frame. Removable box covers shall be secured with corrosion -resistant screws. For cables without a metallic sheath, cable supports shall be of the split wedge type which clamps each conductor firmly and tightens due to the weight of cable. For cables with metallic sheath, a basket weave or equal type of support shall be provided as approved by the cable manufacturer. 7 End of Section 16120-3 1 r II r F SECTION 16140 - WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 NOTE: A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.02 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.03 SCOPE: A. Furnish and install in suitable outlet boxes, the wiring devices indicated, complete with lamps, coverplates, etc. All shall be properly connected to conductors so as to be operable. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Acceptable Manufacturers: The catalog numbers listed herein are generally of Hubbell manufacture. Equivalent devices of Arrow -Hart, Pass and Seymour or General Electric are also acceptable. B. Classification: All wiring devices shall be "Specification Grade", and shall be UL listed. C. Colors: All devices shall have an ivory finish where mounted in walls finished in light colors and a brown finish where mounted in walls finished in dark colors. 2.02 WALL SWITCHES: A. For loads not exceeding 1500 watts at 120 volts or 3000 watts at 277 volts: DEVICE a. Single pole wall switch b. Three-way wall switch B. For loads exceeding above listing: DEVICE a. Single pole wall switch b. Three-way wall switch 2.03 RECEPTACLES: HUBBELL CATALOG NO 1201 or 1201-I 1203 or 1203-I HUBBEL.L CATALOG NO. 1221 or 1221-I 1223 or 1223-I A. Receptacle, 15 ampere, 125 volt, 2 pole, 3 wire grounding duplex: Hubbell No. 5262 or 5262-I (NEMA 5-15R). B. Receptacle, 15 ampere, 125 volt, 2 pole, 3 wire grounding duplex with self-contained ground fault circuit interrupter: Hubbell No. GF 5262 or GF 5262-I (NEMA 5-15R). F 16140-1 C. Outdoor receptacle with self-contained ground fault circuit interrupter: Hubbell No. GFA315. 2.04 OTHER DEVICES: A. Weatherproof Devices: Provide the specified device in FS box with a gasketed cast aluminum or cast alloy coverplate having a lift cover. 2.05 COVERPLATES: A. For Flush Mounted Devices: Sierra Electric Corporation "S-Line" 0.040" stamped satin stainless steel. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION: A. At each wiring device, install a label on the inside of the coverplate which shall identify the panel and circuit number to which the device is finally connected. The labels shall be made — on the job with indent type Dynamo adhesive tape. Attach the label to the plate with contact cement or other suitable adhesive material. In lieu of a label, the panel and circuit _ number may be marked on the inside of the coverplate with an indelible pencil. 3.02 MOUNTING HEIGHTS: - -' A. Where mounting heights are indicated on the drawings, the device shall be installed with the centerline of the device at the indicated height. B. Unless otherwise noted on the drawings, or directed by the Architect, install devices at the following heights. DEVICE MOUNTING HEIGHT Wall Switch 4'6" Receptacle 12" End of Section 16140-2 F I SECTION 16150 - MOTORS AND EQUIPMENT CONTROLS AND WIRING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 NOTE: A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, the Special Conditions and the General Requirements. 1.02 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit manufacturer's data and drawings on all equipment items. 1.03 SCOPE: A. This Section of the Specifications pertains to all other labor, material, equipment and service necessary for and incidental to motor and equipment wiring and control as shown on the drawings and/or as specified herein. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MOTORS: A. All motors will, unless otherwise noted, be furnished under other Divisions of the specifications, or will be furnished by the Owner. Where motors are mounted integrally with items of equipment, they will be erected in place with such equipment ready for electrical connection; such erection is not a part of the work under this Division. Where motors are to be installed as separate items, their foundations, anchor bolts and other provisions necessary to their erection will be provided as a part of the work of the Division under which they are furnished; their erection and final setting are a part of the work of this Division, and shall be done by specially skilled millwrights or similar craftsmen. 2.02 MOTOR STARTERS: A. All motor starters (controllers) and control equipment shall be furnished and installed under this Division of the specifications unless noted otherwise. The starters and control equipment shall conform with the schedule on the drawings. B. Magnetic Starters (Full Voltage): Starters shall be individual units, combination starter/molded case circuit breaker units, combination starter/fused disconnect switch units or combination starter/unfused disconnect switch units as indicated. C. Units shall be of General Electric, Square D, Westinghouse or Gould manufacture with the proper enclosures. D. Provide pushbutton stations, pilot lights and hand -off -automatic switches with each starter. Provide auxiliary contacts on starters to accomplish interlocks and control as specified in Division 15 or as noted elsewhere. Starter disconnecting means shall have auxiliary contacts to disconnect all control circuits when the starter is disconnected. E. Provide all three phase starters with three overload elements, one per phase. F. Equip each starter unit with a control power transformer, with .120 volt secondary, a secondary fuse in one leg and the other secondary leg grounded. 16150-1 r PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EQUIPMENT WIRING: A. Connect complete for operation all items of heating, air conditioning and plumbing equipment, and all other electrical devices furnished by the Owner of under other Divisions of the specifications. Outlets of various types have been indicated at equipment locations, but no indications of exact location or scope of the work are shown on the drawings. Refer to the *Owner and to the various Contractors for the work.under the other Divisions for the scope of connections to equipment furnished by •-- them and for the exact locations of all items. Request of the Owner and the aforementioned suppliers and contractors all rough -in drawings required for proper installation of the electrical work, in ample time to permit preparation of the drawings and thus avoid delays on the job. B. Where disconnect switches or circuit breakers are not provided integral with control equipment for motors and other electrical appurtenances, provide and install all disconnect switches required by the National Electrical Code and/or indicated. C. Provide all power wiring for the proper connection of mechanical .control devices. Verify all locations and requirements with Division 15 and mechanical plans. End of Section 16150-2 r �^ SECTION 16170 - CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 NOTE: A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements and Supplemental Requirements. 1.02 SUBMITTALS: A. Provide complete catalog data and drawings on all items of equipment. 1.03 MANUALS: A. Include all submittal data in the operation and maintenance manuals. f" 1.04 SCOPE: A. Provide all labor, material, equipment, and service necessary for and incidental to the complete electrical distribution system. PART 2 - PRODUCTS r- 2.01 DISCONNECT SWITCHES: A. Unless otherwise noted or required, all disconnect switches shall be UL listed and shall meet NEMA Standard KS1-1983 for Type HD heavy duty switches. Switches shall be fused unless noted otherwise; quick make, quick break; in NEMA 3R enclosures if exposed to the weather; elsewhere in NEMA 1 general purpose enclosures unless special enclosures are required. All motor circuit switches shall be horsepower rated. B. Switches shall be of General Electric, Square D, Westinghouse or ITE manufacture, equivalent to General Electric Type TH quick make, quick break switches. C. Where space does not permit use of the above specified switches, such as within weatherproof fan housings, etc., use suitable horsepower rated tumbler switches as unfused disconnects; General Electric Type RB or equivalent. D. Where disconnect switches are used to disconnect starters, provide auxiliary poles in switches as required to disconnect all auxiliary control circuits in starters. 7 End of Section 16170-1 r SSECTION 16195 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 NOTE: A. Conform with applicable provisions of the general conditions, special conditions, general requirements, and supplemental conditions. 1.02 SCOPE: A. The work shall include furnishing and installing identification signs on all electrical devices. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 NAMEPLATES: A. Electrical equipment shall be identified by the attachment of engraved nameplates constructed from laminated phenolic plastic, at least 1/16" thick, 3-ply, with black surfaces and white core. Engraving shall be condensed gothic, at least 1/4" high, appropriately spaced. Nomenclature on the label shall include the name of the item or equipment served utilizing the equipment names shown on the drawings. B. Where existing devices are to serve new devices, nameplates shall be replaced with new nameplates in accordance with 16195-2.01A. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EQUIPMENT: A. All electrical equipment shall be identified by name utilizing engraved nameplates. Equipment to be labeled shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Switchboards. 2. Panelboards. 3. Motor control centers. 4. Dry type transformers. 5. Main switches. B. The Contractor shall provide to the Owner a typewritten list of all mechanical equipment and fuse sizes that were installed and connected under this project. 3.02 CONTROL DEVICES: A. All electrical control devices shall be labeled to indicate the device served . All electrical control devices shall be labeled regardless of proximity to the equipment served. Electrical control devices to be labeled shall include but not limited to the following: 1. Contactors 2. Motor Starters 3. Relays 4. Disconnect Switches 5. Timeclocks F End of Section 16195-1 F r� i SECTION 16450 - GROUNDING i e PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 NOTE: A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.02 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit manufacturer's data on all products. 1.03 SCOPE: A. Furnish and install the various grounding systems outlined herein in accordance with the National Electrical Code. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Products for grounding systems are specified elsewhere herein. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS: A. Provide a separate, green -insulated copper grounding conductor, with insulation of the same rating as phase conductors, for each feeder and for each branch circuit indicated. Install the grounding conductor in the same raceway with the related phase and neutral conductors, and connect the grounding conductor to pull boxes or outlet boxes at intervals of 100 feet or less. Where paralleled conductors in separate raceways occur, provide a grounding conductor in each raceway. Connect all grounding conductors to bare grounding bars in panelboards, and to ground buses in service equipment to the end that there will be an uninterrupted grounding circuit from the point of a ground fault back to the point of connection of the equipment ground and system neutral. Size all of these grounding conductors per NEC r Table 250-95. 7 F End of Section 16450-1 r r F SECTION 16470 - PANELBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 NOTE: A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements and Supplemental Requirements. 1.02 SUBMITTALS: A. Provide complete catalog data and drawings on all items of equipment. 1.03 MANUALS: A. Include all submittal data in the operation and maintenance manuals. 1.04 SCOPE: A. Provide all labor, material, equipment, and service necessary for and incidental to the complete electrical distribution system. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PANEIWARDS: A. Panelboard Cabinets: Furnish and install cabinets to serve the various panelboards, of sizes as required to house the panelboards. B. Cabinet Construction: Rigidly constructed of sheet steel of gauges conforming to Underwriters' Laboratories Inc. requirements; corners overlapped or welded; edges turned over to receive trim. C. Cabinet Fronts: Cut from single sheet of not less than No. 12 gauge cold rolled sheet steel; fastened in place by adjustable trim clamps which will allow plumbing; same size as the cabinet box if surface mounted; size to overlap the box a minimum of 3/4" on all sides if flush mounted. Provide each door with a substantial flush, cylinder tumbler lock and catch. On doors more than 48" high provide a combination three point catch and lock with T-handle. Provide each lock with two keys, with all locks keyed alike. D. Finish: All back boxes galvanized; all exposed metal, including fronts, primed and finished in gray lacquer. E. Panelboards, Generally: Mount all panelboards in cabinets as specified hereinbefore, arranged for flush or surface mounting as indicated on drawings. F. Where a circuit protective device is scheduled as a "spare", provide the device complete for operation. Where such a device is scheduled as a "space" or "space only", provide proper space and all necessary connectors for future installation of the size of device scheduled. Where a breaker or switch is scheduled to serve a "future" load, provide the device complete for operation. 16470-1 G. All circuit breakers shall be quick make, quick break, trip free, thermal magnetic, indicating type unless noted otherwise. Provide all multiple pole breakers with common trip and single operating handle; handle ties between breakers are unacceptable. Branch circuit breakers shall be fully interchangeable without disturbing adjacent units. H. Connect all circuit interrupting devices with sequence phasing. I. Provide each panelboard with a neatly typewritten directory of circuits and their locations mounted in a cardholder on the inside of the panelboard cabinet. Cover directory with transparent sheet plastic. J. All panelboards shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories Inc. and the building main panel shall be listed as suitable for "Service Entrance Equipment." K. Submit shop drawings of each panelboard for review before commencing fabrication; drawings shall indicate number, size, interrupting rating and type of circuit protective devices; dimensions, gauges and type of construction of cabinets, size and material of main bus and lugs, and any other pertinent information necessary to determine compliance with the drawings and specifications. L. Provide each panelboard with a factory engraved nameplate which shall identify the panelboard name and voltage. M. Ground Bus: Provide each panelboard with a separate equipment grounding bus bar bonded to the panelboard cabinet. Where indicated on the drawings provide panelboards with an isolated grounding bus bar insulated from the panelboard cabinet. 2.02 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARDS: A. Panelboards shall have the number and size of bolted -in circuit breakers as scheduled. Panels shall be of General Electric, Square D, Westinghouse or ITE manufacture, equivalent to the General_ Electric panels listed below. B. Where a lighting and appliance panelboard contains more than 42 branch overcurrent devices, the assembly shall consist of two or more separate boxes bolted together and covered by a common multiple door front; each box containing not more than 42 branch overcurrent devices. C. Panelboards for 480 volts Service: General Electric Series A. Type AE, with Type TEF or TEF4 breakers in 15 to 100 ampere sizes; Type TFJ subfeed breakers in sizes above 100 amperes and not over 225 amperes. 2.03 FUSIBLE SWITCH DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS: A. Panelboards shall have the number and sizes of fused switches scheduled on the drawings, with main switch or lugs only on the mains as noted. B. Panelboards shall be of General Electric, Square D, Westinghouse or ITE manufacture, equivalent to General Electric Type QMR panelboards with positive, quick make, quick break fusible switches. End of Section 16470-2 SECTION 16475 - OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 NOTE: A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements and Supplemental Requirements. 1.02 SUBMITTALS: A. Provide complete catalog data and drawings on all items of equipment. 1.03 MANUALS: A. Include all submittal data in the operation and maintenance manuals. 1.04 SCOPE: A. Provide all labor, material, equipment, and service necessary for and incidental to the complete electrical distribution system. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FUSES: A. Furnish and install all fuses necessary for leaving the installation complete and in working order, including a complete set of fuses in each spare switch. B. Upon completion of the work provide a standard carton (but not less than 3 fuses where a carton does not contain as many as 3) of each size of each type of fuse used. These spare fuses are in addition to fuses in spare switches and replacement fuses blown during construction and testing. C. Place a fuse identification label, showing type and size of the required fuses, inside the door of each enclosure requiring fuses. D: Fuses shall conform to the latest NEMA Standards, and shall be UL listed and labeled (except as noted otherwise) They shall conform to the UL classes listed hereinafter. Voltage ratings shall be suitable for the systems to which the fuses are applied. E. Fuses shall be shipped to the job in boxes, and shall not be installed in any equipment until the installation is complete, and final tests have been made prior to energizing the equipment. F. Where the spacing of fuse clips in equipment is greater than required by the proper size of fuse, use suitable fuse reducers to fit the fuses. G. Fuses shall be of the classes and types listed below, the type designations referring to those indicated on the plans. H. Type KRP-C: Class L; Bussman Type KRP-C "Hi -Cap", current limiting with time delay, interrupting rating of 200,000 RMS symmetrical amperes, current rating 601-4000 amperes. 16475-1 I. Type LP: Class RK-1; Bussmann Type LPN or LPS "Low Peak", r Fuses shall be available in ratings 0-600 amperes, shall be current limiting dual element with time delay, and shall have interrupting rating of 200,000 RMS symmetrical amperes. Fuses shall be equipped with slotted blades, and switch fuse clips shall be provided with matching NEC fuse rejection feature. 2.02 CIRCUIT BREAKERS: A. 120 Volt Molded Case Circuit Breakers: One, two and three pole, thermal magnetic, bolt -on UL listed. Two and three pole circuit breakers with common trip and single operating handle. UL '- listed for switching duty, 15 and 20 ampere single pole. UL listed as HCAR type, 15-60 ampere, one, two and three pole. Operating mechanism shall be over center, trip free, toggle mechanism with quick -make, quick -break action with positive handle indication. Thermal -magnetic trip element calibrated for 40 deg. C. ambient temperature. Terminations for 10-30 ampere — breakers shall be UL listed for use with 60 deg. C. or 75 deg. C. conductors. Terminations for 35-100 ampere breakers shall be UL listed for use with 75 deg. C conductors. Accessories shall be provided as shown on the drawings. Interrupting rating shall be as shown on the drawings. End of Section 16475-2 7 L r" SECTION 16500 - LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 NOTE: A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.02 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit for review catalog data and drawings on all equipment items. 1.03 SCOPE: A. This section pertains to all labor, material, equipment and services necessary for and incidental to the complete lighting system as shown on the drawings and specified herein. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Interior Lighting Fixtures: Provide and install a lighting fixture on each and every lighting outlet shown. Furnish fixtures in accordance with the designations on the drawings and as specified herein. Should any designations be omitted on the drawings, furnish fixtures of the same type as used in rooms of similar usage. All features specified or scheduled for fixtures shall be provided, even if the catalog number given in the specifications or schedule lacks the required numerals, prefixes or suffixes corresponding to the features called for. B. Fixtures: All lighting fixtures shall bear the label of Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. Furnish scale drawings, catalog data, samples of finish, distribution curves, and any other data required by the Architect for every type fixture. C. Energy Saving Ballasts: All 2 lamp, 40 watt, rapid start ballasts installed in an interior space where the ambient temperature is 60 degrees F or higher shall be General Electric "Watt -Miser" or equivalent energy saving ballast. The ballast shall be high power factor, UL labeled, Class P with automatic reset features and "A" sound rating. D. Lamps: Fully equip each fixture with a full set of new lamps at the completion and acceptance of the work; lamps shall be of the best grade, and of the sizes and types specified; General Electric, Phillips or Sylvania. E. Incandescent Lamps: Inside frosted unless specified or recommended otherwise by the fixture manufacturer. F. Fluorescent Lamps: Standard Cool White. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. Interior Fixtures: Outlet box locations shown for fluorescent ` fixtures are diagrammatic. Locate boxes to coincide with stem hangers where such occur. Fixtures shall be level, square with r" the general construction and securely attached. 16500-1 B. Surface Mounted Fixtures: Fixtures shall be installed flush with the ceilings. Where fixtures are mounted to an exposed grid ceiling, the fixtures may be clipped to the ceiling grid provided the attachment holds the fixture flush, level, and _ secure. Where they cannot be centered on a grid, install a structural member to span two tees and attach the fixture to the structural members. C. Where fixtures are installed in a continuous row;..the row shall be straight and plumb. Lens shall be aligned in all planes and no part of the lamp shall be visible. End of Section 16500-2 F SECTION 16723 - FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.00 SCOPE: A. This specification provides the requirements for a fire detection and alarm system. The system shall include but not be limited to: alarm initiating devices, conduit, wire and accessories required to provide a complete operational system. B. The contractor shall provide all labor and materials to connect for operation all new initiating and signaling devices to the existing fire alarm system. 1.01 STANDARDS: A. The equipment and installation shall comply with the current applicable provisions of the following standards: B. National Electric Code, Article 760. r" C. National Fire Protection Standards: a NFPA 71 Central Station signaling Systems -Protected Premises Unit. ,.. NFPA 72A Local Protective Signaling Systems. NFPA 72B Auxiliary Protective Signaling Systems. NFPA 72C Remote Station Protective Signaling Systems. NFPA 72D Protective Signaling Systems -Protected cted Premises Unit. NFPA 72E Automatic Fire Detectors. NFPA 72F Emergency Voice/Alarm Communication Systems D. Local and state building codes. E. All requirements of the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction. F. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. C. The system and all components shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. for use in Fire Protective Signaling Systems under the following standards as applicable: UL 864 Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. UL 268 Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. r- UL 268A Smoke Detectors for Duct Applications. UL 217 Smoke Detectors, Single and Multiple Station. UL 521 Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. UL 228 Door Closers -Holders for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. UL 464 Audible Signaling Appliances. r" UL 1638 Visual Signaling Appliances. 1, UL 38 Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes. UL 346 Waterflow Indicators for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. UL 1481 Power supplies for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. 16723-1 1.02 SUBMITTALS: A. The contractor shall submit complete documentation for the Fire Alarm/Life Safety System showing the Model Number, type, rating, size, style, Manufacturer's Names, and Manufacturer's Catalog Data Sheets for all items to ensure compliance with these specifications. B. Upon Contract Bid approval, and prior to the start of system installation, the Distributor shall submit a complete riser diagram and layout of the entire Fire Alarm / Life Safety System, showing all interconnect wiring and equipment, to the General Contractor. C. All substitute equipment proposed as equal to the equipment specified herein, shall meet or exceed the following standards. For equipment other than that specified, the contractor shall supply proof that such substitute equipment does in fact equal or exceed the features, functions, performance, and quality of the specified equipment. 1.03 EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURERS: A. All references to manufacturer's or supplier's model numbers and other pertinent information herein is intended to establish minimum standards of performance, function and quality. Equivalent equipment (compatible UL Listed) from other manufacturers may be substituted for the specified equipment. 1.04 GENERAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS: A. All equipment and material shall be new and unused, an listed by Underwriter's Laboratories for the specific intended purpose. All control panel components and field peripherals shall be designed for continuous duty without degradation of function or performance. All equipment covered by this specification or noted on Installation Drawings shall be the best equipment suited for the application and shall be provided by a single manufacturer or be recognized and U.L. listed as compatible by both manufacturers. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 DUCT MOUNTED SMOKE DETECTORS: A. Duct detectors shall be 24 VDC analog type wtih visual alarm and power indicators, and a reset switch. Each detector shall be installed upon the composite supply/return air ducts with properly sized sampling tubes. B. Provide each detector with a remote test station with key lock and alarm LED. The test station shall be a Notifier Series BRKRM851DH or equal. C. Duct detectors shall be Hotifier Model Number DH-500-AC/DC or equal. 16723-2 s PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 FIRE ALARM/LIFE SAFETY SYSTEM INSTALLATION: A. Installation of the Fire Alarm/Life Safety System shall be in strict compliance with manufacturers' recommendations. Consult the manufacturers Control Panel Installation Manuals for all wiring diagrams, schematics, physical equipment sizes, etc. before beginning system installation. B. All Equipment shall be attached to a non load -bearing wall, and shall be held firmly in place. Fastening and supports shall be adequate to support the required load, and provide a safety factor of five. C. Each system alarm point or zone in the system shall be uniquely labeled within the Fire Alarm Control Panel. Names of the system points)/zone(s) shall be as defined by the Owner. D. All wiring to monitor modules and control modules shall be executed to insure proper operation of existing devices and zones. 3.02 CABLE AND WIRING: A. Conduit and Conductors: Provide complete wiring and conduit between all equipment. Unless otherwise specified within the Installation Manual of the specific equipment being used, all field wiring shall be minimum #16 Type TFN (solid) or #14 Type THHN/THWN in separate conduit, maximum 40% full, and shall be approved for use as Fire Alarm cable. Conduits of proper size shall be installed from the Control Panel; Equipment to field devices. All field devices shall be mounted upon U.L. Listed Electrical junction boxes. All splices in field wiring shall be made in U.L. Listed Electrical junction boxes. All Electrical junction boxes shall be labeled as "Fire Alarm System" with decal or other approved markings. The Fire Alarm/Life Safety Installation shall comply fully with all Local, State and National Codes, and the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). B. All field wiring shall be completely supervised. In the event of a primary power failure, disconnected standby battery, removal of any internal modules, or any open circuits in the field wiring; an audible and visual trouble signal will be activated until the system and its associated field wiring are restored to normal condition. C. All cable shall be ran in conduit from devices to control panel. D. Cable shall be the type listed for Fire Alarm/Life Safety use and shall be installed per NEC Article 760. E. Cable for Addressable/Intelligent Alarm Initiating Appliances (Manual Stations, Heat Detectors, Smoke Detectors, etc.) shall be installed from the Fire Alarm Control Panel to all devices in that Signaling Line Circuit (SLC) loop. The connection and continuity of the wires which make up that SLC loop will be continuously supervised for shorts, opens, and ground circuit conditions. 16723-3 r f 3.03 FINAL SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE: A. The system will be accepted only after a satisfactory test of the entire system has been accomplished by a Factory -Trained Distributor in the presence of the Engineer and the Owner's Representative'.' B. The distributor will present a complete set of "as -built" Fire Alarm/Life Safety system drawings, and the factory supplied Operator's Manual to the Building Owner's Representative and the local AHJ. C. The Distributor shall make available contracted periodic system testing, maintenance, and/or calibration services. 3.04 ON -SITE SERVICES: A. The Distributor shall provide the on -site services of an Authorized, Factory Trained technical representative to supervise all connections and fully test all devices and components of the system during installation phase. B. The Distributor shall provide comprehensive Training on the operation, proper use, and testing of the installed Fire Alarm System to the Building Owner's Representative, the the local AHJ. C. The distributor shall provide programming for the entire system in accordance wtih the Owner's criteria. 3.05 WARRANTY: A. Provide a service contract to guarantee response to a trouble call within 24 hours after receipt of such a call. B. Provide to the Owner an authorized and trained service representative who will provide maintenance during normal working hours at no cost to the Owner for a period of twelve months from the date of acceptance. End of Section 16723-4 ft r SECTION 16920 - MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 NOTE: A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, the Special Conditions and the General Requirements. 1.02 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit manufacturer's data and drawings on all equipment items. 1.03 SCOPE: A. This Section of the Specifications pertains to all other labor, material, equipment and service necessary for and incidental to motor and equipment wiring and control as shown on the drawings and/or as specified herein. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS: A. Furnish motor control centers as shown, scheduled and specified of General Electric, Square D, Westinghouse or Gould manufacture; equal in all respects to General Electric 7700 line control centers. B. Classification: Class I, Type A per NEMA Publication "Industrial Control No. ICI-1965, Part 22." C. Construction: Totally enclosed, adequately ventilated, free-standing, self-supporting; consisting of structures bolted together to form a continuous unit divided into compartmented sections, each separated by steel barriers; NEMA 1 enclosure: pullbox at top; pullbox at bottom. D. Units shall be front mounted only, suitable for installation against a wall. E. Entire assembly shall be anchored to two 4-inch channel iron sills leveled and grouted flush into the top of a 6-inch high concrete base. F: Finish: All hardware provided with suitable protective finish. All metal surfaces chemically cleaned and treated to provide bond between paint and metal; entire outer surface of board and pullbox primed and then factory painted two coats of gray lacquer. G. Buses: Hard drawn, 98 percent conductivity copper or high strength aluminum, Grade EC flat rectangular bars, with all connections bolted or welded; all contact surfaces of buses silver plated. If aluminum bus is used, use Belleville spring washers at all bolted joints, pulled to adequate compression by torque wrench calibrated to specific foot-pound requirements of manufacturer. H. Vertical buses in each section, 300 amperes capacity. I. Horizontal main buses as scheduled. J. Braced for 42,000 amperes RMS symmetrical. K. Continuous ground bus extending through and connected to each section. 16920-1 �I j 4 L. Incoming Line Compartment: Incoming feeder shall be cable as scheduled, terminating in terminal compartment. M. Starter units shall be combination starter and fused switch units. Fused switches shall be heavy duty interrupter switches -- equal to General Electric Type QMR, equipped with Bussman Low Peak or equal fuses. N. Provide pushbutton stations, pilot lights and hand -off -automatic switches as scheduled on drawings. Provide auxiliary contacts on starters to accomplish interlocks and control as specified in Division 15 or as noted elsewhere. Starter disconnecting means shall have auxiliary contacts to disconnect all control circuits when the starter is disconnected. 0. Provide all three phase starters with three overload elements, one per phase. P. Equip each starter unit with a control power transformer, with 120 volt secondary, a secondary fuse in one leg and the other secondary leg grounded. Q. Identification: Provide adjacent to each protective device and control unit a laminated, white core, beveled edge plastic engraved nameplate designating the function of the device. R. Shop Drawings: Submit for review before beginning fabrication; — indicate dimensions, type and gauge of materials; methods of construction; number, type, size and characteristics of all protective devices, starters, etc.; number, size, type and arrangement of all buses; rating of bus bracing; any other data needed to determine compliance with specifications and drawings. End of Section 16920-2